0% found this document useful (0 votes)

99 views702 pages

I550 Series Ins en

Uploaded by

Omar Cuadros

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

99 views702 pages

I550 Series Ins en

Uploaded by

Omar Cuadros

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 702

Commissioning | EN

Inverter
Inverter i550 Cabinet 0.25 ... 90 kW
Contents

Contents
1 General information 15
1.1 Read first, then start 15
2 Safety instructions 16
2.1 Basic safety measures 16
2.2 Residual hazards 17
2.3 Application as directed 17
3 Mechanical installation 18
3.1 Dimensions 18
4 Electrical installation 28
4.1 Important notes 28
4.2 Mains connection 29
4.2.1 1-phase mains connection 120 V 29
4.2.1.1 Connection plan 29
4.2.1.2 Fusing and terminal data 30
4.2.2 1-phase mains connection 230/240 V 32
4.2.2.1 Connection plan 32
4.2.2.2 Fusing and terminal data 34
4.2.3 3-phase mains connection 230/240 V 37
4.2.3.1 Connection plan 37
4.2.3.2 Fusing and terminal data 39
4.2.4 3-phase mains connection 400 V 41
4.2.4.1 Connection plan 41
4.2.4.2 Fusing and terminal data 42
4.2.5 3-phase mains connection 400 V "light duty" 47
4.2.5.1 Connection plan 47
4.2.5.2 Fusing and terminal data 48
4.2.6 3-phase mains connection 480 V 52
4.2.6.1 Connection plan 52
4.2.6.2 Fusing and terminal data 53
4.2.7 3-phase mains connection 480 V "Light Duty" 58
4.2.7.1 Connection plan 58
4.2.7.2 Fusing and terminal data 59
4.3 Control connections 63
4.4 Networks 64
4.4.1 CANopen 64
4.4.2 Modbus RTU 65
4.4.3 Modbus TCP 66
4.4.4 PROFIBUS 67
4.4.5 EtherCAT 68
4.4.6 EtherNet/IP 68
4.4.7 PROFINET 69
4.4.8 POWERLINK 70
4.5 Connection of the safety module 70

3
Contents

5 Commissioning 71
5.1 Important notes 71
5.2 Operating interfaces 72
5.2.1 Keypad 72
5.2.2 Engineering tool »EASY Starter« 73
5.2.2.1 Generate a connection between inverter and »EASY Starter« 74
5.3 Parameter setting 76
5.3.1 General notes on parameters 77
5.3.2 Basic inverter settings 78
5.3.3 Basic motor settings 81
5.3.4 Function assignment of the inputs and outputs 82
5.4 Keypad parameter list 85
5.5 Save parameter settings in the memory module 107
5.5.1 Save parameter settings with keypad 107
5.5.2 Save parameter settings with »EASY Starter« 107
6 Diagnostics and fault elimination 108
6.1 LED status display 108
6.2 Diagnostics parameter 109
6.2.1 Logbook 110
6.2.2 Error history buffer 111
6.2.3 Inverter diagnostics 114
6.2.4 Network diagnostics 118
6.2.4.1 CANopen diagnostics 119
6.2.4.2 Modbus diagnostics 122
6.2.4.3 PROFIBUS diagnostics 122
6.2.4.4 EtherNet/IP diagnostics 125
6.2.4.5 PROFINET diagnostics 126
6.2.4.6 EtherCAT diagnostics 127
6.2.4.7 POWERLINK diagnostics 128
6.2.5 Diagnostics of the inputs and outputs 129
6.2.5.1 Digital inputs and outputs 129
6.2.5.2 Analog inputs and outputs 130
6.2.6 Wireless-LAN diagnostics 132
6.2.7 Setpoint diagnostic 133
6.2.8 Process controller status 133
6.2.9 Sequencer diagnostics 134
6.2.10 Device identification 135
6.2.11 Device overload monitoring (i*t) 136
6.2.12 Heatsink Temperature Monitoring 137
6.2.13 Life-diagnosis 137
6.3 Error handling 139
6.3.1 Error types 139
6.3.2 Error configuration 140
6.3.3 Error reset 140
6.3.4 Keypad error messages 140
6.4 Data handling 141

4
Contents

7 Basic setting 143

7.1 Mains voltage 144
7.2 Inverter load characteristic 146
7.3 Control source selection 147
7.4 Selection of setpoint source 148
7.4.1 Keypad setpoint default setting 151
7.5 Starting/stopping performance 153
7.5.1 Starting performance 153
7.5.2 Stopping performance 155
7.6 Frequency limits and ramp times 156
7.7 Quick stop 159
7.8 S-shaped ramps 161
7.9 Optical device identification 162

5
Contents

8 Motor control 163

8.1 Motor data 164
8.1.1 Manual setting of the motor data 164
8.2 Motor control selection 165
8.2.1 V/f characteristic control (VFC) 166
8.2.1.1 Linear V/f characteristic 167
8.2.1.2 Square-law V/f characteristic 168
8.2.1.3 User-definable V/f characteristic 169
8.2.1.4 V/f characteristic control - energy-saving (VFC Eco) 170
8.2.2 V/f characteristic control (VFC closed loop) 172
8.2.3 Sensorless vector control (SLVC) 173
8.2.4 Servo control for asynchronous motors (SC-ASM) 176
8.2.5 Sensorless control for synchronous motors (SL-PSM) 178
8.2.5.1 Stall monitoring 181
8.3 Optimisation of motor control 182
8.3.1 V/f voltage boost 183
8.3.2 Skip frequencies 184
8.3.3 Optimising the stalling behaviour 186
8.3.4 Slip compensation 188
8.3.5 Oscillation damping 190
8.3.6 Pole position identification without movement 191
8.4 Optimisation of the control loops 193
8.4.1 Options for optimized motor tuning 196
8.4.1.1 Motor selection from motor catalogue 197
8.4.1.2 Tuning of the motor and the speed controller 198
8.4.1.3 Automatic motor identification (energized) 199
8.4.1.4 Automatic motor calibration (non-energized) 200
8.4.2 Inverter Characteristics 200
8.4.3 Motor equivalent circuit diagram data 201
8.4.4 Motor controller settings 202
8.4.4.1 Current controller 202
8.4.4.2 Field controller 203
8.4.4.3 Field weakening controller 203
8.4.4.4 Field weakening controller (advanced) 203
8.4.4.5 Imax controller 204
8.4.4.6 Flying restart controller 205
8.4.4.7 SLVC controller 205
8.4.4.8 Torque control w/ freq. limit 206
8.4.4.9 Slip controller 210
8.4.5 Speed controller 211
8.5 Motor rotating direction 212
8.6 Switching frequency changeover 213

6
Contents

8.7 Motor protection 214

8.7.1 Motor overload monitoring (i²*t) 215
8.7.2 Motor temperature monitoring 219
8.7.3 Current limits 220
8.7.4 Overcurrent monitoring 222
8.7.5 Motor phase failure detection 223
8.7.6 Motor speed monitoring 224
8.7.7 Motor torque monitoring 224

7
Contents

8
Contents

9.6 PROFIBUS 294

9.6.1 Introduction 294
9.6.2 Communication time setting 294
9.6.3 Station address setting 295
9.6.4 Baud rate setting 296
9.6.5 Monitoring 296
9.6.6 LED status displays 298
9.6.7 Diagnostics 298
9.6.8 Functions 299
9.6.9 Data mapping 300
9.6.10 Parameter data transfer 303
9.6.11 Read parameter data 305
9.6.12 Write parameter data 308
9.6.13 Error codes for parameter data transfer 311
9.6.14 Restart communication 312
9.6.15 Short setup 313
9.7 EtherNet/IP 316
9.7.1 Basic settings 317
9.7.2 Monitoring 320
9.7.3 LED status displays 322
9.7.4 Diagnostics 322
9.7.5 Objects 324
9.7.6 Restart communication 331
9.7.7 Process data transfer 332
9.7.7.1 Customer specific configurations 337
9.7.8 Parameter data transfer 342
9.7.9 Short setup 346
9.8 Modbus TCP 348
9.8.1 Introduction 348
9.8.2 Basic settings 349
9.8.3 Time-out behaviour 351
9.8.4 LED status displays 352
9.8.5 Diagnostics 353
9.8.6 Function codes 355
9.8.7 Data mapping 360
9.8.8 Short setup 362
9.8.9 Restart communication 363
9.8.10 Baud rate setting 363
9.9 PROFINET 365
9.9.1 Introduction 365
9.9.2 Basic settings 366
9.9.3 LED status displays 368
9.9.4 Diagnostics 368
9.9.5 Monitoring 370
9.9.6 Data mapping 371
9.9.7 Parameter data transfer 375
9.9.8 Short setup 377

9
Contents

9.10 EtherCAT 383

9.10.1 Device identification 384
9.10.2 EtherCAT configuration 385
9.10.3 LED status displays 386
9.10.4 Diagnostics 386
9.10.5 Monitoring 387
9.10.6 Objects 388
9.10.7 Process data transfer 389
9.10.8 Parameter data transfer 393
9.10.9 Short setup 394
9.11 POWERLINK 396
9.11.1 Introduction 396
9.11.2 Basic settings 397
9.11.3 LED status displays 398
9.11.4 Diagnostics 399
9.11.5 Process data transfer 399
9.11.6 Monitoring 400
9.11.7 Error response 400
9.11.8 Supported objects 400
9.11.9 Short setup 406
10 Configuring the process controller 407
10.1 Basic process controller settings 408
10.2 Process controller - idle state and rinse function 414
10.2.1 Process controller idle state 414
10.2.2 Process controller rinse function 416

10
Contents

11 Additional functions 417

11.1 Device Commands 418
11.1.1 Reset parameters to default 418
11.1.2 Saving/loading the parameter settings 419
11.1.3 Device commands for parameter change-over 421
11.1.4 Delete logbook 421
11.2 Keypad 422
11.2.1 Keypad language selection 422
11.2.2 Keypad setpoint increment 422
11.2.3 Keypad scaling of speed display 422
11.2.4 Keypad status display 422
11.2.5 Keypad - Configuration of R/F and CTRL buttons 423
11.3 Wireless LAN (WLAN) 426
11.3.1 WLAN LED status displays 426
11.3.2 WLAN basic settings 427
11.3.2.1 Resetting WLAN settings to default setting 429
11.3.3 WLAN access point mode 430
11.3.3.1 Establishing a direct WLAN connection between smartphone and inverter 431
11.3.3.2 Using the smartphone as "Smart Keypad" 432
11.3.3.3 Establishing a direct WLAN connection between Engineering PC and inverter 433
11.3.4 WLAN client mode 435
11.4 DC braking 437
11.4.1 Example 1: Automatic DC braking when the motor is started 439
11.4.2 Example 2: Automatic DC braking when the motor is stopped 440
11.4.3 Migration of Lenze Inverter Drives 8200/8400 442
11.5 Brake energy management 443
11.5.1 Use of a brake resistor 445
11.5.2 Stopping the deceleration ramp function generator 447
11.5.3 Inverter motor brake 448
11.6 Load loss detection 449
11.7 Access protection 450
11.7.1 Write access protection 450
11.7.1.1 Write access protection in the »EASY Starter« 452
11.7.1.2 Write access protection in the keypad 455
11.8 Favorites 459
11.8.1 Accessing the "Favorites" with the keypad 459
11.8.2 Favorites parameter list (default setting) 460
11.8.3 Configuring the "Favorites" 461
11.9 Parameter change-over 464
11.9.1 Example: Selective control of several motors with one inverter 467
11.10 Device profile CiA 402 469
11.11 Holding brake control 472
11.11.1 Basic setting 473
11.11.2 "Automatic" brake mode (automatic operation) 474
11.11.3 Brake holding load 476
11.11.4 Brake closing level 478
11.11.5 Manual release of the holding brake 480
11.12 Flying restart circuit 481
11.13 Timeout für fault reaction 483

11
Contents

11.14 Automatic restart 484

11.15 Mains failure control 485
11.15.1 Activating the mains failure control 487
11.15.2 Restart protection 488
11.15.3 Fast mains recovery 488
11.15.4 Commissioning the mains failure control 489
11.16 UPS operation 490
11.17 Process data 493
11.17.1 Position counter 493
11.18 Encoder settings 495
11.18.1 HTL encoder 496
11.18.2 Encoder monitoring 498
11.19 Firmware download 501
11.19.1 Firmware download with »EASY Starter (Firmware loader)« 501
11.20 Additive voltage impression 502
11.20.1 Example: Using the function with a 400-V inverter 503
12 Sequencer 504
12.1 Segment configuration 506
12.2 Sequence configuration 516
12.3 Sequencer basic settings 520
13 Safety functions 523
13.1 Safe torque off (STO) 523

12
Contents

14 Flexible I/O configuration 525

14.1 Control source change-over 526
14.1.1 Example 1: Change-over from terminal control to keypad control 529
14.1.2 Example 2: Change-over from terminal control to network control 530
14.2 Start / stop motor 531
14.2.1 Example 1: Start/stop (1 signal) and reversal 537
14.2.2 Example 2: Start forward/start reverse/stop (edge-controlled) 538
14.2.3 Example 3: Run forward/Run reverse/stop (status-controlled) 540
14.2.4 Example 4: Quick stop 542
14.2.5 Example 5: Jog forward/Jog reverse 543
14.2.6 Example 6: Enable inverter 545
14.3 Setpoint change-over 546
14.3.1 Priority of the setpoint sources 548
14.3.2 Analog input setpoint source 548
14.3.3 Keypad setpoint source 551
14.3.4 Network setpoint source 553
14.3.5 Setpoint source of preset setpoints 554
14.3.6 Motor potentiometer setpoint source (MOP) 559
14.3.7 Setpoint source segment setpoints 563
14.3.8 HTL input setpoint source 565
14.3.8.1 Example 1: Input range 10 ... 85 kHz ≡ setting range 0 ... 50 Hz 569
14.3.8.2 Example 2: Input range 10 ... 85 kHz ≡ setting range -50 ... 50 Hz 569
14.4 Reset error 570
14.5 Activating DC braking manually 572
14.6 Releasing holding brake manually 574
14.7 Activating ramp 2 manually 576
14.8 Triggering a user-defined fault 578
14.9 Functions for parameter change-over 579
14.9.1 Example 1: Activation via command (only when disabled) 581
14.9.2 Example 2: Activation via command (immediately) 582
14.9.3 Example 3: Activation if the selection is changed (only if the inverter is disabled) 583
14.9.4 Example 4: Activation if the selection is changed (immediately) 584
14.10 Process controller function selection 585
14.11 Sequencer control functions 588
14.12 Frequency threshold for "Frequency threshold exceeded" trigger 593
14.13 Configuration of digital inputs 594
14.14 Configuration of analog inputs 597
14.14.1 Analog input 1 597
14.14.1.1 Example 1: Input range 0 ... 10 V ≡ setting range 0 ... 50 Hz 599
14.14.1.2 Example 2: Input range 0 ... 10 V ≡ setting range -40 ... +40 Hz 599
14.14.1.3 Example 3: Input range -10 ... +10 V ≡ setting range -40 ... +40 Hz 600
14.14.1.4 Example 4: Error detection 600
14.14.2 Analog input 2 601

13
Contents

14.15 Configuration of digital outputs 603

14.15.1 Relay 603
14.15.2 Digital output 1 607
14.15.3 Digital output 2 608
14.15.4 NetWordOUT1 status word 609
14.15.5 HTL output 612
14.15.5.1 Example 1: Pulse train 0 ... 10 kHz ≡ output frequency 0 ... 100 Hz 615
14.15.5.2 Example 2: Pulse train 2 ... 10 kHz ≡ output frequency 30 ... 60 Hz 616
14.16 Configuration of analog outputs 617
14.16.1 Analog output 1 617
14.16.1.1 Example 1: Output voltage 0 ... 10 V ≡ output frequency 0 ... 100 Hz 619
14.16.1.2 Example 2: Output voltage 2 ... 10 V ≡ output frequency 30 ... 60 Hz 619
14.16.2 Analog output 2 620
15 Technical data 622
15.1 Standards and operating conditions 622
15.1.1 Conformities/approvals 622
15.1.2 Protection of persons and device protection 622
15.1.3 EMC data 622
15.1.4 Motor connection 623
15.1.5 Environmental conditions 623
15.1.6 Electrical supply conditions 623
15.2 1-phase mains connection 120 V 624
15.2.1 Rated data 624
15.3 1-phase mains connection 230/240 V 625
15.3.1 Rated data 625
15.4 3-phase mains connection 230/240 V 626
15.4.1 Rated data 626
15.5 3-phase mains connection 400 V 627
15.5.1 Rated data 627
15.6 3-phase mains connection 400 V "light duty" 628
15.6.1 Rated data 628
15.7 3-phase mains connection 480 V 629
15.7.1 Rated data 629
15.8 3-phase mains connection 480 V "Light Duty" 630
15.8.1 Rated data 630
16 Appendix 631
16.1 Operate and parameterise the inverter with keypad 631
16.1.1 Keypad operating mode 632
16.1.1.1 Keypad status display 632
16.1.1.2 Function of keypad keys in operating mode 633
16.1.1.3 Error reset with keypad 634
16.1.2 Keypad parameterisation mode 635
16.1.2.1 Parameter groups 635
16.1.2.2 Function of the keypad keys in the parameterisation mode 636
16.1.2.3 Save parameter settings with keypad 637
16.1.2.4 Display of status words on keypad 638
16.2 Error codes 639
16.3 Parameter attribute list 659

14
General information
Read first, then start

1 General information
1.1 Read first, then start

WARNING!
Read this documentation thoroughly before carrying out the installation and commissioning.
▶ Please observe the safety instructions!

Information and tools with regard to the Lenze products can be found on the
Internet:
http://www.lenze.com à Download

15
Safety instructions
Basic safety measures

2 Safety instructions
2.1 Basic safety measures
Disregarding the following basic safety measures may lead to severe personal injury and dam-
age to material assets!
The product
• must only be used as directed.
• must never be commissioned if they display signs of damage.
• must never be technically modified.
• must never be commissioned if they are not fully mounted.
• must never be operated without required covers.
Connect/disconnect all pluggable terminals only in deenergised condition.
Only remove the product from the installation in the deenergised state.
Insulation resistance tests between 24V control potential and PE: According to EN 61800−5−1,
the maximum test voltage must not exceed 110 V DC.
Observe all specifications of the corresponding documentation supplied. This is the precondi-
tion for safe and trouble-free operation and for obtaining the product features specified.
The procedural notes and circuit details described in this document are only proposals. It is up
to the user to check whether they can be adapted to the particular applications. Lenze does
not take any responsibility for the suitability of the procedures and circuit proposals descri-
bed.
The product must only be used by qualified personnel. IEC 60364 or CENELEC HD 384 define
the skills of these persons:
• They are familiar with installing, mounting, commissioning, and operating the product.
• They have the corresponding qualifications for their work.
• They know and can apply all regulations for the prevention of accidents, directives, and
laws applicable at the place of use.
Please observe the specific notes in the other chapters!
Notes used:

DANGER!
This note refers to an imminent danger which, if not avoided, may result in death or serious
injury.

WARNING!
This note refers to a danger which, if not avoided, may result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION!
This note refers to a danger which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury.

NOTICE
This note refers to a danger which, if not avoided, may result in damage to property.

16
Safety instructions
Application as directed

2.2 Residual hazards

The user must take the residual hazards mentioned into consideration in the risk assessment
for his/her machine/system.
If the above is disregarded, this can lead to severe injuries to persons and damage to material
assets!
Product
Observe the warning labels on the product!
Icon Description
Electrostatic sensitive devices:
Before working on the product, the staff must ensure to be free of electrostatic charge!

Dangerous electrical voltage

Before working on the product, check if no voltage is applied to the power terminals!
After mains disconnection, the power terminals carry the hazardous electrical voltage given on the product!
High leakage current:
Carry out fixed installation and PE connection in compliance with EN 61800−5−1 or EN 60204−1!

Hot surface:
Use personal protective equipment or wait until devices have cooled down!

Motor
If there is a short circuit of two power transistors, a residual movement of up to 180°/number
of pole pairs can occur at the motor! (For 4-pole motor: residual movement max. 180°/2 =
90°).

2.3 Application as directed

• The product must only be operated under the operating conditions prescribed in this doc-
umentation.
• The product meets the protection requirements of 2014/35/EU: Low-Voltage Directive.
• The product is not a machine in terms of 2006/42/EC: Machinery Directive.
• Commissioning or starting the operation as directed of a machine with the product is not
permitted until it has been ensured that the machine meets the regulations of the EC
Directive 2006/42/EC: Machinery Directive; observe EN 60204−1.
• Commissioning or starting the operation as directed is only allowed when there is compli-
ance with the EMC Directive 2014/30/EU.
• The harmonised standard EN 61800−5−1 is used for the inverters.
• The product is not a household appliance, but is only designed as component for commer-
cial or professional use in terms of EN 61000−3−2.
• The product can be used according to the technical data if drive systems have to comply
with categories according to EN 61800−3.
In residential areas, the product may cause EMC interferences. The operator is responsible
for taking interference suppression measures.

17
Mechanical installation

3 Mechanical installation
3.1 Dimensions
0.25 kW ... 0.37 kW
The dimensions in mm apply to:
0.25 kW I55AE125B I55AE125D
0.37 kW I55AE137B I55AE137D I55AE137F

18
Mechanical installation
Dimensions

0.25 kW ... 0.37 kW

The dimensions in mm apply to:
0.25 kW I55AE125A
0.37 kW I55AE137A

19
Mechanical installation
Dimensions

0.55 kW ... 0.75 kW

The dimensions in mm apply to:
0.55 kW I55AE155B I55AE155D I55AE155F
0.75 kW I55AE175B I55AE175D I55AE175F

20
Mechanical installation
Dimensions

0.75 kW ... 1.1 kW

The dimensions in mm apply to:
0.75 kW I55AE175A
1.1 kW I55AE211A

21
Mechanical installation
Dimensions

1.1 kW ... 2.2 kW

The dimensions in mm apply to:
1.1 kW I55AE211B I55AE211D I55AE211F
1.5 kW I55AE215B I55AE215D I55AE215F
2.2 kW I55AE222B I55AE222D I55AE222F

22
Mechanical installation
Dimensions

3 kW ... 5.5 kW
The dimensions in mm apply to:
3 kW I55AE230F
4 kW I55AE240C I55AE240F
5.5 kW I55AE255C I55AE255F

23
Mechanical installation
Dimensions

7.5 kW ... 11 kW
The dimensions in mm apply to:
7.5 kW I55AE275F
11 kW I55AE311F

24
Mechanical installation
Dimensions

15 kW ... 22 kW
The dimensions in mm apply to:
15 kW I55AE315F
18.5 kW I55AE318F
22 kW I55AE322F

25
Mechanical installation
Dimensions

30 kW ... 45 kW
The dimensions in mm apply to:
30 kW I55AE330F
37 kW I55AE337F
45 kW I55AE345F

26
Mechanical installation
Dimensions

55 kW ... 75 kW
The dimensions in mm apply to:
55 kW I55AE355F
75 kW I55AE375F

27
Electrical installation
Important notes

4 Electrical installation
4.1 Important notes

DANGER!
Dangerous electrical voltage
Possible consequence: death or severe injuries
▶ All work on the inverter must only be carried out in the deenergised state.
▶ After switching off the mains voltage, wait for at least 3 minutes before you start working.

28
Electrical installation
Mains connection
1-phase mains connection 120 V

4.2 Mains connection

4.2.1 1-phase mains connection 120 V

4.2.1.1 Connection plan

The connection plan is valid for the inverters I55AExxxA.

Inverters I55AExxxA do not have an integrated RFI filter in the AC mains supply.
In order to meet the EMC requirements according to EN 61800−3, an external
EMC filter according to IEC EN 60939 must be used.
The user must verify that the conformity with EN 61800−3 is fulfilled.

L1 L1
L2 3/N/PE L2 2/N/PE
L3
N AC 208 V N AC 208 V ... 240 V
PE PE
F1 F1
1/N/PE 1/N/PE
Q1 Q1
AC 90 V ... 132 V AC 90 V ... 132 V
45 Hz ... 65 Hz 45 Hz ... 65 Hz
+
X100
L1
L2/N

CAN open Modbus RTU PROFIBUS EtherCAT PROFINET EtherNet/IP Modbus TCP POWERLINK
X216

X216

X226

X246
X247

X256
X257

X266
X267

X276
X277

X286
X287
CL

TA
CH

TB
L2/N
X100

X9
L1

COM
NC
NO
COM

+
IN

IN
OUT

OUT

AC 240 V
3A Application I/O
Standard I/O

+24 V +10 V
10 mA

100 mA
4.4k
4.4k

4.4k

4.4k
24E

DO 1

DI 1

DI 2

DI 3

DI 4

DI 5

DI 6

DI 7

DI 1
GND

GND
X105

X109

GND

GND
DO 2
AO 1

AO 2
24V
Rb1
Rb2

10V

24V
24E

AI 1

AI 2
SIA

SIB
GS
X1

X3
T1
T2
W

+
U
V

" "
Safety STO

"
1k ... 10k
0 ... 10 V

DC 24 V SELV /PELV
J (+19.2 … +28.8 V) DI3 DI4
J

M S1
+ 3~

Fig. 1: Wiring example

S1 Start/Stop Q1 Mains contactor
Fx Fuses --- Dashed line = options

29
Electrical installation
Mains connection
1-phase mains connection 120 V

4.2.1.2 Fusing and terminal data

Fuse data
Inverter I55AE125A I55AE175A
I55AE137A I55AE211A
Cable installation in compliance with EN 60204-1
Installation method B2
operation without mains choke
Fuse
Characteristics gG/gL or gRL
Max. rated current A 16 25
Circuit breaker
Characteristics B
Max. rated current A 16 25
operation with mains choke
Fuse
Characteristics gG/gL or gRL
Max. rated current A 16 25
Circuit breaker
Characteristics B
Max. rated current A 16 25
Earth-leakage circuit breaker
1-phase mains connection ≥ 30 mA, type A or B

Fuse data
Inverter I55AE125A I55AE175A
I55AE137A I55AE211A
Cable installation in compliance with US National Electrical Code NFPA 70 / Canadian Electrical Code C22.1
operation without mains choke
Fuse
Characteristics all acc. to UL 248 / Class CC
Max. rated current A 15 30
Circuit breaker
Characteristics -
Max. rated current A 15 30
operation with mains choke
Fuse
Characteristics all acc. to UL 248 / Class CC
Max. rated current A 15 30
Circuit breaker
Characteristics -
Max. rated current A 15 30
Earth-leakage circuit breaker
1-phase mains connection ≥ 30 mA, type A or B

30
Electrical installation
Mains connection
1-phase mains connection 120 V

Mains connection
Inverter I55AE125A I55AE175A
I55AE137A I55AE211A
Connection X100
Connection type pluggable screw terminal
Min. cable cross-section mm² 1
Min. cable cross-section AWG 18
Max. cable cross-section mm² 2.5 6
Max. cable cross-section AWG 12 10
Stripping length mm 8
Stripping length inch 0.32
Tightening torque Nm 0.5 0.7
Tightening torque lb-in 4.4 6.2
Required tool 0.5 x 3.0 0.6 x 3.5

PE connection
Inverter I55AE125A
I55AE137A
I55AE175A
I55AE211A
Connection PE
Connection type PE screw
Min. cable cross-section mm² 1.5
Min. cable cross-section AWG 14
Max. cable cross-section mm² 6
Max. cable cross-section AWG 10
Stripping length mm 10
Stripping length inch 0.39
Tightening torque Nm 2
Tightening torque lb-in 18
Required tool TORX TX20

Motor connection
Inverter I55AE125A
I55AE137A
I55AE175A
I55AE211A
Connection X105
Connection type pluggable screw terminal
Min. cable cross-section mm² 1
Min. cable cross-section AWG 18
Max. cable cross-section mm² 2.5
Max. cable cross-section AWG 12
Stripping length mm 8
Stripping length inch 0.32
Tightening torque Nm 0.5
Tightening torque lb-in 4.4
Required tool 0.5 x 3.0

31
Electrical installation
Mains connection
1-phase mains connection 230/240 V

4.2.2 1-phase mains connection 230/240 V

4.2.2.1 Connection plan

The connection plan is valid for the inverters I55AExxxB.
L1 L1 L1
L2 3/N/PE L2 3/N/PE L2 2/N/PE
L3 L3
N AC 400 V N AC 208 V ... 240 V N AC 208 V ... 240 V
PE PE PE
F1 F1
F1 … …
F2 F3
1/N/PE 2/PE 2/PE
Q1 Q1 Q1
AC 170 V ... 264 V AC 170 V ... 264 V AC 170 V ... 264 V
45 Hz ... 65 Hz 45 Hz ... 65 Hz 45 Hz ... 65 Hz
+ +
L2/N

L2/N
X100
L1

X100
L1
CANopen Modbus RTU PROFIBUS EtherCAT PROFINET EtherNet/IP Modbus TCP POWERLINK

+
X216

X216

X226

X246
X247

X256
X257

X266
X267

X276
X277

X286
X287
CL

TA
CH

TB
L2/N
X100

X9
L1

COM
NC
NO
COM

IN
OUT

OUT
AC 240 V
3A Application I/O
Standard I/O

+24 V +10 V
10 mA

100 mA
4.4k

4.4k

4.4k
DO 1

DI 1

DI 2

DI 3

DI 4

DI 5

DI 6

DI 7

DI 1
24E

GND

GND
X105

X109

GND

GND
DO 2
AO 1

AO 2
24V
Rb1
Rb2

10V

24V
24E

AI 1

AI 2
SIA

SIB
GS
X1
T1
T2

X3
W

+
U
V

" "
Safety STO

"
0 ... 10 V

1k ... 10k

DC 24 V SELV /PELV
J (+19.2 … +28.8 V) DI3 DI4
J

M S1
+ 3~

Fig. 2: Wiring example

S1 Start/Stop Q1 Mains contactor
Fx Fuses --- Dashed line = options

32
Electrical installation
Mains connection
1-phase mains connection 230/240 V

The connection plan is valid for the inverters I55AExxxD.

Inverters I55AExxxD do not have an integrated RFI filter in the AC mains supply.
In order to meet the EMC requirements according to EN 61800−3, an external
EMC filter according to IEC EN 60939 must be used.
The user must verify that the conformity with EN 61800−3 is fulfilled.

L1 L1
L2 3/N/PE L2 3/N/PE
L3 L3
N AC 400 V N AC 208 V ... 240 V
PE PE
F1
F1 …
F2
1/N/PE 2/PE
Q1 Q1
AC 170 V ... 264 V AC 170 V ... 264 V
45 Hz ... 65 Hz 45 Hz ... 65 Hz
+
L2/N
X100
L1

CANopen Modbus RTU PROFIBUS EtherCAT PROFINET EtherNet/IP Modbus TCP POWERLINK

+
X216

X216

X226

X246
X247

X256
X257

X266
X267

X276
X277

X286
X287
CL

TA
CH

TB
L2/N
X100

X9
L1

COM
NC
NO
COM

IN
OUT

OUT
AC 240 V
3A Application I/O
Standard I/O

+24 V +10 V
10 mA

100 mA
4.4k

4.4k

4.4k
DO 1

DI 1

DI 2

DI 3

DI 4

DI 5

DI 6

DI 7

DI 1
24E

GND

GND
X105

X109

GND

GND
DO 2
AO 1

AO 2
24V
Rb1
Rb2

10V

24V
24E

AI 1

AI 2
SIA

SIB
GS
X1
T1
T2

X3
W

+
U
V

" "
Safety STO

"
0 ... 10 V

1k ... 10k

DC 24 V SELV /PELV
J (+19.2 … +28.8 V) DI3 DI4
J

M S1
+ 3~

Fig. 3: Wiring example

S1 Start/Stop Q1 Mains contactor
Fx Fuses --- Dashed line = options

33
Electrical installation
Mains connection
1-phase mains connection 230/240 V

4.2.2.2 Fusing and terminal data

Fuse data
Inverter I55AE125B I55AE125D I55AE155B I55AE155D
I55AE137B I55AE137D I55AE175B I55AE175D
Cable installation in compliance with EN 60204-1
Installation method B2
operation without mains choke
Fuse
Characteristics gG/gL or gRL
Max. rated current A 10 10 16 16
Circuit breaker
Characteristics B
Max. rated current A 10 10 16 16
operation with mains choke
Fuse
Characteristics gG/gL or gRL
Max. rated current A 10 10 16 16
Circuit breaker
Characteristics B
Max. rated current A 10 10 16 16
Earth-leakage circuit breaker
1-phase mains connection ≥ 30 mA, type A or B
3-phase mains connection - ≥ 30 mA, type B - ≥ 30 mA, type B

Fuse data
Inverter I55AE211B I55AE211D
I55AE215B I55AE215D
I55AE222B I55AE222D
Cable installation in compliance with EN 60204-1
Installation method B2
operation without mains choke
Fuse
Characteristics gG/gL or gRL
Max. rated current A 25 25
Circuit breaker
Characteristics B
Max. rated current A 25 25
operation with mains choke
Fuse
Characteristics gG/gL or gRL
Max. rated current A 25 25
Circuit breaker
Characteristics B
Max. rated current A 25 25
Earth-leakage circuit breaker
1-phase mains connection ≥ 30 mA, type A or B
3-phase mains connection - ≥ 30 mA, type B

34
Electrical installation
Mains connection
1-phase mains connection 230/240 V

Fuse data
Inverter I55AE125B I55AE125D
I55AE211B I55AE211D
I55AE137B I55AE137D
I55AE215B I55AE215D
I55AE155B I55AE155D
I55AE222B I55AE222D
I55AE175B I55AE175D
Cable installation in compliance with US National Electrical Code NFPA 70 / Canadian Electrical Code C22.1
operation without mains choke
Fuse
Characteristics all acc. to UL 248 / Class CC
Max. rated current A 15 15 30 30
Circuit breaker
Characteristics -
Max. rated current A 15 15 30 30
operation with mains choke
Fuse
Characteristics all acc. to UL 248 / Class CC
Max. rated current A 15 15 30 30
Circuit breaker
Characteristics -
Max. rated current A 15 15 30 30
Earth-leakage circuit breaker
1-phase mains connection ≥ 30 mA, type A or B
3-phase mains connection - ≥ 30 mA, type B - ≥ 30 mA, type B

Mains connection
Inverter I55AE125B
I55AE125D I55AE211B
I55AE137B I55AE211D
I55AE137D I55AE215B
I55AE155B I55AE215D
I55AE155D I55AE222B
I55AE175B I55AE222D
I55AE175D
Connection X100
Connection type pluggable screw terminal
Min. cable cross-section mm² 1
Min. cable cross-section AWG 18
Max. cable cross-section mm² 2.5 6
Max. cable cross-section AWG 12 10
Stripping length mm 8
Stripping length inch 0.32
Tightening torque Nm 0.5 0.7
Tightening torque lb-in 4.4 6.2
Required tool 0.5 x 3.0 0.6 x 3.5

35
Electrical installation
Mains connection
1-phase mains connection 230/240 V

PE connection
Inverter I55AE125B
I55AE125D
I55AE137B
I55AE137D
I55AE155B
I55AE155D
I55AE175B
I55AE175D
I55AE211B
I55AE211D
I55AE215B
I55AE215D
I55AE222B
I55AE222D
Connection PE
Connection type PE screw
Min. cable cross-section mm² 1.5
Min. cable cross-section AWG 14
Max. cable cross-section mm² 6
Max. cable cross-section AWG -
Stripping length mm 10
Stripping length inch 0.39
Tightening torque Nm 2
Tightening torque lb-in 18
Required tool TORX TX20

Motor connection
Inverter I55AE125B
I55AE125D
I55AE137B
I55AE137D
I55AE155B
I55AE155D
I55AE175B
I55AE175D
I55AE211B
I55AE211D
I55AE215B
I55AE215D
I55AE222B
I55AE222D
Connection X105
Connection type pluggable screw terminal
Min. cable cross-section mm² 1
Min. cable cross-section AWG 18
Max. cable cross-section mm² 2.5
Max. cable cross-section AWG 12
Stripping length mm 8
Stripping length inch 0.32
Tightening torque Nm 0.5
Tightening torque lb-in 4.4
Required tool 0.5 x 3.0

36
Electrical installation
Mains connection
3-phase mains connection 230/240 V

4.2.3 3-phase mains connection 230/240 V

4.2.3.1 Connection plan

The connection plan is valid for the inverters I55AExxxC.

Inverters I55AExxxC do not have an integrated RFI filter in the AC mains supply.
In order to meet the EMC requirements according to EN 61800−3, an external
EMC filter according to IEC EN 60939 must be used.
The user must verify that the conformity with EN 61800−3 is fulfilled.

L1
L2 3/N/PE
L3
N AC 208 V ... 240 V
PE
F1
…
F3
3/PE
Q1
AC 170 V ... 264 V
45 Hz ... 65 Hz

CANopen Modbus RTU PROFIBUS EtherCAT PROFINET EtherNet/IP Modbus TCP POWERLINK

+
X216

X216

X226

X246
X247

X256
X257

X266
X267

X276
X277

X286
X287
CL

TA
CH

TB
X100

X9
L1
L2
L3
n.c.
n.c.

COM
NC
NO
COM

IN
OUT

OUT
AC 240 V
3A Application I/O
Standard I/O

+24 V +10 V
10 mA

100 mA
4.4k

4.4k

4.4k
DO 1

DI 1

DI 2

DI 3

DI 4

DI 5

DI 6

DI 7

DI 1
24E

GND

GND
X105

X109

GND

GND
DO 2
AO 1

AO 2
24V
Rb1
Rb2

10V

24V
24E

AI 1

AI 2
SIA

SIB
GS
X1
T1
T2

X3
W

+
U
V

" "
Safety STO

"
0 ... 10 V

1k ... 10k

DC 24 V SELV /PELV
J (+19.2 … +28.8 V) DI3 DI4
J

M S1
+ 3~

Fig. 4: Wiring example

S1 Start/Stop Q1 Mains contactor
Fx Fuses --- Dashed line = options

37
Electrical installation
Mains connection
3-phase mains connection 230/240 V

The connection plan is valid for the inverters I55AExxxD.

L1
L2 3/N/PE
L3
N AC 208 V ... 240 V
PE
F1
…
F3
3/PE
Q1
AC 170 V ... 264 V
45 Hz ... 65 Hz

CANopen Modbus RTU PROFIBUS EtherCAT PROFINET EtherNet/IP Modbus TCP POWERLINK

+
X216

X216

X226

X246
X247

X256
X257

X266
X267

X276
X277

X286
X287
CL

TA
CH

TB
X100

L2/N

X9
L1

COM
NC
NO
COM

IN
OUT

OUT
AC 240 V
3A Application I/O
Standard I/O

+24 V +10 V
10 mA

100 mA
4.4k

4.4k

4.4k
DO 1

DI 1

DI 2

DI 3

DI 4

DI 5

DI 6

DI 7

DI 1
24E

GND

GND
X105

X109

GND

GND
DO 2
AO 1

AO 2
24V
Rb1
Rb2

10V

24V
24E

AI 1

AI 2
SIA

SIB
GS
X1
T1
T2

X3
W

+
U
V

" "
Safety STO

"
0 ... 10 V

1k ... 10k

DC 24 V SELV /PELV
J (+19.2 … +28.8 V) DI3 DI4
J

M S1
+ 3~

Fig. 5: Wiring example

S1 Start/Stop Q1 Mains contactor
Fx Fuses --- Dashed line = options

38
Electrical installation
Mains connection
3-phase mains connection 230/240 V

4.2.3.2 Fusing and terminal data

Fuse data
Inverter I55AE211D
I55AE125D I55AE155D I55AE240C
I55AE215D
I55AE137D I55AE175D I55AE255C
I55AE222D
Cable installation in compliance with EN 60204-1
Installation method B2 C
operation without mains choke
Fuse
Characteristics gG/gL or gRL
Max. rated current A 10 16 25 32
Circuit breaker
Characteristics B
Max. rated current A 10 16 25 32
operation with mains choke
Fuse
Characteristics gG/gL or gRL
Max. rated current A 10 16 25 32
Circuit breaker
Characteristics B
Max. rated current A 10 16 25 32
Earth-leakage circuit breaker
1-phase mains connection ≥ 30 mA, type A or B -
3-phase mains connection ≥ 30 mA, type B ≥ 300 mA, type B

Fuse data
Inverter I55AE125D
I55AE211D
I55AE137D I55AE240C
I55AE215D
I55AE155D I55AE255C
I55AE222D
I55AE175D
Cable installation in compliance with US National Electrical Code NFPA 70 / Canadian Electrical Code C22.1
operation without mains choke
Fuse
Characteristics all acc. to UL 248 / Class CC all acc. to UL 248 / Class J, T, R
Max. rated current A 15 30 40
Circuit breaker
Characteristics -
Max. rated current A 15 30 -
operation with mains choke
Fuse
Characteristics all acc. to UL 248 / Class CC all acc. to UL 248 / Class J, T, R
Max. rated current A 15 30 40
Circuit breaker
Characteristics -
Max. rated current A 15 30 -
Earth-leakage circuit breaker
1-phase mains connection ≥ 30 mA, type A or B -
3-phase mains connection ≥ 30 mA, type B ≥ 300 mA, type B

39
Electrical installation
Mains connection
3-phase mains connection 230/240 V

Mains connection
Inverter I55AE125D
I55AE211D
I55AE137D I55AE240C
I55AE215D
I55AE155D I55AE255C
I55AE222D
I55AE175D
Connection X100
Connection type pluggable screw terminal Screw terminal
Min. cable cross-section mm² 1 1.5
Min. cable cross-section AWG 18 16
Max. cable cross-section mm² 2.5 6
Max. cable cross-section AWG 12 10 8
Stripping length mm 8 9
Stripping length inch 0.32 0.35
Tightening torque Nm 0.5 0.7 0.5
Tightening torque lb-in 4.4 6.2 4.4
Required tool 0.5 x 3.0 0.6 x 3.5

PE connection
Inverter I55AE125D
I55AE137D
I55AE155D
I55AE175D
I55AE211D
I55AE215D
I55AE222D
I55AE240C
I55AE255C
Connection PE
Connection type PE screw
Min. cable cross-section mm² 1.5
Min. cable cross-section AWG 14
Max. cable cross-section mm² 6
Max. cable cross-section AWG -
Stripping length mm 10
Stripping length inch 0.39
Tightening torque Nm 2
Tightening torque lb-in 18
Required tool TORX TX20

Motor connection
Inverter I55AE125D
I55AE137D
I55AE155D
I55AE240C
I55AE175D
I55AE255C
I55AE211D
I55AE215D
I55AE222D
Connection X105
Connection type pluggable screw terminal Screw terminal
Min. cable cross-section mm² 1 1.5
Min. cable cross-section AWG 18 16
Max. cable cross-section mm² 2.5 6
Max. cable cross-section AWG 12 8
Stripping length mm 8 9
Stripping length inch 0.32 0.35
Tightening torque Nm 0.5
Tightening torque lb-in 4.4
Required tool 0.5 x 3.0 0.6 x 3.5

40
Electrical installation
Mains connection
3-phase mains connection 400 V

4.2.4 3-phase mains connection 400 V

4.2.4.1 Connection plan

The connection plan is valid for the inverters I55AExxxF.
L1
L2
L3 3/N/PE AC 400 V
N
PE
F1
…
F3
Q1 3/PE
AC 340 V ... 528 V
45 Hz ... 65 Hz

CANopen Modbus RTU PROFIBUS EtherCAT PROFINET EtherNet/IP Modbus TCP POWERLINK

+
X216

X216

X226

X246
X247

X256
X257

X266
X267

X276
X277

X286
X287
CL

TA
CH

TB
X100

X9
L1
L2
L3

COM
NC
NO
+UG
-UG

COM

IN
OUT

OUT
AC 240 V
3A Application I/O
Standard I/O

+24 V +10 V
10 mA

100 mA
4.4k

4.4k

4.4k
DO 1

DI 1

DI 2

DI 3

DI 4

DI 5

DI 6

DI 7

DI 1
24E

GND

GND
X105

X109

GND

GND
DO 2
AO 1

AO 2
24V
Rb1
Rb2

10V

24V
24E

AI 1

AI 2
SIA

SIB
GS
X1
T1
T2

X3
W

+
U
V

" "
Safety STO

"
0 ... 10 V

1k ... 10k

DC 24 V SELV /PELV
J (+19.2 … +28.8 V) DI3 DI4
J

M S1
+ 3~

Fig. 6: Wiring example

S1 Start/Stop Q1 Mains contactor
Fx Fuses --- Dashed line = options

41
Electrical installation
Mains connection
3-phase mains connection 400 V

4.2.4.2 Fusing and terminal data

Fuse data
Inverter I55AE137F I55AE211F I55AE230F
I55AE275F
I55AE155F I55AE215F I55AE240F
I55AE311F
I55AE175F I55AE222F I55AE255F
Cable installation in compliance with EN 60204-1
Installation method B2
operation without mains choke
Fuse
Characteristics gG/gL or gRL
Max. rated current A 10 16 25 32
Circuit breaker
Characteristics B
Max. rated current A 10 16 25 32
operation with mains choke
Fuse
Characteristics gG/gL or gRL
Max. rated current A 10 16 25 32
Circuit breaker
Characteristics B
Max. rated current A 10 16 25 32
Earth-leakage circuit breaker
3-phase mains connection ≥ 30 mA, type B ≥ 300 mA, type B

Fuse data
Inverter I55AE315F
I55AE322F I55AE330F I55AE337F
I55AE318F
Cable installation in compliance with EN 60204-1
Installation method B2 C
operation without mains choke
Fuse
Characteristics gG/gL or gRL -
Max. rated current A 63 - - -
Circuit breaker
Characteristics B -
Max. rated current A 63 - - -
operation with mains choke
Fuse
Characteristics gG/gL or gRL
Max. rated current A 63 63 80 100
Circuit breaker
Characteristics B
Max. rated current A 63 63 80 100
Earth-leakage circuit breaker
3-phase mains connection ≥ 300 mA, type B

42
Electrical installation
Mains connection
3-phase mains connection 400 V

Fuse data
Inverter I55AE355F
I55AE345F
I55AE375F
Cable installation in compliance with EN 60204-1
Installation method C F
operation
Fuse
Characteristics -
Max. rated current A - -
Circuit breaker
Characteristics -
Max. rated current A - -
operation with mains choke
Fuse
Characteristics gG/gL or gRL gR
Max. rated current A 125 160
Circuit breaker
Characteristics B -
Max. rated current A 125 -
Earth-leakage circuit breaker
3-phase mains connection ≥ 300 mA, type B

Fuse data
Inverter I55AE137F
I55AE155F
I55AE230F
I55AE175F
I55AE240F I55AE275F I55AE311F
I55AE211F
I55AE255F
I55AE215F
I55AE222F
Cable installation in compliance with US National Electrical Code NFPA 70 / Canadian Electrical Code C22.1
operation without mains choke
Fuse
Characteristics all acc. to UL 248 / Class CC all acc. to UL 248 / Class J, T, R
Max. rated current A 15 25 40 40
Circuit breaker
Characteristics -
Max. rated current A - 25 35 -
operation with mains choke
Fuse
Characteristics all acc. to UL 248 / Class CC all acc. to UL 248 / Class J, T, R
Max. rated current A 15 25 40 40
Circuit breaker
Characteristics -
Max. rated current A - 25 35 -
Earth-leakage circuit breaker
3-phase mains connection ≥ 30 mA, type B ≥ 300 mA, type B

43
Electrical installation
Mains connection
3-phase mains connection 400 V

Fuse data
Inverter I55AE315F
I55AE322F I55AE330F I55AE337F
I55AE318F
Cable installation in compliance with US National Electrical Code NFPA 70 / Canadian Electrical Code C22.1
operation without mains choke
Fuse
Characteristics all acc. to UL 248 / Class
-
J, T, R
Max. rated current A 70 - - -
Circuit breaker
Characteristics - - - -
Max. rated current A - - - -
operation with mains choke
Fuse
Characteristics all acc. to UL 248 / Class J, T, R
Max. rated current A 70 70 80 100
Circuit breaker
Characteristics - - - -
Max. rated current A - - - -
Earth-leakage circuit breaker
3-phase mains connection ≥ 300 mA, type B

Fuse data
Inverter I55AE355F
I55AE345F
I55AE375F
Cable installation in compliance with US National Electrical Code NFPA 70 / Canadian Electrical Code C22.1
operation
Fuse
Characteristics -
Max. rated current A - -
Circuit breaker
Characteristics - -
Max. rated current A - -
operation with mains choke
Fuse
Characteristics acc. to UL 248 / Class J (recommended: HSJ by
all acc. to UL 248 / Class J, T, R
Mersen)
Max. rated current A 125 200
Circuit breaker
Characteristics - -
Max. rated current A - -
Earth-leakage circuit breaker
3-phase mains connection ≥ 300 mA, type B

44
Electrical installation
Mains connection
3-phase mains connection 400 V

Mains connection
Inverter I55AE137F
I55AE155F
I55AE230F I55AE315F I55AE330F
I55AE175F I55AE275F I55AE355F
I55AE240F I55AE318F I55AE337F
I55AE211F I55AE311F I55AE375F
I55AE255F I55AE322F I55AE345F
I55AE215F
I55AE222F
Connection X100
Connection type pluggable
Screw terminal
screw terminal
Min. cable cross-section mm² 1 1.5 10 25
Min. cable cross-section AWG 18 16 6 2
Max. cable cross-section mm² 2.5 6 16 35 50 95
Max. cable cross-section AWG 12 10 6 2 1/0 4/0
Stripping length mm 8 9 11 18 19 22
Stripping length inch 0.32 0.35 0.43 0.7 0.75 0.87
Tightening torque Nm 0.5 1.2 3.8 4 10
Tightening torque lb-in 4.4 11 34 35 89
Required tool 0.5 x 3.0 0.6 x 3.5 0.8 x 4.0 0.8 x 5.5 Allen key 4.0 Allen key 6.0

PE connection
Inverter I55AE137F
I55AE315F
I55AE155F
I55AE318F
I55AE175F
I55AE322F
I55AE211F
I55AE275F I55AE330F
I55AE215F
I55AE311F I55AE337F
I55AE222F
I55AE345F
I55AE230F
I55AE355F
I55AE240F
I55AE375F
I55AE255F
Connection PE
Connection type PE screw
Min. cable cross-section mm² 1.5 2.5 4
Min. cable cross-section AWG 14 12
Max. cable cross-section mm² 6 16 25
Max. cable cross-section AWG -
Stripping length mm 10 11 16
Stripping length inch 0.39 0.43 0.63
Tightening torque Nm 2 3.4 4
Tightening torque lb-in 18 30 35
Required tool TORX TX20 PZ2

45
Electrical installation
Mains connection
3-phase mains connection 400 V

Motor connection
Inverter I55AE137F
I55AE155F
I55AE230F I55AE315F I55AE330F
I55AE175F I55AE275F I55AE355F
I55AE240F I55AE318F I55AE337F
I55AE211F I55AE311F I55AE375F
I55AE255F I55AE322F I55AE345F
I55AE215F
I55AE222F
Connection X105
Connection type pluggable
Screw terminal
screw terminal
Min. cable cross-section mm² 1 1.5 10 25
Min. cable cross-section AWG 18 16 6 2
Max. cable cross-section mm² 2.5 6 16 35 50 95
Max. cable cross-section AWG 12 10 6 2 1/0 4/0
Stripping length mm 8 9 11 18 19 22
Stripping length inch 0.32 0.35 0.43 0.7 0.75 0.87
Tightening torque Nm 0.5 1.2 3.8 4 10
Tightening torque lb-in 4.4 11 34 35 89
Required tool 0.5 x 3.0 0.6 x 3.5 0.8 x 4.0 0.8 x 5.5 Allen key 4.0 Allen key 6.0

46
Electrical installation
Mains connection
3-phase mains connection 400 V "light duty"

4.2.5 3-phase mains connection 400 V "light duty"

4.2.5.1 Connection plan

See chapter "3-phase mains connection 400 V". ^ 41

47
Electrical installation
Mains connection
3-phase mains connection 400 V "light duty"

4.2.5.2 Fusing and terminal data

Fuse data
Inverter I55AE230F
I55AE240F I55AE275F I55AE311F I55AE315F
I55AE255F
Cable installation in compliance with EN 60204-1
Installation method B2
operation without mains choke without mains choke
Fuse
Characteristics gG/gL or gRL - gG/gL or gRL
Max. rated current A 25 32 - 63
Circuit breaker
Characteristics B - B
Max. rated current A 25 32 - 63
operation with mains choke
Fuse
Characteristics gG/gL or gRL
Max. rated current A 25 32 32 63
Circuit breaker
Characteristics B
Max. rated current A 25 32 32 63
Earth-leakage circuit breaker
3-phase mains connection ≥ 300 mA, type B

Fuse data
Inverter I55AE318F
I55AE330F I55AE337F I55AE345F
I55AE322F
Cable installation in compliance with EN 60204-1
Installation method B2 C
operation
Fuse
Characteristics -
Max. rated current A - - - -
Circuit breaker
Characteristics -
Max. rated current A - - - -
operation with mains choke
Fuse
Characteristics gG/gL or gRL
Max. rated current A 63 80 100 125
Circuit breaker
Characteristics B
Max. rated current A 63 80 100 125
Earth-leakage circuit breaker
3-phase mains connection ≥ 300 mA, type B

48
Electrical installation
Mains connection
3-phase mains connection 400 V "light duty"

Fuse data
Inverter I55AE355F
I55AE390F
I55AE375F
Cable installation in compliance with EN 60204-1
Installation method F
operation
Fuse
Characteristics -
Max. rated current A - -
Circuit breaker
Characteristics - -
Max. rated current A - -
operation with mains choke
Fuse
Characteristics gR
Max. rated current A 160 300
Circuit breaker
Characteristics - -
Max. rated current A - -
Earth-leakage circuit breaker
3-phase mains connection ≥ 300 mA, type B

Fuse data
Inverter I55AE230F
I55AE240F I55AE275F I55AE311F I55AE315F
I55AE255F
Cable installation in compliance with US National Electrical Code NFPA 70 / Canadian Electrical Code C22.1
operation without mains choke without mains choke
Fuse
Characteristics all acc. to UL 248 / Class all acc. to UL 248 / Class all acc. to UL 248 / Class
-
CC J, T, R J, T, R
Max. rated current A 25 40 - 70
Circuit breaker
Characteristics -
Max. rated current A 25 35 - -
operation with mains choke
Fuse
Characteristics all acc. to UL 248 / Class
all acc. to UL 248 / Class J, T, R
CC
Max. rated current A 25 40 40 70
Circuit breaker
Characteristics -
Max. rated current A 25 35 - -
Earth-leakage circuit breaker
3-phase mains connection ≥ 300 mA, type B

49
Electrical installation
Mains connection
3-phase mains connection 400 V "light duty"

Fuse data
Inverter I55AE318F
I55AE330F I55AE337F I55AE345F
I55AE322F
Cable installation in compliance with US National Electrical Code NFPA 70 / Canadian Electrical Code C22.1
operation
Fuse
Characteristics -
Max. rated current A - - - -
Circuit breaker
Characteristics - - - -
Max. rated current A - - - -
operation with mains choke
Fuse
Characteristics all acc. to UL 248 / Class J, T, R
Max. rated current A 70 80 100 125
Circuit breaker
Characteristics - - - -
Max. rated current A - - - -
Earth-leakage circuit breaker
3-phase mains connection ≥ 300 mA, type B

Fuse data
Inverter I55AE355F
I55AE390F
I55AE375F
Cable installation in compliance with US National Electrical Code NFPA 70 / Canadian Electrical Code C22.1
operation
Fuse
Characteristics -
Max. rated current A - -
Circuit breaker
Characteristics - -
Max. rated current A - -
operation with mains choke
Fuse
Characteristics acc. to UL 248 / Class J (recommended: HSJ by
all acc. to UL 248 / Class J, T, R
Mersen)
Max. rated current A 200 300
Circuit breaker
Characteristics - -
Max. rated current A - -
Earth-leakage circuit breaker
3-phase mains connection ≥ 300 mA, type B

50
Electrical installation
Mains connection
3-phase mains connection 400 V "light duty"

Mains connection
Inverter I55AE230F I55AE315F I55AE330F
I55AE275F I55AE355F
I55AE240F I55AE318F I55AE337F I55AE390F
I55AE311F I55AE375F
I55AE255F I55AE322F I55AE345F
Connection X100
Connection type Screw terminal
Min. cable cross-section mm² 1.5 10 25 35
Min. cable cross-section AWG 16 6 2 1
Max. cable cross-section mm² 6 16 35 50 95 150
Max. cable cross-section AWG 10 6 2 1/0 4/0 -
Stripping length mm 9 11 18 19 22 28
Stripping length inch 0.35 0.43 0.7 0.75 0.87 1.1
Tightening torque Nm 0.5 1.2 3.8 4 10 18
Tightening torque lb-in 4.4 11 34 35 89 160
Required tool 0.6 x 3.5 0.8 x 4.0 0.8 x 5.5 Allen key 4.0 Allen key 6.0 Allen key 8.0

Motor connection
Inverter I55AE230F I55AE315F I55AE330F
I55AE275F I55AE355F
I55AE240F I55AE318F I55AE337F I55AE390F
I55AE311F I55AE375F
I55AE255F I55AE322F I55AE345F
Connection X105
Connection type Screw terminal
Min. cable cross-section mm² 1.5 10 25 35
Min. cable cross-section AWG 16 6 2 1
Max. cable cross-section mm² 6 16 35 50 95 150
Max. cable cross-section AWG -
Stripping length mm 9 11 18 19 22 28
Stripping length inch 0.35 0.43 0.7 0.75 0.87 1.1
Tightening torque Nm 0.5 1.2 3.8 4 10 18
Tightening torque lb-in 4.4 11 34 35 89 160
Required tool 0.6 x 3.5 0.8 x 4.0 0.8 x 5.5 Allen key 4.0 Allen key 6.0 Allen key 8.0

51
Electrical installation
Mains connection
3-phase mains connection 480 V

4.2.6 3-phase mains connection 480 V

4.2.6.1 Connection plan

The connection plan is valid for the inverters I55AExxxF.
L1
L2
L3 3/N/PE AC 480 V
N
PE
F1
…
F3
Q1 3/PE
AC 340 V ... 528 V
45 Hz ... 65 Hz

CANopen Modbus RTU PROFIBUS EtherCAT PROFINET EtherNet/IP Modbus TCP POWERLINK

+
X216

X216

X226

X246
X247

X256
X257

X266
X267

X276
X277

X286
X287
CL

TA
CH

TB
X100

X9
L1
L2
L3

COM
NC
NO
+UG
-UG

COM

IN
OUT

OUT
AC 240 V
3A Application I/O
Standard I/O

+24 V +10 V
10 mA

100 mA
4.4k

4.4k

4.4k
DO 1

DI 1

DI 2

DI 3

DI 4

DI 5

DI 6

DI 7

DI 1
24E

GND

GND
X105

X109

GND

GND
DO 2
AO 1

AO 2
24V
Rb1
Rb2

10V

24V
24E

AI 1

AI 2
SIA

SIB
GS
X1
T1
T2

X3
W

+
U
V

" "
Safety STO

"
0 ... 10 V

1k ... 10k

DC 24 V SELV /PELV
J (+19.2 … +28.8 V) DI3 DI4
J

M S1
+ 3~

Fig. 7: Wiring example

S1 Start/Stop Q1 Mains contactor
Fx Fuses --- Dashed line = options

52
Electrical installation
Mains connection
3-phase mains connection 480 V

4.2.6.2 Fusing and terminal data

Fuse data
Inverter I55AE315F
I55AE318F I55AE330F I55AE337F I55AE345F
I55AE322F
Cable installation in compliance with EN 60204-1
Installation method B2 C
operation without mains choke
Fuse
Characteristics gG/gL or gRL -
Max. rated current A 63 - - -
Circuit breaker
Characteristics B -
Max. rated current A 63 - - -
operation with mains choke
Fuse
Characteristics gG/gL or gRL
Max. rated current A 63 80 100 125
Circuit breaker
Characteristics B
Max. rated current A 63 80 100 125
Earth-leakage circuit breaker
3-phase mains connection ≥ 300 mA, type B

53
Electrical installation
Mains connection
3-phase mains connection 480 V

Fuse data
Inverter I55AE355F
I55AE375F
Cable installation in compliance with EN 60204-1
Installation method F
operation
Fuse
Characteristics -
Max. rated current A -
Circuit breaker
Characteristics -
Max. rated current A -
operation with mains choke
Fuse
Characteristics gR
Max. rated current A 160
Circuit breaker
Characteristics -
Max. rated current A -
Earth-leakage circuit breaker
3-phase mains connection ≥ 300 mA, type B

54
Electrical installation
Mains connection
3-phase mains connection 480 V

Fuse data
Inverter I55AE315F
I55AE318F I55AE330F I55AE337F I55AE345F
I55AE322F
Cable installation in compliance with US National Electrical Code NFPA 70 / Canadian Electrical Code C22.1
operation without mains choke
Fuse
Characteristics all acc. to UL 248 / Class
-
J, T, R
Max. rated current A 70 - - -
Circuit breaker
Characteristics - - - -
Max. rated current A - - - -
operation with mains choke
Fuse
Characteristics all acc. to UL 248 / Class J, T, R
Max. rated current A 70 80 100 125
Circuit breaker
Characteristics - - - -
Max. rated current A - - - -
Earth-leakage circuit breaker
3-phase mains connection ≥ 300 mA, type B

Fuse data
Inverter I55AE355F
I55AE375F
Cable installation in compliance with US National Electrical Code NFPA 70 / Canadian Electrical Code C22.1
operation
Fuse
Characteristics -
Max. rated current A -
Circuit breaker
Characteristics -
Max. rated current A -
operation with mains choke
Fuse
Characteristics acc. to UL 248 / Class J (recommended: HSJ by Mersen)
Max. rated current A 200
Circuit breaker
Characteristics -
Max. rated current A -
Earth-leakage circuit breaker
3-phase mains connection ≥ 300 mA, type B

55
Electrical installation
Mains connection
3-phase mains connection 480 V

PE connection
Inverter I55AE137F
I55AE315F
I55AE155F
I55AE318F
I55AE175F
I55AE322F
I55AE211F
I55AE275F I55AE330F
I55AE215F
I55AE311F I55AE337F
I55AE222F
I55AE345F
I55AE230F
I55AE355F
I55AE240F
I55AE375F
I55AE255F
Connection PE
Connection type PE screw
Min. cable cross-section mm² 1.5 2.5 4
Min. cable cross-section AWG 14 12
Max. cable cross-section mm² 6 16 25
Max. cable cross-section AWG 10 6 2
Stripping length mm 10 11 16
Stripping length inch 0.39 0.43 0.63
Tightening torque Nm 2 3.4 4
Tightening torque lb-in 18 30 35
Required tool TORX TX20 PZ2

56
Electrical installation
Mains connection
3-phase mains connection 480 V

Motor connection
Inverter I55AE137F
I55AE155F
I55AE230F I55AE315F I55AE330F
I55AE175F I55AE275F I55AE355F
I55AE240F I55AE318F I55AE337F
I55AE211F I55AE311F I55AE375F
I55AE255F I55AE322F I55AE345F
I55AE215F
I55AE222F
Connection X105
Connection type pluggable
Screw terminal
screw terminal
Min. cable cross-section mm² 1 1.5 10 25
Min. cable cross-section AWG 18 16 6 2
Max. cable cross-section mm² 2.5 6 16 35 50 95
Max. cable cross-section AWG -
Stripping length mm 8 9 11 18 19 22
Stripping length inch 0.32 0.35 0.43 0.7 0.75 0.87
Tightening torque Nm 0.5 1.2 3.8 4 10
Tightening torque lb-in 4.4 11 34 35 89
Required tool 0.5 x 3.0 0.6 x 3.5 0.8 x 4.0 0.8 x 5.5 Allen key 4.0 Allen key 6.0

57
Electrical installation
Mains connection
3-phase mains connection 480 V "Light Duty"

4.2.7 3-phase mains connection 480 V "Light Duty"

4.2.7.1 Connection plan

See chapter "3-phase mains connection 480 V". ^ 52

58
Electrical installation
Mains connection
3-phase mains connection 480 V "Light Duty"

4.2.7.2 Fusing and terminal data

59
Electrical installation
Mains connection
3-phase mains connection 480 V "Light Duty"

60
Electrical installation
Mains connection
3-phase mains connection 480 V "Light Duty"

61
Electrical installation
Mains connection
3-phase mains connection 480 V "Light Duty"

PE connection
Inverter I55AE315F
I55AE318F
I55AE322F
I55AE230F
I55AE275F I55AE330F
I55AE240F I55AE390F
I55AE311F I55AE337F
I55AE255F
I55AE345F
I55AE355F
I55AE375F
Connection PE
Connection type PE screw PE bolt
Min. cable cross-section mm² 1.5 2.5 4
Min. cable cross-section AWG 14 12
Max. cable cross-section mm² 6 16 25 150
Max. cable cross-section AWG -
Stripping length mm 10 11 16 -
Stripping length inch 0.39 0.43 0.63 -
Tightening torque Nm 2 3.4 4 10
Tightening torque lb-in 18 30 35 89
Required tool TORX TX20 PZ2 Width across flats 13

62
Electrical installation
Control connections

4.3 Control connections

Terminal description Relay output PTC input Control terminals
Connection X9 X109 X3
Connection type pluggable screw terminal pluggable screw terminal pluggable spring terminal
Min. cable cross-section mm² 0.5 0.5 0.5
Min. cable cross-section AWG 22 22 22
Max. cable cross-section mm² 1.5 1.5 1.5
Max. cable cross-section AWG 14 14 16
Stripping length mm 6 6 9
Stripping length inch 0.24 0.24 0.35
Tightening torque Nm 0.2 0.2 -
Tightening torque lb-in 1.8 1.8 -
Required tool 0.4 x 2.5 0.4 x 2.5 0.4 x 2.5

63
Electrical installation
Networks
CANopen

4.4 Networks

4.4.1 CANopen
Typical topologies
Line

A1 A2 A3 An
120 120 120 120
R R R R
X216 CH CL CG X216 CH CL CG X216 CH CL CG X216 CH CL CG

Terminal description CANopen

Connection X216
Connection type pluggable spring terminal
Min. cable cross-section mm² 0.5
Min. cable cross-section AWG 22
Max. cable cross-section mm² 2.5
Max. cable cross-section AWG 12
Stripping length mm 10
Stripping length inch 0.39
Tightening torque Nm -
Tightening torque lb-in -
Required tool 0.4 x 2.5

Basic network settings

Use the DIP switch to set the node address and baud rate and to activate the integrated bus
terminating resistor.

R d c b a 64 32 16 8 4 2 1
O
N

Baud CAN Address

Bus termination Baud rate CAN node address

R d c b a 64 32 16 8 4 2 1
OFF OFF ON OFF ON 20 kbps OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
Inactive OFF OFF ON ON 50 kbps Value from parameter
ON OFF OFF ON OFF 125 kbps Node address - example:
Active OFF OFF OFF ON 250 kbps OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON ON
OFF OFF OFF OFF Value from parameter (500 kbps) Node address = 16 + 4 + 2 + 1 = 23
OFF ON OFF OFF 1 Mbps
All other combinations Value from parameter (500 kbps)

Bold print = default setting

The network must be terminated with a 120 Ω resistor at the physically first and
last node.
Set the "R" switch to ON at these nodes.

64
Electrical installation
Networks
Modbus RTU

4.4.2 Modbus RTU

Typical topologies
Line

A1 A2 A3 An
120 120 120 120

X216 TA TB COM X216 TA TB COM X216 TA TB COM X216 TA TB COM

Terminal description Modbus RTU

Basic network settings

Use the DIP switch to set the node address and baud rate and to activate the integrated bus
terminating resistor.

R c b a 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1
O
N

Mode Address

Bus termination Baud rate Parity Modbus node address

R c b a 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1
OFF n.c. OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
Inactive Automatic detection Automatic detection Value from parameter
ON ON ON Node address - example:
Active Value from parameter Value from parameter OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON ON
Node address = 16 + 4 + 2 + 1 = 23
Node address > 247: value from parameter

Bold print = default setting

The network must be terminated with a 120 Ω resistor at the physically first and
last node.
Set the "R" switch to ON at these nodes.

65
Electrical installation
Networks
Modbus TCP

4.4.3 Modbus TCP

Typical topologies
Line Tree

M M

R
S1 S2 Sn SW1 SW2 SWn

M Master SW Switch
S Slave

Basic network settings

The rotary encoder switch allows you to set the last byteof the IP address.

x16 x1

Setting Value of last byte Resulting IP address

0x00 Value from parameter Value from parameter
0x01 ... 0xFE Switch position 192.168.124.<switch position>
0xFF Default setting 192.168.124.16

66
Electrical installation
Networks
PROFIBUS

4.4.4 PROFIBUS
Typical topologies
Line with repeater

M
R
R X1 R

R
R
S11 S12 S1n S21 S2n
1 2

M Master X Repeater
S Slave R Activated bus terminating resistor

Terminal description PROFIBUS

Connection X226
Connection type Sub-D 9p
Min. cable cross-section mm² -
Min. cable cross-section AWG -
Max. cable cross-section mm² -
Max. cable cross-section AWG -
Stripping length mm -
Stripping length inch -
Tightening torque Nm -
Tightening torque lb-in -
Required tool -

Basic network settings

Use the DIP switch to set the station address.
The baud rate is detected automatically.

64 32 16 8 4 2 1
O
N

PROFIBUS Address

PROFIBUS station address

64 32 16 8 4 2 1
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
Value from parameter
Station address - example:
OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON ON
Station address = 16 + 4 + 2 + 1 = 23
Do not set station address = 126 and station address = 127. These station addresses are invalid.

Bold print = default setting

The network must be terminated with a resistor at the physically first and last
node.
Activate the bus terminating resistor at these nodes in the bus connection plug.

67
Electrical installation
Networks
EtherNet/IP

4.4.5 EtherCAT
Typical topologies
Line

IN OUT IN OUT IN R
SD1 SD2 SDn

M Master
SD Slave Device

Basic network settings

The rotary encoder switch allows you to set an EtherCAT identifier.

x16 x1

Setting Identifier
0x00 Value from parameter
0x01 ... 0xFF Switch position

4.4.6 EtherNet/IP
Typical topologies
Line Tree

S S

R
A1 A2 An SW1 SW2 SWn

Ring

An DLR A1

A3 A2

S Scanner SW Switch
A Adapter

Basic network settings

The rotary encoder switch allows you to set the last byteof the IP address.

x16 x1

Setting Value of last byte Resulting IP address

0x00 Value from parameter Value from parameter
0x01 ... 0xFE Switch position 192.168.124.<switch position>
0xFF Default setting 192.168.124.16

68
Electrical installation
Networks
PROFINET

4.4.7 PROFINET
Typical topologies
Line Tree

C C

R
D1 D2 Dn SW1 SW2 SWn

Ring

Dn R D1

D3 D2

C IO controller SW Switch SCALANCE (MRP capable)

D IO device R Redundant domain

The rotary encoder switch has no function.

69
Electrical installation
Connection of the safety module

4.4.8 POWERLINK
Typical topologies
Line

CN11 CN12 CN1n

CN21 CN22 CN2n

Mrated Managing Node H Hub

CN Controlled Node

Basic network settings

The rotary encoder switch allows you to set the node address (last byte of the IP address).

x16 x1

Setting Node address Resulting IP address

0x00 Value from parameter 192.168.100.<parameter value>
0x01 ... 0xEF Switch position 192.168.100.<switch position>

4.5 Connection of the safety module

DANGER!
Automatic restart if the request of the safety function is deactivated.
Possible consequences: Death or severe injuries
▶ You must provide external measures according to EN ISO 13849−1 which ensure that the
drive only restarts after a confirmation.

Terminal description Safety STO

Connection X1
Connection type pluggable spring terminal
Min. cable cross-section mm² 0.5
Min. cable cross-section AWG 22
Max. cable cross-section mm² 1.5
Max. cable cross-section AWG 16
Stripping length mm 9
Stripping length inch 0.35
Tightening torque Nm -
Tightening torque lb-in -
Required tool 0.4 x 2.5

70
Commissioning
Important notes

5 Commissioning
5.1 Important notes

WARNING!
Incorrect wiring can cause unexpected states during the commissioning phase.
Possible consequence: death, severe injuries or damage to property
Check the following before switching on the mains voltage:
▶ Is the wiring complete and correct?
▶ Are there no short circuits and earth faults?
▶ Is the motor circuit configuration (star/delta) adapted to the output voltage of the inverter?
▶ Is the motor connected in-phase (direction of rotation)?
▶ Does the "emergency stop" function of the entire plant operate correctly?

WARNING!
Incorrect settings during commissioning may cause unexpected and dangerous motor and sys-
tem movements.
Possible consequence: death, severe injuries or damage to property
▶ Clear hazardous area.
▶ Observe safety instructions and safety clearances.

71
Commissioning
Operating interfaces
Keypad

5.2 Operating interfaces

Commissioning the inverter requires an operator-process interface.

5.2.1 Keypad
The keypad is an easy means for the local operation, parameterisation, and diagnostics of the
inverter.

• The keypad is simply connected to the diagnostic interface on the front of the inverter.
• The keypad can also be connected and removed during operation.

Detailed information on the keypad can be found in the appendix:

4Operate and parameterise the inverter with keypad ^ 631

72
Commissioning
Operating interfaces
Engineering tool »EASY Starter«

5.2.2 Engineering tool »EASY Starter«

The »EASY Starter« is a PC software that is especially designed for the commissioning and
maintenance of the inverter.

The »EASY Starter« PC software can be found on the Internet:

http://www.lenze.com à Download à Software Downloads

Sample screenshot:

73
Commissioning
Operating interfaces
Engineering tool »EASY Starter«

5.2.2.1 Generate a connection between inverter and »EASY Starter«

For commissioning the inverter with the »EASY Starter«, a communication link with the inver-
ter is required. This can be established in a wired or wireless manner via WLAN.
Preconditions
• For the wired communication with the inverter, the USB module and a USB 2.0 cable (A
plug on Micro-B plug) are required.

• For the wireless communication with the inverter, the WLAN module is required. More-
over, the PC on which the »EASY Starter« is installed must be wireless-enabled.

74
Commissioning
Operating interfaces
Engineering tool »EASY Starter«

Details
The following instructions describe the connection establishment via the USB module.
• Parameterising without motor operation does not require a mains voltage: If you connect
the inverter directly to the PC without a hub, The USB interface of the PC is sufficient for
the voltage supply.
• Instructions for the connection establishment via the WLAN module can be found in the
chapter "Wireless LAN (WLAN)". ^ 426

How to establish a communication to the inverter via USB:

Preconditions for commissioning:
• The functional test described in the mounting and switch-on instructions has been com-
pleted successfully (without any errors or faults).
• The inverter is ready for operation (mains voltage is switched on).
Accessories required for commissioning:
• USB module
• USB 2.0 cable (A-plug on micro B-plug)
• PC with installed »EASY Starter« software
1. Plug the USB module onto the front of the inverter (interface X16).
2. Use a USB cable to connect the inverter to the PC on which »EASY Starter« is installed:
a) Plug the micro B plug of the USB cable into the socket of the USB module.
b) Plug the other end into a free USB type A-socket of the PC.
3. Start »EASY Starter«.
The "Add devices" dialog is shown.
4. Select the "USB - USB via adapter i5MADU0000000S" connection:

5. Click the Insert button.

»EASY Starter« searches for connected devices via the communication path selected. When
the connection has been established successfully, the inverter is displayed in the device list
of »EASY Starter«. The inverter parameters can now be accessed via the tabs of »EASY
Starter«.

75
Commissioning
Parameter setting

5.3 Parameter setting

As a part of a machine with a speed-variable drive system, the inverter must be adapted to its
drive task. The adaptation process of the inverter is carried out by changing parameters.
Optionally these parameters can be accessed by means of the keypad or »EASY Starter«. If the
inverter is provided with a network option, access can also be effected by a higher-level Con-
troller via the corresponding network.

Certain device commands or settings which might cause a critical state of the
drive behaviour can only be carried our when the inverter is inhibited.

76
Commissioning
Parameter setting
General notes on parameters

5.3.1 General notes on parameters

Each parameter features a 16-bit index as address. Under this address, the parameter is
stored in the object directory of the inverter.
• Parameters that belong together functionally are combined in a data set. These parame-
ters are additionally provided with an 8-bit subindex.
• The colon is used as a separator between the index and subindex Example: "0x2540:001"
• There are parameters the setting of which can be changed, and (diagnostic) parameters
which can only be read.
Parameterisation using the keypad
• All parameters which can be accessed by means of the keypad are provided with a "Display
code", the first digit of the display code specifying the group in which the parameter can
be found on the keypad.
• In the documentation, the display code — if available — is specified in brackets behind the
address. Example: "0x2915 (P210.00)".
4Keypad parameterisation mode ^ 635
Structure of the parameter descriptions in this documentation
• The parameter descriptions in this documentation are structured in table form.
• The representation distinguishes parameters with a setting range, text, selection list, and
bit-coded display.
• The default setting of parameters with a write access feature is shown in bold.
• The display code as well as the short keypad designation of the parameter which is limited
to 16 characters, are — if available — shown in brackets.
Example: parameters with a setting range
Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info
Index:Subindex Parameter designation Explanations & notes with regard to the parameter.
(display code) (abbreviated keypad designation)
Minimum value ... [default setting] ... maximum value
• Optional information with regard to the parameter.

Example: parameters with a selection list

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info
Index:Subindex Parameter designation Explanations & notes with regard to the parameter.
(display code) (abbreviated keypad designation) Note: The corresponding selection number (here 0, 1, or 2) must be set.
• Optional information with regard to the parameter. Other values are not permissible.
0 Designation of selection 0 Optionally: Explanations & notes with regard to the corresponding selec-
1 Designation of selection 1 tion.
The default selection is shown in bold.
2 Designation of selection 2

Example: parameters with a bit-coded display

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info
Index:Subindex Parameter designation Explanations & notes with regard to the parameter.
(display code) (abbreviated keypad designation)
• Optional information with regard to the parameter.
Bit 0 Designation of bit 0 Optionally: Explanations & notes with regard to the corresponding bit.
Bit 1 Designation of bit 1
Bit 2 Designation of bit 2
... ...
Bit 15 Designation of bit 15

Parameter overview lists in this documentation

• Keypad parameter list: for the parameterisation using the keypad, contains a list of all
parameters which can also be accessed by means of the keypad. ^ 85
• Parameter attribute list: contains a list of all inverter parameters. This list in particular
includes some information that is relevant for the reading and writing of parameters via
the network. ^ 659

77
Commissioning
Parameter setting
Basic inverter settings

5.3.2 Basic inverter settings

Check the following basic settings of the inverter and adapt them, if required.
Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info
0x2540:001 Mains settings: Rated mains voltage Selection of the mains voltage for actuating the inverter.
(P208.01) (Mains settings: Mains voltage)
• Setting can only be changed if the inverter is inhibi-
ted.
0 230 Veff
1 400 Veff
2 480 Veff
3 120 Veff
10 230 Veff/reduced LU level
0x2838:001 Start/stop configuration: Start method Behaviour after start command.
(P203.01) (Start/stop confg: Start method)
• Setting can only be changed if the inverter is inhibi-
ted.
0 Normal After start command, the standard ramps are active.
• Acceleration time 1 can be set in 0x2917 (P220.00).
• Deceleration time 1 can be set in 0x2918 (P221.00).
1 DC braking After start command, the "DC braking" function is active for the time set
in 0x2B84:002 (P704.02).
4DC braking ^ 437
2 Flying restart circuit After the start command, the flying restart circuit is active.
The flying restart function makes it possible to restart a coasting motor
during operation without speed feedback. Synchronicity between the
inverter and motor is coordinated so that the transition to the rotating
motor is effected without jerk at the time of connection.
4Flying restart circuit ^ 481
3 Start with magnetisation
0x2838:002 Start/stop configuration: Start at power-up Starting performance after switching on the mains voltage.
(P203.02) (Start/stop confg: Start at powerup)
0 Off No automatic start after switching on mains voltage. In addition to the
inverter enable, a renewed start command is always required to start the
motor.
1 On Automatic start of the motor after switching on the mains voltage if the
inverter is enabled and a start command exists.
0x2838:003 Start/stop configuration: Stop method Behaviour after the "Stop" command.
(P203.03) (Start/stop confg: Stop method)
0 Coasting The motor becomes torqueless (coasts down to standstill).
1 Standard ramp The motor is brought to a standstill with deceleration time 1 (or deceler-
ation time 2, if activated).
• Deceleration time 1 can be set in 0x2918 (P221.00).
• Deceleration time 2 can be set in 0x291A (P223.00).
4Frequency limits and ramp times ^ 156
2 Quick stop ramp The motor is brought to a standstill with the deceleration time set for
the "Quick stop" function.
• Deceleration time for quick stop can be set in 0x291C (P225.00).
• The "quick stop" function can also be activated manually, for instance
via a digital input. 4Quick stop ^ 159
0x283A Limitation of rotation Optional restriction of the rotating direction.
(P304.00) (Limit. rotation)
0 Only clockwise (CW) The motor can only be rotated clockwise (CW). The transfer of negative
frequency and PID setpoints to the motor control is prevented.
• This function takes effect after the "Reverse rotational direction" func-
tion (0x2631:013 (P400.13)).
• Since this function only prevents negative setpoints, counter-clock-
wise rotation (CCW) is possible if the motor has been wired for this
rotating direction.
1 Both rotational directions Both directions of motor rotation are enabled.

78
Commissioning
Parameter setting
Basic inverter settings

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x2860:001 Frequency control: Default setpoint source Selection of the standard setpoint source for operating mode "MS:
(P201.01) (Stnd. setpoints: Freq. setp. src.) Velocity mode".
• The selected standard setpoint source is always active in the operat-
ing mode 0x6060 (P301.00) = "MS: Velocity mode [-2]" when no set-
point change-over to another setpoint source via corresponding trig-
gers/functions is active.
4Setpoint change-over ^ 546
1 Keypad The setpoint is specified locally by the keypad.
• Default setting: 0x2601:001 (P202.01)
• Use the and navigation keys to change the keypad setpoint
(also during running operation).
2 Analog input 1 The setpoint is defined as analog signal via the analog input 1.
4Analog input 1 ^ 597
3 Analog input 2 The setpoint is defined as analog signal via the analog input 2.
4Analog input 2 ^ 601
4 HTL input (from version 04.00) The digital inputs DI3 and DI4 can be configured as HTL input to use an
HTL encoder as setpoint encoder or define the setpoint as a reference
frequency ("pulse train").
4HTL input setpoint source ^ 565
5 Network The setpoint is defined as process data object via the network.
4Configuring the network ^ 226
11 Frequency preset 1 For the setpoint selection, preset values can be parameterised and selec-
12 Frequency preset 2 ted.
4Setpoint source of preset setpoints ^ 554
13 Frequency preset 3
14 Frequency preset 4
15 Frequency preset 5
16 Frequency preset 6
17 Frequency preset 7
18 Frequency preset 8
19 Frequency preset 9
20 Frequency preset 10
21 Frequency preset 11
22 Frequency preset 12
23 Frequency preset 13
24 Frequency preset 14
25 Frequency preset 15
31 Segment preset 1 (from version 03.00) For the setpoint selection, the segment presets parameterised for the
32 Segment preset 2 (from version 03.00) "sequencer" function can be selected as well.
4Sequencer ^ 504
33 Segment preset 3 (from version 03.00)
34 Segment preset 4 (from version 03.00)
35 Segment preset 5 (from version 03.00)
36 Segment preset 6 (from version 03.00)
37 Segment preset 7 (from version 03.00)
38 Segment preset 8 (from version 03.00)
50 Motor potentiometer The setpoint is generated by the "motor potentiometer" function. This
function can be used as an alternative setpoint control which is control-
led via two signals: "MOP setpoint up" and "MOP setpoint down".
4Motor potentiometer setpoint source (MOP) ^ 559
201 Internal value (from version 05.00) Internal values of the manufacturer.
202 Internal value (from version 05.00)
203 Internal value (from version 05.00)
204 Internal value (from version 05.00)
205 Internal value (from version 05.00)
206 Internal value (from version 05.00)

79
Commissioning
Parameter setting
Basic inverter settings

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x2911:001 Frequency setpoint presets: Preset 1 Parameterisable frequency setpoints (presets) for operating mode "MS:
(P450.01) (Freq. presets: Freq. preset 1) Velocity mode".
0.0 ... [20.0] ... 599.0 Hz
0x2911:002 Frequency setpoint presets: Preset 2
(P450.02) (Freq. presets: Freq. preset 2)
0.0 ... [40.0] ... 599.0 Hz
0x2911:003 Frequency setpoint presets: Preset 3
(P450.03) (Freq. presets: Freq. preset 3)
Device for 50-Hz mains: 0.0 ... [50.0] ... 599.0 Hz
Device for 60-Hz mains: 0.0 ... [60.0] ... 599.0 Hz
0x2915 Minimum frequency Lower limit value for all frequency setpoints.
(P210.00) (Min. frequency)
0.0 ... [0.0] ... 599.0 Hz
0x2916 Maximum frequency Upper limit value for all frequency setpoints.
(P211.00) (Max. frequency)
Device for 50-Hz mains: 0.0 ... [50.0] ... 599.0 Hz
Device for 60-Hz mains: 0.0 ... [60.0] ... 599.0 Hz
0x2917 Acceleration time 1 Acceleration time 1 for the operating mode "MS: Velocity mode".
(P220.00) (Accelerat.time 1) • The acceleration time set refers to the acceleration from standstill to
0.0 ... [5.0] ... 3600.0 s the maximum frequency set. In the case of a lower setpoint selection,
the actual acceleration time is reduced accordingly.
• Setting is not effective in the operating mode 0x6060 (P301.00) =
"CiA: Velocity mode [2]". 4Device profile CiA 402 ^ 469
0x2918 Deceleration time 1 Deceleration time 1 for the operating mode "MS: Velocity mode".
(P221.00) (Decelerat.time 1) • The deceleration time set refers to the deceleration from the maxi-
0.0 ... [5.0] ... 3600.0 s mum frequency set to standstill. In the case of a lower actual fre-
quency, the actual deceleration time is reduced accordingly.
• Setting is not effective in the operating mode 0x6060 (P301.00) =
"CiA: Velocity mode [2]". 4Device profile CiA 402 ^ 469
0x291C Quick stop deceleration time Quick stop deceleration time for the operating mode "MS: Velocity
(P225.00) (QSP dec. time) mode".
0.0 ... [1.0] ... 3600.0 s • If the "Quick stop" function is activated, the motor is brought to a
standstill within the deceleration time set here.
• The deceleration time set refers to the deceleration from the maxi-
mum frequency set to standstill. In the case of a lower actual fre-
quency, the actual deceleration time is reduced accordingly.
• Setting is not effective in the operating mode 0x6060 (P301.00) =
"CiA: Velocity mode [2]". 4Device profile CiA 402 ^ 469

All possible basic settings are described in the "Basic setting" chapter. ^ 143

80
Commissioning
Parameter setting
Basic motor settings

5.3.3 Basic motor settings

Check the following default settings for the motor and motor control and adapt them, if
required.
Drive behaviour by default
By default, the V/f characteristic control with a linear characteristic is preset as motor control
for asynchronous motors. The V/f characteristic control is a motor control for conventional
frequency inverter applications. It is based on a simple and robust control mode for the opera-
tion of asynchronous motors with a linear or square-law load torque characteristic (e.g. fan).
Because of the minimal parameterisation effort, such applications can be commissioned easily
and quickly.
The default settings of the parameters ensure that the inverter is ready for operation imme-
diately and the motor works adequately without further parameterisation if an inverter and
an asynchronous motor* Hz asynchronous machine with matching performances are
assigned to each other.
* Depending on the device/mains frequency either 50-Hz asynchronous motor or 60-Hz asyn-
chronous motor.
Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info
0x2B01:001 V/f shape data: Base voltage Base voltage and base frequency define the V/f ratio and thus the gradi-
(P303.01) (V/f shape data: Base voltage) ent of the V/f characteristic.
0 ... [230]* ... 5000 V • The V/f base voltage is usually set to the rated motor voltage
* Default setting depending on the size. 0x2C01:007 (P320.07).
0x2B01:002 V/f shape data: Base frequency • The V/f base frequency is usually set to the rated motor frequency
(P303.02) (V/f shape data: Base frequency) 0x2C01:005 (P320.05).
Device for 50-Hz mains: 0 ... [50]* ... 1500 Hz
Device for 60-Hz mains: 0 ... [60]* ... 1500 Hz
* Default setting depending on the size.
0x2C00 Motor control mode Selection of the motor control type.
(P300.00) (Motor ctrl mode)
• Setting can only be changed if the inverter is inhibi-
ted.
2 Servo control (SC ASM) (from version 02.00) This control mode is used for servo control of an asynchronous motor.
4Servo control for asynchronous motors (SC-ASM) ^ 176
3 Sensorless control (SL PSM) (from This control type is used for the sensorless control of a synchronous
version 02.00) motor.
• Control mode is possible up to a rated power of maximally 22 kW.
4Sensorless control for synchronous motors (SL-PSM) ^ 178
4 Sensorless vector control (SLVC) This control type is used for sensorless vector control of an asynchro-
nous motor.
4Sensorless vector control (SLVC) ^ 173
6 V/f characteristic control (VFC open loop) This control mode is used for the speed control of an asynchronous
motor via a V/f characteristic and is the simplest control mode.
4V/f characteristic control (VFC) ^ 166
7 V/f characteristic control (VFC closed loop) The control mode is used for speed control of an asynchronous motor
(from version 04.00) via a V/f characteristic with speed feedback.
A motor encoder must be connected to the inverter and set as feedback
system for the motor control.
4V/f characteristic control (VFC closed loop) ^ 172
0x2C01:010 Motor parameters: Motor name The name (e.g. " 1") can be freely selected by the user.
If the motor in the engineering tool has been selected from the "motor
catalog", the respective motor name is automatically entered here
(example: "MDSKA080-22, 70").
0x6075 Motor rated current The rated motor current to be set here serves as a reference value for
(P323.00) (Motor current) different parameters with a setting/display of a current value in percent.
0.001 ... [1.700]* ... 500.000 A Example:
* Default setting depending on the size.
• Motor rated current = 1.7 A
• Setting can only be changed if the inverter is inhibi- • Max current 0x6073 (P324.00) = 200 % Motor rated current = 3.4 A
ted.

All possible settings with regard to the motor and motor control are described in the "Motor
control" chapter. ^ 163

81
Commissioning
Parameter setting
Function assignment of the inputs and outputs

5.3.4 Function assignment of the inputs and outputs

The inverter control can be adapted individually to the respective application. This is basically
effected by assigning digital control sources ("triggers") to functions of the inverter.
By default, the inverter can be controlled via the I/O terminals as follows:
Input signals Mains voltage
60 Hz t
50 Hz
40 Hz
Frequency setpoint selection 30 Hz
via analog input 1 20 Hz
10 Hz
0 Hz t
Fault status
Trigger Function t
Digital input 1 [11] Run
t
Digital input 2 [12] Reset error
t
Digital input 3 [13] Invert rotation
t
Digital input 4 [14] Activate preset (bit 0)
t
Digital input 5 [15] Activate preset (bit 1)
t
Preset 1 Presets 1 ... 3
Output signals 60 Hz
50 Hz
40 Hz
30 Hz
20 Hz
10 Hz
Output frequency
0 Hz t
0x2DDD (P100.00) -10 Hz
-20 Hz
-30 Hz
-40 Hz
-50 Hz
Status signals Output -60 Hz
Ready for operat. [51] Relay
t
Release brake [115] Digital output 1 Braking function is switched off in default setting of 0x2820:001.
t
Error active [56] Digital output 2 Digital output 2 only available with Application I/O.
t

Parameter Name Default setting

Control functions
① 0x2631:002 (P400.02) Run Digital input 1 [11]
② 0x2631:004 (P400.04) Reset fault Digital input 2 [12]
③ 0x2631:013 (P400.13) Reverse rotational direction Digital input 3 [13]
④ 0x2631:018 (P400.18) Activate preset (bit 0) Digital input 4 [14]
⑤ 0x2631:019 (P400.19) Activate preset (bit 1) Digital input 5 [15]
Configuration of digital outputs
⑥ 0x2634:001 (P420.01) Relay Ready for operation [51]
⑦ 0x2634:002 (P420.02) Digital output 1 Release holding brake [115]
⑧ 0x2634:003 (P420.03) Digital output 2 (only for application I/O) Error active [56]
Settings for the frequency setpoint
⑨ 0x2860:001 (P201.01) Frequency control: Default setpoint source Analog input 1 [2]
⑩ 0x2911:001 (P450.01) Frequency setpoint presets: Preset 1 20 Hz
⑪ 0x2911:002 (P450.02) Frequency setpoint presets: Preset 2 40 Hz
⑫ 0x2911:003 (P450.03) Frequency setpoint presets: Preset 3 50 Hz
⑬ 0x2917 (P220.00) Acceleration time 1 5.0 s
⑭ 0x2918 (P221.00) Deceleration time 1 5.0 s

82
Commissioning
Parameter setting
Function assignment of the inputs and outputs

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x2631:002 Function list: Run Assignment of a trigger to the "Run" function.
(P400.02) (Function list: Run)
• Setting can only be changed if the inverter is inhibi- Function 1: Start / stop motor (default setting)
ted. Function 1 is active if no further start commands (start forward/start
• For further possible settings, see parameter reverse) have been connected to triggers, no keypad control is active and
0x2631:001 (P400.01). ^ 532 no network control is active.
11 Digital input 1 Trigger = TRUE: Let motor rotate forward (CW).
Trigger = FALSE: Stop motor.
Notes to function 1:
• If "Enable inverter" 0x2631:001 (P400.01) = "Constant TRUE [1]", only
a digital input is permissible as trigger for this function in order that
the motor can be stopped again any time.
Exception: If the "Safe torque off (STO)" safety function is available,
both functions "Enable inverter" and "Run" can be set to "Constant
TRUE [1]". The inverter is then controlled via the STO signal unless no
other start commands (start-forward/start-backward) have been con-
nected to triggers.
• The stop method can be selected in 0x2838:003 (P203.03).
• The function also serves to realise an automatic start after switch-on.
4Starting performance ^ 153

Function 2: Start enable/stop motor

Function 2 is active if further start commands have been connected to
triggers, keypad control is active or network control is active.
Trigger = TRUE: Start commands of the active control source are ena-
bled.
Trigger = FALSE: Stop motor.
Notes to function 2:
• If no separate start enable is required for the application, the trigger
"Constant TRUE [1]" must be set.
• The stop method can be selected in 0x2838:003 (P203.03).
0x2631:004 Function list: Reset fault Assignment of a trigger for the "Reset fault" function.
(P400.04) (Function list: Reset fault) Trigger = FALSE↗TRUE (edge): Active error is reset (acknowledged) if the
• For further possible settings, see parameter error condition is not active anymore and the error is resettable.
0x2631:001 (P400.01). ^ 532 Trigger = FALSE: no action.
12 Digital input 2
0x2631:013 Function list: Reverse rotational direction Assignment of a trigger for the "Reverse rotational direction" function.
(P400.13) (Function list: Reverse rot.dir.) Trigger = TRUE: the setpoint specified is inverted (i. e. the sign is inver-
• Setting can only be changed if the inverter is inhibited).
ted. Trigger = FALSE: no action / deactivate function again.
• For further possible settings, see parameter
0x2631:001 (P400.01). ^ 532
13 Digital input 3
0x2631:018 Function list: Activate preset (bit 0) Assignment of a trigger for the "Activate preset (bit 0)" function.
(P400.18) (Function list: Setp: Preset b0) Selection bit with the valency 20 for the bit-coded selection and activa-
• For further possible settings, see parameter tion of a parameterised setpoint (preset value).
0x2631:001 (P400.01). ^ 532 Trigger = FALSE: selection bit = "0".
14 Digital input 4 Trigger = TRUE: selection bit = "1".
0x2631:019 Function list: Activate preset (bit 1) Assignment of a trigger for the "Activate preset (bit 1)" function.
(P400.19) (Function list: Setp: Preset b1) Selection bit with the valency 21 for the bit-coded selection and activa-
• For further possible settings, see parameter tion of a parameterised setpoint (preset value).
0x2631:001 (P400.01). ^ 532 Trigger = FALSE: selection bit = "0".
15 Digital input 5 Trigger = TRUE: selection bit = "1".
0x2634:001 Digital outputs function: Relay Assignment of a trigger to the relay.
(P420.01) (Dig.out.function: Relay function) Trigger = FALSE: X9/NO-COM open and NC-COM closed.
• For further possible settings, see parameter Trigger = TRUE: X9/NO-COM closed and NC-COM open.
0x2634:001 (P420.01). ^ 603 Notes:
• An inversion set in 0x2635:001 (P421.01)is taken into consideration
here.
51 Ready for operation TRUE if inverter is ready for operation (no error active, no STO active and
DC-bus voltage ok). Otherwise FALSE.

83
Commissioning
Parameter setting
Function assignment of the inputs and outputs

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x2634:002 Digital outputs function: Digital output 1 Assignment of a trigger to digital output 1.
(P420.02) (Dig.out.function: DO1 function) Trigger = FALSE: X3/DO1 set to LOW level.
• For further possible settings, see parameter Trigger = TRUE: X3/DO1 set to HIGH level.
0x2634:001 (P420.01). ^ 603 Notes:
115 Release holding brake • An inversion set in 0x2635:002 (P421.02) is taken into consideration
here.
100 Sequencer controlled (from version 03.00) The control is executed via the sequencer (according to the configura-
tion of the digital outputs for the current segment).
4Segment configuration ^ 506
0x2634:003 Digital outputs function: Digital output 2 Assignment of a trigger to digital output 2.
(P420.03) (Dig.out.function: DO2 function) Trigger = FALSE: X3/DO2 set to LOW level.
• Only available for application I/O. Trigger = TRUE: X3/DO2 set to HIGH level.
• For further possible settings, see parameter Notes:
0x2634:001 (P420.01). ^ 603
• An inversion set in 0x2635:003 (P421.03) is taken into consideration
56 Error active here.
100 Sequencer controlled (from version 03.00) The control is executed via the sequencer (according to the configura-
tion of the digital outputs for the current segment).
4Segment configuration ^ 506

All functional possible settings for controlling the inverter are described in the "Flexible I/O
configuration" chapter. ^ 525

84
Commissioning
Keypad parameter list

5.4 Keypad parameter list

For commissioning or diagnostics using the keypad, all parameters of the inverter that can
also be accessed by means of the keypad are listed in the following "Keypad parameter list".
• The keypad parameter list is sorted in ascending order in compliance with the "display
code" (Pxxx).
• In order to provide for quick access, all parameters of the inverter are divided into differ-
ent groups according to their function.
• Group 0 contains the configurable "Favorites". In the default setting these are the most
common parameters for the solution of typical applications. 4Favorites ^ 459
• Based on the hundreds digit of the display code (Pxxx) you can quickly see in which group
the parameter is to be found on the keypad:
Parameter Group - name Description
P1xx Group 1 - Diagnostics Diagnostic/display parameters for displaying device-internal process factors, cur-
rent actual values, and status messages.
4Diagnostics parameter ^ 109
P2xx Group 2 - Basic setting Setting of the mains voltage, selection of the control and setpoint source, starting
and stopping performance, frequency limits and ramp times.
4Basic setting ^ 143
P3xx Group 3 - Motor control Configuration of the motor and motor control
4Motor control ^ 163
P4xx Group 4 - I/O setting Function assignment and configuration of the inputs and outputs
4Flexible I/O configuration ^ 525
P5xx Group 5 - Network setting Configuration of the network (if available)
4Configuring the network ^ 226
P6xx Group 6 - Process controller Configuration of the process controller
4Configuring the process controller ^ 407
P7xx Group 7 - Additional functions Parameterisable additional functions
4Additional functions ^ 417
P8xx Group 8 - Sequencer The "sequencer" function serves to define a programmed sequence of speed set-
points, PID setpoints or torque setpoints for the motor control. Switching to the
next setpoint can be executed in a time-based or event-based manner.
4Sequencer ^ 504

A complete overview of all parameter indexes can be found in the annex in the
Parameter attribute list. ^ 659

Frequently used abbreviations in the short keypad designations of the parameters:

Abbreviation Meaning
AI Analog input
AO Analog output
B0, B1, ... Bit 0, bit 1, ...
CU Control unit
DI Digital input
DO Digital output
LU Undervoltage
MOP Motor potentiometer
NET Network
OU overvoltage
PID Process controller
PU Power unit
QSP Quick stop
Setp Setpoint
WD Watchdog

85
Commissioning
Keypad parameter list

How to read the keypad parameter list:

Column Meaning
Display code Parameter number on the keypad.
Format: Number.Subindex
Short designation Short keypad designation limited to 16 characters.
Default setting Default setting of the parameter.
Setting range Possible setting range for the parameter.
Format: minimum value ... maximum value [unit]
Address Address of the parameter in the object directory.
Format: Index:Subindex
Category Functional assignment of the parameter, for example "motor control" or "CANopen".

Keypad parameter list (short overview of all parameters with display code)
Display code Short designation Default setting Setting range Address Category
P100.00 Output frequency x.x Hz - (Read only) 0x2DDD general
P101.00 Scaled act value x Units - (Read only) 0x400D general
P102.00 Freq. setpoint x.x Hz - (Read only) 0x2B0E general
P103.00 Current actual x.x % - (Read only) 0x6078 general
P104.00 Motor current x.x A - (Read only) 0x2D88 general
P105.00 DC-bus voltage xV - (Read only) 0x2D87 general
P106.00 Motor voltage x VAC - (Read only) 0x2D89 general
P107.00 Torque actual x.x % - (Read only) 0x6077 general
P108.xx Output power
└ P108.01 Effective power x.xxx kW - (Read only) 0x2DA2:001 general
└ P108.02 Apparent power x.xxx kVA - (Read only) 0x2DA2:002 general
P109.xx Output energy
└ P109.01 Motor x.xx kWh - (Read only) 0x2DA3:001 general
└ P109.02 Generator x.xx kWh - (Read only) 0x2DA3:002 general
P110.xx AI1 diagnostics
└ P110.01 AI1 terminal % x.x % - (Read only) 0x2DA4:001 general
└ P110.02 AI1 scaled freq. x.x Hz - (Read only) 0x2DA4:002 general
└ P110.03 AI1 scaled PID x.xx PID unit - (Read only) 0x2DA4:003 general
└ P110.04 AI1 scaled torq. x.x % - (Read only) 0x2DA4:004 general
└ P110.16 AI1 status - - (Read only) 0x2DA4:016 general
P111.xx AI2 diagnostics
└ P111.01 AI2 terminal % x.x % - (Read only) 0x2DA5:001 general
└ P111.02 AI2 scaled freq. x.x Hz - (Read only) 0x2DA5:002 general
└ P111.03 AI2 scaled PID x.xx PID unit - (Read only) 0x2DA5:003 general
└ P111.04 AI2 scaled torq. x.x % - (Read only) 0x2DA5:004 general
└ P111.16 AI2 status - - (Read only) 0x2DA5:016 general
P112.xx AO1 diagnostics
└ P112.01 AO1 Voltage x.xx V - (Read only) 0x2DAA:001 general
└ P112.02 AO1 Current x.xx mA - (Read only) 0x2DAA:002 general
P113.xx AO2 diagnostics
└ P113.01 AO2 Current x.xx V - (Read only) 0x2DAB:001 Appl. I/O
└ P113.02 AO2 Voltage x.xx mA - (Read only) 0x2DAB:002 Appl. I/O
P114.xx DO actual freq.
└ P114.01 Digital output 1 x.x Hz - (Read only) 0x2646:001 general
└ P114.02 Digital output 2 x.x Hz - (Read only) 0x2646:002 general
P115.00 Actual sw. freq. - - (Read only) 0x293A general
P115.xx HTL inp. diag.
└ P115.01 Input frequency x.x Hz - (Read only) 0x2642:001 general
└ P115.02 Freq. setpoint x.x Hz - (Read only) 0x2642:002 general
└ P115.03 PID setpoint x.xx PID unit - (Read only) 0x2642:003 general
└ P115.04 Torque setpoint x.x % - (Read only) 0x2642:004 general
P117.xx Heatsink temp.
* Default setting depending on the size. Firmware version 05.00.00.00

86
Commissioning
Keypad parameter list

Display code Short designation Default setting Setting range Address Category
└ P117.01 Heatsink temp. x.x °C - (Read only) 0x2D84:001 general
P118.00 Digital inputs - - (Read only) 0x60FD general
P119.00 Keypad status - - (Read only) 0x2DAC general
P120.00 Int. HW states - - (Read only) 0x2DAD general
P121.xx
└ P121.01 PID setpoint x.xx PID unit - (Read only) 0x401F:001 general
└ P121.02 PID process var. x.xx PID unit - (Read only) 0x401F:002 general
└ P121.03 PID status - - (Read only) 0x401F:003 general
P123.00 Mot. i2t utilis. x% - (Read only) 0x2D4F general
P125.xx Inverter diag.
└ P125.01 Active control - - (Read only) 0x282B:001 general
└ P125.02 Active setpoint - - (Read only) 0x282B:002 general
└ P125.03 Keypad LCD stat. - - (Read only) 0x282B:003 general
└ P125.04 Drive mode - - (Read only) 0x282B:004 general
└ P125.05 Netw. contr.reg. - - (Read only) 0x282B:005 general
└ P125.06 Netw. setp.reg. - - (Read only) 0x282B:006 general
P126.xx Status words
└ P126.01 Cause of disable - - (Read only) 0x282A:001 general
└ P126.02 Cause of QSP - - (Read only) 0x282A:002 general
└ P126.03 Cause of stop - - (Read only) 0x282A:003 general
└ P126.05 Device status - - (Read only) 0x282A:005 general
P135.xx Device utilisat.
└ P135.04 ixt utilisation x% - (Read only) 0x2D40:004 general
└ P135.05 Error response Fault [3] Selection list 0x2D40:005 general
P140.xx Sequencer diag
└ P140.01 Active Step - - (Read only) 0x2DAE:001 general
└ P140.02 StepTime elapsed x.x s - (Read only) 0x2DAE:002 general
└ P140.03 StepTime remain x.x s - (Read only) 0x2DAE:003 general
└ P140.04 Steps complete - - (Read only) 0x2DAE:004 general
└ P140.05 Steps remain - - (Read only) 0x2DAE:005 general
└ P140.06 Active sequence - - (Read only) 0x2DAE:006 general
└ P140.07 Active segment - - (Read only) 0x2DAE:007 general
└ P140.08 SeqTime remain % x% - (Read only) 0x2DAE:008 general
└ P140.09 SeqTime remain x.x s - (Read only) 0x2DAE:009 general
P150.00 Error code - - (Read only) 0x603F general
P151.xx Life-diagnosis
└ P151.01 Operating time xs - (Read only) 0x2D81:001 general
└ P151.02 Power-on time xs - (Read only) 0x2D81:002 general
└ P151.03 CU oper. time x ns - (Read only) 0x2D81:003 general
└ P151.04 Switching cycles - - (Read only) 0x2D81:004 general
└ P151.05 Relay cycles - - (Read only) 0x2D81:005 general
└ P151.06 Short-circ.count - - (Read only) 0x2D81:006 general
└ P151.07 Earthfault count - - (Read only) 0x2D81:007 general
└ P151.08 Clamp active - - (Read only) 0x2D81:008 general
└ P151.09 Fan oper. time xs - (Read only) 0x2D81:009 general
P155.xx Fault memory
└ P155.00 Error memory - - (Read only) 0x2006:000 general
P190.xx Device data
└ P190.01 Product code - - (Read only) 0x2000:001 general
└ P190.02 Serial number - - (Read only) 0x2000:002 general
└ P190.04 CU firmware ver. - - (Read only) 0x2000:004 general
└ P190.05 CU firmware type - - (Read only) 0x2000:005 general
└ P190.06 CU bootlder ver. - - (Read only) 0x2000:006 general
└ P190.07 CU bootlder type - - (Read only) 0x2000:007 general
* Default setting depending on the size. Firmware version 05.00.00.00

87
Commissioning
Keypad parameter list

Display code Short designation Default setting Setting range Address Category
└ P190.08 OBD version - - (Read only) 0x2000:008 general
└ P190.10 PU firmware ver. - - (Read only) 0x2000:010 general
└ P190.11 PU firmware type - - (Read only) 0x2000:011 general
└ P190.12 PU bootlder ver. - - (Read only) 0x2000:012 general
└ P190.13 PU bootlder type - - (Read only) 0x2000:013 general
└ P190.14 Mod. firmware - - (Read only) 0x2000:014 general
└ P190.15 FW revision nr. - - (Read only) 0x2000:015 general
└ P190.16 Bootloader revNo - - (Read only) 0x2000:016 general
P191.00 Device name My Device Text 0x2001 general
P192.xx Device module
└ P192.04 CU type code - - (Read only) 0x2002:004 general
└ P192.05 PU type code - - (Read only) 0x2002:005 general
└ P192.06 CU serial number - - (Read only) 0x2002:006 general
└ P192.07 PU serial number - - (Read only) 0x2002:007 general
P197.00 Protect. status - - (Read only) 0x2040 general
P198.00 Status load. par - - (Read only) 0x2827 general
P200.00 Control select. Flexible I/O [0] Selection list 0x2824 general
P201.xx Stnd. setpoints
└ P201.01 Freq. setp. src. Analog input 1 [2] Selection list 0x2860:001 general
└ P201.02 PID setp. src. Keypad [1] Selection list 0x2860:002 general
└ P201.03 Torque setp.src. Analog input 1 [2] Selection list 0x2860:003 general
P202.xx Keypad setpoints
└ P202.01 KP freq.setpoint 20.0 Hz 0.0 ... 599.0 Hz 0x2601:001 general
└ P202.02 KP PID setpoint 0.00 PID unit -300.00 ... 300.00 PID unit 0x2601:002 general
└ P202.03 KP torq.setpoint 100.0 % -400.0 ... 400.0 % 0x2601:003 general
P203.xx Start/stop confg
└ P203.01 Start method Normal [0] Selection list 0x2838:001 general
└ P203.02 Start at powerup Off [0] Selection list 0x2838:002 general
└ P203.03 Stop method Standard ramp [1] Selection list 0x2838:003 general
P208.xx Mains settings
└ P208.01 Mains voltage 230 Veff [0] Selection list 0x2540:001 general
└ P208.02 LU warn. thresh. 0V* 0 ... 800 V 0x2540:002 general
└ P208.03 LU error thresh. xV - (Read only) 0x2540:003 general
└ P208.04 LU reset thresh. xV - (Read only) 0x2540:004 general
└ P208.05 OU warn. thresh. 0V* 0 ... 800 V 0x2540:005 general
└ P208.06 OU error thresh. xV - (Read only) 0x2540:006 general
└ P208.07 OU reset thresh. xV - (Read only) 0x2540:007 general
P210.00 Min. frequency 0.0 Hz 0.0 ... 599.0 Hz 0x2915 general
P211.00 Max. frequency Device for 50-Hz mains: 0.0 ... 599.0 Hz 0x2916 general
50.0 Hz
Device for 60-Hz mains:
60.0 Hz
P220.00 Accelerat.time 1 5.0 s 0.0 ... 3600.0 s 0x2917 general
P221.00 Decelerat.time 1 5.0 s 0.0 ... 3600.0 s 0x2918 general
P222.00 Accelerat.time 2 5.0 s 0.0 ... 3600.0 s 0x2919 general
P223.00 Decelerat.time 2 5.0 s 0.0 ... 3600.0 s 0x291A general
P224.00 Ramp 2 thresh. 0.0 Hz 0.0 ... 599.0 Hz 0x291B general
P225.00 QSP dec. time 1.0 s 0.0 ... 3600.0 s 0x291C general
P226.xx S-ramp char.
└ P226.01 Smoothing factor 0.0 % 0.0 ... 100.0 % 0x291E:001 general
P230.xx Optical tracking
└ P230.01 Start detection Stop [0] Selection list 0x2021:001 general
└ P230.02 Blink. duration 5s 0 ... 3600 s 0x2021:002 general
P300.00 Motor ctrl mode VFC open loop [6] Selection list 0x2C00 general
* Default setting depending on the size. Firmware version 05.00.00.00

88
Commissioning
Keypad parameter list

Display code Short designation Default setting Setting range Address Category
P301.00 Modes of op. MS: Velocitymode [-2] Selection list 0x6060 general
P302.00 V/f charac.shape Linear [0] Selection list 0x2B00 general
P303.xx V/f shape data
└ P303.01 Base voltage 230 V * 0 ... 5000 V 0x2B01:001 MCTRL
└ P303.02 Base frequency Device for 50-Hz mains: 0 ... 1500 Hz 0x2B01:002 MCTRL
50 Hz
Device for 60-Hz mains:
60 Hz *
└ P303.03 Midpoint voltage 0V 0 ... 5000 V 0x2B01:003 MCTRL
└ P303.04 Midpoint freq 0 Hz 0 ... 1500 Hz 0x2B01:004 MCTRL
P304.00 Limit. rotation Both rot. direct [1] Selection list 0x283A general
P305.00 Switching freq. 0* Selection list 0x2939 general
P306.xx Inv. load char.
└ P306.01 Duty selection Heavy Duty [0] Selection list 0x2D43:001 general
P308.xx Motor overload
└ P308.01 Max.load.for 60s 150 % 30 ... 200 % 0x2D4B:001 general
└ P308.02 Speed comp. On [0] Selection list 0x2D4B:002 general
└ P308.03 Response Fault [3] Selection list 0x2D4B:003 general
P309.xx Mot.temp.monit.
└ P309.02 Response Fault [3] Selection list 0x2D49:002 general
P310.xx Mot.phase.fail.
└ P310.01 Response No response [0] Selection list 0x2D45:001 general
└ P310.02 Current thresh. 5.0 % 1.0 ... 25.0 % 0x2D45:002 general
└ P310.03 Voltage thresh. 10.0 V 0.0 ... 100.0 V 0x2D45:003 general
P315.xx Slip compens.
└ P315.01 Slip: gain 100.00 % -200.00 ... 200.00 % 0x2B09:001 general
└ P315.02 Filter time 100 ms 1 ... 6000 ms 0x2B09:002 general
P316.xx V/f boosts
└ P316.01 Fixed V/f boost 2.5 % * 0.0 ... 20.0 % 0x2B12:001 MCTRL
└ P316.02 Dynam. V/f boost 0.0 % 0.0 ... 20.0 % 0x2B12:002 general
P317.xx Skip frequencies
└ P317.01 Skip frequency 1 0.0 Hz 0.0 ... 599.0 Hz 0x291F:001 general
└ P317.02 Skip bandwidth 1 0.0 Hz 0.0 ... 10.0 Hz 0x291F:002 general
└ P317.03 Skip frequency 2 0.0 Hz 0.0 ... 599.0 Hz 0x291F:003 general
└ P317.04 Skip bandwidth 2 0.0 Hz 0.0 ... 10.0 Hz 0x291F:004 general
└ P317.05 Skip frequency 3 0.0 Hz 0.0 ... 599.0 Hz 0x291F:005 general
└ P317.06 Skip bandwidth 3 0.0 Hz 0.0 ... 10.0 Hz 0x291F:006 general
P318.xx Oscillat. damp.
└ P318.01 Gain 150 % -400 ... 400 % 0x2B0A:001 MCTRL
└ P318.02 Filter time 30 ms 1 ... 600 ms 0x2B0A:002 MCTRL
P319.00 Field weak thold 0.0 Hz -599.0 ... 599.0 Hz 0x2B0C general
P320.xx Motor parameters
└ P320.04 Rated speed Device for 50-Hz mains: 50 ... 50000 rpm 0x2C01:004 MCTRL
1450 rpm
Device for 60-Hz mains:
1750 rpm
└ P320.05 Rated frequency Device for 50-Hz mains: 1.0 ... 1000.0 Hz 0x2C01:005 MCTRL
50.0 Hz
Device for 60-Hz mains:
60.0 Hz
└ P320.06 Rated power 0.25 kW * 0.00 ... 655.35 kW 0x2C01:006 MCTRL
└ P320.07 Rated voltage 230 V * 0 ... 65535 V 0x2C01:007 MCTRL
└ P320.08 Cosine phi 0.80 0.00 ... 1.00 0x2C01:008 MCTRL
P322.00 Max motor speed 6075 rpm 0 ... 480000 rpm 0x6080 general
P323.00 Motor current 1.700 A * 0.001 ... 500.000 A 0x6075 MCTRL
* Default setting depending on the size. Firmware version 05.00.00.00

89
Commissioning
Keypad parameter list

Display code Short designation Default setting Setting range Address Category
P324.00 Max current 200.0 % 0.0 ... 3000.0 % 0x6073 general
P325.00 Motor torque 1.650 Nm * 0.001 ... 4294967.295 Nm 0x6076 MCTRL
P326.00 Max torque 250.0 % 0.0 ... 3000.0 % 0x6072 general
P327.xx Axis commands
└ P327.04 Identify mot. 0 0 ... 1 0x2822:004 general
└ P327.05 Calibrate mot. 0 0 ... 1 0x2822:005 general
P329.xx MaxTrq.Monitor
└ P329.01 Response No response [0] Selection list 0x2D67:001 MCTRL
└ P329.02 Triggering delay 0.000 s 0.000 ... 10.000 s 0x2D67:002 MCTRL
P330.xx VFC-ECO
└ P330.01 Min. voltage 20 % 20 ... 100 % 0x2B0D:001 MCTRL
└ P330.06 Cos Phi actual - - (Read only) 0x2B0D:006 general
P332.xx Speed controller
└ P332.01 Gain 0.00193 Nm/rpm * 0.00000 ... 0x2900:001 MCTRL
20000.00000 Nm/rpm
└ P332.02 Reset time 80.0 ms * 1.0 ... 6000.0 ms 0x2900:002 MCTRL
P333.xx V/f Imax contr.
└ P333.01 Gain 0.284 Hz/A * 0.000 ... 1000.000 Hz/A 0x2B08:001 MCTRL
└ P333.02 Reset time 2.3 ms * 1.0 ... 2000.0 ms 0x2B08:002 MCTRL
P334.xx Current contr.
└ P334.01 Gain 42.55 V/A * 0.00 ... 750.00 V/A 0x2942:001 MCTRL
└ P334.02 Reset time 4.50 ms * 0.01 ... 2000.00 ms 0x2942:002 MCTRL
P335.xx Moment of inert.
└ P335.01 Motor inertia 3.70 kg cm² * 0.00 ... 20000000.00 kg cm² 0x2910:001 MCTRL
└ P335.02 Load inertia 3.70 kg cm² * 0.00 ... 20000000.00 kg cm² 0x2910:002 MCTRL
└ P336.02 Ramp time 1.0 s 0.0 ... 60.0 s 0x2948:002 general
P337.xx
└ P337.01 Pos. torqlim src Max torque [0] Selection list 0x2949:001 general
└ P337.02 Neg. torqlim src (-) Max torque [0] Selection list 0x2949:002 general
└ P337.03 Act postorqlim x.x % - (Read only) 0x2949:003 general
└ P337.04 Act negtorqlim x.x % - (Read only) 0x2949:004 general
P340.xx Speed limitation
└ P340.01 Upper limit 0 vel. unit -480000 ... 480000 vel. unit 0x2946:001 general
└ P340.02 Lower limit 0 vel. unit -480000 ... 480000 vel. unit 0x2946:002 general
└ P340.03 Uppspeed lim src Max. frequency [0] Selection list 0x2946:003 general
└ P340.04 Lowspeed lim src (-) Max. freq. [0] Selection list 0x2946:004 general
└ P340.05 Upper freq.limit Device for 50-Hz mains: -1000.0 ... 1000.0 Hz 0x2946:005 general
50.0 Hz
Device for 60-Hz mains:
60.0 Hz
└ P340.06 Lower freq.limit Device for 50-Hz mains: -1000.0 ... 1000.0 Hz 0x2946:006 general
-50.0 Hz
Device for 60-Hz mains:
-60.0 Hz
└ P340.07 Act uppspeed lim x.x Hz - (Read only) 0x2946:007 general
└ P340.08 Act lowspeed lim x.x Hz - (Read only) 0x2946:008 general
P341.xx Encoder settings
└ P341.01 Enc. Inc/Rev 128 1 ... 16384 0x2C42:001 general
P342.00 Enc.error resp. Warning [1] Selection list 0x2C45 general
P350.xx Overspeed monit.
└ P350.01 Threshold 8000 rpm 50 ... 50000 rpm 0x2D44:001 general
└ P350.02 Response Fault [3] Selection list 0x2D44:002 general
P351.xx ASM motor par.
└ P351.01 Rotor resistance 8.8944 Ω * 0.0000 ... 200.0000 Ω 0x2C02:001 MCTRL
└ P351.02 Mutual induct. 381.9 mH * 0.0 ... 50000.0 mH 0x2C02:002 MCTRL
* Default setting depending on the size. Firmware version 05.00.00.00

90
Commissioning
Keypad parameter list

Display code Short designation Default setting Setting range Address Category
└ P351.03 Magn. current 0.96 A * 0.00 ... 500.00 A 0x2C02:003 MCTRL
└ P351.04 Slip frequency x.x Hz - (Read only) 0x2C02:004 general
P352.xx PSM motor par.
└ P352.01 BEMF constant 41.8 V/1000rpm 0.0 ... 100000.0 V/1000rpm 0x2C03:001 MCTRL
P353.xx Overcurr. monit.
└ P353.01 Threshold 6.8 A * 0.0 ... 1000.0 A 0x2D46:001 general
└ P353.02 Response Fault [3] Selection list 0x2D46:002 general
P354.00 Voltage reserve 5% 1 ... 20 % 0x29E4 general
P400.xx Function list
└ P400.01 Enable inverter TRUE [1] Selection list 0x2631:001 general
└ P400.02 Run Digital input 1 [11] Selection list 0x2631:002 general
└ P400.03 Quick stop Not connected [0] Selection list 0x2631:003 general
└ P400.04 Reset fault Digital input 2 [12] Selection list 0x2631:004 general
└ P400.05 DC braking Not connected [0] Selection list 0x2631:005 general
└ P400.06 Start forward Not connected [0] Selection list 0x2631:006 general
└ P400.07 Start reverse Not connected [0] Selection list 0x2631:007 general
└ P400.08 Run forward Not connected [0] Selection list 0x2631:008 general
└ P400.09 Run reverse Not connected [0] Selection list 0x2631:009 general
└ P400.10 Jog foward Not connected [0] Selection list 0x2631:010 general
└ P400.11 Jog reverse Not connected [0] Selection list 0x2631:011 general
└ P400.12 Keypad control Not connected [0] Selection list 0x2631:012 general
└ P400.13 Reverse rot.dir. Digital input 3 [13] Selection list 0x2631:013 general
└ P400.14 Setp: AI1 Not connected [0] Selection list 0x2631:014 general
└ P400.15 Setp: AI2 Not connected [0] Selection list 0x2631:015 general
└ P400.16 Setp: Keypad Not connected [0] Selection list 0x2631:016 general
└ P400.17 Setp: Network Not connected [0] Selection list 0x2631:017 general
└ P400.18 Setp: Preset b0 Digital input 4 [14] Selection list 0x2631:018 general
└ P400.19 Setp: Preset b1 Digital input 5 [15] Selection list 0x2631:019 general
└ P400.20 Setp: Preset b2 Not connected [0] Selection list 0x2631:020 general
└ P400.21 Setp: Preset b3 Not connected [0] Selection list 0x2631:021 general
└ P400.22 Setp: HTL input Not connected [0] Selection list 0x2631:022 general
└ P400.23 MOP up Not connected [0] Selection list 0x2631:023 general
└ P400.24 MOP down Not connected [0] Selection list 0x2631:024 general
└ P400.25 Setp: MOP Not connected [0] Selection list 0x2631:025 general
└ P400.26 Setp: Segment b0 Not connected [0] Selection list 0x2631:026 general
└ P400.27 Setp: Segment b1 Not connected [0] Selection list 0x2631:027 general
└ P400.28 Setp: Segment b2 Not connected [0] Selection list 0x2631:028 general
└ P400.29 Setp: Segment b3 Not connected [0] Selection list 0x2631:029 general
└ P400.30 Seq: Run/abort Not connected [0] Selection list 0x2631:030 general
└ P400.31 Seq: Start Not connected [0] Selection list 0x2631:031 general
└ P400.32 Seq: Next step Not connected [0] Selection list 0x2631:032 general
└ P400.33 Seq: Pause Not connected [0] Selection list 0x2631:033 general
└ P400.34 Seq: Suspense Not connected [0] Selection list 0x2631:034 general
└ P400.35 Seq: Stop Not connected [0] Selection list 0x2631:035 general
└ P400.36 Seq: Abort Not connected [0] Selection list 0x2631:036 general
└ P400.37 Network control Not connected [0] Selection list 0x2631:037 general
└ P400.39 Activ. ramp 2 Not connected [0] Selection list 0x2631:039 general
└ P400.40 Load param.set Not connected [0] Selection list 0x2631:040 general
└ P400.41 Sel. paramset b0 Not connected [0] Selection list 0x2631:041 general
└ P400.42 Sel. paramset b1 Not connected [0] Selection list 0x2631:042 general
└ P400.43 Fault 1 Not connected [0] Selection list 0x2631:043 general
└ P400.44 Fault 2 Not connected [0] Selection list 0x2631:044 general
└ P400.45 PID off Not connected [0] Selection list 0x2631:045 general
└ P400.46 PID output=0 Not connected [0] Selection list 0x2631:046 general
* Default setting depending on the size. Firmware version 05.00.00.00

91
Commissioning
Keypad parameter list

Display code Short designation Default setting Setting range Address Category
└ P400.47 PID-I inhibited Not connected [0] Selection list 0x2631:047 general
└ P400.48 PID-Inf ramp on TRUE [1] Selection list 0x2631:048 general
└ P400.49 Release brake Not connected [0] Selection list 0x2631:049 general
└ P400.50 Seq: Select. b0 Not connected [0] Selection list 0x2631:050 general
└ P400.51 Seq: Select. b1 Not connected [0] Selection list 0x2631:051 general
└ P400.52 Seq: Select. b2 Not connected [0] Selection list 0x2631:052 general
└ P400.53 Seq: Select. b3 Not connected [0] Selection list 0x2631:053 general
└ P400.54 PosCounter reset Not connected [0] Selection list 0x2631:054 general
└ P400.55 Activ. UPS oper. Not connected [0] Selection list 0x2631:055 general
P410.xx DI settings
└ P410.01 Assertion level HIGH active [1] Selection list 0x2630:001 general
└ P410.02 Input function Digital Input [0] Selection list 0x2630:002 general
P411.xx DI inversion
└ P411.01 DI1 inversion Not inverted [0] Selection list 0x2632:001 general
└ P411.02 DI2 inversion Not inverted [0] Selection list 0x2632:002 general
└ P411.03 DI3 inversion Not inverted [0] Selection list 0x2632:003 general
└ P411.04 DI4 inversion Not inverted [0] Selection list 0x2632:004 general
└ P411.05 DI5 inversion Not inverted [0] Selection list 0x2632:005 general
└ P411.06 DI6 inversion Not inverted [0] Selection list 0x2632:006 Appl. I/O
└ P411.07 DI7 inversion Not inverted [0] Selection list 0x2632:007 Appl. I/O
P412.00 Freq. threshold 0.0 Hz 0.0 ... 599.0 Hz 0x4005 general
P413.00 MOP startmode Last value [0] Selection list 0x4003 general
P414.xx MOP start value
└ P414.01 Frequency 0.0 Hz 0.0 ... 599.0 Hz 0x4004:001 general
└ P414.02 PID value 0.00 PID unit -300.00 ... 300.00 PID unit 0x4004:002 general
└ P414.03 Torque 0.0 % 0.0 ... 1000.0 % 0x4004:003 general
P415.xx HTL inp. setting
└ P415.01 Min.frequency 0.0 Hz -100000.0 ... 100000.0 Hz 0x2640:001 general
└ P415.02 Max. frequency 0.0 Hz -100000.0 ... 100000.0 Hz 0x2640:002 general
└ P415.03 Min.motor.freq 0.0 Hz -1000.0 ... 1000.0 Hz 0x2640:003 general
└ P415.04 Max.motor.freq Device for 50-Hz mains: -1000.0 ... 1000.0 Hz 0x2640:004 general
50.0 Hz
Device for 60-Hz mains:
60.0 Hz
└ P415.05 Min.PID setpoint 0.00 PID unit -300.00 ... 300.00 PID unit 0x2640:005 general
└ P415.06 Max.PID setpoint 100.00 PID unit -300.00 ... 300.00 PID unit 0x2640:006 general
└ P415.07 Min.torque setp. 0.0 % -400.0 ... 400.0 % 0x2640:007 general
└ P415.08 Max.torque setp 100.0 % -400.0 ... 400.0 % 0x2640:008 general
└ P415.09 Filter time 10 ms 0 ... 10000 ms 0x2640:009 general
P416.xx HTL inp. monit.
└ P416.01 Min.freq.thresh. 0.0 Hz -214748364.8 ... 0x2641:001 general
214748364.7 Hz
└ P416.02 Min.delay thres. 5.0 s 0.0 ... 300.0 s 0x2641:002 general
└ P416.03 Max.freq.thresh. 0.0 Hz -214748364.8 ... 0x2641:003 general
214748364.7 Hz
└ P416.04 Max.delay thres. 5.0 s 0.0 ... 300.0 s 0x2641:004 general
└ P416.05 Monit. condition < min. frequency [1] Selection list 0x2641:005 general
└ P416.06 Error response No response [0] Selection list 0x2641:006 general
P420.xx Dig.out.function
└ P420.01 Relay function Rdy for operat. [51] Selection list 0x2634:001 general
└ P420.02 DO1 function Release brake [115] Selection list 0x2634:002 general
└ P420.03 DO2 function Error [56] Selection list 0x2634:003 Appl. I/O
└ P420.10 NetWordOUT1.00 Rdy for operat. [51] Selection list 0x2634:010 general
└ P420.11 NetWordOUT1.01 Not connected [0] Selection list 0x2634:011 general
└ P420.12 NetWordOUT1.02 Operat. enabled [52] Selection list 0x2634:012 general
* Default setting depending on the size. Firmware version 05.00.00.00

92
Commissioning
Keypad parameter list

Display code Short designation Default setting Setting range Address Category
└ P420.13 NetWordOUT1.03 Error [56] Selection list 0x2634:013 general
└ P420.14 NetWordOUT1.04 Not connected [0] Selection list 0x2634:014 general
└ P420.15 NetWordOUT1.05 Quick stop [54] Selection list 0x2634:015 general
└ P420.16 NetWordOUT1.06 Running [50] Selection list 0x2634:016 general
└ P420.17 NetWordOUT1.07 Device warning [58] Selection list 0x2634:017 general
└ P420.18 NetWordOUT1.08 Not connected [0] Selection list 0x2634:018 general
└ P420.19 NetWordOUT1.09 Not connected [0] Selection list 0x2634:019 general
└ P420.20 NetWordOUT1.10 Speed - setp=act [72] Selection list 0x2634:020 general
└ P420.21 NetWordOUT1.11 At current limit [78] Selection list 0x2634:021 general
└ P420.22 NetWordOUT1.12 Actual speed=0 [71] Selection list 0x2634:022 general
└ P420.23 NetWordOUT1.13 Rot.dir.reversed [69] Selection list 0x2634:023 general
└ P420.24 NetWordOUT1.14 Release brake [115] Selection list 0x2634:024 general
└ P420.25 NetWordOUT1.15 Safe Torque Off [55] Selection list 0x2634:025 general
P421.xx DO inversion
└ P421.01 Relay inverted Not inverted [0] Selection list 0x2635:001 general
└ P421.02 DO1 inversion Not inverted [0] Selection list 0x2635:002 general
└ P421.03 DO2 inversion Not inverted [0] Selection list 0x2635:003 Appl. I/O
P423.xx DO1 freq. setup
└ P423.01 Min. frequency 0.0 Hz 0.0 ... 10000.0 Hz 0x2644:001 general
└ P423.02 Max. frequency 10000.0 Hz 0.0 ... 10000.0 Hz 0x2644:002 general
└ P423.03 Function Not connected [0] Selection list 0x2644:003 general
└ P423.04 Min. signal 0 -2147483648 ... 2147483647 0x2644:004 general
└ P423.05 Max. signal 1000 -2147483648 ... 2147483647 0x2644:005 general
P424.xx DO2 freq. setup
└ P424.01 Min. frequency 0.0 Hz 0.0 ... 10000.0 Hz 0x2645:001 general
└ P424.02 Max. frequency 10000.0 Hz 0.0 ... 10000.0 Hz 0x2645:002 general
└ P424.03 Function Not connected [0] Selection list 0x2645:003 general
└ P424.04 Min. signal 0 -2147483648 ... 2147483647 0x2645:004 general
└ P424.05 Max. signal 1000 -2147483648 ... 2147483647 0x2645:005 general
P430.xx Analog input 1
└ P430.01 AI1 input range 0 ... 10 VDC [0] Selection list 0x2636:001 general
└ P430.02 AI1 freq @ min 0.0 Hz -1000.0 ... 1000.0 Hz 0x2636:002 general
└ P430.03 AI1 freq @ max Device for 50-Hz mains: -1000.0 ... 1000.0 Hz 0x2636:003 general
50.0 Hz
Device for 60-Hz mains:
60.0 Hz
└ P430.04 AI1 PID @ min 0.00 PID unit -300.00 ... 300.00 PID unit 0x2636:004 general
└ P430.05 AI1 PID @ max 100.00 PID unit -300.00 ... 300.00 PID unit 0x2636:005 general
└ P430.06 AI1 filter time 10 ms 0 ... 10000 ms 0x2636:006 general
└ P430.07 AI1 dead band 0.0 % 0.0 ... 100.0 % 0x2636:007 general
└ P430.08 AI1 monit.level 0.0 % -100.0 ... 100.0 % 0x2636:008 general
└ P430.09 AI1 monit.cond. IN < threshold [0] Selection list 0x2636:009 general
└ P430.10 AI1 error resp. Fault [3] Selection list 0x2636:010 general
└ P430.11 Min. torque 0.0 % -400.0 ... 400.0 % 0x2636:011 general
└ P430.12 Max. torque 100.0 % -400.0 ... 400.0 % 0x2636:012 general
P431.xx Analog input 2
└ P431.01 AI2 input range 0 ... 10 VDC [0] Selection list 0x2637:001 general
└ P431.02 AI2 freq @ min 0.0 Hz -1000.0 ... 1000.0 Hz 0x2637:002 general
└ P431.03 AI2 freq @ max Device for 50-Hz mains: -1000.0 ... 1000.0 Hz 0x2637:003 general
50.0 Hz
Device for 60-Hz mains:
60.0 Hz
└ P431.04 AI2 PID @ min 0.00 PID unit -300.00 ... 300.00 PID unit 0x2637:004 general
└ P431.05 AI2 PID @ max 100.00 PID unit -300.00 ... 300.00 PID unit 0x2637:005 general
└ P431.06 AI2 filter time 10 ms 0 ... 10000 ms 0x2637:006 general
* Default setting depending on the size. Firmware version 05.00.00.00

93
Commissioning
Keypad parameter list

Display code Short designation Default setting Setting range Address Category
└ P431.07 AI2 dead band 0.0 % 0.0 ... 100.0 % 0x2637:007 general
└ P431.08 AI2 monit.level 0.0 % -100.0 ... 100.0 % 0x2637:008 general
└ P431.09 AI2 error resp. IN < threshold [0] Selection list 0x2637:009 general
└ P431.10 AI2 error resp. Fault [3] Selection list 0x2637:010 general
└ P431.11 Min. torque 0.0 % -400.0 ... 400.0 % 0x2637:011 general
└ P431.12 Max. torque 100.0 % -400.0 ... 400.0 % 0x2637:012 general
P440.xx Analog output 1
└ P440.01 AO1 outp. range 0 ... 10 VDC [1] Selection list 0x2639:001 general
└ P440.02 AO1 function Outp. frequency [1] Selection list 0x2639:002 general
└ P440.03 AO1 min. signal 0 -2147483648 ... 2147483647 0x2639:003 general
└ P440.04 AO1 max. signal 1000 -2147483648 ... 2147483647 0x2639:004 general
P441.xx Analog output 2
└ P441.01 AO2 outp. range 0 ... 10 VDC [1] Selection list 0x263A:001 Appl. I/O
└ P441.02 AO2 function Motor current [5] Selection list 0x263A:002 Appl. I/O
└ P441.03 AO2 min. signal 0 -2147483648 ... 2147483647 0x263A:003 Appl. I/O
└ P441.04 AO2 max. signal 1000 -2147483648 ... 2147483647 0x263A:004 Appl. I/O
P450.xx Freq. presets
└ P450.01 Freq. preset 1 20.0 Hz 0.0 ... 599.0 Hz 0x2911:001 general
└ P450.02 Freq. preset 2 40.0 Hz 0.0 ... 599.0 Hz 0x2911:002 general
└ P450.03 Freq. preset 3 Device for 50-Hz mains: 0.0 ... 599.0 Hz 0x2911:003 general
50.0 Hz
Device for 60-Hz mains:
60.0 Hz
└ P450.04 Freq. preset 4 0.0 Hz 0.0 ... 599.0 Hz 0x2911:004 general
└ P450.05 Freq. preset 5 0.0 Hz 0.0 ... 599.0 Hz 0x2911:005 general
└ P450.06 Freq. preset 6 0.0 Hz 0.0 ... 599.0 Hz 0x2911:006 general
└ P450.07 Freq. preset 7 0.0 Hz 0.0 ... 599.0 Hz 0x2911:007 general
└ P450.08 Freq. preset 8 0.0 Hz 0.0 ... 599.0 Hz 0x2911:008 general
└ P450.09 Freq. preset 9 0.0 Hz 0.0 ... 599.0 Hz 0x2911:009 general
└ P450.10 Freq. preset 10 0.0 Hz 0.0 ... 599.0 Hz 0x2911:010 general
└ P450.11 Freq. preset 11 0.0 Hz 0.0 ... 599.0 Hz 0x2911:011 general
└ P450.12 Freq. preset 12 0.0 Hz 0.0 ... 599.0 Hz 0x2911:012 general
└ P450.13 Freq. preset 13 0.0 Hz 0.0 ... 599.0 Hz 0x2911:013 general
└ P450.14 Freq. preset 14 0.0 Hz 0.0 ... 599.0 Hz 0x2911:014 general
└ P450.15 Freq. preset 15 0.0 Hz 0.0 ... 599.0 Hz 0x2911:015 general
P451.xx PID presets
└ P451.01 PID preset 1 0.00 PID unit -300.00 ... 300.00 PID unit 0x4022:001 general
└ P451.02 PID preset 2 0.00 PID unit -300.00 ... 300.00 PID unit 0x4022:002 general
└ P451.03 PID preset 3 0.00 PID unit -300.00 ... 300.00 PID unit 0x4022:003 general
└ P451.04 PID preset 4 0.00 PID unit -300.00 ... 300.00 PID unit 0x4022:004 general
└ P451.05 PID preset 5 0.00 PID unit -300.00 ... 300.00 PID unit 0x4022:005 general
└ P451.06 PID preset 6 0.00 PID unit -300.00 ... 300.00 PID unit 0x4022:006 general
└ P451.07 PID preset 7 0.00 PID unit -300.00 ... 300.00 PID unit 0x4022:007 general
└ P451.08 PID preset 8 0.00 PID unit -300.00 ... 300.00 PID unit 0x4022:008 general
P452.xx Torque presets
└ P452.01 Torque preset 1 100.0 % -400.0 ... 400.0 % 0x2912:001 general
└ P452.02 Torque preset 2 100.0 % -400.0 ... 400.0 % 0x2912:002 general
└ P452.03 Torque preset 3 100.0 % -400.0 ... 400.0 % 0x2912:003 general
└ P452.04 Torque preset 4 100.0 % -400.0 ... 400.0 % 0x2912:004 general
└ P452.05 Torque preset 5 100.0 % -400.0 ... 400.0 % 0x2912:005 general
└ P452.06 Torque preset 6 100.0 % -400.0 ... 400.0 % 0x2912:006 general
└ P452.07 Torque preset 7 100.0 % -400.0 ... 400.0 % 0x2912:007 general
└ P452.08 Torque preset 8 100.0 % -400.0 ... 400.0 % 0x2912:008 general
P500.xx Module ID
* Default setting depending on the size. Firmware version 05.00.00.00

94
Commissioning
Keypad parameter list

Display code Short designation Default setting Setting range Address Category
└ P500.01 Active module ID - - (Read only) 0x231F:001 general
└ P500.02 Module ID conn. - - (Read only) 0x231F:002 general
P505.xx NetWordIN1 fct.
└ P505.01 NetWordIN1.00 Not active [0] Selection list 0x400E:001 general
└ P505.02 NetWordIN1.01 Not active [0] Selection list 0x400E:002 general
└ P505.03 NetWordIN1.02 Quick stop [3] Selection list 0x400E:003 general
└ P505.04 NetWordIN1.03 Not active [0] Selection list 0x400E:004 general
└ P505.05 NetWordIN1.04 Run forward [8] Selection list 0x400E:005 general
└ P505.06 NetWordIN1.05 Setp: Preset b0 [18] Selection list 0x400E:006 general
└ P505.07 NetWordIN1.06 Setp: Preset b1 [19] Selection list 0x400E:007 general
└ P505.08 NetWordIN1.07 Reset error [4] Selection list 0x400E:008 general
└ P505.09 NetWordIN1.08 Not active [0] Selection list 0x400E:009 general
└ P505.10 NetWordIN1.09 DC braking [5] Selection list 0x400E:010 general
└ P505.11 NetWordIN1.10 Not active [0] Selection list 0x400E:011 general
└ P505.12 NetWordIN1.11 Not active [0] Selection list 0x400E:012 general
└ P505.13 NetWordIN1.12 Reverse rot.dir. [13] Selection list 0x400E:013 general
└ P505.14 NetWordIN1.13 Not active [0] Selection list 0x400E:014 general
└ P505.15 NetWordIN1.14 Not active [0] Selection list 0x400E:015 general
└ P505.16 NetWordIN1.15 Not active [0] Selection list 0x400E:016 general
P508.00 CANopen comm. No action [0] Selection list 0x2300 CANopen
P508.00 EtherCAT comm. No action [0] Selection list 0x2360 EtherCAT
P508.00 EtherN/IP comm. No action [0] Selection list 0x23A0 EtherNet/IP
P508.00 Modbus comm. No action [0] Selection list 0x2320 Modbus RTU
P508.00 MBTCP comm. No action [0] Selection list 0x23B0 Modbus TCP
P508.00 PROFINET comm. No action [0] Selection list 0x2380 PROFINET
P509.00 CANopen switch - - (Read only) 0x2303 CANopen
P509.00 EtherC. switch - - (Read only) 0x2363 EtherCAT
P509.00 EtherN. switch - - (Read only) 0x23A3 EtherNet/IP
P509.00 Modbus switch - - (Read only) 0x2323 Modbus RTU
P509.00 Switch position - - (Read only) 0x23B3 Modbus TCP
P509.00 PROFIBUS switch - - (Read only) 0x2343 PROFIBUS
P510.xx CANopen sett.
└ P510.01 Node ID 1 1 ... 127 0x2301:001 CANopen
└ P510.02 Baud rate 500 kbps [5] Selection list 0x2301:002 CANopen
└ P510.03 Slave/Master Slave [0] Selection list 0x2301:003 CANopen
└ P510.04 Start rem. delay 3000 ms 0 ... 65535 ms 0x2301:004 CANopen
└ P510.05 SDO2 channel Not active [0] Selection list 0x2301:005 CANopen
└ P510.06 COB-ID Config Base + node-ID [0] Selection list 0x2301:006 CANopen
P510.xx EtherCAT sett.
└ P510.04 Device ident. 0 0 ... 65535 0x2361:004 EtherCAT
P510.xx EtherN/IP sett.
└ P510.01 IP address 276605120 0 ... 4294967295 0x23A1:001 EtherNet/IP
└ P510.02 Subnet 16777215 0 ... 4294967295 0x23A1:002 EtherNet/IP
└ P510.03 Gateway 0 0 ... 4294967295 0x23A1:003 EtherNet/IP
└ P510.04 Host name Text 0x23A1:004 EtherNet/IP
└ P510.05 IP configuration BOOTP [1] Selection list 0x23A1:005 EtherNet/IP
└ P510.06 Multicast TTL 1 1 ... 255 0x23A1:006 EtherNet/IP
└ P510.07 Mcast allocation Default alloc. [0] Selection list 0x23A1:007 EtherNet/IP
└ P510.08 Mcast IP addr. 3221373167 0 ... 4294967295 0x23A1:008 EtherNet/IP
└ P510.09 Multicast number 1 1 ... 8 0x23A1:009 EtherNet/IP
└ P510.10 Timeout 10000 ms 500 ... 65535 ms 0x23A1:010 EtherNet/IP
P510.xx Modbus sett.
└ P510.01 Node ID 1 1 ... 247 0x2321:001 Modbus RTU
└ P510.02 Baud rate Automatic [0] Selection list 0x2321:002 Modbus RTU
* Default setting depending on the size. Firmware version 05.00.00.00

95
Commissioning
Keypad parameter list

Display code Short designation Default setting Setting range Address Category
└ P510.03 Data format Automatic [0] Selection list 0x2321:003 Modbus RTU
└ P510.04 Min. resp. time 0 ms 0 ... 1000 ms 0x2321:004 Modbus RTU
P510.xx MBTCP settings
└ P510.01 IP address 276605120 0 ... 4294967295 0x23B1:001 Modbus TCP
└ P510.02 Subnet 16777215 0 ... 4294967295 0x23B1:002 Modbus TCP
└ P510.03 Gateway 0 0 ... 4294967295 0x23B1:003 Modbus TCP
└ P510.05 IP configuration Stored IP [0] Selection list 0x23B1:005 Modbus TCP
└ P510.06 TTL value 32 1 ... 255 0x23B1:006 Modbus TCP
└ P510.10 Ethernet timeout 10 s 0 ... 65535 s 0x23B1:010 Modbus TCP
└ P510.11 Secondary port 502 0 ... 65535 0x23B1:011 Modbus TCP
P510.xx PROFIBUS sett.
└ P510.01 Station address 3 1 ... 125 0x2341:001 PROFIBUS
P510.xx PROFINET sett.
└ P510.01 IP address 0 0 ... 4294967295 0x2381:001 PROFINET
└ P510.02 Subnet 0 0 ... 4294967295 0x2381:002 PROFINET
└ P510.03 Gateway 0 0 ... 4294967295 0x2381:003 PROFINET
└ P510.04 Station name Text 0x2381:004 PROFINET
P511.xx CANopen diag.
└ P511.01 Active node ID - - (Read only) 0x2302:001 CANopen
└ P511.02 Active baud rate - - (Read only) 0x2302:002 CANopen
P511.xx EtherCAT diag.
└ P511.04 Device ident. - - (Read only) 0x2362:004 EtherCAT
└ P511.06 Station address - - (Read only) 0x2362:006 EtherCAT
└ P511.07 Tx length - - (Read only) 0x2362:007 EtherCAT
└ P511.08 Rx length - - (Read only) 0x2362:008 EtherCAT
P511.xx EtherN/IP diag.
└ P511.01 IP address - - (Read only) 0x23A2:001 EtherNet/IP
└ P511.02 Subnet - - (Read only) 0x23A2:002 EtherNet/IP
└ P511.03 Gateway - - (Read only) 0x23A2:003 EtherNet/IP
└ P511.05 MAC address - - (Read only) 0x23A2:005 EtherNet/IP
└ P511.06 Mcast address - - (Read only) 0x23A2:006 EtherNet/IP
P511.xx Modbus diag.
└ P511.01 Active node ID - - (Read only) 0x2322:001 Modbus RTU
└ P511.02 Active baud rate - - (Read only) 0x2322:002 Modbus RTU
└ P511.03 Data format - - (Read only) 0x2322:003 Modbus RTU
P511.xx Act. MBTCP sett.
└ P511.01 Act. IP address - - (Read only) 0x23B2:001 Modbus TCP
└ P511.02 Act. subnet - - (Read only) 0x23B2:002 Modbus TCP
└ P511.03 Act. gateway - - (Read only) 0x23B2:003 Modbus TCP
└ P511.05 MAC address - - (Read only) 0x23B2:005 Modbus TCP
P511.xx PROFIBUS diag.
└ P511.01 Act.station addr - - (Read only) 0x2342:001 PROFIBUS
└ P511.02 Active baud rate - - (Read only) 0x2342:002 PROFIBUS
└ P511.03 Watchdog time - - (Read only) 0x2342:003 PROFIBUS
P511.xx PROFINET diag.
└ P511.01 IP address - - (Read only) 0x2382:001 PROFINET
└ P511.02 Subnet - - (Read only) 0x2382:002 PROFINET
└ P511.03 Gateway - - (Read only) 0x2382:003 PROFINET
└ P511.04 Station name - - (Read only) 0x2382:004 PROFINET
└ P511.05 MAC Address - - (Read only) 0x2382:005 PROFINET
P512.xx Port settings
└ P512.01 Port 1 Auto-Negotiation [0] Selection list 0x23A4:001 EtherNet/IP
└ P512.02 Port 2 Auto-Negotiation [0] Selection list 0x23A4:002 EtherNet/IP
P512.xx Port settings
* Default setting depending on the size. Firmware version 05.00.00.00

96
Commissioning
Keypad parameter list

Display code Short designation Default setting Setting range Address Category
└ P512.01 Port 1 Auto-Negotiation [0] Selection list 0x23B4:001 Modbus TCP
└ P512.02 Port 2 Auto-Negotiation [0] Selection list 0x23B4:002 Modbus TCP
P512.xx PROFIBUS Config.
└ P512.01 Ext. diag. bit Delete [0] Selection list 0x2344:001 PROFIBUS
P513.00 QualityOfService - - (Read only) 0x23A6 EtherNet/IP
P513.xx Act. port sett.
└ P513.01 Port 1 - - (Read only) 0x23B5:001 Modbus TCP
└ P513.02 Port 2 - - (Read only) 0x23B5:002 Modbus TCP
P514.00 AddrConflctDetec Enabled [1] Selection list 0x23A7 EtherNet/IP
P514.xx MBTCP t-out mon
└ P514.01 Time-out time 2.0 s 0.0 ... 300.0 s 0x23B6:001 Modbus TCP
└ P514.02 Keep al t-out 2.0 s 0.0 ... 300.0 s 0x23B6:002 Modbus TCP
└ P514.05 Keep al register 0 0 ... 65535 0x23B6:005 Modbus TCP
P515.00 Time-out status - - (Read only) 0x2307 CANopen
P515.xx EtherCAT monit.
└ P515.01 WD elapsed Trouble [2] Selection list 0x2859:001 EtherCAT
└ P515.03 Invalid config Trouble [2] Selection list 0x2859:003 EtherCAT
└ P515.04 Init. error Trouble [2] Selection list 0x2859:004 EtherCAT
└ P515.05 Inval. proc.data Trouble [2] Selection list 0x2859:005 EtherCAT
P515.xx EtherN/IP monit.
└ P515.01 WD elapsed Trouble [2] Selection list 0x2859:001 EtherNet/IP
└ P515.03 Invalid config Trouble [2] Selection list 0x2859:003 EtherNet/IP
└ P515.04 Init. error Trouble [2] Selection list 0x2859:004 EtherNet/IP
└ P515.05 Inval. proc.data Trouble [2] Selection list 0x2859:005 EtherNet/IP
└ P515.06 Timeout ExplMsg Warning [1] Selection list 0x2859:006 EtherNet/IP
└ P515.07 Timeout Comm. Warning [1] Selection list 0x2859:007 EtherNet/IP
P515.xx Modbus monit.
└ P515.01 Resp. Time-out Fault [3] Selection list 0x2858:001 Modbus RTU
└ P515.02 Time-out time 2.0 s 0.0 ... 300.0 s 0x2858:002 Modbus RTU
P515.xx MBTCP monitoring
└ P515.03 Config error Trouble [2] Selection list 0x2859:003 Modbus TCP
└ P515.04 Init error Trouble [2] Selection list 0x2859:004 Modbus TCP
└ P515.07 React t-out netw Warning [1] Selection list 0x2859:007 Modbus TCP
└ P515.08 React t-out mast Fault [3] Selection list 0x2859:008 Modbus TCP
└ P515.09 Reac t-out kp-al Fault [3] Selection list 0x2859:009 Modbus TCP
P515.xx PROFIBUS monit.
└ P515.01 WD elapsed Trouble [2] Selection list 0x2859:001 PROFIBUS
└ P515.02 Data exch.exited No response [0] Selection list 0x2859:002 PROFIBUS
└ P515.03 Invalid config Trouble [2] Selection list 0x2859:003 PROFIBUS
└ P515.04 Init. error Trouble [2] Selection list 0x2859:004 PROFIBUS
└ P515.05 Inval. proc.data Trouble [2] Selection list 0x2859:005 PROFIBUS
P515.xx PROFINET monit.
└ P515.01 WD elapsed Trouble [2] Selection list 0x2859:001 PROFINET
└ P515.02 Data exch.exited No response [0] Selection list 0x2859:002 PROFINET
└ P515.03 Invalid config Trouble [2] Selection list 0x2859:003 PROFINET
└ P515.04 Init. error Trouble [2] Selection list 0x2859:004 PROFINET
└ P515.05 Inval. proc.data Trouble [2] Selection list 0x2859:005 PROFINET
P516.00 CANopen status - - (Read only) 0x2308 CANopen
P516.00 EtherCAT status - - (Read only) 0x2368 EtherCAT
P516.00 CIP module stat. - - (Read only) 0x23A8 EtherNet/IP
P516.00 MBTCP modul. stat - - (Read only) 0x23B8 Modbus TCP
P516.xx PROFIBUS Status
└ P516.01 Bus status - - (Read only) 0x2348:001 PROFIBUS
└ P516.02 Watchdog status - - (Read only) 0x2348:002 PROFIBUS
* Default setting depending on the size. Firmware version 05.00.00.00

97
Commissioning
Keypad parameter list

Display code Short designation Default setting Setting range Address Category
P516.00 PROFINET status - - (Read only) 0x2388 PROFINET
P517.00 CAN contr.status - - (Read only) 0x2309 CANopen
P517.00 EtherCAT error - - (Read only) 0x2369 EtherCAT
P517.00 EtherN/IP status - - (Read only) 0x23A9 EtherNet/IP
P517.00 MBTCP netw stat - - (Read only) 0x23B9 Modbus TCP
P517.00 PROFIBUS error - - (Read only) 0x2349 PROFIBUS
P517.xx PROFINET error
└ P517.01 Error 1 - - (Read only) 0x2389:001 PROFINET
└ P517.02 Error2 - - (Read only) 0x2389:002 PROFINET
P518.00 CAN errorcounter - - (Read only) 0x230B CANopen
P519.xx Port diagnostics
└ P519.01 Port 1 - - (Read only) 0x23A5:001 EtherNet/IP
└ P519.02 Port 2 - - (Read only) 0x23A5:002 EtherNet/IP
P520.xx Cons. heartbeat
└ P520.00 Highest subindex - - (Read only) 0x1016:000 CANopen
└ P520.01 Cons. heartbeat1 0x00000000 0x00000000 ... 0x00FFFFFF 0x1016:001 CANopen
└ P520.02 Cons. heartbeat2 0x00000000 0x00000000 ... 0x00FFFFFF 0x1016:002 CANopen
└ P520.03 Cons. heartbeat3 0x00000000 0x00000000 ... 0x00FFFFFF 0x1016:003 CANopen
└ P520.04 Cons. heartbeat4 0x00000000 0x00000000 ... 0x00FFFFFF 0x1016:004 CANopen
P522.00 Prod. heartbeat 0 ms 0 ... 65535 ms 0x1017 CANopen
P530.xx Para. mapping
└ P530.01 ... 24 Parameter 1 ... Parameter 0x00000000 0x00000000 ... 0xFFFFFF00 0x232B:001 ... Modbus RTU
24 0x232B:024
P530.xx MBTCP param.mapp
└ P530.01 ... 24 Parameter 1 ... Parameter 0x00000000 0x00000000 ... 0xFFFFFFFF 0x23BB:001 ... Modbus TCP
24 0x23BB:024
P531.xx Reg. assigned
└ P531.01 ... 24 Register 1 ... Register 24 - - (Read only) 0x232C:001 ... Modbus RTU
0x232C:024
P531.xx Register assignm
└ P531.01 ... 24 Register 1 ... Register 24 - - (Read only) 0x23BC:001 ... Modbus TCP
0x23BC:024
P532.00 Verificationcode - - (Read only) 0x232D Modbus RTU
P532.00 Verificat. code - - (Read only) 0x23BD Modbus TCP
P540.xx RPDO1 config.
└ P540.01 COB-ID 0x00000200 0x00000000 ... 0xFFFFFFFF 0x1400:001 CANopen
└ P540.02 Transm. type 255 0 ... 255 0x1400:002 CANopen
└ P540.05 Event timer 100 ms 0 ... 65535 ms 0x1400:005 CANopen
P541.xx RPDO2 config.
└ P541.01 COB-ID 0x80000300 0x00000000 ... 0xFFFFFFFF 0x1401:001 CANopen
└ P541.02 Transm. type 255 0 ... 255 0x1401:002 CANopen
└ P541.05 Event timer 100 ms 0 ... 65535 ms 0x1401:005 CANopen
P542.xx RPDO3 config.
└ P542.01 COB-ID 0x80000400 0x00000000 ... 0xFFFFFFFF 0x1402:001 CANopen
└ P542.02 Transm. type 255 0 ... 255 0x1402:002 CANopen
└ P542.05 Event timer 100 ms 0 ... 65535 ms 0x1402:005 CANopen
P550.xx TPDO1 config.
└ P550.01 COB-ID 0x40000180 0x00000001 ... 0xFFFFFFFF 0x1800:001 CANopen
└ P550.02 Transm. type 255 0 ... 255 0x1800:002 CANopen
└ P550.03 Inhibit time 0.0 ms 0.0 ... 6553.5 ms 0x1800:003 CANopen
└ P550.05 Event timer 20 ms 0 ... 65535 ms 0x1800:005 CANopen
└ P550.05 NetWordIN5 0.0 % -100.0 ... 100.0 % 0x4008:005 general
P551.xx TPDO2 config.
└ P551.01 COB-ID 0xC0000280 0x00000001 ... 0xFFFFFFFF 0x1801:001 CANopen
* Default setting depending on the size. Firmware version 05.00.00.00

98
Commissioning
Keypad parameter list

Display code Short designation Default setting Setting range Address Category
└ P551.02 Transm. type 255 0 ... 255 0x1801:002 CANopen
└ P551.03 Inhibit time 0.0 ms 0.0 ... 6553.5 ms 0x1801:003 CANopen
└ P551.05 Event timer 0 ms 0 ... 65535 ms 0x1801:005 CANopen
P552.xx TPDO3 config.
└ P552.01 COB-ID 0xC0000380 0x00000001 ... 0xFFFFFFFF 0x1802:001 CANopen
└ P552.02 Transm. type 255 0 ... 255 0x1802:002 CANopen
└ P552.03 Inhibit time 0.0 ms 0.0 ... 6553.5 ms 0x1802:003 CANopen
└ P552.05 Event timer 0 ms 0 ... 65535 ms 0x1802:005 CANopen
P580.xx CAN statistics
└ P580.01 PDO1 received - - (Read only) 0x230A:001 CANopen
└ P580.02 PDO2 received - - (Read only) 0x230A:002 CANopen
└ P580.03 PDO3 received - - (Read only) 0x230A:003 CANopen
└ P580.05 PDO1 transmitted - - (Read only) 0x230A:005 CANopen
└ P580.06 PDO2 transmitted - - (Read only) 0x230A:006 CANopen
└ P580.07 PDO3 transmitted - - (Read only) 0x230A:007 CANopen
└ P580.09 SDO1 counter - - (Read only) 0x230A:009 CANopen
└ P580.10 SDO2 counter - - (Read only) 0x230A:010 CANopen
P580.xx Modbus statistic
└ P580.01 Mess. received - - (Read only) 0x232A:001 Modbus RTU
└ P580.02 Val. mess. rec. - - (Read only) 0x232A:002 Modbus RTU
└ P580.03 Mess. w. exc. - - (Read only) 0x232A:003 Modbus RTU
└ P580.04 Mess. w. errors - - (Read only) 0x232A:004 Modbus RTU
└ P580.05 Messages sent - - (Read only) 0x232A:005 Modbus RTU
P580.xx MBTCP statistics
└ P580.01 Rx messages - - (Read only) 0x23BA:001 Modbus TCP
└ P580.02 Valid Rx messag. - - (Read only) 0x23BA:002 Modbus TCP
└ P580.03 Mess. w. except - - (Read only) 0x23BA:003 Modbus TCP
└ P580.05 Tx messages - - (Read only) 0x23BA:005 Modbus TCP
P580.xx PROFIBUS counter
└ P580.01 Data cycles/sec. - - (Read only) 0x234A:001 PROFIBUS
└ P580.02 PRM events - - (Read only) 0x234A:002 PROFIBUS
└ P580.03 CFG events - - (Read only) 0x234A:003 PROFIBUS
└ P580.04 DIAG events - - (Read only) 0x234A:004 PROFIBUS
└ P580.05 C1 messages - - (Read only) 0x234A:005 PROFIBUS
└ P580.06 C2 messages - - (Read only) 0x234A:006 PROFIBUS
└ P580.07 WD events - - (Read only) 0x234A:007 PROFIBUS
└ P580.08 DataEx.event - - (Read only) 0x234A:008 PROFIBUS
└ P580.09 Tot. data cycles - - (Read only) 0x234A:009 PROFIBUS
P583.xx Rx data diagn.
└ P583.01 Rx data offset 0 0 ... 240 0x232E:001 Modbus RTU
└ P583.02 Last RxD byte0 - - (Read only) 0x232E:002 Modbus RTU
└ P583.03 Last RxD byte1 - - (Read only) 0x232E:003 Modbus RTU
└ P583.04 Last RxD byte2 - - (Read only) 0x232E:004 Modbus RTU
└ P583.05 Last RxD byte3 - - (Read only) 0x232E:005 Modbus RTU
└ P583.06 Last RxD byte4 - - (Read only) 0x232E:006 Modbus RTU
└ P583.07 Letzt RxD-Byte5 - - (Read only) 0x232E:007 Modbus RTU
└ P583.08 Last RxD byte6 - - (Read only) 0x232E:008 Modbus RTU
└ P583.09 Last RxD byte7 - - (Read only) 0x232E:009 Modbus RTU
└ P583.10 Last RxD byte8 - - (Read only) 0x232E:010 Modbus RTU
└ P583.11 Last RxD byte9 - - (Read only) 0x232E:011 Modbus RTU
└ P583.12 Last RxD byte10 - - (Read only) 0x232E:012 Modbus RTU
└ P583.13 Last RxD byte11 - - (Read only) 0x232E:013 Modbus RTU
└ P583.14 Last RxD byte12 - - (Read only) 0x232E:014 Modbus RTU
└ P583.15 Last RxD byte13 - - (Read only) 0x232E:015 Modbus RTU
* Default setting depending on the size. Firmware version 05.00.00.00

99
Commissioning
Keypad parameter list

Display code Short designation Default setting Setting range Address Category
└ P583.16 Last RxD byte14 - - (Read only) 0x232E:016 Modbus RTU
└ P583.17 Last RxD byte15 - - (Read only) 0x232E:017 Modbus RTU
P585.xx Tx data diagn.
└ P585.01 Tx data offset 0 0 ... 240 0x232F:001 Modbus RTU
└ P585.02 Last TxD byte0 - - (Read only) 0x232F:002 Modbus RTU
└ P585.03 Last TxD Byte1 - - (Read only) 0x232F:003 Modbus RTU
└ P585.04 Last TxD byte2 - - (Read only) 0x232F:004 Modbus RTU
└ P585.05 Last TxD byte3 - - (Read only) 0x232F:005 Modbus RTU
└ P585.06 Last TxD byte4 - - (Read only) 0x232F:006 Modbus RTU
└ P585.07 Last TxD byte5 - - (Read only) 0x232F:007 Modbus RTU
└ P585.08 Last TxD byte6 - - (Read only) 0x232F:008 Modbus RTU
└ P585.09 Last TxD byte7 - - (Read only) 0x232F:009 Modbus RTU
└ P585.10 Last TxD byte8 - - (Read only) 0x232F:010 Modbus RTU
└ P585.11 Last TxD byte9 - - (Read only) 0x232F:011 Modbus RTU
└ P585.12 Last TxD byte10 - - (Read only) 0x232F:012 Modbus RTU
└ P585.13 Last TxD byte11 - - (Read only) 0x232F:013 Modbus RTU
└ P585.14 Last TxD byte12 - - (Read only) 0x232F:014 Modbus RTU
└ P585.15 Last TxD byte13 - - (Read only) 0x232F:015 Modbus RTU
└ P585.16 Last TxD byte14 - - (Read only) 0x232F:016 Modbus RTU
└ P585.17 Last TxD byte15 - - (Read only) 0x232F:017 Modbus RTU
P585.xx MBTCP Tx/Rx diag
└ P585.01 Rx offset 0 0 ... 240 0x23BE:001 Modbus TCP
└ P585.02 Last Rx message - - (Read only) 0x23BE:002 Modbus TCP
└ P585.03 Tx offset 0 0 ... 240 0x23BE:003 Modbus TCP
└ P585.04 Last Tx message - - (Read only) 0x23BE:004 Modbus TCP
P590.xx NetWordINx
└ P590.01 NetWordIN1 0x0000 0x0000 ... 0xFFFF 0x4008:001 general
└ P590.02 NetWordIN2 0x0000 0x0000 ... 0xFFFF 0x4008:002 general
└ P590.03 NetWordIN3 0.0 % 0.0 ... 100.0 % 0x4008:003 general
└ P590.04 NetWordIN4 0.0 % 0.0 ... 100.0 % 0x4008:004 general
P591.xx NetWordOUTx
└ P591.01 NetWordOUT1 - - (Read only) 0x400A:001 general
└ P591.02 NetWordOUT2 - - (Read only) 0x400A:002 general
P592.xx Process data IN
└ P592.01 AC control word 0x0000 0x0000 ... 0xFFFF 0x400B:001 general
└ P592.02 LECOM ctrl word 0x0000 0x0000 ... 0xFFFF 0x400B:002 general
└ P592.03 Net.freq. 0.1 0.0 Hz 0.0 ... 599.0 Hz 0x400B:003 general
└ P592.04 Net.setp. speed 0 rpm 0 ... 50000 rpm 0x400B:004 general
└ P592.05 Net.freq. 0.01 0.00 Hz 0.00 ... 599.00 Hz 0x400B:005 general
└ P592.06 Veloc. mode setp 0.0 Hz -599.0 ... 599.0 Hz 0x400B:006 general
└ P592.07 PID setpoint 0.00 PID unit -300.00 ... 300.00 PID unit 0x400B:007 general
└ P592.08 Torque mode setp 0 Nm -32768 ... 32767 Nm 0x400B:008 general
└ P592.09 Torque scaling 0 -128 ... 127 0x400B:009 general
└ P592.11 PID feedback 0.00 PID unit -300.00 ... 300.00 PID unit 0x400B:011 general
└ P592.12 NetSetfreq0.02Hz 0 Hz -29950 ... 29950 Hz 0x400B:012 general
└ P592.13 N.FrqSet+/-16384 0 -32768 ... 32767 0x400B:013 general
P593.xx Process data OUT
└ P593.01 AC status word - - (Read only) 0x400C:001 general
└ P593.02 LECOM stat. word - - (Read only) 0x400C:002 general
└ P593.03 Frequency (0.1) x.x Hz - (Read only) 0x400C:003 general
└ P593.04 Motor speed x rpm - (Read only) 0x400C:004 general
└ P593.05 Drive status - - (Read only) 0x400C:005 general
└ P593.06 Frequency 0.01 x.xx Hz - (Read only) 0x400C:006 general
└ P593.07 Torque scaled - - (Read only) 0x400C:007 general
* Default setting depending on the size. Firmware version 05.00.00.00

100
Commissioning
Keypad parameter list

Display code Short designation Default setting Setting range Address Category
└ P593.08 Frequency 0.02Hz Hz - (Read only) 0x400C:008 general
└ P593.09 Freq. [+/-16384] - - (Read only) 0x400C:009 general
P595.xx PAM monitoring
└ P595.02 Keep alive reg. 0 0 ... 65535 0x2552:002 general
└ P595.03 Time-out time 10.0 s 0.0 ... 6553.5 s 0x2552:003 general
└ P595.04 Reaction No response [0] Selection list 0x2552:004 general
└ P595.05 Action No action [0] Selection list 0x2552:005 general
└ P595.06 PAM status - - (Read only) 0x2552:006 general
└ P595.07 WLAN reset t.out 0s 0 ... 65535 s 0x2552:007 general
P600.xx PID setup
└ P600.01 Operating mode Inhibited [0] Selection list 0x4020:001 general
└ P600.02 PID process var. Analog input 1 [1] Selection list 0x4020:002 general
└ P600.03 PID speed range 100 % 0 ... 100 % 0x4020:003 general
└ P600.04 PID line speed w/o speed.add. [0] Selection list 0x4020:004 general
└ P600.05 Min speed lim -100.0 % -100.0 ... 100.0 % 0x4020:005 general
└ P600.06 Max speed lim 100.0 % -100.0 ... 100.0 % 0x4020:006 general
P601.00 PID P-component 5.0 % 0.0 ... 1000.0 % 0x4048 general
P602.00 PID I- component 400 ms 10 ... 6000 ms 0x4049 general
P603.00 PID D-component 0.0 s 0.0 ... 20.0 s 0x404A general
P604.00 PID setp.ramp 20.0 s 0.0 ... 100.0 s 0x404B general
P605.xx PID setp. limit
└ P605.01 Minimum setpoint -300.00 PID unit -300.00 ... 300.00 PID unit 0x404E:001 general
└ P605.02 Maximum setpoint 300.00 PID unit -300.00 ... 300.00 PID unit 0x404E:002 general
P606.xx PID speed op.
└ P606.01 Accel. time 1.0 s 0.0 ... 3600.0 s 0x4021:001 general
└ P606.02 Decel. time 1.0 s 0.0 ... 3600.0 s 0x4021:002 general
P607.xx PID influence
└ P607.01 Activation time 5.0 s 0.0 ... 999.9 s 0x404C:001 general
└ P607.02 Mask out time 5.0 s 0.0 ... 999.9 s 0x404C:002 general
P608.xx PID alarms
└ P608.01 MIN alarm thrsh. 0.00 PID unit -300.00 ... 300.00 PID unit 0x404D:001 general
└ P608.02 MAX alarm thrsh. 100.00 PID unit -300.00 ... 300.00 PID unit 0x404D:002 general
└ P608.03 Bandw. feedback 2.00 % 0.00 ... 100.00 % 0x404D:003 general
P610.xx PID sleep mode
└ P610.01 Activation Disabled [0] Selection list 0x4023:001 general
└ P610.02 Stop method Coasting [0] Selection list 0x4023:002 general
└ P610.03 Freq. thresh. 0.0 Hz 0.0 ... 599.0 Hz 0x4023:003 general
└ P610.04 Feedback thresh. 0.00 PID unit -300.00 ... 300.00 PID unit 0x4023:004 general
└ P610.05 Delay time 0.0 s 0.0 ... 300.0 s 0x4023:005 general
└ P610.06 Recovery Setp. > P610.3 [0] Selection list 0x4023:006 general
└ P610.07 Bandwidth 0.00 PID unit 0.00 ... 300.00 PID unit 0x4023:007 general
└ P610.08 Recovery thresh. 0.00 PID unit -300.00 ... 300.00 PID unit 0x4023:008 general
P615.xx Auto-rinsing
└ P615.01 Rinsing in idle Inhibited [0] Selection list 0x4024:001 general
└ P615.02 Rinse interval 30.0 min 0.0 ... 6000.0 min 0x4024:002 general
└ P615.03 Rinse speed 0.0 Hz -599.0 ... 599.0 Hz 0x4024:003 general
└ P615.04 Rinse period 0.0 s 0.0 ... 6000.0 s 0x4024:004 general
P700.xx Device commands
└ P700.01 Load def. sett. Off / ready [0] Selection list 0x2022:001 general
└ P700.03 Save user data Off / ready [0] Selection list 0x2022:003 general
└ P700.04 Load user data Off / ready [0] Selection list 0x2022:004 general
└ P700.05 Load OEM data Off / ready [0] Selection list 0x2022:005 general
└ P700.06 Save OEM data Off / ready [0] Selection list 0x2022:006 general
└ P700.07 Load par. set 1 Off / ready [0] Selection list 0x2022:007 general
* Default setting depending on the size. Firmware version 05.00.00.00

101
Commissioning
Keypad parameter list

Display code Short designation Default setting Setting range Address Category
└ P700.08 Load par. set 2 Off / ready [0] Selection list 0x2022:008 general
└ P700.09 Load par. set 3 Off / ready [0] Selection list 0x2022:009 general
└ P700.10 Load par. set 4 Off / ready [0] Selection list 0x2022:010 general
└ P700.11 Save par. set 1 Off / ready [0] Selection list 0x2022:011 general
└ P700.12 Save par. set 2 Off / ready [0] Selection list 0x2022:012 general
└ P700.13 Save par. set 3 Off / ready [0] Selection list 0x2022:013 general
└ P700.14 Save par. set 4 Off / ready [0] Selection list 0x2022:014 general
└ P700.15 Delete logbook Off / ready [0] Selection list 0x2022:015 general
P701.00 KP setp. incr. 1 1 ... 100 0x2862 general
P702.00 Scal.speed fact. 0.00 0.00 ... 650.00 0x4002 general
P703.00 KP status displ. 0x00000000 0x00000000 ... 0xFFFFFF00 0x2864 general
P704.xx DC braking
└ P704.01 Current 0.0 % 0.0 ... 200.0 % 0x2B84:001 general
└ P704.02 Hold time autom. 0.0 s 0.0 ... 1000.0 s 0x2B84:002 general
└ P704.03 Threshold autom. 0.0 Hz 0.0 ... 599.0 Hz 0x2B84:003 general
└ P704.04 Demagnet. time 100 % 0 ... 150 % 0x2B84:004 general
└ P704.05 Def. demag. time x ms - (Read only) 0x2B84:005 general
└ P704.06 DCbrk/inv.disab 0 0 ... 1 0x2B84:006 general
P705.00 KP language English [1] Selection list 0x2863 general
P706.xx Brake management
└ P706.01 Operating mode Rfg stop (RFGS) [1] Selection list 0x2541:001 general
└ P706.02 Active threshold xV - (Read only) 0x2541:002 general
└ P706.03 Red. threshold 0V 0 ... 100 V 0x2541:003 general
└ P706.04 Add.frequency 0.0 Hz 0.0 ... 10.0 Hz 0x2541:004 general
└ P706.05 Del.overr.time 2.0 s 0.0 ... 60.0 s 0x2541:005 general
└ P706.06 Brk. res. behav Off:disabl+error [0] Selection list 0x2541:006 general
P707.xx Brake resistor
└ P707.02 Resistance value 180.0 Ω * 0.0 ... 500.0 Ω 0x2550:002 general
└ P707.03 Rated power 50 W * 0 ... 800000 W 0x2550:003 general
└ P707.04 Maximum heat 8.0 kWs * 0.0 ... 100000.0 kWs 0x2550:004 general
└ P707.07 Thermal load x.x % - (Read only) 0x2550:007 general
└ P707.08 Warning thresh. 90.0 % 50.0 ... 150.0 % 0x2550:008 general
└ P707.09 Error thresh. 100.0 % 50.0 ... 150.0 % 0x2550:009 general
└ P707.10 Warning resp. Warning [1] Selection list 0x2550:010 general
└ P707.11 Error response Fault [3] Selection list 0x2550:011 general
P708.xx Keypad setup
└ P708.01 CTRL&F/R keys CTRL&F/R Enable [1] Selection list 0x2602:001 general
└ P708.02 Select rot.dir. Forward [0] Selection list 0x2602:002 general
└ P708.03 Keypad Full Ctrl Off [0] Selection list 0x2602:003 general
P710.xx Load loss detect
└ P710.01 Threshold 0.0 % 0.0 ... 200.0 % 0x4006:001 general
└ P710.02 Deceleration 0.0 s 0.0 ... 300.0 s 0x4006:002 general
P711.xx Position counter
└ P711.01 Signal source Disbled [0] Selection list 0x2C49:001 general
└ P711.02 Reset mode Rising edge [0] Selection list 0x2C49:002 general
└ P711.03 Actual position - - (Read only) 0x2C49:003 general
P712.xx Brake control
└ P712.01 Brake mode Off [2] Selection list 0x2820:001 general
└ P712.02 Closing time 100 ms 0 ... 10000 ms 0x2820:002 general
└ P712.03 Opening time 100 ms 0 ... 10000 ms 0x2820:003 general
└ P712.07 Closing thresh. 0.2 Hz 0.0 ... 599.0 Hz 0x2820:007 general
└ P712.08 Holding load 0.0 % -500.0 ... 500.0 % 0x2820:008 general
└ P712.12 ClosingThr delay 0 ms 0 ... 10000 ms 0x2820:012 general
└ P712.13 HoldLoad ramptim 0 ms 0 ... 100 ms 0x2820:013 general
* Default setting depending on the size. Firmware version 05.00.00.00

102
Commissioning
Keypad parameter list

Display code Short designation Default setting Setting range Address Category
└ P712.15 Brake status - - (Read only) 0x2820:015 general
P718.xx Flying restart
└ P718.01 Current 30 % 0 ... 100 % 0x2BA1:001 MCTRL
└ P718.02 Start frequency 20.0 Hz -599.0 ... 599.0 Hz 0x2BA1:002 MCTRL
└ P718.03 Restart time 5911 ms * 1 ... 60000 ms 0x2BA1:003 MCTRL
└ P718.08 Fl.res.frequency x.x Hz - (Read only) 0x2BA1:008 MCTRL
P721.xx Mains fail. ctrl
└ P721.01 Enable function Disabled [0] Selection list 0x2D66:001 general
└ P721.02 DC-bus act.level 0%* 60 ... 90 % 0x2D66:002 general
└ P721.03 Gain V-ctrl 0.01000 Hz/V 0.00001 ... 0.50000 Hz/V 0x2D66:003 general
└ P721.04 Res. time V-ctrl 20 ms 5 ... 2000 ms 0x2D66:004 general
└ P721.05 DC voltage setp. 100 % 80 ... 110 % 0x2D66:005 general
└ P721.06 Setp. ramp 20 ms 1 ... 16000 ms 0x2D66:006 general
└ P721.07 Clear time 20 ms 1 ... 60000 ms 0x2D66:007 general
└ P721.08 Restart level 0.0 Hz 0.0 ... 599.0 Hz 0x2D66:008 general
└ P721.09 RERT:Status - - (Read only) 0x2D66:009 general
P730.00 PIN1 protection 0 -1 ... 9999 0x203D general
P731.00 PIN2 protection 0 -1 ... 9999 0x203E general
P732.00 Auto-Save EPM Inhibit [0] Selection list 0x2829 general
P740.xx Favorites sett.
└ P740.01 Parameter 1 0x2DDD0000 0x00000000 ... 0xFFFFFF00 0x261C:001 general
└ P740.02 Parameter 2 0x60780000 0x00000000 ... 0xFFFFFF00 0x261C:002 general
└ P740.03 Parameter 3 0x2D890000 0x00000000 ... 0xFFFFFF00 0x261C:003 general
└ P740.04 Parameter 4 0x603F0000 0x00000000 ... 0xFFFFFF00 0x261C:004 general
└ P740.05 Parameter 5 0x28240000 0x00000000 ... 0xFFFFFF00 0x261C:005 general
└ P740.06 Parameter 6 0x28600100 0x00000000 ... 0xFFFFFF00 0x261C:006 general
└ P740.07 Parameter 7 0x28380100 0x00000000 ... 0xFFFFFF00 0x261C:007 general
└ P740.08 Parameter 8 0x28380300 0x00000000 ... 0xFFFFFF00 0x261C:008 general
└ P740.09 Parameter 9 0x25400100 0x00000000 ... 0xFFFFFF00 0x261C:009 general
└ P740.10 Parameter 10 0x29150000 0x00000000 ... 0xFFFFFF00 0x261C:010 general
└ P740.11 Parameter 11 0x29160000 0x00000000 ... 0xFFFFFF00 0x261C:011 general
└ P740.12 Parameter 12 0x29170000 0x00000000 ... 0xFFFFFF00 0x261C:012 general
└ P740.13 Parameter 13 0x29180000 0x00000000 ... 0xFFFFFF00 0x261C:013 general
└ P740.14 Parameter 14 0x2C000000 0x00000000 ... 0xFFFFFF00 0x261C:014 general
└ P740.15 Parameter 15 0x2B000000 0x00000000 ... 0xFFFFFF00 0x261C:015 general
└ P740.16 Parameter 16 0x2B010100 0x00000000 ... 0xFFFFFF00 0x261C:016 general
└ P740.17 Parameter 17 0x2B010200 0x00000000 ... 0xFFFFFF00 0x261C:017 general
└ P740.18 Parameter 18 0x283A0000 0x00000000 ... 0xFFFFFF00 0x261C:018 general
└ P740.19 Parameter 19 0x29390000 0x00000000 ... 0xFFFFFF00 0x261C:019 general
└ P740.20 Parameter 20 0x2D430100 0x00000000 ... 0xFFFFFF00 0x261C:020 general
└ P740.21 Parameter 21 0x2D4B0100 0x00000000 ... 0xFFFFFF00 0x261C:021 general
└ P740.22 Parameter 22 0x2B120100 0x00000000 ... 0xFFFFFF00 0x261C:022 general
└ P740.23 Parameter 23 0x60750000 0x00000000 ... 0xFFFFFF00 0x261C:023 general
└ P740.24 Parameter 24 0x60730000 0x00000000 ... 0xFFFFFF00 0x261C:024 general
└ P740.25 Parameter 25 0x26310100 0x00000000 ... 0xFFFFFF00 0x261C:025 general
└ P740.26 Parameter 26 0x26310200 0x00000000 ... 0xFFFFFF00 0x261C:026 general
└ P740.27 Parameter 27 0x26310300 0x00000000 ... 0xFFFFFF00 0x261C:027 general
└ P740.28 Parameter 28 0x26310400 0x00000000 ... 0xFFFFFF00 0x261C:028 general
└ P740.29 Parameter 29 0x26310500 0x00000000 ... 0xFFFFFF00 0x261C:029 general
└ P740.30 Parameter 30 0x26310600 0x00000000 ... 0xFFFFFF00 0x261C:030 general
└ P740.31 Parameter 31 0x26310700 0x00000000 ... 0xFFFFFF00 0x261C:031 general
└ P740.32 Parameter 32 0x26310800 0x00000000 ... 0xFFFFFF00 0x261C:032 general
└ P740.33 Parameter 33 0x26310900 0x00000000 ... 0xFFFFFF00 0x261C:033 general
└ P740.34 Parameter 34 0x26310D00 0x00000000 ... 0xFFFFFF00 0x261C:034 general
* Default setting depending on the size. Firmware version 05.00.00.00

103
Commissioning
Keypad parameter list

Display code Short designation Default setting Setting range Address Category
└ P740.35 Parameter 35 0x26311200 0x00000000 ... 0xFFFFFF00 0x261C:035 general
└ P740.36 Parameter 36 0x26311300 0x00000000 ... 0xFFFFFF00 0x261C:036 general
└ P740.37 Parameter 37 0x26311400 0x00000000 ... 0xFFFFFF00 0x261C:037 general
└ P740.38 Parameter 38 0x26340100 0x00000000 ... 0xFFFFFF00 0x261C:038 general
└ P740.39 Parameter 39 0x26340200 0x00000000 ... 0xFFFFFF00 0x261C:039 general
└ P740.40 Parameter 40 0x26360100 0x00000000 ... 0xFFFFFF00 0x261C:040 general
└ P740.41 Parameter 41 0x26360200 0x00000000 ... 0xFFFFFF00 0x261C:041 general
└ P740.42 Parameter 42 0x26360300 0x00000000 ... 0xFFFFFF00 0x261C:042 general
└ P740.43 Parameter 43 0x26390100 0x00000000 ... 0xFFFFFF00 0x261C:043 general
└ P740.44 Parameter 44 0x26390200 0x00000000 ... 0xFFFFFF00 0x261C:044 general
└ P740.45 Parameter 45 0x26390300 0x00000000 ... 0xFFFFFF00 0x261C:045 general
└ P740.46 Parameter 46 0x26390400 0x00000000 ... 0xFFFFFF00 0x261C:046 general
└ P740.47 Parameter 47 0x29110100 0x00000000 ... 0xFFFFFF00 0x261C:047 general
└ P740.48 Parameter 48 0x29110200 0x00000000 ... 0xFFFFFF00 0x261C:048 general
└ P740.49 Parameter 49 0x29110300 0x00000000 ... 0xFFFFFF00 0x261C:049 general
└ P740.50 Parameter 50 0x29110400 0x00000000 ... 0xFFFFFF00 0x261C:050 general
P750.xx Param.set setup
└ P750.01 ... 32 Parameter 1 ... Parameter 0x00000000 0x00000000 ... 0xFFFFFF00 0x4041:001 ... general
32 0x4041:032
P751.xx Par. value set 1
└ P751.01 ... 32 Set 1 - Value 1 ... Set 1 - 0 -2147483648 ... 2147483647 0x4042:001 ... general
Value 32 0x4042:032
P752.xx Par. value set 2
└ P752.01 ... 32 Set 2 - Value 1 ... Set 2 - 0 -2147483648 ... 2147483647 0x4043:001 ... general
Value 32 0x4043:032
P753.xx Par. value set 3
└ P753.01 ... 32 Set 3 - Value 1 ... Set 3 - 0 -2147483648 ... 2147483647 0x4044:001 ... general
Value 32 0x4044:032
P754.xx Par. value set 4
└ P754.01 ... 32 Set 4 - Value 1 ... Set 4 - 0 -2147483648 ... 2147483647 0x4045:001 ... general
Value 32 0x4045:032
P755.00 PSet activation On op. disabled [0] Selection list 0x4046 general
P756.xx PSet error msg.
└ P756.01 Status - - (Read only) 0x4047:001 general
└ P756.02 List entry - - (Read only) 0x4047:002 general
P760.xx Fault config.
└ P760.02 Restart delay 3.0 s 0.0 ... 1000.0 s 0x2839:002 general
└ P760.03 Restart counter 5 0 ... 255 0x2839:003 general
└ P760.04 Tro.count r.time 40.0 s 0.1 ... 3600.0 s 0x2839:004 general
└ P760.05 Trouble counter - - (Read only) 0x2839:005 general
P780.00 CiA: Statusword - - (Read only) 0x6041 general
P781.00 Target velocity 0 rpm -32768 ... 32767 rpm 0x6042 general
P782.00 Velocity demand x rpm - (Read only) 0x6043 general
P783.00 Velocity actual x rpm - (Read only) 0x6044 general
P784.xx Vel. min max
└ P784.01 Vel. min amount 0 rpm 0 ... 480000 rpm 0x6046:001 general
└ P784.02 Vel. max amount 2147483647 rpm 0 ... 2147483647 rpm 0x6046:002 general
P785.xx Vel.acceleration
└ P785.01 Delta speed 3000 rpm 0 ... 2147483647 rpm 0x6048:001 general
└ P785.02 Delta time 10 s 0 ... 65535 s 0x6048:002 general
P786.xx Vel.deceleration
└ P786.01 Delta speed 3000 rpm 0 ... 2147483647 rpm 0x6049:001 general
└ P786.02 Delta time 10 s 0 ... 65535 s 0x6049:002 general
P788.00 Modes of op. dis - - (Read only) 0x6061 general
P789.00 Supported modes - - (Read only) 0x6502 general
* Default setting depending on the size. Firmware version 05.00.00.00

104
Commissioning
Keypad parameter list

Display code Short designation Default setting Setting range Address Category
P790.00 Quick stop dec. 546000 pos. unit/s² 0 ... 2147483647 pos. unit/s² 0x6085 general
P791.00 Fault reaction Coasting [0] Selection list 0x605E general
P800.00 Sequencer mode Disabled [0] Selection list 0x4025 general
P801.xx Segment 1
└ P801.01 Frequency setp. 0.0 Hz -599.0 ... 599.0 Hz 0x4026:001 general
└ P801.02 Accel./decel. 5.0 s 0.0 ... 3600.0 s 0x4026:002 general
└ P801.03 Time 0.0 s 0.0 ... 100000.0 s 0x4026:003 general
└ P801.04 Digital outp. 0 0 ... 255 0x4026:004 general
└ P801.05 Analog outp. 0.00 VDC 0.00 ... 10.00 VDC 0x4026:005 general
└ P801.06 PID setp. 0.00 PID unit -300.00 ... 300.00 PID unit 0x4026:006 general
└ P801.07 Torque setp. 100.0 % -400.0 ... 400.0 % 0x4026:007 general
P802.xx Segment 2
└ P802.01 Frequency setp. 0.0 Hz -599.0 ... 599.0 Hz 0x4027:001 general
└ P802.02 Accel./decel. 5.0 s 0.0 ... 3600.0 s 0x4027:002 general
└ P802.03 Time 0.0 s 0.0 ... 100000.0 s 0x4027:003 general
└ P802.04 Digital outp. 0 0 ... 255 0x4027:004 general
└ P802.05 Analog outp. 0.00 VDC 0.00 ... 10.00 VDC 0x4027:005 general
└ P802.06 PID setp. 0.00 PID unit -300.00 ... 300.00 PID unit 0x4027:006 general
└ P802.07 Torque setp. 100.0 % -400.0 ... 400.0 % 0x4027:007 general
P803.xx Segment 3
└ P803.01 Frequency setp. 0.0 Hz -599.0 ... 599.0 Hz 0x4028:001 general
└ P803.02 Accel./decel. 5.0 s 0.0 ... 3600.0 s 0x4028:002 general
└ P803.03 Time 0.0 s 0.0 ... 100000.0 s 0x4028:003 general
└ P803.04 Digital outp. 0 0 ... 255 0x4028:004 general
└ P803.05 Analog outp. 0.00 VDC 0.00 ... 10.00 VDC 0x4028:005 general
└ P803.06 PID setp. 0.00 PID unit -300.00 ... 300.00 PID unit 0x4028:006 general
└ P803.07 Torque setp. 100.0 % -400.0 ... 400.0 % 0x4028:007 general
P804.xx Segment 4
└ P804.01 Frequency setp. 0.0 Hz -599.0 ... 599.0 Hz 0x4029:001 general
└ P804.02 Accel./decel. 5.0 s 0.0 ... 3600.0 s 0x4029:002 general
└ P804.03 Time 0.0 s 0.0 ... 100000.0 s 0x4029:003 general
└ P804.04 Digital outp. 0 0 ... 255 0x4029:004 general
└ P804.05 Analog outp. 0.00 VDC 0.00 ... 10.00 VDC 0x4029:005 general
└ P804.06 PID setp. 0.00 PID unit -300.00 ... 300.00 PID unit 0x4029:006 general
└ P804.07 Torque setp. 100.0 % -400.0 ... 400.0 % 0x4029:007 general
P805.xx Segment 5
└ P805.01 Frequency setp. 0.0 Hz -599.0 ... 599.0 Hz 0x402A:001 general
└ P805.02 Accel./decel. 5.0 s 0.0 ... 3600.0 s 0x402A:002 general
└ P805.03 Time 0.0 s 0.0 ... 100000.0 s 0x402A:003 general
└ P805.04 Digital outp. 0 0 ... 255 0x402A:004 general
└ P805.05 Analog outp. 0.00 VDC 0.00 ... 10.00 VDC 0x402A:005 general
└ P805.06 PID setp. 0.00 PID unit -300.00 ... 300.00 PID unit 0x402A:006 general
└ P805.07 Torque setp. 100.0 % -400.0 ... 400.0 % 0x402A:007 general
P806.xx Segment 6
└ P806.01 Frequency setp. 0.0 Hz -599.0 ... 599.0 Hz 0x402B:001 general
└ P806.02 Accel./decel. 5.0 s 0.0 ... 3600.0 s 0x402B:002 general
└ P806.03 Time 0.0 s 0.0 ... 100000.0 s 0x402B:003 general
└ P806.04 Digital outp. 0 0 ... 255 0x402B:004 general
└ P806.05 Analog outp. 0.00 VDC 0.00 ... 10.00 VDC 0x402B:005 general
└ P806.06 PID setp. 0.00 PID unit -300.00 ... 300.00 PID unit 0x402B:006 general
└ P806.07 Torque setp. 100.0 % -400.0 ... 400.0 % 0x402B:007 general
P807.xx Segment 7
└ P807.01 Frequency setp. 0.0 Hz -599.0 ... 599.0 Hz 0x402C:001 general
└ P807.02 Accel./decel. 5.0 s 0.0 ... 3600.0 s 0x402C:002 general
* Default setting depending on the size. Firmware version 05.00.00.00

105
Commissioning
Keypad parameter list

Display code Short designation Default setting Setting range Address Category
└ P807.03 Time 0.0 s 0.0 ... 100000.0 s 0x402C:003 general
└ P807.04 Digital outp. 0 0 ... 255 0x402C:004 general
└ P807.05 Analog outp. 0.00 VDC 0.00 ... 10.00 VDC 0x402C:005 general
└ P807.06 PID setp. 0.00 PID unit -300.00 ... 300.00 PID unit 0x402C:006 general
└ P807.07 Torque setp. 100.0 % -400.0 ... 400.0 % 0x402C:007 general
P808.xx Segment 8
└ P808.01 Frequency setp. 0.0 Hz -599.0 ... 599.0 Hz 0x402D:001 general
└ P808.02 Accel./decel. 5.0 s 0.0 ... 3600.0 s 0x402D:002 general
└ P808.03 Time 0.0 s 0.0 ... 100000.0 s 0x402D:003 general
└ P808.04 Digital outp. 0 0 ... 255 0x402D:004 general
└ P808.05 Analog outp. 0.00 VDC 0.00 ... 10.00 VDC 0x402D:005 general
└ P808.06 PID setp. 0.00 PID unit -300.00 ... 300.00 PID unit 0x402D:006 general
└ P808.07 Torque setp. 100.0 % -400.0 ... 400.0 % 0x402D:007 general
P820.00 StartOfSeq. mode Restart sequencr [0] Selection list 0x4040 general
P822.xx End segment
└ P822.01 Frequency setp. 0.0 Hz -599.0 ... 599.0 Hz 0x402E:001 general
└ P822.02 Accel./decel. 5.0 s 0.0 ... 3600.0 s 0x402E:002 general
└ P822.03 Time 0.0 s 0.0 ... 100000.0 s 0x402E:003 general
└ P822.04 Digital outp. 0 0 ... 255 0x402E:004 general
└ P822.05 Analog outp. 0.00 VDC 0.00 ... 10.00 VDC 0x402E:005 general
└ P822.06 PID setp. 0.00 PID unit -300.00 ... 300.00 PID unit 0x402E:006 general
└ P822.07 Torque setp. 100.0 % -400.0 ... 400.0 % 0x402E:007 general
P824.00 End of seq. mode Keep running [0] Selection list 0x402F general
P830.xx Sequence 1
└ P830.01 ... 16 Step 1 ... Step 16 Skip step [0] Selection list 0x4030:001 ... general
0x4030:016
P831.00 Cycl. sequence 1 1 1 ... 65535 0x4031 general
P835.xx Sequence 2
└ P835.01 ... 16 Step 1 ... Step 16 Skip step [0] Selection list 0x4032:001 ... general
0x4032:016
P836.00 Cycl. sequence 2 1 1 ... 65535 0x4033 general
P840.xx Sequence 3
└ P840.01 ... 16 Step 1 ... Step 16 Skip step [0] Selection list 0x4034:001 ... general
0x4034:016
P841.00 Cycl. sequence 3 1 1 ... 65535 0x4035 general
P845.xx Sequence 4
└ P845.01 ... 16 Step 1 ... Step 16 Skip step [0] Selection list 0x4036:001 ... general
0x4036:016
P846.00 Cycl. sequence 4 1 1 ... 65535 0x4037 general
P850.xx Sequence 5
└ P850.01 ... 16 Step 1 ... Step 16 Skip step [0] Selection list 0x4038:001 ... general
0x4038:016
P851.00 Cycl. sequence 5 1 1 ... 65535 0x4039 general
P855.xx Sequence 6
└ P855.01 ... 16 Step 1 ... Step 16 Skip step [0] Selection list 0x403A:001 ... general
0x403A:016
P856.00 Cycl. sequence 6 1 1 ... 65535 0x403B general
P860.xx Sequence 7
└ P860.01 ... 16 Step 1 ... Step 16 Skip step [0] Selection list 0x403C:001 ... general
0x403C:016
P861.00 Cycl. sequence 7 1 1 ... 65535 0x403D general
P865.xx Sequence 8
└ P865.01 ... 16 Step 1 ... Step 16 Skip step [0] Selection list 0x403E:001 ... general
0x403E:016
P866.00 Cycl. sequence 8 1 1 ... 65535 0x403F general
* Default setting depending on the size. Firmware version 05.00.00.00

106
Commissioning
Save parameter settings in the memory module
Save parameter settings with »EASY Starter«

5.5 Save parameter settings in the memory module

5.5.1 Save parameter settings with keypad

If one parameter setting has been changed with the keypad but has not been saved in the
memory module with mains failure protection, the SET display is blinking.
In order to save parameter settings in the user memory of the memory module, press the key-
pad enter key longer than 3 s.

VEL:FLEX:AIN1 Saving Parameters Parameters Saved

000STOP
LOC REM MAN AUTO SET
>3s
SAVINGP
LOC REM MAN AUTO SET
SPSAVED
LOC REM MAN AUTO SET

5.5.2 Save parameter settings with »EASY Starter«

If a parameter setting has been changed with the »EASY Starter« but not yet saved in the
memory module with mains failure protection, the status line of the »EASY Starter« displays
the note "The parameter set was changed".
In order to save parameter settings in the user memory of the memory module,
• click the button in the toolbar of the »EASY Starter« or
• press the function key <F6> or
• execute the device command "Save user data": 0x2022:003 (P700.03) = "On / start [1]".

107
Diagnostics and fault elimination
LED status display

6 Diagnostics and fault elimination

6.1 LED status display
The "RDY" and "ERR" LED status displays on the front of the inverter provide some quick infor-
mation about certain operating states.
"RDY" LED (blue) "ERR" LED (red) Status/meaning
off off No supply voltage.
Initialisation (inverter is started.)
on on
Safe torque off (STO) active.
off
4Safe torque off (STO) ^ 523
blinking (1 Hz) Safe torque off (STO) active, warning active.
blinking fast (4 Hz)
off Inverter inhibited.
Inverter disabled, warning active.
blinking fast (4 Hz) 4Error handling ^ 139
Inverter disabled, error active.
on 4Error handling ^ 139
blinking (2 Hz) Inverter inhibited, no DC-bus voltage.
lit every 1.5 s for a
short time
USB module is connected, 5-V supply voltage for the USB module is available.
on for a short time
every 1 s
Inverter enabled.
off
The motor rotates according to the specified setpoint or quick stop active.
Inverter enabled, warning active.
on blinking fast (4 Hz) The motor rotates according to the specified setpoint or quick stop active.
Inverter enabled, quick stop as response to fault active.
blinking (1 Hz) 4Error handling ^ 139
Firmware update active.
4Firmware download ^ 501
Both LEDs are blinking in a rapidly alternating
mode
"Visual tracking" function is active.
4Optical device identification ^ 162
Both LEDs are blinking in a very rapidly synchro-
nous mode

108
Diagnostics and fault elimination
Diagnostics parameter

6.2 Diagnostics parameter

The inverter provides many diagnostic parameters which are helpful for operation, mainte-
nance, error diagnosis, error correction, etc.
• In the following overview the most common diagnostic parameters are listed. For the key-
pad you can find these diagnostic parameters in group 1.
• Further parameters for more specific diagnostic purposes are described in the following
subchapters.
• The diagnostic parameters can only be read and cannot be written to.

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x2030 CRC parameter set Display of the 32-bit hash sum for the integrity check of the parameter
• Read only set.
0x2B0B Frequency setpoint Display of the actual frequency setpoint that is internally transferred to
• Read only: x.x Hz the motor control (after scaling and ramp generator).
• From version 03.00
0x2B0E Frequency setpoint Display of the frequency setpoint currently assigned.
(P102.00) (Freq. setpoint) • Depending on the present operating conditions, this value may differ
• Read only: x.x Hz from the current output frequency 0x2DDD (P100.00).
0x2B0F VFC output frequency Display of the current output frequency at V/f operation.
• Read only: x.x Hz
0x2D4F Motor utilisation (i²*t) Display of the current thermal motor utilisation.
(P123.00) (Mot. i2t utilis.)
• Read only: x %
0x2D87 DC-bus voltage Display of the current DC-bus voltage.
(P105.00) (DC-bus voltage)
• Read only: x V
0x2D88 Motor current Display des present current-r.m.s. value.
(P104.00) (Motor current)
• Read only: x.x A
0x2D89 Motor voltage Display of the current motor voltage.
(P106.00) (Motor voltage)
• Read only: x VAC
0x2DA2:001 Output power: Effective power Display of the active output power for an energy analysis in the respec-
(P108.01) (Output power: Effective power) tive application.
• Read only: x.xxx kW
0x2DA2:002 Output power: Apparent power Display of the apparent output power for an energy analysis in the
(P108.02) (Output power: Apparent power) respective application.
• Read only: x.xxx kVA
0x2DA3:001 Output energy: Motor Display of the output power in motor mode for an energy analysis in the
(P109.01) (Output energy: Motor) respective application.
• Read only: x.xx kWh
0x2DA3:002 Output energy: Generator Display of the output power in generator mode for an energy analysis in
(P109.02) (Output energy: Generator) the respective application.
• Read only: x.xx kWh
0x2DDD Output frequency Display of the current output frequency for diagnostics of the control.
(P100.00) (Output frequency)
• Read only: x.x Hz
0x400D Scaled actual value Display of the current speed in application units.
(P101.00) (Scaled act value)
• Read only: x Units
0x6077 Torque actual value Display of the current torque.
(P107.00) (Torque actual) • 100 % ≡ Motor rated torque 0x6076 (P325.00)
• Read only: x.x %
0x6078 Current actual value Display of the present motor current.
(P103.00) (Current actual) • 100 % ≡ Motor rated current 0x6075 (P323.00)
• Read only: x.x %

109
Diagnostics and fault elimination
Diagnostics parameter
Logbook

6.2.1 Logbook
For diagnostic purposes, the logbook contains the last 32 error messages and warning signals
of the inverter, which have occurred during operation.
Preconditions
The logbook can only be accessed
• via the user interface of »EASY Starter« ("Diagnostics" tab) or
• via network.
Details
In contrast to the error history buffer, the logbook additionally protocols the following events:
• Fault messages
• Change-over from normal to setup mode (and vice versa)
• Execution of device commands
• Avoidance of safety functions
The logbook entries are saved persistently in the inverter. If all 32 memory units are occupied,
the oldest entry is deleted for a new entry. By means of the "Delete logbook" device com-
mand, all logbook entries can be deleted.
Accessing the logbook with »EASY Starter«
1. Select the inverter on the left side in the »EASY Starter« device list.
2. Change to the "Diagnostics" tab.
3. Click the icon to open the logbook.

Observe that the logbook only presents a snapshot at the time the data are read out. If a new
event occurs, the logbook must be read out again so that the new event becomes visible.
Accessing the logbook via network
The logbook can also be accessed via network from a higher-level controller or a visualisation.
The structure of the diagnostic messages complies with the "ETG.1020" standard of the Ether-
CAT Technology Group (ETG).

See chapter 13.3 of document "ETG.1020 Protocol Enhancements" provided by

the EtherCAT Technology Group (ETG) for detailed information on the structure
of the diagnostic messages.

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x2022:015 Device commands: Delete logbook 1 = delete all entries in the logbook.
(P700.15) (Device commands: Delete logbook)
• Setting can only be changed if the inverter is inhibi-
ted.
0 Off / ready
1 On / start

110
Diagnostics and fault elimination
Diagnostics parameter
Error history buffer

6.2.2 Error history buffer

For purposes of diagnostics, the error history buffer contains the last 32 error and warning
messages of the inverter, which have occurred during operation. The error history buffer can
be read out using the keypad via P155.00 and provides a limited view on the logbook.
Details
• For each event that is recorded, the error history buffer contains the message text, the
error code, the time of occurrence as well as a counter for successive, identical events. If
an event that has already been recorded occurs repeatedly, only the counter is incremen-
ted.
• The error history buffer can be reset by the user. In order to prevent the buffer from being
reset by the user, this function can be protected by means of a password.
• Observe that the error history buffer only presents a snapshot at the time the data are
read out. If a new event occurs, the error history buffer must be read out again via P155.00
so that the new event becomes visible.
Accessing the error history buffer with the keypad
1. VEL:FLEX:AIN1 1. Use the key in the operating mode to navigate to the
parameterisation mode one level below.
000STOP
LOC REM MAN AUTO SET
You are now in the group level. All parameters of the
inverter are divided into different groups according to
their function.
2. Favorites Note: By using the key you can navigate one level
GROUPOO
LOC REM MAN AUTO SET
upwards again anytime.
2. Use the navigation key to select group 1 ("Diagnos-
tics").
3. Diagnostics 3. Use the key to navigate to one level below.
You are now in the parameter level of the group selec-
GROUPO1
LOC REM MAN AUTO SET
ted.
4. Use the and select the P155.00 parameter.
5. Use the key to navigate to one level below.
4. Output frequency
You are now in the error history buffer.
OP1OOOO
LOC REM MAN AUTO SET
6. Use the and navigation keys you can now scroll
through the error history buffer entries.
Use the key, you can switch over the display.
5. Error memory

OP155OO
LOC REM MAN AUTO SET
Information displayed (page 1):
① Message text
② No. of the entry (01 = latest event)
③ Response (W = warning, T = trouble, F = fault)
6. Warn.DC Bus UV ④ Error code

O1W3221
LOC REM MAN AUTO SET
Information displayed (page 2):
⑤ Time of occurrence
⑥ No. of the entry (01 = latest event)
⑦ Counter for successive, identical events
Time:01d17h04m00s

O1C OO1
LOC REM MAN AUTO SET
Note: By using the
buffer again.
key you can exit the error history

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x2006:000 Error history buffer: Keypad display Display of the error history buffer on the keypad.
(P155.00) (Fault memory: Error memory)
• Read only
0x2006:001 Error history buffer: Maximum number of messages Display of the maximum number of messages which can be stored in the
• Read only history buffer (from subindex 6).

111
Diagnostics and fault elimination
Diagnostics parameter
Error history buffer

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x2006:002 Error history buffer: Latest message Display of the subindex of the most recent message.
• Read only
0x2006:003 Error history buffer: Latest acknowledgement mes- 0 = delete all entries in the error history buffer.
sage
0 ... [0] ... 37
0x2006:004 Error history buffer: New message Reserved for future extensions.
• Read only
0x2006:005 Error history buffer: Buffer overflow Bit 0 ... bit 4 = 0.
0 ... [1] ... 65535 Bit 5 = 1 ≡ overflow (after recording the 33rd event in the error history
Bit 0 Send emergency message buffer.
Bit 1 Disable info message
Bit 2 Disable warning message
Bit 3 Disable error message
Bit 4 Mode selection
Bit 5 Message overwritten
0x2006:006 Error history buffer: Message 0 Error history buffer entry 01 (latest event)
• Read only
0x2006:007 Error history buffer: Message 1 Error history buffer entry 02
• Read only
0x2006:008 Error history buffer: Message 2 Error history buffer entry 03
• Read only
0x2006:009 Error history buffer: Message 3 Error history buffer entry 04
• Read only
0x2006:010 Error history buffer: Message 4 Error history buffer entry 05
• Read only
0x2006:011 Error history buffer: Message 5 Error history buffer entry 06
• Read only
0x2006:012 Error history buffer: Message 6 Error history buffer entry 07
• Read only
0x2006:013 Error history buffer: Message 7 Error history buffer entry 08
• Read only
0x2006:014 Error history buffer: Message 8 Error history buffer entry 09
• Read only
0x2006:015 Error history buffer: Message 9 Error history buffer entry 10
• Read only
0x2006:016 Error history buffer: Message 10 Error history buffer entry 11
• Read only
0x2006:017 Error history buffer: Message 11 Error history buffer entry 12
• Read only
0x2006:018 Error history buffer: Message 12 Error history buffer entry 13
• Read only
0x2006:019 Error history buffer: Message 13 Error history buffer entry 14
• Read only
0x2006:020 Error history buffer: Message 14 Error history buffer entry 15
• Read only
0x2006:021 Error history buffer: Message 15 Error history buffer entry 16
• Read only
0x2006:022 Error history buffer: Message 16 Error history buffer entry 17
• Read only
0x2006:023 Error history buffer: Message 17 Error history buffer entry 18
• Read only
0x2006:024 Error history buffer: Message 18 Error history buffer entry 19
• Read only
0x2006:025 Error history buffer: Message 19 Error history buffer entry 20
• Read only
0x2006:026 Error history buffer: Message 20 Error history buffer entry 21
• Read only
0x2006:027 Error history buffer: Message 21 Error history buffer entry 22
• Read only

112
Diagnostics and fault elimination
Diagnostics parameter
Error history buffer

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x2006:028 Error history buffer: Message 22 Error history buffer entry 23
• Read only
0x2006:029 Error history buffer: Message 23 Error history buffer entry 24
• Read only
0x2006:030 Error history buffer: Message 24 Error history buffer entry 25
• Read only
0x2006:031 Error history buffer: Message 25 Error history buffer entry 26
• Read only
0x2006:032 Error history buffer: Message 26 Error history buffer entry 27
• Read only
0x2006:033 Error history buffer: Message 27 Error history buffer entry 28
• Read only
0x2006:034 Error history buffer: Message 28 Error history buffer entry 29
• Read only
0x2006:035 Error history buffer: Message 29 Error history buffer entry 30
• Read only
0x2006:036 Error history buffer: Message 30 Error history buffer entry 31
• Read only
0x2006:037 Error history buffer: Message 31 Error history buffer entry 32
• Read only

Structure of the messages

The following example shows the detailed structure of one of the following messages (param-
eter 0x2006:006 ... 0x2006:037):
Message: 00E010431201990000520B0473FC0100050001
00E01043 1201 9900 00520B0473FC0100 0500 01
Meaning: Diag code Message type Text ID Time stamp in [ns] Flag param. 1 Parameter 1
Data type: U32 U16 U16 U64 U16 U8
Hex value: 0x4310 E000 0x0112 0x0099 0x0001 FC73 040B 5200 0x0005 0x01

Notes:
• The upper 16 bits of the "Diag Code" contain the error code (in the example "0x4310").
• Bit 0 ... 3 of the message type contain the error type (0: Info, 1: Warning, 2: Trouble,
3: Fault).
• Convert time stamp: 0x0001 FC73 040B 5200 = 559045896000000 ns = 6 days, 11 hours,
17 minutes, 25 seconds
• The flag for parameter 1 has no meaning for decoding the message.
• The parameter 1 contains the counter for successive, identical events.

113
Diagnostics and fault elimination
Diagnostics parameter
Inverter diagnostics

6.2.3 Inverter diagnostics

The following parameters supply some information about the current operating status of the
inverter.
This includes the following information:
• Active access protection after log-in by means of PIN1/PIN2
• Currently loaded parameter settings
• Cause(s) for disable, quick stop and stop.
• Active control source and active setpoint source
• Active operating mode
• Keypad status
• Status of the internal motor control
Some of the following parameters contain bit-coded status words. Each single bit has a certain
meaning.
4Display of status words on keypad ^ 638
Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info
0x2040 Access protection status Bit-coded display of the active access protection after login by PIN1/
(P197.00) (Protect. status) PIN2.
• Read only
Bit 0 No write access
Bit 1 Only favorites changeable
0x2827 Currently loaded parameter settings Display of the parameter settings currently loaded.
(P198.00) (Status load. par) 4Data handling ^ 141
• Read only 4Saving/loading the parameter settings ^ 419
0 User settings User parameter settings of the memory module
1 Reset 60 Hz setting Delivery status (default setting) for 50-Hz device
2 Reset 50 Hz setting Delivery status (default setting) for 60-Hz device
3 OEM default settings OEM parameter settings of the memory module
0x282A:001 Status words: Cause of disable Bit-coded display of the cause(s) for disabled inverter.
(P126.01) (Status words: Cause of disable)
• Read only
Bit 0 Flexible I/O configuration 1 ≡ the inverter was disabled by the trigger set in 0x2631:001 (P400.01).
Bit 1 Network 1 ≡ the inverter was disabled via network.
Bit 2 Axis command 1 ≡ the inverter was disabled via axis command .
Bit 6 Fault DC-bus 1 ≡ the inverter was inhibited due to a DC-bus error.
Bit 7 Drive not ready 1 ≡ the inverter was disabled internally since the drive was not ready for
operation.
Possible causes:
• Under/overvoltage in the DC bus
• Defect device hardware
Bit 8 Quick stop active 1 ≡ the inverter has been disabled by the "Quick stop" function.
Bit 9 Motor data identification 1 ≡ the inverter was disabled by the "Automatic identification of the
motor data" function.
Bit 10 Automatic holding brake control 1 ≡ the inverter was disabled by the "Holding brake control" function.
Bit 11 DC braking -
Bit 12 CiA402 Inverter disabled 1 ≡ the inverter was disabled by the internal state machine.
The bit is only set if
• operating mode 0x6060 (P301.00) = "CiA: Velocity mode [2]" and
• state machine in the "Switch on disabled" state and
• the state change has not been carried out via the "Disable operation"
command.
Bit 13 CiA402 Quick stop option code 2 1 ≡ the inverter has been disabled by the "Quick stop" function.
Bit 14 Safe torque off (STO) 1 ≡ the inverter has been disabled by the integrated safety system.
Bit 15 CiA402 operation mode 0 1 ≡ the inverter has been disabled because the selection "No mode
change/no mode assigned [0]" is set in 0x6060 (P301.00).

114
Diagnostics and fault elimination
Diagnostics parameter
Inverter diagnostics

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x282A:002 Status words: Cause of quick stop Bit coded display of the cause(s) of quick stop.
(P126.02) (Status words: Cause of QSP)
• Read only
Bit 0 Flexible I/O configuration 1 ≡ quick stop was activated by the trigger set in 0x2631:003 (P400.03).
Bit 1 Network 1 ≡ quick stop was activated via network.
Bit 2 Axis command 1 ≡ quick stop was activated via axis command .
Bit 6 Error response 1 ≡ quick stop has been activated as a response to an error.
0x282A:003 Status words: Cause of stop Bit coded display of the cause(s) of stop.
(P126.03) (Status words: Cause of stop)
• Read only
Bit 0 Flexible I/O: Start disabled 1 ≡ stop was activated by the trigger set in 0x2631:002 (P400.02).
Bit 1 Flexible I/O: Run forward 1 ≡ stop has been activated due to cancellation of the command "Run
forward (CW)".
Bit 2 Flexible I/O: Run reverse 1 ≡ stop has been activated due to cancellation of the command "Run
reverse (CCW)".
Bit 3 Flexible I/O: Jog forward 1 ≡ stop has been activated due to cancellation of the command "Jog
foward (CW)".
Bit 4 Flexible I/O: Jog reverse 1 ≡ stop has been activated due to cancellation of the command "Jog
reverse (CCW)".
Bit 5 Network 1 ≡ stop was activated via network.
Bit 6 Keypad 1 ≡ stop was activated via keypad.
Bit 7 Control mode transition 1 ≡ stop has been activated due to a change of the operating mode.
Bit 8 End of sequence 1 ≡ stop was activated by the "sequencer" function since the sequence is
completed.
• The bit is only set after the sequence is completed if End of sequence
mode0x402F (P824.00) is set ="Stop [1]" or "Stop and abort [2]".
Bit 15 Waiting for start 1 ≡ Stop is active as a start command is not yet available (e.g. after ena-
bling the inverter).
0x282A:004 Status words: Extended status word Bit-coded status word.
• Read only
Bit 8 Reverse rotational direction 1 ≡ reversal active.
Bit 10 Safe torque off (STO) active 1 ≡ "Safe torque off (STO)" function has been triggered by the integrated
safety system.
Bit 11 Both STO channels not active 1 ≡ safe inputs SIA and SIB = LOW (simultaneously).
0x282A:005 Status words: Device status Display of the current inverter device state.
(P126.05) (Status words: Device status)
• Read only
0 Initialisation
2 Not ready to switch on
3 Switch on disabled
4 Ready to switch on
5 Switched on
6 Operation enabled
7 Disable operation
8 Shut down
9 Quick stop active
10 Fault reaction active
11 Fault
0x282B:001 Inverter diagnostics: Active control source Display of the control source that is currently active.
(P125.01) (Inverter diag.: Active control)
• Read only
0 Flexible I/O configuration
1 Network
2 Keypad
8 Keypad full control

115
Diagnostics and fault elimination
Diagnostics parameter
Inverter diagnostics

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x282B:002 Inverter diagnostics: Active setpoint source Display of the setpoint source that is currently active.
(P125.02) (Inverter diag.: Active setpoint)
• Read only
0 Not selected
1 Analog input 1
2 Analog input 2
3 Keypad Setpoint
4 HTL input
5 Network Setpoint
11 Setpoint preset 1
12 Setpoint preset 2
13 Setpoint preset 3
14 Setpoint preset 4
15 Setpoint preset 5
16 Setpoint preset 6
17 Setpoint preset 7
18 Setpoint preset 8
19 Setpoint preset 9
20 Setpoint preset 10
21 Setpoint preset 11
22 Setpoint preset 12
23 Setpoint preset 13
24 Setpoint preset 14
25 Setpoint preset 15
31 Segment preset 1
32 Segment preset 2
33 Segment preset 3
34 Segment preset 4
35 Segment preset 5
36 Segment preset 6
37 Segment preset 7
38 Segment preset 8
39 Last segment
50 Motor potentiometer
51 PID setpoint (from version 04.00)
201 Internal value (from version 05.00)
202 Internal value (from version 05.00)
203 Internal value (from version 05.00)
204 Internal value (from version 05.00)
205 Internal value (from version 05.00)
206 Internal value (from version 05.00)
0x282B:003 Inverter diagnostics: Keypad LCD status Bit-coded state of the keypad status displays.
(P125.03) (Inverter diag.: Keypad LCD stat.)
• Read only
Bit 0 LOC 1 ≡ local keypad control active.
Bit 1 REM 1 ≡ remote control via terminals, network, etc. active.
Bit 2 MAN 1 ≡ manual setpoint selection via keypad active.
Bit 3 Auto 1 ≡ automatic setpoint selection via terminals, network, etc. active.
Bit 4 Set 1 ≡ a parameter setting has been changed but not been saved yet in the
memory module with mains failure protection.

116
Diagnostics and fault elimination
Diagnostics parameter
Inverter diagnostics

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x282B:004 Inverter diagnostics: Active drive mode Display of the active drive mode.
(P125.04) (Inverter diag.: Drive mode)
• Read only
0 Velocity mode "Velocity mode" active.
1 PID control PID control active.
2 Torque mode (from version 03.00) "Torque mode" active.
4 Jog operation "Jog foward (CW)" or "Jog reverse (CCW)" function active.
0x2831 Inverter status word Bit-coded status word of the internal motor control.
• Read only
Bit 1 Speed 1 limited 1 ≡ input of speed controller 1 in limitation.
Bit 2 Speed limited 1 ≡ output of speed controller 1 in limitation.
Bit 3 Torque limited 1 ≡ setpoint torque in limitation.
Bit 4 Current limited 1 ≡ setpoint current in limitation.
Bit 5 Speed 2 limited 1 ≡ input of the speed controller 2 in "torque mode" in limitation.
Bit 6 Upper speed limit active 1 ≡ in "torque mode", the speed is limited to upper speed limit
0x2946:001 (P340.01).
Bit 7 Lower speed limit active 1 ≡ in "torque mode", the speed is limited to lower speed
limit0x2946:002 (P340.02).
Bit 10 Output frequency limited 1 ≡ setpoint frequency with V/f operation in limitation.
Bit 11 Magnetisation completed 1 ≡ during V/f operation, the factor 7 rotor time constant has passed
(calculated from the time at which the inverter was enabled without
restart on the fly and with a total motor current of 20 % rated motor cur-
rent for the first time). Otherwise 0.
Bit 12 Motor phase error 1 ≡ motor phase failure detection active.
Bit 14 Error reset blocking time active 1 ≡ the fault can only be reset when the blocking time has elapsed.
0x2833 Inverter status word 2 Bit-coded status word 2 of the inverter.
• Read only
Bit 1 Manual test mode active 1 ≡ manual test mode active.
Bit 2 Manual control active 1 ≡ manual control active.
Bit 6 DC braking active 1 ≡ DC braking active.
Bit 15 UPS operation active 1 ≡ UPS operation active.
0x293A Actual switching frequency Display of the currently active switching frequency of the inverter.
(P115.00) (Actual sw. freq.) Example:
• Read only • "16 kHz variable / drive-optimised / 4 kHz min. [22]" is selected as
1 2 kHz drive-optimised switching frequency in 0x2939 (P305.00).
2 4 kHz drive-optimised • An increase of the ambient temperature and/or the load have caused
3 8 kHz drive-optimised a decrease of the switching frequency to 8 kHz. In this case, this
parameter indicates the selection "8 kHz power loss-optimised [7]".
4 16 kHz drive-optimised
5 2 kHz power loss-optimised
6 4 kHz power loss-optimised
7 8 kHz power loss-optimised
8 16 kHz power loss-optimised
0x2DAC Keypad status Bit-coded display of the keypad status.
(P119.00) (Keypad status)
• Read only
Bit 0 Start Key 1 ≡ keypad start key pressed.
Bit 1 Stop Key 1 ≡ keypad stop key pressed.
Bit 2 Up arrow 1 ≡ keypad up-arrow key pressed.
Bit 3 Down arrow 1 ≡ keypad down-arrow key pressed.
Bit 4 Enter Key 1 ≡ keypad enter key pressed.
Bit 5 Back key 1 ≡ keypad back key pressed.

117
Diagnostics and fault elimination
Diagnostics parameter
Inverter diagnostics

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x2DAD Internal hardware states Bit-coded display of internal hardware states.
(P120.00) (Int. HW states)
• Read only
Bit 0 Relay 0 ≡ X9/NO-COM open and NC-COM closed.
1 ≡ X9/NO-COM closed and NC-COM open.
Bit 1 Digital output 1 0 ≡ LOW level, 1 ≡ HIGH level.
Bit 2 Digital output 2
Bit 10 Charge Relay 1 ≡ precharging of the DC bus via charge relay is active.
0x603F Error code Error message
(P150.00) (Error code)
• Read only

6.2.4 Network diagnostics

The following parameters show some general information with regard to the network option
available and the network.
Further fieldbus-specific diagnostic parameters are described in the following subchapters.
Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info
0x282B:005 Inverter diagnostics: Most recently used control regis- Display of the network register for the control that was accessed last
(P125.05) ter (e. g. 0x6040 or 0x400B:1).
(Inverter diag.: Netw. contr.reg.) • Format: 0xiiiiss00 (iiii = hexadecimal index, ss = hexadecimal subindex)
• Read only • The lowest byte is always 0x00.
0x282B:006 Inverter diagnostics: Most recently used setpoint reg- Display of the network register for setpoint selection that was accessed
(P125.06) ister last (e. g. 0x6042 or 0x400B:3).
(Inverter diag.: Netw. setp.reg.) • Format: 0xiiiiss00 (iiii = hexadecimal index, ss = hexadecimal subindex)
• Read only • The lowest byte is always 0x00.
0x400B:006 Process input data: Velocity mode setpoint Mappable parameter for defining the setpoint for operating mode "MS:
(P592.06) (Process data IN: Veloc. mode setp) Velocity mode" via network.
-599.0 ... [0.0] ... 599.0 Hz • If this parameter is to be used as standard setpoint source, the selec-
tion "Network [5]" must be set in 0x2860:001 (P201.01).
• If this bipolar setpoint is used, the direction of rotation cannot be con-
trolled via the network control word. The direction of rotation is
determined by the sign of the setpoint.
0x400B:007 Process input data: PID setpoint Mappable parameter for defining the setpoint for the PID control via
(P592.07) (Process data IN: PID setpoint) network.
-300.00 ... [0.00] ... 300.00 PID unit • If this parameter is to be used as standard setpoint source, the selec-
tion "Network [5]" must be set in 0x2860:002 (P201.02).
0x400B:008 Process input data: Torque mode setpoint Mappable parameter for defining the setpoint for operating mode "MS:
(P592.08) (Process data IN: Torque mode setp) Torque mode" via network.
-32768 ... [0] ... 32767 Nm • If this parameter is to be used as standard setpoint source, the selec-
tion "Network [5]" must be set in 0x2860:003 (P201.03).
• The scaling factor can be set in 0x400B:009 (P592.09).
• Scaled torque setpoint = torque setpoint (0x400B:008) / 2scaling factor
Example:
• Torque setpoint (0x400B:008) = 345 [Nm]
• Scaling factor (0x400B:009) = 3
• Scaled torque setpoint = 345 [Nm] / 23 = 43.125 [Nm]

118
Diagnostics and fault elimination
Diagnostics parameter
Network diagnostics

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

Related topics
4Configuring the network ^ 226
6.2.4.1 CANopen diagnostics
The following parameters serve to diagnose the CANopen interface and communication via
CANopen.
Preconditions
Control unit (CU) of the inverter is provided with CANopen.
Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info
0x1000 Device type CANopen device profile according CANopen specification CiA 301/
• Read only CiA 402.
Specifies the axis type:
• 0x01010192 ≡ single axis
• 0x02010192 ≡ double axis
• 0x01020192 ≡ servo single axis
• 0x02020192 ≡ servo double axis
• 0x01030192 ≡ stepper single axis
• 0x02030192 ≡ stepper double axis
0x1001 Error register Bit-coded error status.
• Read only • Bit 0 is set if an error is active.
The other bits signalise which group the active error belongs to:
• Bit 1: Current error
• Bit 2: Voltage error
• Bit 3: Temperature error
• Bit 4: Communication error
• Bit 5: Device profile-specific error
• Bit 6: Reserved (always 0)
• Bit 7: Manufacturer-specific error

119
Diagnostics and fault elimination
Diagnostics parameter
Network diagnostics

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x1008 Manufacturer device name Display of the manufacturer device name.
• Read only
0x1009 Manufacturer hardware version Display of the manufacturer hardware version.
• Read only
0x100A Manufacturer software version Display of the manufacturer software version.
• Read only
0x1018:001 Identity object: Vendor ID Display of the manufacturer's identification number.
• Read only • The identification number allocated to Lenze by the organisation
"CAN in Automation e. V." is "0x0000003B".
0x1018:002 Identity object: Product ID Display of the product code of the inverter.
• Read only
0x1018:003 Identity object: Revision number Display of the main and subversion of the firmware.
• Read only
0x1018:004 Identity object: Serial number Display of the serial number of the inverter.
• Read only
0x2302:001 Active CANopen settings: Active node ID Display of the active node address.
(P511.01) (CANopen diag.: Active node ID)
• Read only
0x2302:002 Active CANopen settings: Active baud rate Display of the active baud rate.
(P511.02) (CANopen diag.: Active baud rate)
• Read only
0 Automatic (from version 03.00)
1 20 kbps
2 50 kbps
3 125 kbps
4 250 kbps
5 500 kbps
6 800 kbps
7 1 Mbps
0x2307 CANopen time-out status Bit-coded status display of the CAN time monitoring functions.
(P515.00) (Time-out status)
• Read only
Bit 0 RPDO1-Timeout 1 ≡ RPDO1 was not received within the monitoring time or not with the
sync configured.
• Status is reset automatically after the RPDO has been received again.
• Setting of monitoring time for RPDO1 in 0x1400:005 (P540.05).
Bit 1 RPDO2-Timeout 1 ≡ RPDO2 was not received within the monitoring time or not with the
sync configured.
• Status is reset automatically after the RPDO has been received again.
• Setting of monitoring time for RPDO2 in 0x1401:005 (P541.05).
Bit 2 RPDO3-Timeout 1 ≡ RPDO3 was not received within the monitoring time or not with the
sync configured.
• Status is reset automatically after the RPDO has been received again.
• Setting of monitoring time for RPDO3 in 0x1402:005 (P542.05).
Bit 8 Heartbeat-Timeout Consumer 1 1 ≡ within the "Heartbeat Consumer Time", no heartbeat telegram was
received from node 1 to be monitored.
• Status can only be reset by mains switching or error reset.
• "Heartbeat Consumer Time" setting in 0x1016:001 (P520.01).
Bit 9 Heartbeat-Timeout Consumer 2 1 ≡ within the "Heartbeat Consumer Time", no heartbeat telegram was
received from node 2 to be monitored.
• Status can only be reset by mains switching or error reset.
• "Heartbeat Consumer Time" setting in 0x1016:002 (P520.02).
Bit 10 Heartbeat-Timeout Consumer 3 1 ≡ within the "Heartbeat Consumer Time", no heartbeat telegram was
received from node 3 to be monitored.
• Status can only be reset by mains switching or error reset.
• "Heartbeat Consumer Time" setting in 0x1016:003 (P520.03).
Bit 11 Heartbeat-Timeout Consumer 4 1 ≡ within the "Heartbeat Consumer Time", no heartbeat telegram was
received from node 4 to be monitored.
• Status can only be reset by mains switching or error reset.
• "Heartbeat Consumer Time" setting in 0x1016:004 (P520.04).

120
Diagnostics and fault elimination
Diagnostics parameter
Network diagnostics

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x2308 CANopen status Display of the current fieldbus state
(P516.00) (CANopen status)
• Read only
0 Initialisation Fieldbus initialisation active.
• The initialisation is started automatically at mains connection. During
this phase, the inverter us not involved in the data exchange process
on the CAN bus.
• All CAN-relevant parameters are initialised with the saved settings.
• When the initialisation process has been completed, the inverter
automatically adopts the "Pre-Operational" state.
1 Reset node "Reset Node" NMT command active.
• All parameters are initialised with the saved settings (not only the
CAN-relevant parameters).
2 Reset communication "Reset Communication" NMT command active.
• Initialisation of all CAN-relevant parameters with the values stored.
4 Stopped Only network management telegrams can be received.
5 Operational Parameter data and process data can be received. If defined, process
data is sent as well.
127 Pre-Operational Parameter data can be received, process data are ignored.
0x2309 CANopen controller status Status display of the internal CANopen controller.
(P517.00) (CAN contr.status)
• Read only
1 Error active The inverter is a fully-fledged communication node at the CANopen net-
work. It is able to transmit and receive data and to report faults.
2 Error passive The inverter can only passively indicate faulty reception via the ACK
field.
3 Bus off The inverter is electrically separated from the CANopen network. In
order to exit this state, the CANopen interface must be reset. An auto-
matic restart is implemented.
0x230A:001 CANopen statistics: PDO1 received Display of the number of PDO1 telegrams received.
(P580.01) (CAN statistics: PDO1 received)
• Read only
0x230A:002 CANopen statistics: PDO2 received Display of the number of PDO2 telegrams received.
(P580.02) (CAN statistics: PDO2 received)
• Read only
0x230A:003 CANopen statistics: PDO3 received Display of the number of PDO3 telegrams received.
(P580.03) (CAN statistics: PDO3 received)
• Read only
0x230A:005 CANopen statistics: PDO1 transmitted Display of the number of PDO1 telegrams sent.
(P580.05) (CAN statistics: PDO1 transmitted)
• Read only
0x230A:006 CANopen statistics: PDO2 transmitted Display of the number of PDO2 telegrams sent.
(P580.06) (CAN statistics: PDO2 transmitted)
• Read only
0x230A:007 CANopen statistics: PDO3 transmitted Display of the number of PDO3 telegrams sent.
(P580.07) (CAN statistics: PDO3 transmitted)
• Read only
0x230A:009 CANopen statistics: SDO1 telegrams Display of the number of SDO1 telegrams.
(P580.09) (CAN statistics: SDO1 counter)
• Read only
0x230A:010 CANopen statistics: SDO2 telegrams Display of the number of SDO2 telegrams.
(P580.10) (CAN statistics: SDO2 counter)
• Read only
0x230B CANopen error counter Display of the total number of CAN faults that have occurred.
(P518.00) (CAN errorcounter)
• Read only

6.2.4.2 Modbus diagnostics

The following parameters serve to diagnose the Modbus interface and communication via
Modbus.
Preconditions
Control unit (CU) of the inverter is provided with Modbus.
Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info
0x2322:001 Active Modbus settings: Active node ID Display of the active node address.
(P511.01) (Modbus diag.: Active node ID)
• Read only
0x2322:002 Active Modbus settings: Active baud rate Display of the active baud rate.
(P511.02) (Modbus diag.: Active baud rate)
• Read only
• For the meaning of the display see parameter
0x2321:002 (P510.02). ^ 283
0x2322:003 Active Modbus settings: Data format Display of the active data format.
(P511.03) (Modbus diag.: Data format)
• Read only
• For the meaning of the display see parameter
0x2321:003 (P510.03). ^ 283
0x232A:001 Modbus statistics: Messages received Display of the total number of messages received.
(P580.01) (Modbus statistic: Mess. received) • This counter counts both valid and invalid messages.
• Read only • After the maximum value has been reached, the counter starts again
"0".
0x232A:002 Modbus statistics: Valid messages received Display of the number of valid messages received.
(P580.02) (Modbus statistic: Val. mess. rec.) • After the maximum value has been reached, the counter starts again
• Read only "0".
0x232A:003 Modbus statistics: Messages with exceptions Display of the number of messages with exceptions that have been
(P580.03) (Modbus statistic: Mess. w. exc.) received.
• Read only • After the maximum value has been reached, the counter starts again
"0".
0x232A:004 Modbus statistics: Messages with errors Display of the number of messages received with a faulty data integrity
(P580.04) (Modbus statistic: Mess. w. errors) (parity, CRC).
• Read only • After the maximum value has been reached, the counter starts again
"0".
0x232A:005 Modbus statistics: Messages sent Display of the total number of messages sent.
(P580.05) (Modbus statistic: Messages sent) • After the maximum value has been reached, the counter starts again
• Read only "0".

Related topics
4Modbus RTU ^ 282
6.2.4.3 PROFIBUS diagnostics
The following parameters serve to diagnose the PROFIBUS interface and communication via
PROFIBUS.
Preconditions
Control unit (CU) of the inverter is provided with PROFIBUS.
Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info
0x2342:001 Active PROFIBUS settings: Active station address Display of the active station address.
(P511.01) (PROFIBUS diag.: Act.station addr)
• Read only

122
Diagnostics and fault elimination
Diagnostics parameter
Network diagnostics

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x2342:002 Active PROFIBUS settings: Active baud rate Display of the active baud rate.
(P511.02) (PROFIBUS diag.: Active baud rate)
• Read only
0 12 Mbps
1 6 Mbps
2 3 Mbps
3 1.5 Mbps
4 500 kbps
5 187.5 kbps
6 93.75 kbps
7 45.45 kbps
8 19.2 kbps
9 9.6 kbps
15 Search Automatic baud rate detection active.
0x2342:003 Active PROFIBUS settings: Watchdog time Display of the watchdog monitoring time specified by the master.
(P511.03) (PROFIBUS diag.: Watchdog time) • Monitoring starts with the arrival of the first telegram.
• Read only • When a value of "0" is displayed, the monitoring function is deactiva-
ted.
• A change in the watchdog monitoring time in the master is effective
immediately.
0x2348:001 PROFIBUS Status: Bus status Display of the current DP state machine state (DP-STATE).
(P516.01) (PROFIBUS Status: Bus status)
• Read only
0 WAIT_PRM After the run-up, the inverter (slave) is waiting for parameter data
(CHK_PRM) from the master. All other frame types are not processed.
Exchanging user data with the master is not possible yet.
1 WAIT_CFG The inverter (slave) is waiting for configuration data (CHK_CFG) from the
master that define the structure of the cyclic frames.
2 DATA_EXCH Parameter and configuration data have been received and accepted by
the inverter (slave). The inverter is in the "Data Exchange" state. It is now
possible to exchange user data with the master.
0x2348:002 PROFIBUS Status: Watchdog status Display of the current state of the watchdog state machine (WD-STATE).
(P516.02) (PROFIBUS Status: Watchdog status)
• Read only
0 BAUD_SEARCH The inverter (slave) is able to detect the baud rate automatically.
1 BAUD_CONTROL After detecting the correct baud rate, the inverter (slave) status changes
to BAUD_CONTROL, and the baud rate is monitored.
2 DP_CONTROL The DP_CONTROL state serves to the response monitoring of the master.

123
Diagnostics and fault elimination
Diagnostics parameter
Network diagnostics

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x2349 PROFIBUS error Bit-coded display of PROFIBUS errors.
(P517.00) (PROFIBUS error)
• Read only
Bit 0 Watchdog elapsed Communication with the PROFIBUS master is continuously interrupted,
e. g. by cable break or failure of the PROFIBUS master.
• No process data are sent to the inverter (slave) in the "Data Exchange"
state.
• When the watchdog monitoring time specified by the master has
elapsed, the response set in 0x2859:001 (P515.01) is triggered in the
inverter.
Preconditions for a response by the inverter (slave):
• The slave is in the "Data Exchange" state.
• The watchdog monitoring time is configured correctly in the master
(1 ... 65535 ms).
If one of these preconditions is not met, the response to the absence of
cyclic process data telegrams from the master is not executed.
Bit 1 Data exchange completed Data exchange via PROFIBUS has been terminated.
• The inverter (slave) can be instructed by the master to exit the "Data
Exchange" state.
• If this state change is to be treated as an error in the inverter, the
desired response can be set in 0x2859:002 (P515.02).
Bit 2 Incorrect configuration data The inverter (slave) has received invalid configuration data from the
master.
• The response set in 0x2859:003 (P515.03) is effected.
Bit 3 Initialisation error An error has occurred during the initialisation of the PROFIBUS interface.
• The response set in 0x2859:004 (P515.04) is effected.
Bit 4 Invalid process data The inverter (slave) has received invalid process data from the master,
e.g. no process data or deleted process data are sent by the "Stop" oper-
ating status in the master.
• The response set in 0x2859:005 (P515.05) is effected.
0x234A:001 PROFIBUS statistics: Data cycles per second Display of the data cycles per second.
(P580.01) (PROFIBUS counter: Data cycles/sec.)
• Read only
0x234A:002 PROFIBUS statistics: Parameterization events Display of the number of parameterisation events.
(P580.02) (PROFIBUS counter: PRM events)
• Read only
0x234A:003 PROFIBUS statistics: Configuration events Display of the number of configuration events.
(P580.03) (PROFIBUS counter: CFG events)
• Read only
0x234A:004 PROFIBUS statistics: Diagnostics events Display of the number of diagnostic telegrams sent.
(P580.04) (PROFIBUS counter: DIAG events)
• Read only
0x234A:005 PROFIBUS statistics: C1 messages Display of the number of requests by the class 1 DPV1 master.
(P580.05) (PROFIBUS counter: C1 messages)
• Read only
0x234A:006 PROFIBUS statistics: C2 messages Display of the number of requests by the class 2 DPV1 master.
(P580.06) (PROFIBUS counter: C2 messages)
• Read only
0x234A:007 PROFIBUS statistics: Watchdog events Display of the number of watchdog events.
(P580.07) (PROFIBUS counter: WD events)
• Read only
0x234A:008 PROFIBUS statistics: Data exchange aborts Display of the number of "Data Exchange exited" events.
(P580.08) (PROFIBUS counter: DataEx.event)
• Read only
0x234A:009 PROFIBUS statistics: Total data cycles Display of the number of cyclic process data received.
(P580.09) (PROFIBUS counter: Tot. data cycles)
• Read only

6.2.4.4 EtherNet/IP diagnostics

The following parameters serve to diagnose the EtherNet/IP interface and the communication
via EtherNet/IP.
Preconditions
Control unit (CU) of the inverter is provided with EtherNet/IP.
Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info
0x23A2:001 Active EtherNet/IP settings: IP address Display of the active IP address.
(P511.01) (EtherN/IP diag.: IP address) The default setting 276605120 corresponds to the IP address
• Read only 192.168.124.16.
• From version 02.00 • 276605120 = 0x107CA8C0 à 0xC0.0xA8.0x7C.0x10 = 192.168.124.16
0x23A2:002 Active EtherNet/IP settings: Subnet Display of the active subnet mask.
(P511.02) (EtherN/IP diag.: Subnet) The default setting 16777215 corresponds to the subnet mask
• Read only 255.255.255.0.
• From version 02.00 • 16777215 = 0xFFFFFF à 0xFF.0xFF.0xFF.0x00 = 255.255.255.0
0x23A2:003 Active EtherNet/IP settings: Gateway Display of the active gateway address.
(P511.03) (EtherN/IP diag.: Gateway) Example:
• Read only The setting 276344004 corresponds to the gateway address
• From version 02.00 196.172.120.16.
• 276344004 = 0x1078ACC4 à 0xC4.0xAC.0x78.0x10 = 196.172.120.16
0x23A2:005 Active EtherNet/IP settings: MAC address Display of the active MAC address.
(P511.05) (EtherN/IP diag.: MAC address)
• Read only
• From version 02.00
0x23A2:006 Active EtherNet/IP settings: Multicast address Display of the active Multicast IP address.
(P511.06) (EtherN/IP diag.: Mcast address) The default setting 3221373167 corresponds to the Multicast IP address
• Read only 239.64.2.192.
• From version 02.00 • 3221373167 = 0xC00240EF à 0xEF.0x40.0x02.0xC0 = 239.64.2.192
0x23A3 EtherNet/IP switch position Display of the rotary encoder switch settings at the last mains power-on.
(P509.00) (EtherN. switch)
• Read only
• From version 02.00
0x23A5:001 Active port settings: Port 1 Display of the active baud rate for Ethernet port 1.
(P519.01) (Port diagnostics: Port 1)
• Read only
• From version 02.00
0 Not connected
1 10 Mbps/Half Duplex
2 10 Mbps/Full Duplex
3 100 Mbps/Half Duplex
4 100 Mbps/Full Duplex
0x23A5:002 Active port settings: Port 2 Display of the active baud rate for Ethernet port 2.
(P519.02) (Port diagnostics: Port 2)
• Read only
• From version 02.00
0 Not connected
1 10 Mbps/Half Duplex
2 10 Mbps/Full Duplex
3 100 Mbps/Half Duplex
4 100 Mbps/Full Duplex
5 Reserved
6 Reserved
0x23A6 Quality of service Display if the QoS tag for prioritising the data packages to be transmitted
(P513.00) (QualityOfService) is used.
• Read only
• From version 02.00
0 802.1Q Tag disable
1 802.1Q Tag enable
0x23A8 CIP module status Display of the active CIP module status.
(P516.00) (CIP module stat.)
• Read only
• From version 02.00

125
Diagnostics and fault elimination
Diagnostics parameter
Network diagnostics

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x23A9 EtherNet/IP status Display of the active network status.
(P517.00) (EtherN/IP status)
• Read only
• From version 02.00

Related topics
4EtherNet/IP ^ 316
6.2.4.5 PROFINET diagnostics
The following parameters serve to diagnose the PROFINET interface and the communication
via PROFINET.
Preconditions
Control unit (CU) of the inverter is provided with PROFINET.
Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info
0x2382:001 Active PROFINET settings: IP address Display of the active IP address.
(P511.01) (PROFINET diag.: IP address)
• Read only
• From version 02.00
0x2382:002 Active PROFINET settings: Subnet Display of the active subnet mask.
(P511.02) (PROFINET diag.: Subnet)
• Read only
• From version 02.00
0x2382:003 Active PROFINET settings: Gateway Display of the gateway address.
(P511.03) (PROFINET diag.: Gateway)
• Read only
• From version 02.00
0x2382:004 Active PROFINET settings: Station name Display of the active station name.
(P511.04) (PROFINET diag.: Station name)
• Read only
• From version 02.00
0x2382:005 Active PROFINET settings: MAC Address Display of the active MAC address.
(P511.05) (PROFINET diag.: MAC Address)
• Read only
• From version 02.00
0x2388 PROFINET status Bit coded display of the current Bus status.
(P516.00) (PROFINET status)
• Read only
• From version 02.00
Bit 0 Initialized After initialisation, the network component waits for a communication
partner and the system power-up.
Bit 1 Online
Bit 2 Connected
Bit 3 IP address error The IP address is invalid. Valid IP addresses are defined according to RFC
3330.
Bit 4 Hardware fault
Bit 6 Watchdog elapsed PROFINET communication is continuously interrupted in the
"Data_Exchange" state, e.g. by cable break or failure of the IO Controller.
• PROFINET communication changes to the "No_Data_Exchange" state.
When the watchdog monitoring time specified by the IO Controller has
elapsed, the response set in 0x2859:001 (P515.01) is triggered in the
inverter.
Bit 7 Protocol error
Bit 8 PROFINET stack ok
Bit 9 PROFINET stack not configured
Bit 10 Ethernet controller fault
Bit 11 UDP stack fault

126
Diagnostics and fault elimination
Diagnostics parameter
Network diagnostics

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x2389:001 PROFINET error: Error 1 The parameter currently contains the error detected on the network.
(P517.01) (PROFINET error: Error 1) • The error values may occur in combination with the error values from
• Read only parameter 0x2389:002 (P517.02).
• From version 02.00
0 No error
1 Reserved
2 Unit ID unknown
3 Max. units exceeded
4 Invalid size
5 Unit type unknown
6 Runtime plug error
7 Invalid argument
8 Service pending
9 Stack not ready
10 Command unknown
11 Invalid address descriptor
0x2389:002 PROFINET error: Error 2 The parameter currently contains the error detected on the network.
(P517.02) (PROFINET error: Error2) • The error values may occur in combination with the error values from
• Read only parameter 0x2389:001 (P517.01).
• From version 02.00
Bit 7 IP address error The IP address is invalid. Valid IP addresses are defined according to RFC
3330.
Bit 8 Station name problem The station name must be assigned according to the PROFINET specifica-
tion.
Bit 9 DataExch left
Bit 10 Stack boot error
Bit 11 Stack online error
Bit 12 Stack state error
Bit 13 Stack revision error
Bit 14 Initialization problem
Bit 15 Stack init error The stack cannot be initiated with the user specifications. A reason
might be, e. g., a station name that does not correspond to the PROFI-
NET specification.

Related topics
4PROFINET ^ 365
6.2.4.6 EtherCAT diagnostics
The following parameters serve to diagnose the EtherCAT interface and the communication
via EtherCAT.
Preconditions
The control unit (CU) of the inverter is provided with EtherCAT (from firmware 02.00).
Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info
0x1000 Device type CANopen device profile according CANopen specification CiA 301/
• Read only CiA 402.
• From version 02.00
0x1008 Manufacturer device name Display of the manufacturer device name.
• Read only
• From version 02.00
0x1009 Manufacturer hardware version Display of the manufacturer hardware version.
• Read only
• From version 02.00
0x100A Manufacturer software version Display of the manufacturer software version.
• Read only
• From version 02.00
0x1018:001 Identity object: Vendor ID Display of the manufacturer's identification number.
• Read only
• From version 02.00

127
Diagnostics and fault elimination
Diagnostics parameter
Network diagnostics

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x1018:002 Identity object: Product ID Display of the product code of the inverter.
• Read only
• From version 02.00
0x1018:003 Identity object: Revision number Display of the main and subversion of the firmware.
• Read only
• From version 02.00
0x1018:004 Identity object: Serial number Display of the serial number of the inverter.
• Read only
• From version 02.00
0x2362:004 Active EtherCAT settings: Device identifier Display of the clear device address in the network which is defined via
(P511.04) (EtherCAT diag.: Device ident.) rotary encoder switch or object 0x2361:004 (P510.04).
• Read only
• From version 02.00
0x2362:006 Active EtherCAT settings: Station address Display of the active station address.
(P511.06) (EtherCAT diag.: Station address)
• Read only
• From version 02.00
0x2362:007 Active EtherCAT settings: Tx length Display of the length of the transmitted cyclic data in bytes.
(P511.07) (EtherCAT diag.: Tx length)
• Read only
• From version 02.00
0x2362:008 Active EtherCAT settings: Rx length Display of the length of the received cyclic data in bytes.
(P511.08) (EtherCAT diag.: Rx length)
• Read only
• From version 02.00
0x2368 EtherCAT status Display of the current network status.
(P516.00) (EtherCAT status)
• Read only
• From version 02.00
1 Initialisation Network initialisation is active.
• No PDO/SDO transmission.
• Device identification is possible by network scan.
2 Pre-Operational The network is active.
• SDO transmission (CoE communication via mailbox) is possible.
• No PDO transmission.
3 Bootstrap Firmware update active.
• For the firmware update, the FoE protocol is used.
• No PDO transmission.
4 Safe-Operational SDO transmission (CoE communication via mailbox) is possible.
PDO transmission:
• The input data in the process image are updated.
• The output data from the process image are not transmitted.
8 Operational Normal operation
• PDO/SDO transmission is possible.
• Network synchronisation is successful (if used).
0x2369 EtherCAT error Bit coded display of EtherCAT errors.
(P517.00) (EtherCAT error)
• Read only
• From version 02.00

Related topics
4EtherCAT ^ 383
6.2.4.7 POWERLINK diagnostics
The following parameters serve to diagnose the POWERLINK interface and the communication
via POWERLINK.
Preconditions
Control unit (CU) of the inverter is provided with POWERLINK.
Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info
0x1000 NMT_DeviceType_U32 CANopen device profile according CANopen specification CiA 301/
• Read only CiA 402.

128
Diagnostics and fault elimination
Diagnostics parameter
Network diagnostics

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x1008 NMT_ManufactDevName_VS Display of the manufacturer device name.
• Read only
0x1009 NMT_ManufactHwVers_VS Display of the manufacturer hardware version.
• Read only
0x100A NMT_ManufactSwVers_VS Display of the manufacturer software version.
• Read only
0x1018:001 NMT_IdentityObject_REC: VendorId_U32 Display of the manufacturer's identification number.
• Read only
0x23C2:001 Active POWERLINK settings: IP address Display of the active IP address.
• Read only
0x23C2:002 Active POWERLINK settings: Subnet Display of the active subnet mask.
• Read only
0x23C2:003 Active POWERLINK settings: Gateway Display of the IP address of the router that connects the POWERLINK
• Read only segment to the higher-level network.
0x23C2:004 Active POWERLINK settings: Node ID Display of the active node address (node ID) in the network.
• Read only
0x23C2:005 Active POWERLINK settings: MAC Address Display of the active MAC address.
• Read only
0x23C2:007 Active POWERLINK settings: Tx length Display of the length of the transmitted cyclic data in bytes.
• Read only
0x23C2:008 Active POWERLINK settings: Rx length Display of the length of the received cyclic data in bytes.
• Read only
0x23C3 POWERLINK switch position Display of the rotary encoder switch setting at the last mains power-on.
• Read only
0x23C8:001 POWERLINK status: Network management Display of the current bus status.
• Read only
0x23C9:001 POWERLINK error: Error Bit coded display of the bus error state reported by the LED "BE" (Bus
• Read only Error).
• Bit 0 = 0 (0x0000) ≡ no bus error
• Bit 0 = 1 (0x0001) ≡ active bus error

6.2.5 Diagnostics of the inputs and outputs

6.2.5.1 Digital inputs and outputs

The following parameters serve to diagnose the digital inputs and outputs of the inverter.
Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info
0x60FD Digital inputs Bit coded display of the current state of the digital inputs
(P118.00) (Digital inputs)
• Read only
Bit 16 Level from digital input 1 0 ≡ LOW level, 1 ≡ HIGH level.
Bit 17 Level from digital input 2 Digital input 6 and digital input 7 are only available with application I/O.
Bit 18 Level from digital input 3
Bit 19 Level from digital input 4
Bit 20 Level from digital input 5
Bit 21 Level from digital input 6
Bit 22 Level from digital input 7
Bit 25 Internal interconnection of digital inputs 0 ≡ digital input terminals are set to HIGH level via pull-up resistors.
1 ≡ digital input terminals are set to LOW level via pull-down resistors.
0x2DAD Internal hardware states Bit-coded display of internal hardware states.
(P120.00) (Int. HW states)
• Read only
Bit 0 Relay 0 ≡ X9/NO-COM open and NC-COM closed.
1 ≡ X9/NO-COM closed and NC-COM open.
Bit 1 Digital output 1 0 ≡ LOW level, 1 ≡ HIGH level.
Bit 2 Digital output 2
Bit 10 Charge Relay 1 ≡ precharging of the DC bus via charge relay is active.

129
Diagnostics and fault elimination
Diagnostics parameter
Diagnostics of the inputs and outputs

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x4016:005 Digital output 1: Terminal state Display of the logic state of output terminal X3/DO1.
• Read only
0 FALSE
1 TRUE
0x4016:006 Digital output 1: Trigger signal state Display of the logic state of the trigger signal for digital output 1 (without
• Read only taking a ON/OFF delay set and inversion into consideration).
0 FALSE
1 TRUE
0x4017:005 Digital output 2: Terminal state Display of the logic state of output terminal X3/DO2.
• Read only
• Only available for application I/O.
0 FALSE
1 TRUE
0x4017:006 Digital output 2: Trigger signal state Display of the logic state of the trigger signal for digital output 2 (without
• Read only taking a ON/OFF delay set and inversion into consideration).
• Only available for application I/O.
0 FALSE
1 TRUE
0x4018:005 Relay: Relay state Display of the logic state of the relay.
• Read only
0 FALSE
1 TRUE
0x4018:006 Relay: Trigger signal state Display of the logic state of the trigger signal for the relay (without tak-
• Read only ing a ON/OFF delay set and inversion into consideration).
0 FALSE
1 TRUE

Related topics
4Configuration of digital inputs ^ 594
4Configuration of digital outputs ^ 603
6.2.5.2 Analog inputs and outputs
The following parameters serve to diagnose the analog inputs and outputs of the inverter.
Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info
0x2DA4:001 Diagnostics of analog input 1: Value in percent Display of the current input value at X3/AI1 scaled as value in percent.
(P110.01) (AI1 diagnostics: AI1 terminal %) • 100 % ≡ 10 V or 20 mA or 5 V
• Read only: x.x %
0x2DA4:002 Diagnostics of analog input 1: Frequency value Display of the current input value at X3/AI1 scaled as a frequency value.
(P110.02) (AI1 diagnostics: AI1 scaled freq.) • The standard setpoint source for operating mode 0x6060 (P301.00) =
• Read only: x.x Hz "MS: Velocity mode [-2]" is selected in 0x2860:001 (P201.01).
0x2DA4:003 Diagnostics of analog input 1: Process controller value Display of the current input value at X3/AI1 scaled as a process controller
(P110.03) (AI1 diagnostics: AI1 scaled PID) value.
• Read only: x.xx PID unit • The standard setpoint source for the reference value of PID control is
selected in 0x2860:002 (P201.02).
0x2DA4:004 Diagnostics of analog input 1: Torque value Display of the current input value at X3/AI1 scaled as a percentage tor-
(P110.04) (AI1 diagnostics: AI1 scaled torq.) que value.
• Read only: x.x % • 100 % ≡ permissible maximum torque 0x6072 (P326.00)
• The standard setpoint source for operating mode 0x6060 (P301.00) =
"MS: Torque mode [-1]" is selected in 0x2860:003 (P201.03).

130
Diagnostics and fault elimination
Diagnostics parameter
Diagnostics of the inputs and outputs

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x2DA4:016 Diagnostics of analog input 1: Status Bit-coded display of the status of analog input 1 (X3/AI1).
(P110.16) (AI1 diagnostics: AI1 status)
• Read only
• From version 04.00
Bit 0 Mode 0: 0 ... 10 VDC active
Bit 1 Mode 1: 0 ... 5 VDC active
Bit 2 Mode 2: 2 ... 10 VDC active
Bit 3 Mode 3: -10 ... 10 VDC active
Bit 4 Mode 4: 4 ... 20 mA active
Bit 5 Mode 5: 0 ... 20 mA active
Bit 6 24 V supply OK
Bit 7 Calibration successful
Bit 8 Monitoring threshold exceeded/not reached
Bit 9 Input current too low (mode 4)
Bit 10 Input voltage too low (mode 2)
Bit 11 Input voltage too high (mode 4)
0x2DA5:001 Diagnostics of analog input 2: Value in percent Display of the current input value at X3/AI2 scaled as a value in percent.
(P111.01) (AI2 diagnostics: AI2 terminal %) • 100 % ≡ 10 V or 20 mA or 5 V
• Read only: x.x %
0x2DA5:002 Diagnostics of analog input 2: Frequency value Display of the current input value at X3/AI2 scaled as a frequency value.
(P111.02) (AI2 diagnostics: AI2 scaled freq.) • The standard setpoint source for operating mode 0x6060 (P301.00) =
• Read only: x.x Hz "MS: Velocity mode [-2]" is selected in 0x2860:001 (P201.01).
0x2DA5:003 Diagnostics of analog input 2: Process controller value Display of the current input value at X3/AI2 scaled as a process controller
(P111.03) (AI2 diagnostics: AI2 scaled PID) value.
• Read only: x.xx PID unit • The standard setpoint source for the reference value of PID control is
selected in 0x2860:002 (P201.02).
0x2DA5:004 Diagnostics of analog input 2: Torque value Display of the current input value at X3/AI2 scaled as a percentage tor-
(P111.04) (AI2 diagnostics: AI2 scaled torq.) que value.
• Read only: x.x % • 100 % ≡ permissible maximum torque 0x6072 (P326.00)
0x2DA5:016 Diagnostics of analog input 2: Status Bit-coded display of the status of analog input 2 (X3/AI2).
(P111.16) (AI2 diagnostics: AI2 status)
• Read only
• From version 04.00
Bit 0 Mode 0: 0 ... 10 VDC active
Bit 1 Mode 1: 0 ... 5 VDC active
Bit 2 Mode 2: 2 ... 10 VDC active
Bit 3 Mode 3: -10 ... 10 VDC active
Bit 4 Mode 4: 4 ... 20 mA active
Bit 5 Mode 5: 0 ... 20 mA active
Bit 6 24 V supply OK
Bit 7 Calibration successful
Bit 8 Monitoring threshold exceeded/not reached
Bit 9 Input current too low
Bit 10 Input voltage too low
Bit 11 Input voltage too high
0x2DAA:001 Diagnostics of analog output 1: Voltage Display of the current output voltage at X3/AO1.
(P112.01) (AO1 diagnostics: AO1 Voltage)
• Read only: x.xx V
0x2DAA:002 Diagnostics of analog output 1: Current Display of the present output current at X3/AO1.
(P112.02) (AO1 diagnostics: AO1 Current)
• Read only: x.xx mA
0x2DAB:001 Diagnostics of analog output 2: Voltage Display of the current output voltage at X3/AO2.
(P113.01) (AO2 diagnostics: AO2 Current)
• Read only: x.xx V
• Only available for application I/O.
0x2DAB:002 Diagnostics of analog output 2: Current Display of the present output current at X3/AO2.
(P113.02) (AO2 diagnostics: AO2 Voltage)
• Read only: x.xx mA
• Only available for application I/O.

131
Diagnostics and fault elimination
Diagnostics parameter
Wireless-LAN diagnostics

Related topics
4Configuration of analog inputs ^ 597
4Configuration of analog outputs ^ 617

6.2.6 Wireless-LAN diagnostics

The following parameters serve to diagnose the WLAN module and the WLAN communica-
tion.
Preconditions
WLAN module has been plugged onto the interface X16 on the front of the inverter.
Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info
0x2442:001 Active WLAN settings: Active IP address Display of the active IP address.
• Read only • If DHCP is activated, the active IP address usually derives from the
• From version 02.00 configured static IP address of the device.
0x2442:002 Active WLAN settings: Active netmask Display of the active netmask.
• Read only
• From version 02.00
0x2442:003 Active WLAN settings: Active gateway Display of the active gateway IP address.
• Read only
• From version 02.00
0x2442:004 Active WLAN settings: Active module mode Display of the active data source for the WLAN settings.
• Read only • This parameter indicates whether the settings used come from the
• From version 02.00 inverter or from the WLAN module.
0 Inverter The WLAN settings saved in the inverter are used.
1 Standalone The WLAN settings saved in the WLAN module are used.
0x2442:005 Active WLAN settings: MAC address Display of the MAC address of the WLAN module.
• Read only
• From version 02.00
0x2448:001 WLAN status: Connection time Display of the connection time in [s] since the current connection was
• Read only established.
• From version 02.00
0x2448:002 WLAN status: Number of connections In access point mode: Display of the number of currently connected cli-
• Read only ents.
• From version 02.00 In client mode: 0 ≡ not connected; 1 ≡ connected with external WLAN
network.
0x2448:003 WLAN status: Rx frame counter Display of the number of request received via WLAN.
• Read only
• From version 02.00
0x2448:004 WLAN status: Error statistics Display of the quality of the WLAN connection. A display value > 0 indi-
• Read only cates communication problemsn.
• From version 02.00
0x2449 WLAN error Bit coded display of WLAN errors.
• Read only
• From version 02.00
Bit 2 WLAN error
Bit 3 Memory problem
Bit 4 WLAN connection problem
Bit 7 WLAN off
Bit 9 Client mode off
Bit 12 TCP/IP configuration error
Bit 13 Password length
Bit 14 Access denied

Related topics
4Wireless LAN (WLAN) ^ 426

132
Diagnostics and fault elimination
Diagnostics parameter
Setpoint diagnostic

6.2.7 Setpoint diagnostic

The following parameters show the current setpoints of different setpoint sources.
Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info
0x282B:007 Inverter diagnostics: Default frequency setpoint Display of the frequency setpoint of the standard setpoint source set in
• Read only: x.x Hz 0x2860:001 (P201.01).
• From version 03.00
0x282B:008 Inverter diagnostics: Preset frequency setpoint Display of the preset frequency setpoint selected via the four functions
• Read only: x.x Hz "Activate preset (bit 0)" ... " Activate preset (bit 3)".
• From version 03.00 4Setpoint source of preset setpoints ^ 554
0x282B:009 Inverter diagnostics: Actual frequency setpoint Display of the currently selected frequency setpoint that is internally
• Read only: x.x Hz transferred to the motor control.
• From version 03.00
0x282B:010 Inverter diagnostics: Default PID setpoint Display of the PID control value of the standard setpoint source set in
• Read only: x.xx PID unit 0x2860:002 (P201.02).
• From version 03.00
0x282B:011 Inverter diagnostics: Preset PID setpoint Display of the preset PID setpoint selected via the four functions "Acti-
• Read only: x.xx PID unit vate preset (bit 0)" ... " Activate preset (bit 3)".
• From version 03.00 4Setpoint source of preset setpoints ^ 554
0x282B:012 Inverter diagnostics: Default torque setpoint Display of the torque setpoint of the standard setpoint source set in
• Read only: x.x % 0x2860:003 (P201.03).
• From version 03.00 • 100 % ≡ Motor rated torque 0x6076 (P325.00)
0x282B:013 Inverter diagnostics: Preset torque setpoint Display of the preset torque setpoint selected via the four functions
• Read only: x.x % "Activate preset (bit 0)" ... " Activate preset (bit 3)".
• From version 03.00 4Setpoint source of preset setpoints ^ 554
0x2948:001 Actual torque setpoint Display of the currently selected torque setpoint that is internally trans-
• Read only: x.x % ferred to the motor control.
• From version 03.00 • 100 % ≡ Motor rated torque 0x6076 (P325.00)
0x2DAE:010 Sequencer diagnostics: Frequency setpoint Display of the current frequency setpoint of the "sequencer" function.
• Read only: x.x Hz 4Sequencer ^ 504
• From version 03.00
0x2DAE:011 Sequencer diagnostics: PID setpoint Display of the current PID control value of the "sequencer" function.
• Read only: x.xx PID unit 4Sequencer ^ 504
• From version 03.00
0x2DAE:012 Sequencer diagnostics: Torque setpoint Display of the current torque setpoint of the "sequencer" function.
• Read only: x.x % • 100 % ≡ Motor rated torque 0x6076 (P325.00)
• From version 03.00 4Sequencer ^ 504
0x4009:004 MOP values saved: Frequency setpoint Display of the last MOP value saved internally for the operating mode
• Read only: x.x Hz "MS: Velocity mode".
0x4009:005 MOP values saved: PID setpoint Display of the last MOP value saved internally for the reference value of
• Read only: x.xx PID unit the PID control.
0x4009:006 MOP values saved: Torque setpoint Display of the last MOP value saved internally for the operating mode
• Read only: x.x % "MS: Torque mode".

Related topics
4Selection of setpoint source ^ 148
4Setpoint change-over ^ 546

6.2.8 Process controller status

The following parameters serve to diagnose the process controller.
Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info
0x401F:001 Current setpoint Display of the current reference value (setpoint) for the process control-
(P121.01) (PID setpoint) ler.
• Read only: x.xx PID unit
0x401F:002 Current process variable Display of the current controlled variable (actual value) fed back for the
(P121.02) (PID process var.) process controller.
• Read only: x.xx PID unit

133
Diagnostics and fault elimination
Diagnostics parameter
Process controller status

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x401F:003 Status Bit-coded status display of the process controller.
(P121.03) (PID status)
• Read only
Bit 0 Process controller off
Bit 1 PID output set to 0
Bit 2 PID I-component inhibited
Bit 3 PID influence active
Bit 4 Setpoint = actual value
Bit 5 Idle state active
Bit 6 Max. alarm
Bit 7 Min. alarm
0x401F:004 PID control value Display of the output frequency after the PID controller, but without any
• Read only: x.x Hz influencing factor.
• From version 03.00
0x401F:005 PID Feedforward value Display of the feedforward control value for the process controller.
• Read only: x.x Hz
• From version 03.00
0x401F:006 PID output value Display of the current process controller setpoint that is internally trans-
• Read only: x.x Hz ferred to the motor control (considering the feedforward control value).
• From version 03.00
0x401F:007 PID error value Display of the difference between reference value (setpoint) and fed
• Read only: x.xx PID unit back variable (actual value) of the process controller.
• From version 03.00

Related topics
4Configuring the process controller ^ 407

6.2.9 Sequencer diagnostics

The following parameters serve to diagnose the "sequencer" function.
Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info
0x2DAE:001 Sequencer diagnostics: Active step Display of the active step.
(P140.01) (Sequencer diag: Active Step) • 0 ≡ no sequence active.
• Read only
• From version 03.00
0x2DAE:002 Sequencer diagnostics: Step time elapsed Display of the time that has passed since the start of the current step.
(P140.02) (Sequencer diag: StepTime elapsed)
• Read only: x.x s
• From version 03.00
0x2DAE:003 Sequencer diagnostics: Step time remaining Display of the residual time for the current step.
(P140.03) (Sequencer diag: StepTime remain)
• Read only: x.x s
• From version 03.00
0x2DAE:004 Sequencer diagnostics: Steps complete Display of the number of steps that have been made since the start of
(P140.04) (Sequencer diag: Steps complete) the sequence.
• Read only
• From version 03.00
0x2DAE:005 Sequencer diagnostics: Steps remaining Display of the residual number of steps until the current sequence is
(P140.05) (Sequencer diag: Steps remain) completed. This includes the current step.
• Read only
• From version 03.00
0x2DAE:006 Sequencer diagnostics: Active sequence Display of the active sequence.
(P140.06) (Sequencer diag: Active sequence) • 0 ≡ no sequence active.
• Read only
• From version 03.00
0x2DAE:007 Sequencer diagnostics: Active segment Display of the active segment.
(P140.07) (Sequencer diag: Active segment) • 0 ≡ no sequence active.
• Read only • 255 ≡ final sequence active.
• From version 03.00

134
Diagnostics and fault elimination
Diagnostics parameter
Sequencer diagnostics

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x2DAE:008 Sequencer diagnostics: Relative sequence time Display of the residual time of the sequence in [%].
(P140.08) remaining
(Sequencer diag: SeqTime remain %)
• Read only: x %
• From version 03.00
0x2DAE:009 Sequencer diagnostics: Absolute sequence time Display of the residual time of the sequence in [s].
(P140.09) remaining
(Sequencer diag: SeqTime remain)
• Read only: x.x s
• From version 03.00

Related topics
4Sequencer ^ 504
4Sequencer control functions ^ 588

6.2.10 Device identification

The following parameters show some general information about the inverter.
Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info
0x2000:001 Device data: Product code Product code of the complete device.
(P190.01) (Device data: Product code) Example: "I55AE155D10V10017S"
• Read only • If control unit and power unit were ordered separately, the product
code "XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX" is displayed.
0x2000:002 Device data: Serial number Serial number of the complete device.
(P190.02) (Device data: Serial number) Example: "0000000000000000XYZXYZ"
• Read only • If control unit and power unit were ordered separately, the serial
number "XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX" is displayed.
0x2000:004 Device data: CU firmware version Firmware version of the control unit.
(P190.04) (Device data: CU firmware ver.) Example: "01.00.01.00"
• Read only
0x2000:005 Device data: CU firmware type Firmware type of the control unit.
(P190.05) (Device data: CU firmware type) Example: "IOFW51AC10"
• Read only
0x2000:006 Device data: CU bootloader version Bootloader version of the control unit.
(P190.06) (Device data: CU bootlder ver.) Example: "00.00.00.13"
• Read only
0x2000:007 Device data: CU bootloader type Bootloader type of the control unit.
(P190.07) (Device data: CU bootlder type) Example: "IOBL51AOnn"
• Read only
0x2000:008 Device data: Object directory version Example: "108478"
(P190.08) (Device data: OBD version)
• Read only
0x2000:010 Device data: PU firmware version Firmware version of the power unit.
(P190.10) (Device data: PU firmware ver.) Example: "00202"
• Read only
0x2000:011 Device data: PU firmware type Firmware type of the power unit.
(P190.11) (Device data: PU firmware type) Example: "IDFW5AA"
• Read only
0x2000:012 Device data: PU bootloader version Bootloader version of the power unit.
(P190.12) (Device data: PU bootlder ver.)
• Read only
0x2000:013 Device data: PU bootloader type Bootloader type of the power unit.
(P190.13) (Device data: PU bootlder type)
• Read only
0x2000:014 Device data: Module - firmware version Firmware version of the plugged-in module (e. g. WLAN module).
(P190.14) (Device data: Mod. firmware)
• Read only
0x2000:015 Device data: Firmware revision number Firmware version of the network option.
(P190.15) (Device data: FW revision nr.)
• Read only

135
Diagnostics and fault elimination
Diagnostics parameter
Device identification

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x2000:016 Device data: Bootloader revision number Bootloader version of the network option.
(P190.16) (Device data: Bootloader revNo)
• Read only
0x2001 Device name Any device name (e.g. "Wheel drive") can be set in this object for the
(P191.00) (Device name) purpose of device identification.
["My Device"]
0x2002:004 Device module: CU type code Type code of the control unit.
(P192.04) (Device module: CU type code)
• Read only
0x2002:005 Device module: PU type code Type code of the power unit.
(P192.05) (Device module: PU type code)
• Read only
0x2002:006 Device module: CU serial number Serial number of the control unit.
(P192.06) (Device module: CU serial number)
• Read only
0x2002:007 Device module: PU serial number Serial number of the power unit.
(P192.07) (Device module: PU serial number)
• Read only

6.2.11 Device overload monitoring (i*t)

The inverter calculates the i*t utilisation in order to protect itself against thermal overload. In
simple terms: a higher current or an overcurrent that continues for a longer time causes a
higher i*t utilisation.

DANGER!
Uncontrolled motor movements by pulse inhibit.
When the device overload monitoring function is activated, pulse inhibit is set and the motor
becomes torqueless. A load that is connected to motors without a holding brake may there-
fore cause uncontrolled movements! Without a load, the motor will coast.
▶ Only operate the inverter under permissible load conditions.

Details
The device overload monitoring function primarily offers protection to the power section.
Indirectly, also other components such as filter chokes, circuit-board conductors, and termi-
nals are protected against overheating. Short-time overload currents followed by recovery
periods (times of smaller current utilisation) are permissible. The monitoring function during
operation checks whether these conditions are met, taking into consideration that higher
switching frequencies and lower stator frequencies as well as higher DC voltages cause a
greater device utilisation.
• If the device utilisation exceeds the warning threshold set in 0x2D40:002 (default setting:
95 %), the inverter outputs a warning.
• If the device utilisation exceeds the permanent error threshold 100 %, the inverter is disa-
bled immediately and any further operation is stopped.
• Device overload monitoring depends on the inverter load characteristic 0x2D43:001
(P306.01).
• The device overload can be obtained from the configuration document.

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x2D40:002 Device utilisation (i*t): Warning threshold If the device utilisation exceeds the threshold set, the inverter outputs a
0 ... [95] ... 101 % warning.
• With the setting 0 % or ≥ 100 %, the warning is deactivated.
0x2D40:004 Device utilisation (i*t) Display of the current device utilisation.
(P135.04) (Device utilisat.: ixt utilisation)
• Read only: x %

136
Diagnostics and fault elimination
Diagnostics parameter
Heatsink Temperature Monitoring

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x2D40:005 Device utilisation (i*t): Error response Selection of the response to be executed when the device overload
(P135.05) (Device utilisat.: Error response) monitoring function is triggered.
Associated error code:
• 9090 | 0x2382 - I*t error
2 Trouble 4Error types ^ 139
3 Fault
0x2DDF:001 Axis information: Rated current Display of the rated current of the axis.
• Read only: x.xx A

6.2.12 Heatsink Temperature Monitoring

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info
0x2D84:001 Heatsink temperature Display of the current heatsink temperature.
(P117.01) (Heatsink temp.: Heatsink temp.)
• Read only: x.x °C
0x2D84:002 Heatsink temperature: Warning threshold Warning threshold for temperature monitoring.
50.0 ... [80.0]* ... 100.0 °C • If the heatsink temperature exceeds the threshold set here, the inver-
* Default setting depending on the size. ter outputs a warning.
• The warning is reset with a hysteresis of approx. 5 °C.
• If the heatsink temperature increases further and exceeds the non-
adjustable error threshold (100 °C), the inverter changes to the
"Fault" device status. The inverter is disabled and thus any further
operation is stopped.

6.2.13 Life-diagnosis
The following parameters provide some information about the use of the inverter.
This includes the following information:
• Operating and power-on time of the inverter/control unit
• Operating time of the internal fan
• Number of switching cycles of the mains voltage
• Number of switching cycles of the relay
• Number of short-circuits and earth faults that have occurred
• Display of the number of "Imax: Clamp responded too often" errors that have occurred.

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x2D81:001 Life-diagnosis: Operating time Display showing for how long the inverter has been running so far "Oper-
(P151.01) (Life-diagnosis: Operating time) ation enabled" device state).
• Read only: x s
0x2D81:002 Life-diagnosis: Power-on time Display showing for how long the inverter has been supplied with mains
(P151.02) (Life-diagnosis: Power-on time) voltage so far.
• Read only: x s
0x2D81:003 Life-diagnosis: Control unit operating time Display showing for how long the control unit has been supplied with
(P151.03) (Life-diagnosis: CU oper. time) voltage so far. This includes the external 24-V supply and voltage supply
• Read only: x ns via USB module.
• This also includes the time within which the control unit has only
been supplied with an external 24 V voltage.
0x2D81:004 Life-diagnosis: Main switching cycles Display of the number of switching cycles of the mains voltage.
(P151.04) (Life-diagnosis: Switching cycles)
• Read only
0x2D81:005 Life-diagnosis: Relay switching cycles Display of the number of switching cycles of the relay.
(P151.05) (Life-diagnosis: Relay cycles)
• Read only
0x2D81:006 Life-diagnosis: Short-circuit counter Display of the number of short circuits that have occurred.
(P151.06) (Life-diagnosis: Short-circ.count)
• Read only
0x2D81:007 Life-diagnosis: Earth fault counter Display of the number of earth faults that have occurred.
(P151.07) (Life-diagnosis: Earthfault count)
• Read only

137
Diagnostics and fault elimination
Diagnostics parameter
Life-diagnosis

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x2D81:008 Life-diagnosis: Clamp active Display of the number of "Imax: Clamp responded too often" errors that
(P151.08) (Life-diagnosis: Clamp active) have occurred.
• Read only • "Clamp" = short-time inhibit of the inverter in V/f operation when the
current limit shown in 0x2DDF:002 is reached.
0x2D81:009 Life-diagnosis: Fan operating time Display showing for how long the internal fan has been running so far.
(P151.09) (Life-diagnosis: Fan oper. time)
• Read only: x s

138
Diagnostics and fault elimination
Error handling
Error types

6.3 Error handling

Many functions integrated in the inverter can
• detect errors and thus protect inverter and motor from damages,
• detect an operating error of the user,
• output a warning or information if desired.

6.3.1 Error types

In the event of an error, the inverter response is determined by the error type defined for the
error.
In the following, the different error types are described.
Error type "No response"
The error is completely ignored (does not affect the running process).
Error type "Warning"
A warning does not severely affect the process and may be also ignored in consideration of
safety aspects.
Error type "Fault"
The motor is brought to a standstill with the quick stop ramp.
• The inverter will only be disabled after the quick stop is executed (motor at standstill) or
after the time-out time set in 0x2826 has been elapsed. 4Timeout für fault reaction ^ 483
• Exception: In case of a serious fault, the inverter is disabled immediately. The motor
becomes torqueless (coasts). For details see the table "Error codes". ^ 639
Error type "Trouble"
Just like "Fault", but the error state will be left automatically if the error condition is not active
anymore.
• Exception: In case of a severe trouble, the inverter is disabled immediately. The motor
becomes torqueless (coasts). For details see the table "Error codes". ^ 639
• The restart behaviour after trouble can be configured. 4Automatic restart ^ 484

In the operating mode 0x6060 (P301.00) = "CiA: Velocity mode [2]", the behav-
iour in case of "Trouble" is just like in case of "Fault"!

Comparison of the error types

The following table compares the main differences of the error types:
Error type Logging in the Display in the Inverter disable Motor stop Error reset is "ERR" LED (red)
Error history buf- CiA 402 status required
fer / Logbook word 0x6041
(P780.00)
No response No No No No No off

Warning Yes yes, bit 7 No No No

blinking fast (4 Hz)
after quick stop or quick stop ramp or
Trouble Yes yes, bit 3 No
immediately. coasting. blinking (1 Hz)

Error Yes yes, bit 3 For details see table "Error codes". ^ 639 Yes
on

139
Diagnostics and fault elimination
Error handling
Keypad error messages

6.3.2 Error configuration

The errors can be divided into two types:
• Errors with predefined error type
• Errors with configurable error type
Especially critical errors are permanently set to the "Fault" error type in order to protect inver-
ter and motor from damages.
In case of errors with configurable error type, the default setting can be changed in considera-
tion of safety aspects and the operational performance. The selection "No response [0]" is,
however, only available for minor errors.
The "Error codes" table lists the error type for each error. If the error type can be configured
by the user, the "adjustable in" column displays the corresponding parameter. ^ 639

6.3.3 Error reset

If the error condition is not active anymore, there are several options to reset an active error
and thus leave the error state again:
• Via the keypad key . 4Error reset with keypad ^ 634
• Via the trigger assigned to the Reset fault" function. 4Reset error ^ 570
• Via the button in the »EASY Starter« ("Diagnostics" tab).
• In the default setting of 0x400E:008 (P505.08) via bit 7 in the mappable data word Net-
WordIN1 0x4008:001 (P590.01).
• Via bit 7 in the mappable CiA 402 control word 0x6040.
• Via bit 2 in the mappable AC Drive control word 0x400B:001 (P592.01).
• Via bit 11 in the mappable LECOM control word 0x400B:002 (P592.02).
Notes:
• Certain errors can only be reset by mains switching.
• Certain errors (e. g. earth fault or short circuit of the motor phases) may cause a blocking
time. In this case, the error can be reset only after the blocking time has elapsed. An active
blocking time is displayed via bit 14 in the inverter status word 0x2831.
The "Error codes" table gives the blocking time (if available) for each error. This table also
shows whether mains switching is required for the error reset. ^ 639

6.3.4 Keypad error messages

If an error is pending, the keypad shows the following information:
Keypad display Meaning
① Error text

Warn.DC Bus UV ② Error type:

F Fault
O1W3221
LOC REM MAN AUTO SET
T Trouble
W Warning
③ Error code (hexadecimal)
• Faults (F) and trouble (T) are displayed con-
tinuously. 4Error codes ^ 639
• Warnings (W) are only displayed every 2 sec- 4Error reset with keypad ^ 634
onds for a short time.
Restart Pending After a disturbance, a restart is possible if the error condition is not active anymore. The keypad
shows this by the "Restart Pending" note. The note is displayed in a 1-second interval alternating
with the error text.
AI1 fault 4Timeout für fault reaction ^ 483

OOF7O81
LOC REM MAN AUTO SET

140
Diagnostics and fault elimination
Data handling

6.4 Data handling

In the following, the behaviour of the inverter is described if the data on the memory module
do not match the inverter hardware or firmware, for whatever reason.
The following points are described in detail here:
• Automatic loading of the parameter settings when the inverter is switched on
• Manual loading of the user data via device command
• Manual loading of the OEM data via device command
• Manual saving of the parameter settings via device command
• Hardware and firmware updates/downgrades
Automatic loading of the parameter settings when the inverter is switched on
Process when the inverter is switched on:
1. The default setting saved in the inverter firmware is loaded.
2. If a memory module with valid data is available, the data is loaded from the user memory.
Otherwise a corresponding error message is output:
Error message Info
0x7681: No memory The default setting saved in the inverter firmware is loaded. The error cannot be reset by the user.
module Remedy:
1. Switch off inverter.
2. Plug the memory module into the inverter.
3. Switch the inverter on again.
Note: The memory module cannot be replaced during ongoing operation!
0x7682: Memory mod- The user parameter settings in the memory module are invalid. Thus, the user parameter settings get lost. The default
ule: invalid user data setting is loaded automatically.
Remedy:
1. Execute user parameter settings again.
2. Execute device command "Save user data" 0x2022:003 (P700.03).
0x7684: Data not com- Saving the parameter settings was interrupted by an unexpected disconnection. The user parameter settings were not
pletely saved before saved completely. When the inverter is switched on the next time, the backup data is copied to the user memory.
switch-off Remedy:
1. Check user parameter settings. (The loaded backup is an older version.)
2. If required, repeat the changes made last.
3. Execute device command "Save user data" 0x2022:003 (P700.03).
0x7689: Memory mod- The OEM memory contains invalid parameter settings or is empty. The user parameter settings are loaded automatically.
ule: invalid OEM data Remedy:
• Execute device command "Save OEM data" 0x2022:006 (P700.06).
• Thus, the user parameter settings get lost!
Notes:
• If the memory module contains invalid data, the device commands "Load user data"
0x2022:004 (P700.04) and "Load OEM data" 0x2022:005 (P700.05) are not executed. The
status feedback "Action cancelled" takes place.
• If the memory module is empty, the default setting saved in the inverter firmware is loa-
ded. No access is required by the user. The memory module remains empty until the
device command "Save user data" 0x2022:003 (P700.03) or "Save OEM data" 0x2022:006
(P700.06) is executed.
• Irrespective of the data on the memory module, the device command "Load default set-
tings" 0x2022:001 (P700.01) is always enabled.
Manual loading of the user data via device command
Device command: "Load user data" 0x2022:004 (P700.04)
• If the user memory contains invalid parameter settings, the default setting saved in the
inverter firmware is automatically loaded.
• For possible error messages, see the table above.

141
Diagnostics and fault elimination
Data handling

Manual loading of the OEM data via device command

Device command: "Load OEM data" 0x2022:005 (P700.05)
• If the OEM memory contains invalid parameter settings, the user parameter settings are
loaded automatically.
• If the OEM memory is empty, the status feedback "Action cancelled" takes place. The cur-
rent parameter settings remain unchanged.
Manual saving of the parameter settings via device command
Device command: "Save user data" 0x2022:003 (P700.03)
• It may happen that the parameter settings cannot be saved because the user memory is
full. In this case, the following error message appears:
Error message Info
0x7680: Memory mod- The memory module contains too many parameter settings. The parameter settings were not saved in the memory mod-
ule is full ule.
Remedy: Execute device command "Save user data" 0x2022:003 (P700.03) again. This reinitialises the user memory with
the current parameter settings. By this means, parameter settings no longer required are deleted automatically.

Hardware and firmware upgrades/downgrades

By "taking along" the memory module, all parameter settings of a device can be transferred to
another device, for instance, in case of a device replacement. When switched on, the inverter
checks whether the parameter settings saved in the memory module match the inverter hard-
ware and firmware. In case of an incompatibility, a corresponding error message is output.
The following table contains details on different scenarios:
Prio Compatibility check Error message Info
User data ßà device
1 Device has a newer firmware - The "firmware upgrade" is recognised.
Example: Version 2.x à version 3.x • The user parameter settings are loaded without an action being
required by the user.
• If the parameter settings are saved afterwards, the user memory is
reinitialised with the current parameter settings. By this means,
parameter settings no longer required are deleted automatically.
Device has an older firmware 0x7690: EPM firmware The data is loaded into the RAM memory but are incompatible.
Example: Version 4.x à version 3.x version incompatible Remedy:
2 Firmware type is different 0x7691: EPM data: 1. Execute device command "Load default settings" 0x2022:001
firmware type incom- (P700.01).
patible 2. Execute "Save user data" 0x2022:003 (P700.03) or "Save OEM data"
Power unit is different (and incom- 0x7693: EPM data: PU 0x2022:006 (P700.06) device command.
patible with saved data) size incompatible
Country code is different 0x7691: EPM data:
Example: EU à USA firmware type incom-
Device has less functionality patible
Examples:
i550 à i510
Application I/O à Standard I/O
3 Network option is different 0x7692: EPM data: The data is loaded into the RAM memory and is compatible. However,
Example: CANopen à PROFIBUS new firmware type the settings must be accepted by the user:
detected 1. Check parameter settings.
2. Reset error.
3. Execute "Save user data" 0x2022:003 (P700.03) or "Save OEM data"
0x2022:006 (P700.06) device command.
4 Device has more functionality - The "hardware upgrade" is recognised.
Examples: • The user parameter settings are loaded without an action being
i510 à i550 required by the user.
Standard I/O à application I/O • If the parameter settings are saved afterwards, the user memory is
reinitialised with the current parameter settings. By this means,
parameter settings no longer required are deleted automatically.
5 Power unit is different (but compat- 0x7694: EPM data: The data is loaded into the RAM memory and is compatible. However,
ible with saved data) new PU size detected the settings must be accepted by the user:
Example: 1. Check parameter settings.
230 V/0.75 kW à 400 V/5.5 kW 2. Reset error.
3. Execute "Save user data" 0x2022:003 (P700.03) or "Save OEM data"
0x2022:006 (P700.06) device command.

142
Basic setting

7 Basic setting
This chapter contains the most frequently used functions and settings to adapt the inverter to
a simple application based on the default setting.
• Mains voltage ^ 144
• Inverter load characteristic ^ 146
• Control source selection ^ 147
• Selection of setpoint source ^ 148
• Starting/stopping performance ^ 153
• Frequency limits and ramp times ^ 156
• Quick stop ^ 159
• S-shaped ramps ^ 161
• Optical device identification ^ 162

143
Basic setting
Mains voltage

7.1 Mains voltage

The rated mains voltage set for the inverter has an impact on the operating range of the inver-
ter.
Details
By default, the rated mains voltage in 0x2540:001 (P208.01) is set according to the product
code of the inverter.

Check the setting of the rated mains voltage in 0x2540:001 (P208.01). Ensure
that it matches the actual mains voltage applied!

Region Inverter Product code Rated mains voltage

0x2000:001 (P190.01) Default setting Possible settings
EU i500, 230 V, 1-phase i5xAExxxBxxxx0xxxx 230 Veff [0] 230 Veff [0]
US i500, 230 V, 1-phase i5xAExxxBxxxx1xxxx 230 Veff [0] 230 Veff [0]
EU i500, 230 V, 1/3-phase i5xAExxxDxxxx0xxxx 230 Veff [0] 230 Veff [0]
US i500, 230 V, 1/3-phase i5xAExxxDxxxx1xxxx 230 Veff [0] 230 Veff [0]
EU i500, 400 V, 3-phase i5xAExxxFxxxx0xxxx 400 Veff [1] 400 Veff [1], 480 Veff [2]
US i500, 480 V, 3-phase i5xAExxxFxxxx1xxxx 480 Veff [2] 400 Veff [1], 480 Veff [2]
EU i500, 120 V, 1-phase i5xAExxxAxxxx0xxxx 120 Veff [3] 120 Veff [3]
US i500, 120 V, 1-phase i5xAExxxAxxxx1xxxx 120 Veff [3] 120 Veff [3]
Notes regarding the table:
• The inverter types 400/480 V can be used with different mains voltages. For setting the
internal limit values, the rated mains voltage can be set in 0x2540:001 (P208.01) by the
user.
• The inverter types 120 V are designed for a 1-phase 120-V mains voltage and 3-phase 230-
V three-phase AC motors. These inverters have an internal DC bus similar to the 230-V
inverters. The voltage thresholds correspond to the ones of the 230-V inverters.
• If the inverter is reset to the delivery status, the rated mains voltage is also reset to the
default setting listed in the table according to the product code.
The following results from the rated mains voltage set:
• the error threshold for monitoring the DC-bus voltage and
• the voltage threshold for braking operation ("brake chopper threshold").
Monitoring of the DC-bus voltage
• The warning thresholds for monitoring are adjustable.
• The error thresholds and reset thresholds for monitoring result from the rated mains volt-
age set:
Rated mains volt- Undervoltage thresholds Overvoltage thresholds
age Warning threshold Error threshold Reset threshold Warning threshold Error threshold Reset threshold
Setting in Setting in Display in Display in Setting in Display in Display in
0x2540:001 0x2540:002 0x2540:003 0x2540:004 0x2540:005 0x2540:006 0x2540:007
(P208.01) (P208.02) (P208.03) (P208.04) (P208.05) (P208.06) (P208.07)

• If the DC-bus voltage of the inverter falls below the undervoltage error threshold, the
"Trouble" response is triggered.
• Without external 24-V supply: Motor behaves according to 0x2838:002 (P203.02).
• With external 24-V supply: At undervoltage, motor behaves according to disturbance
response.
• If the DC-bus voltage of the inverter exceeds the overvoltage error threshold, the "Fault"
response is triggered.

The motor does not restart automatically after the overvoltage monitoring func-
tion has been activated.

144
Basic setting
Mains voltage

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x2540:001 Mains settings: Rated mains voltage Selection of the mains voltage for actuating the inverter.
(P208.01) (Mains settings: Mains voltage)
• Setting can only be changed if the inverter is inhibi-
ted.
0 230 Veff
1 400 Veff
2 480 Veff
3 120 Veff
10 230 Veff/reduced LU level
0x2540:002 Mains settings: Undervoltage warning threshold Setting of the warning threshold for monitoring DC bus undervoltage.
(P208.02) (Mains settings: LU warn. thresh.) • If the DC bus voltage falls below the threshold set, the inverter out-
0 ... [0]* ... 800 V puts a warning.
* Default setting depending on the size. • The warning is reset with a hysteresis of 10 V.
0x2540:003 Mains settings: Undervoltage error threshold Display of the fixed error threshold for monitoring DC bus undervoltage.
(P208.03) (Mains settings: LU error thresh.) • If the DC-bus voltage falls below the threshold displayed, the "Fault"
• Read only: x V response is triggered.
0x2540:004 Mains settings: Undervoltage reset threshold Display of the fixed reset threshold for monitoring DC bus undervoltage.
(P208.04) (Mains settings: LU reset thresh.)
• Read only: x V
0x2540:005 Mains settings: Overvoltage warning threshold Setting of the warning threshold for monitoring DC bus overvoltage.
(P208.05) (Mains settings: OU warn. thresh.) • If the DC bus voltage exceeds the threshold set, the inverter outputs a
0 ... [0]* ... 800 V warning.
* Default setting depending on the size. • The warning is reset with a hysteresis of 10 V.
0x2540:006 Mains settings: Overvoltage error threshold Display of the fixed error threshold for monitoring the DC bus overvolt-
(P208.06) (Mains settings: OU error thresh.) age.
• Read only: x V • If the DC-bus voltage exceeds the threshold displayed, the "Fault"
response is triggered.
0x2540:007 Mains settings: Overvoltage reset threshold Display of the fixed reset threshold for monitoring DC bus overvoltage.
(P208.07) (Mains settings: OU reset thresh.)
• Read only: x V

145
Basic setting
Inverter load characteristic

7.2 Inverter load characteristic

The inverter has two different load characteristics: "Light Duty" and "Heavy Duty". The load
characteristic "Light Duty" enables a higher output current with restrictions regarding over-
load capacity, ambient temperature and switching frequency. This enables the motor required
for the application to be driven by a less powerful inverter. The selected load characteristic
depends on the application.

NOTICE
Load characteristic "Light Duty"
In order to prevent irreversible damage of the inverter/motor:
▶ Based on the configuration document, check whether the inverter can be operated with the
load characteristic "Light Duty".
▶ Comply with all data in the configuration document for this load characteristic and the cor-
responding mains voltage range. Among other things, this includes information on the type
of installation and required fuses, cable cross-sections, mains chokes and filters.
▶ Set parameters only in accordance with the following specifications.

Details
The following table compares the two load characteristics:
Duty selection 0x2D43:001 (P306.01)
"Heavy Duty [0]" "Light Duty [1]"
Characteristics High dynamic requirements Low dynamic requirements
Typical applications Main tool drives, travelling drives, hoist drives, winders, Pumps, fans, general horizontal materials handling tech-
forming drives, and conveyors. nology and line drives.
Overload capacity 3 s/200 %, 60 s/150 % Reduced overload
For details see configuration document For details see configuration document

If the inverter is reset to the default setting, the load characteristic is set to
"Heavy Duty [0]".

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x2D43:001 Inverter load characteristic: Duty selection Selection of the load characteristic.
(P306.01) (Inv. load char.: Duty selection) Further required settings:
• Setting can only be changed if the inverter is inhibi- • Set the motor data according to the motor.
ted.
• Set further parameters (e. g. current limits) according to the applica-
tion.
0 Heavy Duty Load characteristic for high dynamic requirements.
1 Light Duty Load characteristic for low dynamic requirements.
• The device overload monitoring (i*t) is adapted.
CAUTION!
Observe the information in the configuration document for this load
characteristic.

Related topics
4Motor data ^ 164
4Current limits ^ 220

146
Basic setting
Control source selection

7.3 Control source selection

The selected "control source" serves to provide the inverter with its start, stop, and reversal
commands.
Possible control sources are:
• Digital inputs
• Keypad
• Network

Irrespective of the control source selection, stop commands are always active
from each source connected! If, for instance, the network control is active and a
keypad is connected for diagnostic purposes, the motor is also stopped if the
keypad key is pressed.
Exception: In the jog operation, a stop command has no impact.

Details
• The default setting "Flexible I/O configuration [0]" in 0x2824 (P200.00) enables a flexible
control of the inverter via digital inputs, network and keypad. The control of the inverter
via the digital inputs is preconfigured. For details see the chapter "Function assignment of
the inputs and outputs". ^ 82
• If the keypad is to be used as the sole control source for the application, selection "Keypad
[1]" is to be set in 0x2824 (P200.00).
• The control source that is currently active is displayed in 0x282B:001 (P125.01).

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x2824 Control selection Selection of the type of inverter control.
(P200.00) (Control select.)
0 Flexible I/O configuration This selection enables a flexible assignment of the start, stop, and rotat-
ing direction commands with digital signal sources.
• Digital signal sources can be digital inputs, network and keypad.
• The I/O configuration is made via the parameters 0x2631:xx (P400.xx).
1 Keypad This selection enables the motor to be started exclusively via the start
key of the keypad. Other signal sources for starting the motor are
ignored.
Start motor Stop motor

Note!
• The functions "Enable inverter" 0x2631:001 (P400.01) and "Run"
0x2631:002 (P400.02) must be set to TRUE to start the motor.
• If jog operation is active, the motor cannot be stopped via the
keypad key.
0x282B:001 Inverter diagnostics: Active control source Display of the control source that is currently active.
(P125.01) (Inverter diag.: Active control)
• Read only
0 Flexible I/O configuration
1 Network
2 Keypad
8 Keypad full control

Related topics
• The preset I/O configuration can be individually adapted to the respective application. For
details see the chapter "Flexible I/O configuration". ^ 525
• For details of the network control of the inverter, see the chapter "General network set-
tings". ^ 227

147
Basic setting
Selection of setpoint source

7.4 Selection of setpoint source

The selected "setpoint source" serves to provide the inverter with its setpoint. The setpoint
source can be selected individually for each operating mode.
Possible setpoint sources are:
• Analog inputs
• Keypad
• Network
• Parameterisable setpoints (presets)
• Digital inputs (configured as HTL input for pulse train or HTL encoder)
• "Motor potentiometer" function
• "Sequencer" function
Details
• For applications only requiring one setpoint it is sufficient to define the standard setpoint
source in the following parameters.
• For applications requiring a change-over of the setpoint source during operation, the func-
tions for setpoint change-over have to be configured accordingly. 4Setpoint change-over
^ 546

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

148
Basic setting
Selection of setpoint source

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

31 Segment preset 1 (from version 03.00) For the setpoint selection, the segment presets parameterised for the
32 Segment preset 2 (from version 03.00) "sequencer" function can be selected as well.
4Sequencer ^ 504
33 Segment preset 3 (from version 03.00)
34 Segment preset 4 (from version 03.00)
35 Segment preset 5 (from version 03.00)
36 Segment preset 6 (from version 03.00)
37 Segment preset 7 (from version 03.00)
38 Segment preset 8 (from version 03.00)
50 Motor potentiometer The setpoint is generated by the "motor potentiometer" function. This
function can be used as an alternative setpoint control which is control-
led via two signals: "MOP setpoint up" and "MOP setpoint down".
4Motor potentiometer setpoint source (MOP) ^ 559
201 Internal value (from version 05.00) Internal values of the manufacturer.
202 Internal value (from version 05.00)
203 Internal value (from version 05.00)
204 Internal value (from version 05.00)
205 Internal value (from version 05.00)
206 Internal value (from version 05.00)

149
Basic setting
Selection of setpoint source

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x2860:002 PID control: Default setpoint source Selection of the standard setpoint source for the reference value of the
(P201.02) (Stnd. setpoints: PID setp. src.) PID control.
• The selected standard setpoint source is always active with an activa-
ted PID control when no setpoint change-over to another setpoint
source via corresponding triggers/functions is active.
1 Keypad The setpoint is specified locally by the keypad.
• Default setting: 0x2601:002 (P202.02)
• Use the and navigation keys to change the keypad setpoint
(also during running operation).
2 Analog input 1 The setpoint is defined as analog signal via the analog input 1.
4Analog input 1 ^ 597
3 Analog input 2 The setpoint is defined as analog signal via the analog input 2.
4Analog input 2 ^ 601
4 HTL input (from version 04.00) The digital inputs DI3 and DI4 can be configured as HTL input to use an
HTL encoder as setpoint encoder or define the setpoint as a reference
frequency ("pulse train").
4HTL input setpoint source ^ 565
5 Network The setpoint is defined as process data object via the network.
4Configuring the network ^ 226
11 PID preset 1 For the setpoint selection, preset values can be parameterised and selec-
12 PID preset 2 ted.
4Setpoint source of preset setpoints ^ 554
13 PID preset 3
14 PID preset 4
15 PID preset 5
16 PID preset 6
17 PID preset 7
18 PID preset 8
31 Segment preset 1 (from version 03.00) For the setpoint selection, the segment presets parameterised for the
32 Segment preset 2 (from version 03.00) "sequencer" function can be selected as well.
4Sequencer ^ 504
33 Segment preset 3 (from version 03.00)
34 Segment preset 4 (from version 03.00)
35 Segment preset 5 (from version 03.00)
36 Segment preset 6 (from version 03.00)
37 Segment preset 7 (from version 03.00)
38 Segment preset 8 (from version 03.00)
50 Motor potentiometer The setpoint is generated by the "motor potentiometer" function. This
function can be used as an alternative setpoint control which is control-
led via two signals: "MOP setpoint up" and "MOP setpoint down".
4Motor potentiometer setpoint source (MOP) ^ 559
201 Internal value (from version 05.00) Internal values of the manufacturer.
202 Internal value (from version 05.00)
203 Internal value (from version 05.00)
204 Internal value (from version 05.00)
205 Internal value (from version 05.00)
206 Internal value (from version 05.00)

150
Basic setting
Selection of setpoint source
Keypad setpoint default setting

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x2860:003 Torque control: Default setpoint source Selection of the standard setpoint source for operating mode "MS: Tor-
(P201.03) (Stnd. setpoints: Torque setp.src.) que mode".
• From version 03.00 • The selected standard setpoint source is always active in the operat-
ing mode 0x6060 (P301.00) = "MS: Torque mode [-1]" when no set-
point change-over to another setpoint source via corresponding trig-
gers/functions is active.
1 Keypad The setpoint is specified locally by the keypad.
• Default setting: 0x2601:003 (P202.03)
• Use the and navigation keys to change the keypad setpoint
(also during running operation).
2 Analog input 1 The setpoint is defined as analog signal via the analog input 1.
4Analog input 1 ^ 597
3 Analog input 2 The setpoint is defined as analog signal via the analog input 2.
4Analog input 2 ^ 601
4 HTL input (from version 04.00) The digital inputs DI3 and DI4 can be configured as HTL input to use an
HTL encoder as setpoint encoder or define the setpoint as a reference
frequency ("pulse train").
4HTL input setpoint source ^ 565
5 Network The setpoint is defined as process data object via the network.
4Configuring the network ^ 226
11 Torque preset 1 For the setpoint selection, preset values can be parameterised and selec-
12 Torque preset 2 ted.
4Setpoint source of preset setpoints ^ 554
13 Torque preset 3
14 Torque preset 4
15 Torque preset 5
16 Torque preset 6
17 Torque preset 7
18 Torque preset 8
31 Segment preset 1 For the setpoint selection, the segment presets parameterised for the
32 Segment preset 2 "sequencer" function can be selected as well.
4Sequencer ^ 504
33 Segment preset 3
34 Segment preset 4
35 Segment preset 5
36 Segment preset 6
37 Segment preset 7
38 Segment preset 8
50 Motor potentiometer The setpoint is generated by the "motor potentiometer" function. This
function can be used as an alternative setpoint control which is control-
led via two signals: "MOP setpoint up" and "MOP setpoint down".
4Motor potentiometer setpoint source (MOP) ^ 559
201 Internal value (from version 05.00) Internal values of the manufacturer.
202 Internal value (from version 05.00)
203 Internal value (from version 05.00)
204 Internal value (from version 05.00)
205 Internal value (from version 05.00)
206 Internal value (from version 05.00)

7.4.1 Keypad setpoint default setting

For the manual setpoint selection via keypad the following default settings are used.
Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info
0x2601:001 Keypad setpoints: Frequency setpoint Default setting of the keypad setpoint for the operating mode 0x6060
(P202.01) (Keypad setpoints: KP freq.setpoint) (P301.00) = "MS: Velocity mode [-2]".
0.0 ... [20.0] ... 599.0 Hz
0x2601:002 Keypad setpoints: Process controller setpoint Default setting of the keypad setpoint for the reference value of the PID
(P202.02) (Keypad setpoints: KP PID setpoint) control.
-300.00 ... [0.00] ... 300.00 PID unit

151
Basic setting
Selection of setpoint source
Keypad setpoint default setting

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x2601:003 Keypad setpoints: Torque setpoint Default setting of the keypad setpoint for the operating mode 0x6060
(P202.03) (Keypad setpoints: KP torq.setpoint) (P301.00) = "MS: Torque mode [-1]".
-400.0 ... [100.0] ... 400.0 % • 100 % ≡ Motor rated torque 0x6076 (P325.00)
• From version 03.00

The increment for keypad setpoints can be adapted in 0x2862 (P701.00) by pressing a keypad
arrow key once.

152
Basic setting
Starting/stopping performance
Starting performance

7.5 Starting/stopping performance

7.5.1 Starting performance

The start can be optionally made with DC braking or flying restart circuit. Moreover, an auto-
matic start can be activated after switch-on.
Details
The start method can be selected in 0x2838:001 (P203.01). The following diagram demon-
strates the different start methods:
Input signals 60 Hz
50 Hz
40 Hz
Frequency setpoint selection 30 Hz
20 Hz
10 Hz
0 Hz t
Trigger Function
Digital input 1 [11] Enable inverter
t
Digital input 2 [12] Run
t
Output signals 60 Hz
Output frequency 50 Hz
0x2DDD 40 Hz
0x2838:001 = Normal [0] 30 Hz
20 Hz
10 Hz
0 Hz t
60 Hz
50 Hz
40 Hz
0x2838:001 = DC braking [1] 30 Hz
DC brake

DC brake

DC brake
20 Hz
10 Hz
0 Hz t
60 Hz
50 Hz
40 Hz
0x2838:001 = Flying restart circuit [2] 30 Hz
20 Hz
10 Hz
0 Hz t
① Start method = "Normal [0]": After the start command, the motor is accelerated to the setpoint with the set acceleration time.
② Start method = "DC braking [1]": After the start command, the "DC braking" function is active. Only after the hold time set in 0x2B84:002
(P704.02) has elapsed, the motor is accelerated to the setpoint with the set acceleration time.
4DC braking ^ 437
③ For demonstrating the flying restart circuit: At the time of the start command, the motor is not at standstill (for instance by loads with high
inertia such as fans or flywheels).
④ Start method = "Flying restart circuit [2]": After the start command, the flying restart circuit is active. The flying restart circuit serves to
restart a coasting motor on the fly during operation without speed feedback. The synchronicity between inverter and motor is coordinated
so that the transition to the rotating motor is effected without jerk at the time of connection.
4Flying restart circuit ^ 481

153
Basic setting
Starting/stopping performance
Starting performance

Automatic start after switching on the mains voltage

The automatic start can be activated in 0x2838:002 (P203.02).
Preconditions for the automatic start:
• Flexible I/O configuration is selected: 0x2824 (P200.00) = "Flexible I/O configuration [0]"
• For the start command, a digital input has been configured. (In case of keypad or activated
network control, an automatic start is not possible.)
The following diagram demonstrates the function:
Input signals 60 Hz
50 Hz
40 Hz
Frequency setpoint selection 30 Hz
20 Hz
10 Hz
0 Hz t
Mains voltage
t
Trigger Function
Constant TRUE [1] Enable inverter
t
Digital input 1 [11] Run
t
Output signals 60 Hz
Output frequency 50 Hz
0x2DDD 40 Hz
0x2838:002 = Off [0] 30 Hz
20 Hz
10 Hz
0 Hz t
60 Hz
50 Hz
40 Hz
0x2838:002 = On [1] 30 Hz
20 Hz
10 Hz
0 Hz t
① Start at power-up = "Off [0]": After switching on the mains voltage, a renewed start command is required to start the motor.
② Start at power-up = "On [1]": After switching on the mains voltage, the motor starts automatically if a start command is active.

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x2838:001 Start/stop configuration: Start method Behaviour after start command.
(P203.01) (Start/stop confg: Start method)
• Setting can only be changed if the inverter is inhibi-
ted.
0 Normal After start command, the standard ramps are active.
• Acceleration time 1 can be set in 0x2917 (P220.00).
• Deceleration time 1 can be set in 0x2918 (P221.00).
1 DC braking After start command, the "DC braking" function is active for the time set
in 0x2B84:002 (P704.02).
4DC braking ^ 437
2 Flying restart circuit After the start command, the flying restart circuit is active.
The flying restart function makes it possible to restart a coasting motor
during operation without speed feedback. Synchronicity between the
inverter and motor is coordinated so that the transition to the rotating
motor is effected without jerk at the time of connection.
4Flying restart circuit ^ 481
3 Start with magnetisation
0x2838:002 Start/stop configuration: Start at power-up Starting performance after switching on the mains voltage.
(P203.02) (Start/stop confg: Start at powerup)
0 Off No automatic start after switching on mains voltage. In addition to the
inverter enable, a renewed start command is always required to start the
motor.
1 On Automatic start of the motor after switching on the mains voltage if the
inverter is enabled and a start command exists.

154
Basic setting
Starting/stopping performance
Stopping performance

7.5.2 Stopping performance

In the default setting, the motor is brought to a standstill after a stop command with standard
ramp. Alternatively, coasting or ramping down with quick stop ramp can be selected.
Details
The stop method can be selected in 0x2838:003 (P203.03). The following diagram demon-
strates the different stop methods:
Input signals 60 Hz
50 Hz
40 Hz
Frequency setpoint selection 30 Hz
20 Hz
10 Hz
0 Hz t
Trigger Function
Digital input 1 [11] Enable inverter
t
Digital input 2 [12] Run
t
Output signals 60 Hz
Output frequency 50 Hz
0x2DDD 40 Hz
0x2838:003 = Coasting [0] 30 Hz
20 Hz
10 Hz
0 Hz t
60 Hz
50 Hz
40 Hz
0x2838:003 = Standard ramp [1] 30 Hz
20 Hz
10 Hz
0 Hz t
60 Hz
50 Hz
40 Hz
0x2838:003 = Quick stop ramp [2] 30 Hz
20 Hz
10 Hz
0 Hz t
① Stop method = "Coasting [0]": The motor is coasting.
② Stop method = "Standard ramp [1]": The motor is brought to standstill with a deceleration time 1 (here: 10 s).
③ Stop method = "Quick stop ramp [2]": The motor is brought to a standstill with the deceleration time for quick stop (here: 1 s).
④ If "Enable inverter" is set to FALSE, the inverter is disabled. The motor becomes torqueless and coasts to standstill depending on the mass
inertia of the machine (irrespective of the set stop method).

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x2838:003 Start/stop configuration: Stop method Behaviour after the "Stop" command.
(P203.03) (Start/stop confg: Stop method)
0 Coasting The motor becomes torqueless (coasts down to standstill).
1 Standard ramp The motor is brought to a standstill with deceleration time 1 (or deceler-
ation time 2, if activated).
• Deceleration time 1 can be set in 0x2918 (P221.00).
• Deceleration time 2 can be set in 0x291A (P223.00).
4Frequency limits and ramp times ^ 156
2 Quick stop ramp The motor is brought to a standstill with the deceleration time set for
the "Quick stop" function.
• Deceleration time for quick stop can be set in 0x291C (P225.00).
• The "quick stop" function can also be activated manually, for instance
via a digital input. 4Quick stop ^ 159

155
Basic setting
Frequency limits and ramp times

7.6 Frequency limits and ramp times

The frequency range can be limited by setting a minimum and maximum frequency. For the
frequency setpoint, two different ramps can be parameterised. Change-over to ramp 2 can be
carried out manually or automatically.
Details
The frequency setpoint is internally led via a ramp generator.
• The acceleration time set in 0x2917 (P220.00) refers to an acceleration from standstill to
the maximum frequency set in 0x2916 (P211.00). At a low setpoint selection, the real
acceleration time decreases accordingly.
• The deceleration time set in 0x2918 (P221.00) refers to the deceleration of the set maxi-
mum frequency to standstill. In case of a lower actual frequency, the actual deceleration
time is reduced accordingly.
Input signals 60 Hz
50 Hz
40 Hz
Frequency setpoint selection 30 Hz
20 Hz
10 Hz
0 Hz t
Output signals 60 Hz
0x2916
50 Hz
40 Hz
Output frequency
30 Hz
0x2DDD 20 Hz
10 Hz
0 Hz t
0x2917 0x2918

Automatic/manual change-over to ramp 2

• For ramp 2, the acceleration time 2 set in 0x2919 (P222.00) and the deceleration time 2
set in 0x291A (P223.00) apply.
• The change-over to ramp 2 is effected automatically if the frequency setpoint (absolute
value) ≥ auto-changeover threshold 0x291B (P224.00).
Input signals 60 Hz
50 Hz
40 Hz
Frequency setpoint selection 30 Hz
20 Hz
10 Hz
0 Hz t
Output signals 60 Hz
50 Hz
0x2
19

40 Hz
Output frequency
29

Ramp 2 active
91

30 Hz
0x

0x2DDD 0x
A

20 Hz 7 29 0x291B = 20 Hz
91
10 Hz 0x2 Ramp 1 active 18
0 Hz t
• The "Activate ramp 2" function serves to manually activate the acceleration time 2 and the
deceleration time 2. 4Activating ramp 2 manually ^ 576

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x2915 Minimum frequency Lower limit value for all frequency setpoints.
(P210.00) (Min. frequency)
0.0 ... [0.0] ... 599.0 Hz
0x2916 Maximum frequency Upper limit value for all frequency setpoints.
(P211.00) (Max. frequency)
Device for 50-Hz mains: 0.0 ... [50.0] ... 599.0 Hz
Device for 60-Hz mains: 0.0 ... [60.0] ... 599.0 Hz

156
Basic setting
Frequency limits and ramp times

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x2917 Acceleration time 1 Acceleration time 1 for the operating mode "MS: Velocity mode".
(P220.00) (Accelerat.time 1) • The acceleration time set refers to the acceleration from standstill to
0.0 ... [5.0] ... 3600.0 s the maximum frequency set. In the case of a lower setpoint selection,
the actual acceleration time is reduced accordingly.
• Setting is not effective in the operating mode 0x6060 (P301.00) =
"CiA: Velocity mode [2]". 4Device profile CiA 402 ^ 469
0x2918 Deceleration time 1 Deceleration time 1 for the operating mode "MS: Velocity mode".
(P221.00) (Decelerat.time 1) • The deceleration time set refers to the deceleration from the maxi-
0.0 ... [5.0] ... 3600.0 s mum frequency set to standstill. In the case of a lower actual fre-
quency, the actual deceleration time is reduced accordingly.
• Setting is not effective in the operating mode 0x6060 (P301.00) =
"CiA: Velocity mode [2]". 4Device profile CiA 402 ^ 469
0x2919 Acceleration time 2 Acceleration time 2 for the operating mode "MS: Velocity mode".
(P222.00) (Accelerat.time 2) • The acceleration time set refers to the acceleration from standstill to
0.0 ... [5.0] ... 3600.0 s the maximum frequency set. In the case of a lower setpoint selection,
the actual acceleration time is reduced accordingly.
• The acceleration time 2 is active if the frequency setpoint (absolute
value) ≥ auto switching threshold 0x291B (P224.00) or the trigger
assigned to the function "Activate ramp 2" in 0x2631:039 (P400.39) =
TRUE.
• The acceleration time 2 is also used for changing the MOP setpoint
generated by the "motor potentiometer" function.
• Setting is not effective in the operating mode 0x6060 (P301.00) =
"CiA: Velocity mode [2]". 4Device profile CiA 402 ^ 469
0x291A Deceleration time 2 Deceleration time 2 for the operating mode "MS: Velocity mode".
(P223.00) (Decelerat.time 2) • The deceleration time set refers to the deceleration from the maxi-
0.0 ... [5.0] ... 3600.0 s mum frequency set to standstill. In the case of a lower actual fre-
quency, the actual deceleration time is reduced accordingly.
• The deceleration time 2 is active if the frequency setpoint (absolute
value) ≥ auto change-over threshold 0x291B (P224.00) or the trigger
assigned to the function "Activate ramp 2" in 0x2631:039 (P400.39) =
TRUE.
• The deceleration time 2 is also used for changing the MOP setpoint
generated by the "motor potentiometer" function.
• Setting is not effective in the operating mode 0x6060 (P301.00) =
"CiA: Velocity mode [2]". 4Device profile CiA 402 ^ 469
0x291B Auto-changeover threshold of ramp 2 Threshold for the automatic change-over to acceleration time 2 and
(P224.00) (Ramp 2 thresh.) deceleration time 2.
0.0 ... [0.0] ... 599.0 Hz • The change-over is effected if the frequency setpoint (absolute value)
≥ auto change-over threshold.
• With the setting 0, the automatic change-over function is deactivated.

157
Basic setting
Frequency limits and ramp times

Example for operating mode

Parameter Name Setting for this example
0x2631:001 (P400.01) Enable inverter Constant TRUE [1]
0x2631:002 (P400.02) Run Digital input 1 [11]
0x2915 (P210.00) Minimum frequency 15 Hz
0x2916 (P211.00) Maximum frequency 40 Hz
0x2917 (P220.00) Acceleration time 1 4s
0x2918 (P221.00) Deceleration time 1 3s

Input signals 60 Hz
50 Hz
40 Hz
30 Hz
20 Hz
10 Hz
Frequency setpoint selection 0 Hz t
-10 Hz
-20 Hz
-30 Hz
-40 Hz
-50 Hz
-60 Hz
Trigger Function
Constant TRUE [1] Enable inverter
t
Digital input 1 [11] Run
t
Output signals 60 Hz
50 Hz 0x2916
40 Hz
30 Hz 0x2915 0x2915
20 Hz
10 Hz 0x2917 0x2918
Output frequency
0 Hz t
0x2DDD -10 Hz
0x2917 0x2918 0x2918
-20 Hz
-30 Hz 0x2915
-40 Hz
-50 Hz 0x2916
-60 Hz
① After a start command, the motor is accelerated to the minimum frequency. This is also the case if the setpoint selection is = 0 Hz. If the
setpoint exceeds the minimum frequency, the ramp generator follows the setpoint.
② If the start command is deactivated again, the motor is stopped with the stop method set in 0x2838:003 (P203.03) (here: Standard ramp).
③ The motor is accelerated to the set maximum frequency.
④ If the setpoint falls below the minimum frequency, it is decelerated up to the minimum frequency.
⑤ In case of a sign reversal of the setpoint, a change of direction of rotation takes place, minimum and maximum frequency, however, con-
tinue to apply.

158
Basic setting
Quick stop

7.7 Quick stop

The "quick stop" function is an alternative stop method if the motor has to be stopped faster
than normal.

Cancelling the quick stop causes a restart of the motor if the start command is
still active and the inverter is enabled!

Details
• Possible triggers to be selected for the "quick stop" function are available for example in
0x2631:003 (P400.03) the digital inputs and internal status signals of the inverter.
• An activation via network is possible via the mappable NetWordIN1 data word or one of
the predefined process data words. 4General network settings ^ 227
Diagnostic parameters:
• 0x282A:002 (P126.02) displays the cause of quick stop bit-coded.

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x291C Quick stop deceleration time Quick stop deceleration time for the operating mode "MS: Velocity
(P225.00) (QSP dec. time) mode".
0.0 ... [1.0] ... 3600.0 s • If the "Quick stop" function is activated, the motor is brought to a
standstill within the deceleration time set here.
• The deceleration time set refers to the deceleration from the maxi-
mum frequency set to standstill. In the case of a lower actual fre-
quency, the actual deceleration time is reduced accordingly.
• Setting is not effective in the operating mode 0x6060 (P301.00) =
"CiA: Velocity mode [2]". 4Device profile CiA 402 ^ 469
0x2631:003 Function list: Activate quick stop Assignment of a trigger for the "Activate quick stop" function.
(P400.03) (Function list: Quick stop) Trigger = TRUE: Activate quick stop.
• Setting can only be changed if the inverter is inhibi- Trigger = FALSE: Deactivate quick stop.
ted. Notes:
• For further possible settings, see parameter • The "Quick stop" function brings the motor to a standstill within the
0x2631:001 (P400.01). ^ 532 deceleration time set in 0x291C (P225.00).
0 Not connected

159
Basic setting
Quick stop

Example for operating mode

Parameter Name Setting for this example
0x2631:001 (P400.01) Enable inverter Constant TRUE [1]
0x2631:002 (P400.02) Run Digital input 1 [11]
0x2631:003 (P400.03) Activate quick stop Digital input 2 [12]
0x2838:003 (P203.03) Stop method Standard ramp [1]
0x2916 (P211.00) Maximum frequency 50 Hz
0x2917 (P220.00) Acceleration time 1 4s
0x2918 (P221.00) Deceleration time 1 3s
0x291C (P225.00) Quick stop deceleration time 1s

Input signals 60 Hz
50 Hz
40 Hz
Frequency setpoint selection 30 Hz
20 Hz
10 Hz
0 Hz t
Trigger Function
Constant TRUE [1] Enable inverter
t
Digital input 1 [11] Run
t
Digital input 2 [12] Activate quick stop
t
Output signals 60 Hz
0x2916
50 Hz
40 Hz
Output frequency
30 Hz
0x2DDD 20 Hz
10 Hz
0 Hz t
0x2917 0x291C 0x2918
Status signals
Quick stop active [54]
t
① Quick stop is activated: The motor is brought to a standstill within the deceleration time set in 0x291C (P225.00).
② If quick stop is active, the status signal "Quick stop active [54]" is set to TRUE. This status signal can be assigned via the Flexible I/O configu-
ration of a function or a digital output.
③ Quick stop is deactivated again: The motor accelerates again to the setpoint since the start command is still active.

160
Basic setting
S-shaped ramps

7.8 S-shaped ramps

In order to reduce the jerk and to therefore prevent the drive components from damage, a
smoothing factor can be set for the acceleration/deceleration ramps.
Details
In the default setting, the motor is accelerated and decelerated with linear ramps since this is
the most used configuration. The setting of a smoothing factor causes S-shaped ramps. This
leads to a smoother starting and braking behaviour which, for instance, is used for sensitive
machine parts with backlash. It has to be observed here that the setting of a smoothing factor
causes longer acceleration and delay times (see the following diagrams).
Input signals 60 Hz
50 Hz
40 Hz
Frequency setpoint selection 30 Hz
20 Hz
10 Hz
0 Hz t
Output signals 60 Hz
0x2916
Output frequency 50 Hz
0x2DDD 40 Hz
0x291E:001 = 0 % 30 Hz
20 Hz
10 Hz
0 Hz t
0x2917 0x2918
60 Hz
50 Hz
40 Hz
0x291E:001 = 50 % 30 Hz
20 Hz
10 Hz
0 Hz t
0x2917 + (50 % · 0x2917 ) 0x2918 + (50 % · 0x2918 )
60 Hz
50 Hz
40 Hz
0x291E:001 = 100 % 30 Hz
20 Hz
10 Hz
0 Hz t
0x2917 + (100 % · 0x2917 ) 0x2918 + (100 % · 0x2918 )

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x291E:001 S-Ramp characteristic: Smoothing factor Factor for S-rounding of the acceleration/deceleration ramps.
(P226.01) (S-ramp char.: Smoothing factor) • With the setting "0.0", the S-rounding is deactivated and acceleration/
0.0 ... [0.0] ... 100.0 % deceleration with linear ramps is carried out.

161
Basic setting
Optical device identification

7.9 Optical device identification

For applications including several interconnected inverters it may be difficult to locate a device
that has been connected online. The "Optical device identification" function serves to locate
the inverter by means of blinking LEDs.
Details
In order to start the visual tracking,
• click the button in the toolbar of the »EASY Starter« or
• set 0x2021:001 (P230.01) = "Start [1]".
After the start, both LEDs "RDY" and "ERR" on the front of the inverter synchronously blink
very fast.
"RDY" LED (blue) "ERR" LED (red) Status/meaning
"Visual tracking" function is active.

Both LEDs are blinking in a very rapidly synchro-

nous mode

The blinking duration can be set in 0x2021:002 (P230.02) or selected in the »EASY Starter« in
the dropdown list field:

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x2021:001 Optical tracking: Start detection 1 = start optical device identification.
(P230.01) (Optical tracking: Start detection) • After the start, the two LEDs "RDY" and "ERR" on the front of the
0 Stop inverter are blinking with a blinking frequency of 20 Hz for the blink-
ing duration set in 0x2021:002 (P230.02). The setting is then automat-
1 Start
ically reset to "0" again.
• If the function is reactivated within the blinking time set, the time is
extended correspondingly.
• A manual reset to "0" makes it possible to stop the function prema-
turely.
0x2021:002 Optical tracking: Blinking duration
(P230.02) (Optical tracking: Blink. duration)
0 ... [5] ... 3600 s

162
Motor control

8 Motor control
This chapter contains all functions and settings relevant for the motor control.
Basic procedure of commissioning the motor control
In the first step, the rated data of the motor must be set. The other steps depend on the
respective application case.
There are several options for setting the motor data and optimising the control loops. Basi-
cally, you can select between a manual and an automatic process. Whether a setting can be
applied or not depends on the motor (Lenze motor yes/no) and the application. If possible,
always use the possible setting listed first in the following diagram since this one leads to the
most accurate results.

Setting of motor data Possible settings:

a) Using data from motor catalogue
b) Entering data manually (e.g. from the nameplate)

Motor control selection Options:

V/f characteristic control (open-loop) (default setting), V/f characteristic control (closed-loop),
servo control, sensorless control, sensorless vector control

Optimisation of motor control Parameterisable functions:

V/f voltage boost, skip frequencies, optimisation of the stalling behaviour,
slip compensation, oscillation damping

Optimisation of the control loops

Possible settings:
a) Identifying data automatically (by inverter)
Inverter characteristic b) Calibrating data automatically (by inverter or engineering tool)
c) Loading preset inverter characteristics

Possible settings:
a) Identifying data automatically (by inverter)
Motor b) Using data from the motor catalogue
equivalent circuit data
c) Calibrating data automatically (by inverter or engineering tool)
d) Entering data manually

Possible settings:
Motor controller a) Identifying data automatically (by inverter)
settings
b) Entering data manually

Possible settings:
Speed controller a) Identifying data automatically (by inverter)
b) Entering data manually

• Motor data ^ 164

• Motor control selection ^ 165
• Optimisation of motor control ^ 182
• Optimisation of the control loops ^ 193
• Motor rotating direction ^ 212
• Switching frequency changeover ^ 213
• Motor protection ^ 214

163
Motor control
Motor data
Manual setting of the motor data

8.1 Motor data

Setting of motor data Motor control selection Optimisation of motor control Optimisation of the control loops

The term "motor data" comprises all parameters only depending on the motor and only char-
acterising the electrical behaviour of the machine. Motor data are independent of the applica-
tion in which the inverter and the motor are used.
Preconditions
When you enter the motor nameplate data, take into account the phase connection imple-
mented for the motor (star or delta connection). Only enter the data applying to the connec-
tion type selected.
Possible settings
If a Lenze motor is connected to the inverter, you can simply select the used motor in the
engineering tool from the "motor catalog".
• For details see chapter "Motor selection from motor catalogue". ^ 197
Otherwise the motor data has to be set manually (see the following subchapter).

8.1.1 Manual setting of the motor data

If an external motor is connected to the inverter, the motor data must be set manually in the
following parameters according to the manufacturer information/motor data sheet.
Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info
0x2C01:001 Motor parameters: Number of pole pairs Display of the number of pole pairs calculated from the rated speed and
• Read only rated frequency.
0x2C01:004 Motor parameters: Rated speed General motor data.
(P320.04) (Motor parameters: Rated speed) Carry out settings as specified by motor nameplate data.
Device for 50-Hz mains: 50 ... [1450] ... 50000 rpm
Device for 60-Hz mains: 50 ... [1750] ... 50000 rpm Note!
0x2C01:005 Motor parameters: Rated frequency When you enter the motor nameplate data, take into account the phase
(P320.05) (Motor parameters: Rated frequency) connection implemented for the motor (star or delta connection). Only
Device for 50-Hz mains: 1.0 ... [50.0] ... 1000.0 Hz enter the data applying to the connection type selected.
Device for 60-Hz mains: 1.0 ... [60.0] ... 1000.0 Hz
0x2C01:006 Motor parameters: Rated power
(P320.06) (Motor parameters: Rated power)
0.00 ... [0.25]* ... 655.35 kW
* Default setting depending on the size.
0x2C01:007 Motor parameters: Rated voltage
(P320.07) (Motor parameters: Rated voltage)
0 ... [230]* ... 65535 V
* Default setting depending on the size.
0x2C01:008 Motor parameters: Cosine phi
(P320.08) (Motor parameters: Cosine phi)
0.00 ... [0.80] ... 1.00
0x6075 Motor rated current The rated motor current to be set here serves as a reference value for
(P323.00) (Motor current) different parameters with a setting/display of a current value in percent.
0.001 ... [1.700]* ... 500.000 A Example:
* Default setting depending on the size.
• Motor rated current = 1.7 A
• Setting can only be changed if the inverter is inhibi- • Max current 0x6073 (P324.00) = 200 % Motor rated current = 3.4 A
ted.
0x6076 Motor rated torque The rated motor torque to be set here serves as a reference value for
(P325.00) (Motor torque) different parameters with a setting/display of a torque value in percent.
0.001 ... [1.650]* ... 4294967.295 Nm Example:
* Default setting depending on the size.
• Motor rated torque = 1.65 Nm
• Setting can only be changed if the inverter is inhibi- • Max torque 0x6072 (P326.00) = 250 % Motor rated torque = 4.125 Nm
ted.
0x6080 Max motor speed Limitation of the maximum motor speed.
(P322.00) (Max motor speed)
0 ... [6075] ... 480000 rpm

164
Motor control
Motor control selection

8.2 Motor control selection

Setting of motor data Motor control selection Optimisation of motor control Optimisation of the control loops

The inverter supports different modes for closed-loop/open-loop motor control.

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info
0x2C00 Motor control mode Selection of the motor control type.
(P300.00) (Motor ctrl mode)
• Setting can only be changed if the inverter is inhibi-
ted.
2 Servo control (SC ASM) (from version 02.00) This control mode is used for servo control of an asynchronous motor.
4Servo control for asynchronous motors (SC-ASM) ^ 176
3 Sensorless control (SL PSM) (from This control type is used for the sensorless control of a synchronous
version 02.00) motor.
• Control mode is possible up to a rated power of maximally 22 kW.
4Sensorless control for synchronous motors (SL-PSM) ^ 178
4 Sensorless vector control (SLVC) This control type is used for sensorless vector control of an asynchro-
nous motor.
4Sensorless vector control (SLVC) ^ 173
6 V/f characteristic control (VFC open loop) This control mode is used for the speed control of an asynchronous
motor via a V/f characteristic and is the simplest control mode.
4V/f characteristic control (VFC) ^ 166
7 V/f characteristic control (VFC closed loop) The control mode is used for speed control of an asynchronous motor
(from version 04.00) via a V/f characteristic with speed feedback.
A motor encoder must be connected to the inverter and set as feedback
system for the motor control.
4V/f characteristic control (VFC closed loop) ^ 172

In the following subchapters, each motor control is described in detail.

165
Motor control
Motor control selection
V/f characteristic control (VFC)

8.2.1 V/f characteristic control (VFC)

The V/f characteristic control is a motor control for conventional frequency inverter applica-
tions. It is based on a simple and robust control mode for the operation of asynchronous
motors with a linear or square-law load torque characteristic (e.g. fan). Because of the mini-
mal parameterisation effort, such applications can be commissioned easily and quickly.
Preconditions
• The V/f characteristic control is only suitable for asynchronous motors.
• If you want to actuate a drive with a square-law V/f characteristic: please always check
whether the corresponding drive is suitable for operation with a square-law V/f character-
istic!
• From the motor nameplate data, at least the rated speed and rated frequency must be
entered, so that the inverter can calculate the correct number of pole pairs. 4Motor data
^ 164
• The motor must only be actuated above the rated motor frequency/rated voltage if this is
expressly approved by the motor manufacturer!
Details
This motor control type is activated by setting 0x2C00 (P300.00) = " V/f characteristic control
(VFC open loop) [6]".
• 0x2B00 (P302.00) provides different characteristic shapes which are described in detail in
the following subchapters.
• Limiting factors for the V/f characteristic are rated mains voltage 0x2540:001 (P208.01),
minimum frequency 0x2915 (P210.00) and maximum frequency 0x2916 (P211.00).

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

166
Motor control
Motor control selection
V/f characteristic control (VFC)

8.2.1.1 Linear V/f characteristic

The linear V/f characteristic is the most used characteristic shape for general applications
since they cause a torque that is largely constant.
Details
Select V/f characteristic control with linear characteristic:
1. Motor control mode 0x2C00 (P300.00) = "V/f characteristic control (VFC open loop) [6]"
2. V/f characteristic shape 0x2B00 (P302.00) = "Linear [0]"
Setting of the V/f characteristic:
• Limiting factors for the V/f characteristic are rated mains voltage 0x2540:001 (P208.01),
minimum frequency 0x2915 (P210.00) and maximum frequency 0x2916 (P211.00).
• The base voltage 0x2B01:001 (P303.01) is usually set to the rated motor voltage (motor
nameplate data). The base voltage is preset to the rated mains voltage. This again is preset
according to the product key of the inverter. 4Mains voltage ^ 144
• The base frequency 0x2B01:002 (P303.02) is usually set to the rated motor frequency
(motor nameplate data).
[V]
0x2540:001
0x2B01:001

0
0 0x2B01:002 [Hz]
0x2915 0x2916

The current output frequency can exceed the set maximum frequency if the
gain for the slip compensation in 0x2B09:001 (P315.01) is set to a value higher
than 0.

Example
In this example, a 400 V/50 Hz motor is connected to the inverter which is to be operated with
maximally 75 Hz. The minimum frequency is set to 10 Hz.
• V/f characteristic on the left: The inverter is operated with a rated mains voltage of 400 V.
• V/f characteristic on the right: The inverter is operated with a rated mains voltage of 480 V.
This causes the output voltage to further increase above 50 Hz.
[V] [V]
480
400 400

0 0
0 10 50 75 [Hz] 0 10 50 75 [Hz]

Parameter Name Setting for this example

0x2540:001 (P208.01) Rated mains voltage 400 Veff [1] (on the left) / 480 Veff [2] (on the right)
0x2915 (P210.00) Minimum frequency 10 Hz
0x2916 (P211.00) Maximum frequency 75 Hz
0x2B01:001 (P303.01) Base voltage 400 V
0x2B01:002 (P303.02) Base frequency 50 Hz

Next steps
• The inverter provides different functions by means of which the drive behaviour can be
further optimised.4Optimisation of motor control ^ 182
• An optimisation of the control loops is not mandatory for this motor control type but may
lead to a better control mode. 4Optimisation of the control loops ^ 193

167
Motor control
Motor control selection
V/f characteristic control (VFC)

8.2.1.2 Square-law V/f characteristic

The square-law V/f characteristic is typically used in heating, ventilation and climate applica-
tions to control the speed of fans and pumps.
Details
Each application that is provided with the features according to the affinity laws may possibly
benefit from a square-law V/f characteristic.
The affinity laws describe the relation between the speed and other variables:
• The volume flow increases proportionately to the speed.
• The required pressure behaves proportionately to the square of the speed.
• The power input is proportionately to the cube of the speed. This means that already a
minimal reduction of the speed may lead to substantial savings in energy consumption.
Volume flow Pressure Power input
[%] [%] [%]
100 100 100

50 50 50

0 0 0
0 50 100 [%] 0 50 100 [%] 0 50 100 [%]
Speed Speed Speed

By approximation, the square-law V/f characteristic corresponds to the curve for power input
shown above. At low frequencies, the voltage is reduced since due to the type of load a lower
voltage is sufficient to generate the required power. All in all, this results in an energy-efficient
system.
Select V/f characteristic control with square-law characteristic:
1. Motor control mode 0x2C00 (P300.00) = "V/f characteristic control (VFC open loop) [6]"
2. V/f characteristic shape 0x2B00 (P302.00) = "Quadratic [1]"
Setting of the V/f characteristic:
• Limiting factors for the V/f characteristic are rated mains voltage 0x2540:001 (P208.01),
minimum frequency 0x2915 (P210.00) and maximum frequency 0x2916 (P211.00).
• The base voltage 0x2B01:001 (P303.01) is usually set to the rated motor voltage (motor
nameplate data). The base voltage is preset to the rated mains voltage. This again is preset
according to the product key of the inverter. 4Mains voltage ^ 144
• The base frequency 0x2B01:002 (P303.02) is usually set to the rated motor frequency
(motor nameplate data).
[V]
0x2540:001
0x2B01:001

0
0 0x2B01:002 [Hz]
0x2915 0x2916

The current output frequency can exceed the set maximum frequency if the
gain for the slip compensation in 0x2B09:001 (P315.01) is set to a value higher
than 0.

168
Motor control
Motor control selection
V/f characteristic control (VFC)

8.2.1.3 User-definable V/f characteristic

The user-definable V/f characteristic is based on the linear V/f characteristic. An additional
medium characteristic point, however, enables the adaptation to applications with special tor-
que properties.
Details
An application case for this characteristic shape are applications that require a higher torque
at lower speeds. The additional medium characteristic point can be then configured in such a
way that more voltage is provided in the lower frequency range of the characteristic. Other-
wise, the same limits apply for the adaptive characteristic as for the linear characteristic.
Select V/f characteristic control with adaptive characteristic:
1. Motor control mode 0x2C00 (P300.00) = "V/f characteristic control (VFC open loop) [6]"
2. V/f characteristic shape 0x2B00 (P302.00)= "Multipoint [2]"
Setting of the V/f characteristic:
• Limiting factors for the V/f characteristic are rated mains voltage 0x2540:001 (P208.01),
minimum frequency 0x2915 (P210.00) and maximum frequency 0x2916 (P211.00).
• The base voltage 0x2B01:001 (P303.01) is usually set to the rated motor voltage (motor
nameplate data). The base voltage is preset to the rated mains voltage. This again is preset
according to the product key of the inverter. 4Mains voltage ^ 144
• The base frequency 0x2B01:002 (P303.02) is usually set to the rated motor frequency
(motor nameplate data).
• The additional medium characteristic point is defined based on the parameters
0x2B01:003 (P303.03) and 0x2B01:004 (P303.04).
Characteristic examples:
• Example on the left: Base voltage is set equal to rated mains voltage
• Example on the right: Base voltage s set lower than rated mains voltage
[V] [V]
0x2B01:001 = 0x2540:001 0x2540:001
0x2B01:001

0x2B01:003 0x2B01:003

0 0
0x2B01:004
0 0x2916 [Hz] 0 0x2B01:004 0x2916 [Hz]
0x2915 0x2B01:002 0x2915 0x2B01:002

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x2B01:003 V/f shape data: Midpoint voltage Definition of the medium characteristic point for user-definable V/f char-
(P303.03) (V/f shape data: Midpoint voltage) acteristic.
0 ... [0] ... 5000 V • Only relevant if V/f characteristic shape 0x2B00 (P302.00) is set =
• From version 03.00 "Multipoint [2]".
0x2B01:004 V/f shape data: Midpoint frequency
(P303.04) (V/f shape data: Midpoint freq)
0 ... [0] ... 1500 Hz
• From version 03.00

169
Motor control
Motor control selection
V/f characteristic control (VFC)

8.2.1.4 V/f characteristic control - energy-saving (VFC Eco)

In case of the energy-saving V/f characteristic control (VFCplusEco). the motor voltage of the
inverter is detected by means of a linear characteristic as a function of the rotating field fre-
quency or motor speed to be generated. Moreover, the motor is always driven in the optimal
efficiency range via a cosϕ control and the resulting voltage reduction (reduced copper losses
in the asynchronous motor).
Details
Select energy-saving V/f characteristic control with linear characteristic:
1. Motor control mode 0x2C00 (P300.00) = "V/f characteristic control (VFC open loop) [6]"
2. V/f characteristic shape 0x2B00 (P302.00)= "Eco [3]"
Setting of the V/f characteristic:
• Limiting factors for the V/f characteristic are rated mains voltage 0x2540:001 (P208.01),
minimum frequency 0x2915 (P210.00) and maximum frequency 0x2916 (P211.00).
• The base voltage 0x2B01:001 (P303.01) is usually set to the rated motor voltage (motor
nameplate data). The base voltage is preset to the rated mains voltage. This again is preset
according to the product key of the inverter. 4Mains voltage ^ 144
• The base frequency 0x2B01:002 (P303.02) is usually set to the rated motor frequency
(motor nameplate data).
Eco efficiency range:
• The Eco efficiency range (grey) is between the V/f-standard characteristic (black) and the
V/f Eco characteristic (green).
• The V/f Eco characteristic (green) is defined by the operating point that results from the
minimum voltage 0x2B0D:001 (P330.01) and the base frequency 0x2B01:002 (P303.02).
• The minimum voltage 0x2B0D:001 (P330.01) has to be set in percent with reference to the
base voltage 0x2B01:001 (P303.01).
[V]
0x2540:001
0x2B01:001 100 %

0x2B0D:001 20 %
0
0 0x2B01:002 [Hz]
0x2915 0x2916

The current output frequency can exceed the set maximum frequency if the
gain for the slip compensation in 0x2B09:001 (P315.01) is set to a value higher
than 0.

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x2B0D:001 VFC-ECO: Minimum voltage Defining the operating point of the V/f eco characteristic. The V/f eco
(P330.01) (VFC-ECO: Min. voltage) characteristic defines the lower limit of the eco efficiency range.
20 ... [20] ... 100 % • 100 % ≡ Base voltage 0x2B01:001 (P303.01)
• From version 02.00
0x2B0D:006 Cos phi actual value
(P330.06) (Cos Phi actual)
• Read only
• From version 02.00
0x2822:004 Axis commands: Identify motor data (energized) 1 = start automatic identification of the motor data.
(P327.04) (Axis commands: Identify mot.) • Inverter characteristics, motor equivalent circuit diagram data and
0 ... [0] ... 1 controller settings are identified and set automatically.
• During the procedure, the motor is energised!
0x2822:005 Axis commands: Calibrate motor data (non-energized) 1 = start automatic calibration of the motor data.
(P327.05) (Axis commands: Calibrate mot.) • A default inverter characteristic is loaded.
0 ... [0] ... 1 • the motor equivalent circuit diagram data and controller settings are
calculated on the basis of the currently set rated motor data.
• The motor is not energised.

170
Motor control
Motor control selection
V/f characteristic control (VFC)

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x2B00 V/f characteristic shape Selection of the V/f characteristic shape for the adaptation to different
(P302.00) (V/f charac.shape) load profiles.
• Setting can only be changed if the inverter is inhibi-
ted.
0 Linear Linear characteristic for drives with constant load torque over the speed.
4Linear V/f characteristic ^ 167
1 Quadratic Square-law characteristic for drives with a linear or square-law load tor-
que over the speed.
• Square-law V/f characteristics are preferably used for centrifugal
pumps and fan drives.
• Please always check whether the corresponding drive is suitable for
operation with a square-law V/f characteristic!
• If your pump drive or fan drive is not suitable for operation with a
square-law V/f characteristic, use the linear V/f characteristic instead.
4Square-law V/f characteristic ^ 168
2 Multipoint (from version 03.00) Linear characteristics with an additional centre characteristic point for
the purpose of adaptation to specific load profiles.
4User-definable V/f characteristic ^ 169
3 Eco (from version 02.00) Linear characteristic with energy optimisation in the partial load opera-
tional range.
4V/f characteristic control - energy-saving (VFC Eco) ^ 170
0x2B01:001 V/f shape data: Base voltage Base voltage and base frequency define the V/f ratio and thus the gradi-
(P303.01) (V/f shape data: Base voltage) ent of the V/f characteristic.
0 ... [230]* ... 5000 V • The V/f base voltage is usually set to the rated motor voltage
* Default setting depending on the size. 0x2C01:007 (P320.07).
0x2B01:002 V/f shape data: Base frequency • The V/f base frequency is usually set to the rated motor frequency
(P303.02) (V/f shape data: Base frequency) 0x2C01:005 (P320.05).
Device for 50-Hz mains: 0 ... [50]* ... 1500 Hz
Device for 60-Hz mains: 0 ... [60]* ... 1500 Hz
* Default setting depending on the size.
0x2C00 Motor control mode Selection of the motor control type.
(P300.00) (Motor ctrl mode)
• Setting can only be changed if the inverter is inhibi-
ted.
2 Servo control (SC ASM) (from version 02.00) This control mode is used for servo control of an asynchronous motor.
4Servo control for asynchronous motors (SC-ASM) ^ 176
3 Sensorless control (SL PSM) (from This control type is used for the sensorless control of a synchronous
version 02.00) motor.
• Control mode is possible up to a rated power of maximally 22 kW.
4Sensorless control for synchronous motors (SL-PSM) ^ 178
4 Sensorless vector control (SLVC) This control type is used for sensorless vector control of an asynchro-
nous motor.
4Sensorless vector control (SLVC) ^ 173
6 V/f characteristic control (VFC open loop) This control mode is used for the speed control of an asynchronous
motor via a V/f characteristic and is the simplest control mode.
4V/f characteristic control (VFC) ^ 166
7 V/f characteristic control (VFC closed loop) The control mode is used for speed control of an asynchronous motor
(from version 04.00) via a V/f characteristic with speed feedback.
A motor encoder must be connected to the inverter and set as feedback
system for the motor control.
4V/f characteristic control (VFC closed loop) ^ 172

171
Motor control
Motor control selection
V/f characteristic control (VFC closed loop)

8.2.2 V/f characteristic control (VFC closed loop)

The V/f characteristic control with feedback (VFC closed loop) can be used if an asynchronous
motor with motor encoder is connected to the inverter.
The speed feedback leads to the following advantages:
• Stationary speed accuracy
• Improved dynamics compared to the V/f characteristic control without feedback (VFC
open loop) or to the encoderless vector control (SLVC)
• Suitability for group drives
Preconditions
• The V/f characteristic control (VFC closed loop) is only suitable for asynchronous motors.
• The V/f characteristic control (VFC closed loop) requires a feedback of the speed. A motor
encoder must be connected to the inverter and set as feedback system for the motor con-
trol.
• This setting is not made automatically if a motor is selected from the motor catalog.
• For required settings see chapter "HTL encoder". ^ 496
• If you want to actuate a drive with a square-law V/f characteristic: please always check
whether the corresponding drive is suitable for operation with a square-law V/f character-
istic!
• From the motor nameplate data, at least the rated speed and rated frequency must be
entered, so that the inverter can calculate the correct number of pole pairs. 4Motor data
^ 164
• The motor must only be actuated above the rated motor frequency/rated voltage if this is
expressly approved by the motor manufacturer!
Details
This motor control type is activated by setting 0x2C00 (P300.00) = " V/f characteristic control
(VFC closed loop) [7]".
• 0x2B00 (P302.00) provides different characteristic shapes.
• Limiting factors for the V/f characteristic are rated mains voltage 0x2540:001 (P208.01),
minimum frequency 0x2915 (P210.00) and maximum frequency 0x2916 (P211.00).
• The slip compensation is deactivated in this motor control type. In case of V/f characteris-
tic control with feedback, the slip is calculated and injected by the slip regulator. 4Slip
controller ^ 210
Next steps
• The inverter provides different functions by means of which the drive behaviour can be
further optimised.4Optimisation of motor control ^ 182
• An optimisation of the control loops is not mandatory for this motor control type but may
lead to a better control mode. 4Optimisation of the control loops ^ 193

172
Motor control
Motor control selection
Sensorless vector control (SLVC)

8.2.3 Sensorless vector control (SLVC)

Sensorless (field-oriented) vector control for asynchronous motors is based on a decoupled,
separate control for the torque-producing and the field-producing current component. In
addition, the actual speed is reconstructed by means of a motor model so that a speed sensor
is not required.
Preconditions
• Sensorless vector control (SLVC) is only suitable for asynchronous motors.
• The operation of the sensorless vector control (SLVC) is only permitted for a single drive,
i. e., only one motor may be connected to the inverter.
• Operation of the sensorless vector control (SLVC) is not permissible for hoists!
Supported operating modes 0x6060 (P301.00):
• "MS: Velocity mode [-2]"
• "MS: Torque mode [-1]"
• "CiA: Velocity mode [2]"
Details
This motor control type is activated by setting 0x2C00 (P300.00) = "Sensorless vector control
(SLVC) [4]".
Compared to the V/f characteristics, the sensorless vector control (SLVC) serves to achieve
improved drive characteristics thanks to:
• higher torque throughout the entire speed range
• higher speed accuracy and higher concentricity factor
• higher efficiency
Torque

Rated torque

Speed
Rated speed
① Sensorless vector control (SLVC)
② V/f characteristic control (VFC) ^ 166

173
Motor control
Motor control selection
Sensorless vector control (SLVC)

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x2949:001 Positive torque limit source Selection of the source for the positive torque limit source.
(P337.01) (Pos. torqlim src)
• From version 03.00
0 Max torque Positive torque limit source = Max torque 0x6072 (P326.00).
1 Fixed Limit 0.0 % Positive torque limit source = 0.0 %.
2 Analog Input 1 The positive torque limit source is defined as analog signal via the analog
input 1.
4Analog input 1 ^ 597
3 Analog Input 2 The positive torque limit source is defined as analog signal via the analog
input 2.
4Analog input 2 ^ 601
4 Positive torque limit Positive torque limit source = Positive torque limit 0x60E0.
5 Network target torque The positive torque limit source is defined as process data object via net-
work.
4Configuring the network ^ 226
0x2949:002 Negative torque limit source Selection of the source for the negative torque limit source.
(P337.02) (Neg. torqlim src)
• From version 03.00
0 (-) Max torque Negative torque limit source = (-) Max torque 0x6072 (P326.00).
1 Fixed Limit 0.0 % Negative torque limit source = 0.0 %.
2 Analog Input 1 The negative torque limit source is defined as analog signal via the ana-
log input 1.
4Analog input 1 ^ 597
3 Analog Input 2 The negative torque limit source is defined as analog signal via the ana-
log input 2.
4Analog input 2 ^ 601
4 Negative torque limit Negative torque limit source = Negative torque limit 0x60E1.
5 Network target torque The negative torque limit source is defined as process data object via
network.
4Configuring the network ^ 226
0x2C00 Motor control mode Selection of the motor control type.
(P300.00) (Motor ctrl mode)
• Setting can only be changed if the inverter is inhibi-
ted.
2 Servo control (SC ASM) (from version 02.00) This control mode is used for servo control of an asynchronous motor.
4Servo control for asynchronous motors (SC-ASM) ^ 176
3 Sensorless control (SL PSM) (from This control type is used for the sensorless control of a synchronous
version 02.00) motor.
• Control mode is possible up to a rated power of maximally 22 kW.
4Sensorless control for synchronous motors (SL-PSM) ^ 178
4 Sensorless vector control (SLVC) This control type is used for sensorless vector control of an asynchro-
nous motor.
4Sensorless vector control (SLVC) ^ 173
6 V/f characteristic control (VFC open loop) This control mode is used for the speed control of an asynchronous
motor via a V/f characteristic and is the simplest control mode.
4V/f characteristic control (VFC) ^ 166
7 V/f characteristic control (VFC closed loop) The control mode is used for speed control of an asynchronous motor
(from version 04.00) via a V/f characteristic with speed feedback.
A motor encoder must be connected to the inverter and set as feedback
system for the motor control.
4V/f characteristic control (VFC closed loop) ^ 172

174
Motor control
Motor control selection
Sensorless vector control (SLVC)

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x6060 Modes of operation Selection of the operating mode.
(P301.00) (Modes of op.)
• Setting can only be changed if the inverter is inhibi-
ted.
-2 MS: Velocity mode Vendor specific velocity mode
-1 MS: Torque mode (from version 03.00) Vendor specific torque mode
• Only possible in motor control type 0x2C00 (P300.00) = "Sensorless
vector control (SLVC) [4]" or "Servo control (SC ASM) [2]".
4Torque control w/ freq. limit ^ 206
0 No mode change/no mode assigned No operating mode (standstill)
2 CiA: Velocity mode CiA 402 velocity mode

Next steps
• The inverter provides different functions by means of which the drive behaviour can be
further optimised.4Optimisation of motor control ^ 182
• The default setting enables the operation of a power-adapted motor. An optimum opera-
tion of this motor control type requires an optimisation of the control loops! 4Optimisa-
tion of the control loops ^ 193
• If the inverter is to control a motor torque within a defined frequency range, the torque
control must be configured accordingly after the control loops are optimised. 4Torque
control w/ freq. limit ^ 206

175
Motor control
Motor control selection
Servo control for asynchronous motors (SC-ASM)

8.2.4 Servo control for asynchronous motors (SC-ASM)

The field-oriented servo control is based on a decoupled, separated control of the torque-pro-
ducing and field-producing current share. The motor control is based on a feedback, field-ori-
ented and cascaded controller structure and enables a dynamic and stable operation in all
four quadrants.
Preconditions
• The servo control (SC ASM) is only suitable for asynchronous motors.
• The servo control (SC-ASM) requires a feedback of the speed. A motor encoder must be
connected to the inverter and set as feedback system for the motor control.
• This setting is not made automatically if a motor is selected from the motor catalog.
• For required settings see chapter "HTL encoder". ^ 496
Details
This motor control type is activated by setting 0x2C00 (P300.00) = "Servo control (SC ASM)
[2]".
Basically, the servo control has the same advantages as the sensorless vector control (SLVC).
Compared to the V/f characteristic control without feedback, the following can be achieved by
means of the servo control:
• A higher maximum torque throughout the entire speed range
• A higher speed accuracy
• A higher concentricity factor
• A higher level of efficiency
• The implementation of torque-actuated operation with speed limitation
• The limitation of the maximum torque in motor and generator mode for speed-actuated
operation

For a speed control with torque limitation in operating mode 0x6060 (P301.00) = "MS: Veloc-
ity mode [-2]":
1. Select the source in 0x2949:001 (P337.01) for the positive torque limit source and set it
accordingly.
2. Select the source in 0x2949:002 (P337.02) for the negative torque limit source and set it
accordingly.
Alternatively, the inverter can be configured in this motor control type in such a way that it
controls a motor torque within a defined frequency range. For details, see chapter "Torque
control w/ freq. limit". ^ 206
Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info
0x2901 Speed controller gain adaption Mappable parameter for adaptive adjustment of the speed controller
0.00 ... [100.00] ... 200.00 % gain via network.
• From version 04.00
0x2949:001 Positive torque limit source Selection of the source for the positive torque limit source.
(P337.01) (Pos. torqlim src)
• From version 03.00
0 Max torque Positive torque limit source = Max torque 0x6072 (P326.00).
1 Fixed Limit 0.0 % Positive torque limit source = 0.0 %.
2 Analog Input 1 The positive torque limit source is defined as analog signal via the analog
input 1.
4Analog input 1 ^ 597
3 Analog Input 2 The positive torque limit source is defined as analog signal via the analog
input 2.
4Analog input 2 ^ 601
4 Positive torque limit Positive torque limit source = Positive torque limit 0x60E0.
5 Network target torque The positive torque limit source is defined as process data object via net-
work.
4Configuring the network ^ 226

176
Motor control
Motor control selection
Servo control for asynchronous motors (SC-ASM)

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x2949:002 Negative torque limit source Selection of the source for the negative torque limit source.
(P337.02) (Neg. torqlim src)
• From version 03.00
0 (-) Max torque Negative torque limit source = (-) Max torque 0x6072 (P326.00).
1 Fixed Limit 0.0 % Negative torque limit source = 0.0 %.
2 Analog Input 1 The negative torque limit source is defined as analog signal via the ana-
log input 1.
4Analog input 1 ^ 597
3 Analog Input 2 The negative torque limit source is defined as analog signal via the ana-
log input 2.
4Analog input 2 ^ 601
4 Negative torque limit Negative torque limit source = Negative torque limit 0x60E1.
5 Network target torque The negative torque limit source is defined as process data object via
network.
4Configuring the network ^ 226
0x2C00 Motor control mode Selection of the motor control type.
(P300.00) (Motor ctrl mode)
• Setting can only be changed if the inverter is inhibi-
ted.
2 Servo control (SC ASM) (from version 02.00) This control mode is used for servo control of an asynchronous motor.
4Servo control for asynchronous motors (SC-ASM) ^ 176
3 Sensorless control (SL PSM) (from This control type is used for the sensorless control of a synchronous
version 02.00) motor.
• Control mode is possible up to a rated power of maximally 22 kW.
4Sensorless control for synchronous motors (SL-PSM) ^ 178
4 Sensorless vector control (SLVC) This control type is used for sensorless vector control of an asynchro-
nous motor.
4Sensorless vector control (SLVC) ^ 173
6 V/f characteristic control (VFC open loop) This control mode is used for the speed control of an asynchronous
motor via a V/f characteristic and is the simplest control mode.
4V/f characteristic control (VFC) ^ 166
7 V/f characteristic control (VFC closed loop) The control mode is used for speed control of an asynchronous motor
(from version 04.00) via a V/f characteristic with speed feedback.
A motor encoder must be connected to the inverter and set as feedback
system for the motor control.
4V/f characteristic control (VFC closed loop) ^ 172
0x2C01:010 Motor parameters: Motor name The name (e.g. " 1") can be freely selected by the user.
If the motor in the engineering tool has been selected from the "motor
catalog", the respective motor name is automatically entered here
(example: "MDSKA080-22, 70").

177
Motor control
Motor control selection
Sensorless control for synchronous motors (SL-PSM)

8.2.5 Sensorless control for synchronous motors (SL-PSM)

The sensorless control for synchronous motors is based on a decoupled, separated control of
the torque-producing current and the current in field direction. In contrast to the servo con-
trol, the actual speed value and rotor position are reconstructed via a motor model.

NOTICE
In case of this motor control type, an adjustable, constant current is injected in the lower
speed range. If this current is higher than the rated motor current, the motor may heat up in
the lower speed range. This effect increases if the motor is operated in the lower speed range
for a longer period of time.
Possible consequence: Destruction of the motor by overheating
▶ Do not operate the motor for a longer period of time in the lower speed range.
▶ For detecting and monitoring the motor temperature, we recommend a temperature feed-
back via PTC thermistor or thermal contact. 4Motor temperature monitoring ^ 219

Preconditions
The sensorless control for synchronous motors (SL-PSM) is possible up to a rated power of
maximally 22 kW.
Details
This motor control type is activated by setting 0x2C00 (P300.00) = "Sensorless control (SL
PSM) [3]".
The motor model-based speed observer requires a rotating machine. Thus, as a matter of
principle, the operational performance of the sensorless control for synchronous motors is
divided into two ranges:
1. Low speed range (|setpoint speed| < lower limit 0x2C11:001)
• In the range of low speed, the speed of a synchronous motor cannot be observed. In
this "Low speed range", an open-loop controlled operation takes place: For accelera-
tion processes, the current set in 0x2C12:001 is injected and for processes without
acceleration (for instance standstill or constant setpoint speed) the current set in
0x2C12:002 is injected.
2. High speed range (|setpoint speed| > lower limit 0x2C11:001)
• In this area, the rotor flux position and the speed are reconstructed by means of an
observer. The control is executed in a field-oriented way. Only the current required for
generating the necessary torque is injected.
Pole position identification (PLI)
• For controlling a permanent-magnet synchronous motor, the pole position - the angle
between the motor phase U and the field axis of the rotor - must be known.
• In case of a drive at standstill, the inverter enable is directly followed by the "pole position
identification (PLI)" which identifies the initial pole position.
Flying restart circuit
• From firmware version 4 onwards, a flying restart circuit for the synchronous motor up to
speeds lower than half the rated speed is supported.
• If the flying restart circuit shall be used, set the start method "Flying restart circuit [2]" in
0x2838:001 (P203.01). More settings are not required for the flying restart circuit at sen-
sorless control of a synchronous motor.

178
Motor control
Motor control selection
Sensorless control for synchronous motors (SL-PSM)

SL-PSM parameters
The parameters for this motor control type are calculated and set automatically while optimis-
ing the control loops. 4Optimisation of the control loops ^ 193
Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info
0x2C03:001 Back EMF constant Voltage induced by the motor (rotor voltage / 1000 rpm).
(P352.01) (BEMF constant)
0.0 ... [41.8] ... 100000.0 V/1000rpm
• From version 02.00
0x2C11:001 High speed range: Lower limit Definition of the lower limit of the high speed range.
5 ... [30] ... 100 % • The lower limit has a permanent hysteresis of 5 %.
• From version 02.00
0x2C11:002 High speed range: Tracking controller gain Gain factor for tracking the rotor position in the motor model.
0 ... [200] ... 65535 %
• From version 02.00
0x2C11:003 High speed range: Tracking controller reset time Reset time for tracking the rotor position in the motor model.
0.00 ... [6.00] ... 655.35 ms
• From version 02.00
0x2C11:004 High speed range: Tracking controller decouple time Temporal hysteresis for the switching back and forth from the open-loop
0.0 ... [200.0] ... 6553.5 ms controlled to the closed-loop controlled operation.
• From version 02.00
0x2C12:001 SM low speed range: Acceleration current R.m.s. current value for acceleration processes in the lower velocity
5 ... [70] ... 400 % range.
• From version 02.00 • 100 % ≡ rated motor current 0x6075 (P323.00)
• In the lower speed range and during the acceleration phase, the cur-
rent setpoints of 0x2C12:001 and 0x2C12:002 are added and injected
to the motor.
0x2C12:002 SM low speed range: Standstill current R.m.s. current value for processes without acceleration (for instance
5 ... [30] ... 400 % standstill or constant setpoint speed) in the lower velocity range.
• From version 02.00 • 100 % ≡ rated motor current 0x6075 (P323.00)
• In the lower speed range and during the acceleration phase, the cur-
rent setpoints of 0x2C12:001 and 0x2C12:002 are added and injected
to the motor.
Note!
In case of a "100 %" setting and at standstill, a motor current flows, the
r.m.s. value of which is square root of 2 higher than the rated motor cur-
rent. The reason for this is that at standstill a DC current is injected into
the synchronous motor and not an AC current. But as soon as the motor
rotates, the correct rated motor current flows.
0x2949:001 Positive torque limit source Selection of the source for the positive torque limit source.
(P337.01) (Pos. torqlim src)
• From version 03.00
0 Max torque Positive torque limit source = Max torque 0x6072 (P326.00).
1 Fixed Limit 0.0 % Positive torque limit source = 0.0 %.
2 Analog Input 1 The positive torque limit source is defined as analog signal via the analog
input 1.
4Analog input 1 ^ 597
3 Analog Input 2 The positive torque limit source is defined as analog signal via the analog
input 2.
4Analog input 2 ^ 601
4 Positive torque limit Positive torque limit source = Positive torque limit 0x60E0.
5 Network target torque The positive torque limit source is defined as process data object via net-
work.
4Configuring the network ^ 226

179
Motor control
Motor control selection
Sensorless control for synchronous motors (SL-PSM)

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x2949:002 Negative torque limit source Selection of the source for the negative torque limit source.
(P337.02) (Neg. torqlim src)
• From version 03.00
0 (-) Max torque Negative torque limit source = (-) Max torque 0x6072 (P326.00).
1 Fixed Limit 0.0 % Negative torque limit source = 0.0 %.
2 Analog Input 1 The negative torque limit source is defined as analog signal via the ana-
log input 1.
4Analog input 1 ^ 597
3 Analog Input 2 The negative torque limit source is defined as analog signal via the ana-
log input 2.
4Analog input 2 ^ 601
4 Negative torque limit Negative torque limit source = Negative torque limit 0x60E1.
5 Network target torque The negative torque limit source is defined as process data object via
network.
4Configuring the network ^ 226
0x2C00 Motor control mode Selection of the motor control type.
(P300.00) (Motor ctrl mode)
• Setting can only be changed if the inverter is inhibi-
ted.
2 Servo control (SC ASM) (from version 02.00) This control mode is used for servo control of an asynchronous motor.
4Servo control for asynchronous motors (SC-ASM) ^ 176
3 Sensorless control (SL PSM) (from This control type is used for the sensorless control of a synchronous
version 02.00) motor.
• Control mode is possible up to a rated power of maximally 22 kW.
4Sensorless control for synchronous motors (SL-PSM) ^ 178
4 Sensorless vector control (SLVC) This control type is used for sensorless vector control of an asynchro-
nous motor.
4Sensorless vector control (SLVC) ^ 173
6 V/f characteristic control (VFC open loop) This control mode is used for the speed control of an asynchronous
motor via a V/f characteristic and is the simplest control mode.
4V/f characteristic control (VFC) ^ 166
7 V/f characteristic control (VFC closed loop) The control mode is used for speed control of an asynchronous motor
(from version 04.00) via a V/f characteristic with speed feedback.
A motor encoder must be connected to the inverter and set as feedback
system for the motor control.
4V/f characteristic control (VFC closed loop) ^ 172
0x60E0 Positive torque limit Positive torque limit source for speed control with torque limitation.
0.0 ... [250.0] ... 3276.7 % • 100 % ≡ Motor rated torque 0x6076 (P325.00)
• From version 02.00
0x60E1 Negative torque limit Negative torque limit source for speed control with torque limitation.
0.0 ... [250.0] ... 3276.7 % • 100 % ≡ Motor rated torque 0x6076 (P325.00)
• From version 02.00

180
Motor control
Motor control selection
Sensorless control for synchronous motors (SL-PSM)

8.2.5.1 Stall monitoring

The stalling monitoring for the sensorless control for synchronous motors (SL-PSM) switches
off the drive if the motor is about to "stall". A possible cause may be an overload of the motor.
Preconditions
The stalling monitoring only works in the controlled area and if the motor is not operated in
the field weakening range.
Details
In order to detect the motor stalling, the cosine phi is used.
Example:
• For the cosine phi, the value "0.9" is set in 0x2C01:008 (P320.08) according to the data
given on the motor nameplate.
• The limit value for stalling monitoring is set in 0x2C11:006 to "80 %".
• Stalling monitoring is triggered if the current cosine phi is lower than 0.72 (80 % of 0.9).

If stalling monitoring is triggered, the "Trouble" error response takes place. If

the operating mode "MS: Velocity mode [-2]" is set in 0x6060 (P301.00), the
motor automatically restarts if the trouble does not exist anymore.

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x2C11:006 High speed range: Stall monitoring limit The stall monitoring limit refers to the cosine phi of the motor in per-
0 ... [50] ... 65535 % cent.
• From version 04.00
0x6060 Modes of operation Selection of the operating mode.
(P301.00) (Modes of op.)
• Setting can only be changed if the inverter is inhibi-
ted.
-2 MS: Velocity mode Vendor specific velocity mode
-1 MS: Torque mode (from version 03.00) Vendor specific torque mode
• Only possible in motor control type 0x2C00 (P300.00) = "Sensorless
vector control (SLVC) [4]" or "Servo control (SC ASM) [2]".
4Torque control w/ freq. limit ^ 206
0 No mode change/no mode assigned No operating mode (standstill)
2 CiA: Velocity mode CiA 402 velocity mode

181
Motor control
Optimisation of motor control

8.3 Optimisation of motor control

Setting of motor data Motor control selection Optimisation of motor control Optimisation of the control loops

The inverter provides different functions by means of which the drive behaviour can be fur-
ther optimised.
Function Motor control type
VFC open VFC closed SC-ASM SL-PSM SLVC
loop loop
V/f voltage boost ^ 183 l l
The parameterisable voltage boost makes it possible to improve the
starting performance for applications requiring a high starting tor-
que.
Skip frequencies ^ 184 l l l l l
By means of the three parameterisable skip frequencies, critical fre-
quencies can be suppressed which lead to mechanical resonances in
the system.
Optimising the stalling behaviour ^ 186 l l
For special motors which enable an operation in the field weakening
range, the behaviour in the field weakening range can be adapted to
the motor.
Slip compensation ^ 188 l
In case of a load, the speed of an asynchronous motor decreases.
This load-dependent speed drop is called slip. The slip compensation
serves to counteract the load-dependent speed loss.
Oscillation damping ^ 190 l l
The oscillation damping serves to reduce the oscillations during no-
load operation which are caused by energy oscillating between the
mechanical system (mass inertia) and the electrical system (DC bus).
l
For controlling a permanent-magnet synchronous motor, the pole
position - the angle between the motor phase U and the field axis of
the rotor - must be known. This function serves to detect the pole
position for the currently activated motor encoder.
VFC open loop = V/f characteristic control
VFC closed loop = V/f characteristic control with speed feedback
SC-ASM = servo control for asynchronous motor
SL-PSM = sensorless control for synchronous motor
SLVC = sensorless vector control

182
Motor control
Optimisation of motor control
V/f voltage boost

8.3.1 V/f voltage boost

The parameterisable voltage boost makes it possible to improve the starting performance for
applications requiring a high starting torque.
Preconditions
The function is only effective in the following motor control types:
• V/f characteristic control (VFC open loop)
• V/f characteristic control (VFC closed loop)
Details
• In 0x2B12:001 (P316.01), a permanent voltage boost can be set. ①
• In 0x2B12:002 (P316.02), an additional voltage boost can be set for acceleration processes
only. ②
• Reference for the percentage setting of the voltage boost is the base voltage 0x2B01:001
(P303.01).
[%]
0x2540:001

0x2B01:001 100

0x2B12:002
0x2B12:001
0
0 0x2B01:002 [Hz]
0x2B12:001 0x2B01:002 0x2916
2 2

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x2B12:001 Fixed boost Fixed (constant) voltage boost for V/f characteristic control without feed-
(P316.01) (Fixed V/f boost) back.
0.0 ... [2.5]* ... 20.0 % • 100 % ≡ V/f base voltage 0x2B01:001 (P303.01)
* Default setting depending on the size. • For the purpose of optimising the starting performance for applica-
tions requiring a high starting torque.
0x2B12:002 V/f voltage boost: Boost at acceleration Additional voltage boost for V/f characteristic control without feedback.
(P316.02) (V/f boosts: Dynam. V/f boost) • 100 % ≡ V/f base voltage 0x2B01:001 (P303.01)
0.0 ... [0.0] ... 20.0 % • This voltage boost is only active while the motor is accelerated. It then
acts in addition to the fixed voltage boost set in 0x2B12:001
(P316.01).
0x2B01:001 V/f shape data: Base voltage Base voltage and base frequency define the V/f ratio and thus the gradi-
(P303.01) (V/f shape data: Base voltage) ent of the V/f characteristic.
0 ... [230]* ... 5000 V • The V/f base voltage is usually set to the rated motor voltage
* Default setting depending on the size. 0x2C01:007 (P320.07).
0x2B01:002 V/f shape data: Base frequency • The V/f base frequency is usually set to the rated motor frequency
(P303.02) (V/f shape data: Base frequency) 0x2C01:005 (P320.05).
Device for 50-Hz mains: 0 ... [50]* ... 1500 Hz
Device for 60-Hz mains: 0 ... [60]* ... 1500 Hz
* Default setting depending on the size.

183
Motor control
Optimisation of motor control
Skip frequencies

8.3.2 Skip frequencies

By means of the three parameterisable skip frequencies, critical frequencies can be sup-
pressed which lead to mechanical resonances in the system.
Details
A blocking zone is active as soon as the frequency for this blocking zone is set to value unequal
to "0 Hz".
• The set frequency defines the centre of the range to be masked out. ①
• The set bandwidth defines its total size. ②
Output
[Hz]

[Hz]
Input

Example: For a blocking zone, the frequency is set to 20 Hz and the bandwidth to 10 Hz.
These settings mask out the range from 15 Hz to 25 Hz.
Notes:
• Skip frequencies are absolute values. With the setting "20 Hz", at the same time also the
skip frequency "-20 Hz" is defined.
• The inverter accelerates/decelerates the motor by the range to be masked out. A continu-
ous operation within this range is not possible.
• A blocking zone is not active if its bandwidth is set to "0 Hz".
Adjacent and overlapping ranges:
• Example on the left: If the ranges are closely spaced, the ranges are passed through as
shown.
• Example on the right: If the ranges overlap, the lowest and highest value form a new
range. In the status display 0x291F:016, both ranges are shown as active.
Output Output
[Hz] [Hz]

[Hz] [Hz]
Input Input

184
Motor control
Optimisation of motor control
Skip frequencies

Valid and invalid ranges:

• Example on the left: Skip frequency = 5 Hz, bandwidth = 10 Hz
à Valid range (starts at ≥ 0)
• Example on the right: Skip frequency = 4 Hz, bandwidth = 10 Hz
à Invalid range (starts at < 0); is thus ignored.
Output Output
[Hz] [Hz]

[Hz] [Hz]
Input Input

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x291F:001 Skip frequencies: Skip frequency 1 Centre of frequency range 1 which is to be skipped.
(P317.01) (Skip frequencies: Skip frequency 1)
0.0 ... [0.0] ... 599.0 Hz
0x291F:002 Skip frequencies: Skip bandwidth 1 Size of frequency range 1 which is to be skipped.
(P317.02) (Skip frequencies: Skip bandwidth 1)
0.0 ... [0.0] ... 10.0 Hz
0x291F:003 Skip frequencies: Skip frequency 2 Centre of frequency range 2 which is to be skipped.
(P317.03) (Skip frequencies: Skip frequency 2)
0.0 ... [0.0] ... 599.0 Hz
0x291F:004 Skip frequencies: Skip bandwidth 2 Size of frequency range 2 which is to be skipped.
(P317.04) (Skip frequencies: Skip bandwidth 2)
0.0 ... [0.0] ... 10.0 Hz
0x291F:005 Skip frequencies: Skip frequency 3 Centre of frequency range 3 which is to be skipped.
(P317.05) (Skip frequencies: Skip frequency 3)
0.0 ... [0.0] ... 599.0 Hz
0x291F:006 Skip frequencies: Skip bandwidth 3 Size of frequency range 3 which is to be skipped.
(P317.06) (Skip frequencies: Skip bandwidth 3)
0.0 ... [0.0] ... 10.0 Hz
0x291F:016 Skip frequencies: Status Bit-coded status display of the skip frequencies.
• Read only
Bit 0 Blocking zone 1 active
Bit 1 Blocking zone 2 active
Bit 2 Blocking zone 3 active
Bit 4 Frequency above blocking zone 1
Bit 5 Frequency above blocking zone 2
Bit 6 Frequency above blocking zone 3
Bit 8 Blocking zone 1 invalid
Bit 9 Blocking zone 2 invalid
Bit 10 Blocking zone 3 invalid
0x291F:032 Skip frequencies: Input frequency Display of the skip filter input frequency.
• Read only: x.xx Hz
0x291F:033 Skip frequencies: Output frequency Display of the skip filter output frequency.
• Read only: x.xx Hz

185
Motor control
Optimisation of motor control
Optimising the stalling behaviour

8.3.3 Optimising the stalling behaviour

If the motor is driven with frequencies above the rated motor frequency, the operating point
is shifted to the "field weakening range". In this range, the motor voltage does not increase
proportionately to the output frequency anymore. As a consequence, the inverter automati-
cally reduces the maximum current since the full torque is not available anymore at these fre-
quencies.
For special motors which enable an operation in the field weakening range, the behaviour in
the field weakening range can be adapted to the motor with 0x2B0C (P319.00).

DANGER!
Danger by incorrect parameterisation.
Possible consequences: damage to material assets and injury to persons
▶ Only change the default setting (0 Hz) in 0x2B0C (P319.00) after consulting the motor man-
ufacturer!
▶ Recommendation: Maintain default setting (0 Hz).

Preconditions
The function is only effective in the following motor control types:
• V/f characteristic control (VFC open loop)
• V/f characteristic control (VFC closed loop)

186
Motor control
Optimisation of motor control
Optimising the stalling behaviour

Details
The operating range of an asynchronous motor consists of the voltage range ① and the field
weakening range. The field weakening range again is divided into two ranges:
• In the first range ②, the power can be kept constant without the motor stalling.
• The second field weakening range ③ is characterised by the fact that the maximum per-
missible stator current is decreased to prevent the motor from stalling .
Speed/torque curve of the asynchronous motor with two field weakening ranges
M = Mmax
1.0

0.9
M = Mmax * n1/n
0.8

0.7

0.6
M2
0.5

0.4
M = M2 * n2²/n²
0.3

0.2

0.1

0
2.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9

2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0

n1 n2

The override point (n2, M2) can be influenced with 0x2B0C (P319.00).
0x2B0C (P319.00) > 0 Hz:
• The maximum current characteristic is shifted to higher field frequencies by the frequency
entered.
• The maximum permissible current and the maximum torque increase in the field weaken-
ing range.
• The risk of motor stalling increases.
0x2B0C (P319.00) < 0 Hz:
• The maximum current characteristic is shifted to lower field frequencies by the frequency
entered.
• The maximum permissible current and the maximum torque are reduced in the field weak-
ening range.
• The risk of motor stalling is reduced.

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x2B0C Override field weakening Offset of the override point for field weakening.
(P319.00) (Field weak thold)
-599.0 ... [0.0] ... 599.0 Hz
0x2B01:002 V/f shape data: Base frequency Base voltage and base frequency define the V/f ratio and thus the gradi-
(P303.02) (V/f shape data: Base frequency) ent of the V/f characteristic.
Device for 50-Hz mains: 0 ... [50]* ... 1500 Hz • The V/f base voltage is usually set to the rated motor voltage
Device for 60-Hz mains: 0 ... [60]* ... 1500 Hz 0x2C01:007 (P320.07).
* Default setting depending on the size. • The V/f base frequency is usually set to the rated motor frequency
0x2C01:005 (P320.05).

187
Motor control
Optimisation of motor control
Slip compensation

8.3.4 Slip compensation

In case of a load, the speed of an asynchronous motor decreases. This load-dependent speed
drop is called slip. The slip compensation serves to counteract the load-dependent speed loss.
Preconditions
The function is only effective in the motor control type "V/f characteristic control (VFC open
loop)".
In order that the function can determine the rated slip correctly, the following parameters
must be set correctly:
• Rated speed
• Rated frequency
• Number of pole pairs (Automatically calculated from Rated speed and Rated frequency)
Details
The slip compensation increases or decreases the output frequency as a response to a load
change. Thus, the slip is counteracted and the speed is kept precisely.

Motor speed

Load

Output frequency

The rated slip required for the slip compensation is calculated by the inverter according to the
following formula:
Rated slip [%] = (1 - (rated motor speed [rpm] / (120 * rated motor frequency [Hz] / number of
poles))) * 100
Calculation example:
• Rated motor speed = 1750 rpm
• Rated motor frequency = 60 Hz
• Number of poles = 2 * Number of pole pairs = 2 * 2 = 4
• Rated slip = (1 - (1750 / (120 * 60 / 4))) * 100 = 2.77 %
The rated slip represents the reduction of the motor speed due to the motor load. At full
speed and full load, the motor given in the example would rotate with 1750 rpm, which
means 2.77 % below its synchronous speed of 1800 rpm. In order to compensate this speed
loss, the inverter increases the output frequency by the rated slip multiplied by the rated
motor frequency. In the example 2.77 % * 60 Hz = 1.66 Hz increase at full load.
In order to consider load changes, the influence of the rated slip on output frequency can be
adapted in 0x2B09:001 (P315.01). A setting of 100 % corresponds to the rated slip of the
machine in the nominal operating point.
With reference to the example above and a setpoint frequency of 60 Hz:
• If 0x2B09:001 (P315.01) = 100 %, the output frequency is = 61.66 Hz
(60 Hz + 100 % * 1.66 Hz).
• If 0x2B09:001 (P315.01) = 50 %, the output frequency is = 60.83 Hz
(60 Hz + 50 % * 1.66 Hz).
Additionally, the filter time for the slip compensation can be adapted in 0x2B09:002 (P315.02)
if required. The preset filter time is adapted to typical motors. If full load or nearly full load
oscillations or instabilities occur, we recommend an increase of the filter time.
Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info
0x2B09:001 Slip compensation: Gain Adjustment in percent of the slip calculated.
(P315.01) (Slip compens.: Slip: gain) • For instance required for deviations of the real motor data from the
-200.00 ... [100.00] ... 200.00 % nameplate data.
• A setting of 100 % corresponds to the rated slip of the machine in the
nominal operating point.
0x2B09:002 Slip compensation: Filter time Filter time for the slip compensation.
(P315.02) (Slip compens.: Filter time) • The preset filter time is adapted to typical motors.
1 ... [100] ... 6000 ms

188
Motor control
Optimisation of motor control
Slip compensation

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x2C02:004 Slip frequency Display of the rated slip determined.
(P351.04) (Slip frequency)
• Read only: x.x Hz
0x2C01:001 Motor parameters: Number of pole pairs Display of the number of pole pairs calculated from the rated speed and
• Read only rated frequency.
0x2C01:004 Motor parameters: Rated speed General motor data.
(P320.04) (Motor parameters: Rated speed) Carry out settings as specified by motor nameplate data.
Device for 50-Hz mains: 50 ... [1450] ... 50000 rpm
Device for 60-Hz mains: 50 ... [1750] ... 50000 rpm Note!
0x2C01:005 Motor parameters: Rated frequency When you enter the motor nameplate data, take into account the phase
(P320.05) (Motor parameters: Rated frequency) connection implemented for the motor (star or delta connection). Only
Device for 50-Hz mains: 1.0 ... [50.0] ... 1000.0 Hz enter the data applying to the connection type selected.
Device for 60-Hz mains: 1.0 ... [60.0] ... 1000.0 Hz

189
Motor control
Optimisation of motor control
Oscillation damping

8.3.5 Oscillation damping

The oscillation damping serves to reduce the oscillations during no-load operation which are
caused by energy oscillating between the mechanical system (mass inertia) and the electrical
system (DC bus). Furthermore, the oscillation damping can also be used to compensate for
resonances.
Preconditions
The function is only effective in the following motor control types:
• V/f characteristic control (VFC open loop)
• V/f characteristic control (VFC closed loop)
Restrictions
Observe the following restrictions:
• Damping is possible only for constant oscillations at a steady-state operating point.
• Oscillations occurring sporadically cannot be damped.
• Oscillation damping is not suitable for oscillations occurring during dynamic processes
(e.g. accelerations or load changes).
• Oscillation damping is only active if the setpoint speed is greater than 10 rpm and the DC-
bus voltage exceeds a value of 100 V.
Details
The determination of the oscillation is based on the active current. In order to obtain the
alternating component of the active current, this current is differentiated. This signal is then
passed through a PT1 filter.
Identification of the oscillation
Before the oscillation damping function can be parameterised, the oscillation has to be identi-
fied. One way to do this is to examine the motor current while oscillation damping is switched
off (gain = 0 %). At steady-state operation, a constant current flows. If the drive oscillates,
these oscillations are also visible on the motor current. It is therefore possible to determine
the frequency and the amplitude of the oscillation from the alternating component of the
motor current. In the following, this alternating component is referred to as "current oscilla-
tion".
Parameter setting
The gain of the oscillation signal is to be set according to the following equation:
0x2B0A:001 (P318.01) = current amplitude * 100 % / (Ö2 * maximum device current)
The default time constant of the PT1 filter should be sufficient for most applications. If
required, it is only possible to adapt the time constant via »EASY Starter«. Generally, the time
constant must be set so that the oscillation can be dampened, but that higher-frequency com-
ponents are filtered from the signal. The time constant is determined from the reciprocal
value of the double current oscillation frequency:
0x2B0A:002 (P318.02) = 1 / (2 * oscillation frequency)
Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info
0x2B0A:001 Gain Gain of the oscillation signal.
(P318.01) (Gain) • With the setting 0, oscillation damping is deactivated.
-400 ... [150] ... 400 %
0x2B0A:002 Filter time Time constant of the PT1 filter.
(P318.02) (Filter time)
1 ... [30] ... 600 ms
0x2DDF:002 Axis information: Maximum current Display of the maximum current of the axis.
• Read only: x.xx A
0x2D88 Motor current Display des present current-r.m.s. value.
(P104.00) (Motor current)
• Read only: x.x A

190
Motor control
Optimisation of motor control
Pole position identification without movement

8.3.6 Pole position identification without movement

If a permanent-magnet synchronous motor is driven by the inverter, a "pole position identifi-
cation (PLI)" is required for an optimum and jerk-free starting torque. In the default setting, a
pole position identification is executed after each inverter enable. If the pole position identifi-
cation is deactivated, the motor may briefly rotate backwards before starting or stall if the
starting torque is too high.

NOTICE
With an incorrect parameter setting and dimensioning of the inverter, the maximum permissi-
ble motor current may be exceeded during the pole position identification.
Possible consequence: irreversible damage of the motor.
▶ Set the motor data correctly. 4Motor data ^ 164
▶ Only use an inverter that is performance-matched to the motor.

Preconditions
• The wiring of the three motor phases and the motor encoder must be carried out accord-
ing to the specifications from the mounting instructions.
• The inverter is ready for operation (no fault active).
• For the pole position identification (PPI) without movement, the motor must be at stand-
still. In order that the pole position identification is only executed at standstill, set the start
method "Flying restart circuit [2]" in 0x2838:001 (P203.01).
Details
This function was developed for a wide range of motor characteristics. In case of some motor
types, the identified pole position may differ considerably from the real pole position, so that
a considerable loss in torque and greater motor losses may occur.
The pole position identification can be executed automatically after every inverter enable if
"After each enable [2]" is selected in 0x2C63:001. Further settings are not required for this
function.
Process of the pole position identification:
1. After inverter enable, a defined pulse pattern is output that provides currents up to
approx. maximum motor current. The respective currents are measured. Based on these
currents, the field distribution can be detected so that the pole position can be calculated.
This process lasts maximally 1.8 seconds.
2. After the pole position identification has been carried out successfully, the motor follows
the setpoint selection.
During the pole position identification:
• The current test pulses cause audible engine noises that may be increased by the machine
mechanics depending on the mechanical coupling!
• The function can be aborted by the inverter disable any time without changing the set-
tings. In this case, you have to carry out the pole position identification again.
• If the function is aborted by itself, the motor features may not be suitable for this function.
If an error occurs during the pole position identification,
• the procedure is stopped without the settings being changed.
• the response set in 0x2C60 is effected.

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x2C60 PPI monitoring: Reaction Selection of the response triggered by the occurrence of an error during
• From version 04.00 the pole position identification (PLI).
• For further possible settings, see parameter Associated error code:
0x2D45:001 (P310.01). ^ 223
• 28961 | 0x7121 - Pole position identification fault
3 Fault

191
Motor control
Optimisation of motor control
Pole position identification without movement

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x2C63:001 PPI without movement: Execution Starting performance (without or with pole position identification before
• Setting can only be changed if the inverter is inhibi- the start).
ted.
• From version 04.00
0 Deactivated Do not execute a pole position identification.
2 After each enable Execute a pole position identification after every inverter enable.

192
Motor control
Optimisation of the control loops

8.4 Optimisation of the control loops

Setting of motor data Motor control selection Optimisation of motor control Optimisation of the control loops

If there is a need to improve the total power of the system, different options are available:
a) Select motor from motor catalogue
b) Tuning of the motor and the speed controller
c) Automatic motor identification (energized)
d) Automatic motor calibration (non-energized)
Simply select an option that best suits your environment and requirements!
Before the different options are described in detail, first make the decision which operator
interface you want to use to execute the optimisation:
Option 1: Performing optimisation with engineering tool ^ 194
Option 2: Performing optimisation with keypad ^ 195

193
Motor control
Optimisation of the control loops

Performing optimisation with engineering tool

The following flow diagram shows the optimisation process with an engineering tool
(e. g. »EASY Starter«):

Start

Yes Lenze motor No

connected?

Set manually:
• Motor data (e.g. according to data
a) on the motor nameplate)
Yes Engineering tool No
Select motor from motor • Motor control type
available?
catalogue • Mechanical load and its coupling
to the motor
• Filter time for speed feedback

Set manually:
Adaptation of the
No Yes • Mechanical load and its coupling
speed controller to the motor
required? • Filter time for speed feedback

Identification Identification
No Yes Yes No
(energized) (energized)
possible? possible?

b) c) d)
Tuning of the motor Automatic motor identification Automatic motor calibration
and the speed controller (energized) (non-energized)

End

a) No matter which option suits you best, first the relevant motor data must be set. By selecting the motor from the motor catalogue, you
benefit from very accurate Motor equivalent circuit diagram data.
4Motor selection from motor catalogue ^ 197
b) If you already have an optimised system, but the load adjustment has changed, it makes sense to just re-initialise the speed controller.
4Tuning of the motor and the speed controller ^ 198
c) If the application enables you to energise the system during the optimisation procedure, carry out an automatic identification. This proce-
dure results in the best possible parameter settings.
4Automatic motor identification (energized) ^ 199
d) If the application does not enable you to energise the system during the optimisation procedure, carry out an automatic calibration.
4Automatic motor calibration (non-energized) ^ 200

194
Motor control
Optimisation of the control loops

Performing optimisation with keypad

Since there is no access with the keypad to the motor catalogue, first the motor data must be
set manually with the keypad according to the manufacturer data/motor data sheet. 4Man-
ual setting of the motor data ^ 164
The following flow diagram shows the optimisation process with the keypad:

Start

Yes Lenze motor No

connected?

Set manually:
• Motor data (e.g. according to data on
the motor nameplate)
Engineering tool No
• Motor control type
available?
• Mechanical load and its coupling
to the motor
• Filter time for speed feedback

Identification
Yes No
(energized)
possible?

c) d)
Automatic motor identification Automatic motor calibration
(energized) (non-energized)

End

c) If the application enables you to energise the system during the optimisation procedure, carry out an automatic identification. This proce-
dure results in the best possible parameter settings.
4Automatic motor identification (energized) ^ 199
d) If the application does not enable you to energise the system during the optimisation procedure, carry out an automatic calibration.
4Automatic motor calibration (non-energized) ^ 200

195
Motor control
Optimisation of the control loops
Options for optimized motor tuning

8.4.1 Options for optimized motor tuning

The option to be selected depends on the respective application. Depending on the selected
option, different procedures become active and thus different parameter groups are influ-
enced:
• Rated motor data
• Inverter characteristic
• Motor equivalent circuit diagram data
• Motor controller settings
• Speed controller settings
For further details, see the following subchapters:
• Motor selection from motor catalogue ^ 197
• Tuning of the motor and the speed controller ^ 198
• Automatic motor identification (energized) ^ 199
• Automatic motor calibration (non-energized) ^ 200

196
Motor control
Optimisation of the control loops
Options for optimized motor tuning

8.4.1.1 Motor selection from motor catalogue

The following describes how to optimise your drive system by selecting a Lenze motor from
the motor catalogue. Several steps are started invisibly in the background to load/calculate
the settings for the relevant parameters.
Preconditions
• Access to a Lenze engineering tool (e. g. »EASY Starter«).
• Optimisation is possible online or offline (with or without connected motor).
Required steps
1. Open the Lenze engineering tool that provides for the functionality of a "Lenze motor cata-
logue".
2. Click the Select motor... button. In case of the »EASY Starter«, you find the Select motor...
button on the "settings". tab.
3. Select the used motor in the "Select motor" dialog:

• By entering filter criteria, you can restrict the selection.

• Name (e. g. "MDSKxxx"), rated power and C86 value can be found on the motor name-
plate.
4. Click the OK button to start the optimisation.
Optimisation process
As soon as the optimisation has been started, the following steps are initiated by the engi-
neering tool:
1. The rated motor data are loaded from the motor catalogue.
2. The motor equivalent circuit diagram data are loaded from the motor catalogue.
3. The motor controller settings are calculated based on the previously loaded data.
4. The speed controller settings are automatically calculated based on the previously loaded
data.
Notes:
• The data involved in this optimisation are provided be the motor catalogue alone. Further
user data is not required.
• The inverter characteristic is not changed by this optimisation.

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x2C01:010 Motor parameters: Motor name The name (e.g. " 1") can be freely selected by the user.
If the motor in the engineering tool has been selected from the "motor
catalog", the respective motor name is automatically entered here
(example: "MDSKA080-22, 70").

197
Motor control
Optimisation of the control loops
Options for optimized motor tuning

8.4.1.2 Tuning of the motor and the speed controller

The following describes in general how to optimise the speed controller. This may be required
if some parameters have on the load side of the drive system have changed or have not been
set yet, such as:
• Motor moment of inertia
• Load moment of inertia
• Type of coupling between moment of inertia of the motor and that of the load
Preconditions
• All rated motor data are known and set in the inverter, either by selecting the motor from
the motor catalogue or manually.
4Motor selection from motor catalogue ^ 197
4Manual setting of the motor data ^ 164
• All further options for optimisation have been executed before if possible.
4Automatic motor identification (energized) ^ 199
4Automatic motor calibration (non-energized) ^ 200
• Optimisation is possible online or offline (with or without connected motor).
Required steps
Adapt the following parameters to your drive system using the engineering tool. Since this
only changes load-dependent data, the other parameter groups must not be calculated again.
Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info
0x2910:001 Motor moment of inertia Setting of the moment of inertia of the motor.
(P335.01) (Motor inertia)
0.00 ... [3.70]* ... 20000000.00 kg cm²
* Default setting depending on the size.
0x2910:002 Load moment of inertia Setting of the moment of inertia of the load.
(P335.02) (Load inertia) • Always adjust the setting to the current load, otherwise the optimisa-
0.00 ... [3.70]* ... 20000000.00 kg cm² tion process cannot be executed successfully.
* Default setting depending on the size.
0x2910:003 Coupling Selection of the type of coupling between the moment of inertia of the
0 Stiff motor and that of the load.
1 Elastic
2 With backlash
0x2904 Actual speed filter time Filter time for the actual speed value.
0.0 ... [2.0] ... 50.0 ms

For further details on the speed controller, see chapter "Speed controller". ^ 211

198
Motor control
Optimisation of the control loops
Options for optimized motor tuning

8.4.1.3 Automatic motor identification (energized)

The automatic identification of the motor results in the best possible parameter settings. If
the application enables you to energise the system during the optimisation, carry out this
optimisation.
Preconditions
• All rated motor data are known and set in the inverter, either by selecting the motor from
the motor catalogue or manually.
4Motor selection from motor catalogue ^ 197
4Manual setting of the motor data ^ 164
• In 0x2C00 (P300.00), the motor control type required and suitable for the motor is selec-
ted.
• In 0x6060 (P301.00), the operating mode "MS: Velocity mode [-2]" or "CiA: Velocity mode
[2]" is set.
• DC-bus voltage is available.
• The inverter is error-free and in the "Ready to switch on" or "Switched on" device state.
• The motor is stopped (no start enable).
• No inverter disable is active.
• No quick stop is active.
• No other axis command is active anymore.
General information on the identification
• The automatic identification can take from some seconds to minutes.
• The procedure can be aborted any time by inverter disable or cancellation of the start ena-
ble without settings being changed.
• During and after the procedure, the LED "RDY" (blue) is permanently on.
• After completing, a renewed start command is required to start the motor.
Required steps
Optimisation with engineering tool (e. g. »EASY Starter«):
1. Go to the "Settings" tab and navigate to the parameterisation dialog "Advanced motor set-
ting".
2. Click the Energized button under "motor calibration".
3. Follow the instructions of the engineering tool.

Optimisation with keypad:

1. Request automatic identification: Set 0x2822:004 (P327.04) = "1".
2. Issue the start command to start the procedure.

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x2822:004 Axis commands: Identify motor data (energized) 1 = start automatic identification of the motor data.
(P327.04) (Axis commands: Identify mot.) • Inverter characteristics, motor equivalent circuit diagram data and
0 ... [0] ... 1 controller settings are identified and set automatically.
• During the procedure, the motor is energised!

Optimisation process
As soon as the process has been started, the following steps are initiated:
1. The inverter characteristic is automatically identified by the inverter.
2. The motor equivalent circuit diagram data are automatically identified by the inverter.
3. The motor controller settings are automatically calculated.
4. The speed controller settings are automatically calculated.

199
Motor control
Optimisation of the control loops
Inverter Characteristics

8.4.1.4 Automatic motor calibration (non-energized)

If the application does not enable you to energise the system during the optimisation, carry
out this optimisation.
Preconditions
• All rated motor data are known and set in the inverter, either by selecting the motor from
the motor catalogue or manually.
4Motor selection from motor catalogue ^ 197
4Manual setting of the motor data ^ 164
• In 0x2C00 (P300.00), the motor control type required and suitable for the motor is selec-
ted.
• The inverter is error-free and in the "Ready to switch on" or "Switched on" device state.
• The inverter is disabled or the motor is stopped (no start enable).
• No other axis command is active anymore.
Required steps
Optimisation with engineering tool (e. g. »EASY Starter«):
1. Go to the "Settings" tab and navigate to the parameterisation dialog "Advanced motor set-
ting".
2. Click the Non-energized button under "motor calibration".
3. Follow the instructions of the engineering tool.
Optimisation with keypad:
• 0x2822:005 (P327.05) Set = "1" to start the process.

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x2822:005 Axis commands: Calibrate motor data (non-energized) 1 = start automatic calibration of the motor data.
(P327.05) (Axis commands: Calibrate mot.) • A default inverter characteristic is loaded.
0 ... [0] ... 1 • the motor equivalent circuit diagram data and controller settings are
calculated on the basis of the currently set rated motor data.
• The motor is not energised.

Optimisation process
As soon as the process has been started, the following steps are initiated:
1. A default inverter characteristic is loaded.
2. The motor equivalent circuit diagram data is calculated based on the currently set rated
motor data.
3. The motor controller settings are automatically calculated.
4. The speed controller settings are automatically calculated.

8.4.2 Inverter Characteristics

The inverter characteristic is automatically set if one of the following optimisations is carried
out:
4Automatic motor identification (energized) ^ 199
4Automatic motor calibration (non-energized) ^ 200

The settings made can be seen if required, but should not be changed. A wrong
setting may influence the control negatively!

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x2947:001 ... Inverter characteristic: Value y1 ... Value y17 The inverter characteristic (consisting of 17 values) is calculated and set
0x2947:017 0.00 ... [0.00]* ... 20.00 V during the automatic identification of the motor data. If only an auto-
* Default setting depending on the size. matic calibration of the motor data is carried out, a default inverter char-
acteristic is loaded instead.

Note!
Changing these values is not recommended by the manufacturer.

200
Motor control
Optimisation of the control loops
Motor equivalent circuit diagram data

8.4.3 Motor equivalent circuit diagram data

The motor equivalent circuit diagram data are automatically set if one of the following optimi-
sations is carried out:
4Motor selection from motor catalogue ^ 197
4Automatic motor identification (energized) ^ 199
4Automatic motor calibration (non-energized) ^ 200
Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info
0x2C01:002 Motor parameters: Stator resistance General motor data.
0.0000 ... [10.1565]* ... 125.0000 Ω Carry out settings as specified by manufacturer data/motor data sheet.
* Default setting depending on the size.
0x2C01:003 Motor parameters: Stator leakage inductance
0.000 ... [23.566]* ... 500.000 mH
* Default setting depending on the size.
0x2C02:001 Motor parameter (ASM): Rotor resistance Equivalent circuit data of the motor required for the motor model.
(P351.01) (ASM motor par.: Rotor resistance)
0.0000 ... [8.8944]* ... 200.0000 Ω
* Default setting depending on the size.
0x2C02:002 Motor parameter (ASM): Mutual inductance
(P351.02) (ASM motor par.: Mutual induct.)
0.0 ... [381.9]* ... 50000.0 mH
* Default setting depending on the size.
0x2C02:003 Motor parameter (ASM): Magnetising current
(P351.03) (ASM motor par.: Magn. current)
0.00 ... [0.96]* ... 500.00 A
* Default setting depending on the size.

201
Motor control
Optimisation of the control loops
Motor controller settings

8.4.4 Motor controller settings

After the motor settings have been made, the different control loops must be set. For a quick
commissioning, the calculations and settings are made automatically if one of the following
optimisations is carried out:
4Motor selection from motor catalogue ^ 197
4Automatic motor identification (energized) ^ 199
4Automatic motor calibration (non-energized) ^ 200
Details
The following controllers have an influence in the respective motor control type:
Controller Motor control type
VFC open VFC closed SC-ASM SL-PSM SLVC
loop loop
Current controller ^ 202 l l l l l
Field controller ^ 203 l l
Field weakening controller ^ 203 l l
Imax controller ^ 204 l l
Flying restart controller ^ 205 l l l
SLVC controller ^ 205 l
Slip controller ^ 210 l
VFC open loop = V/f characteristic control
VFC closed loop = V/f characteristic control with speed feedback
SC-ASM = servo control for asynchronous motor
SL-PSM = sensorless control for synchronous motor
SLVC = sensorless vector control

8.4.4.1 Current controller

For a quick commissioning, the calculations and settings are made automatically during the
optimisation.

For typical applications, a manual adaptation of the parameters of the current

controller is not recommended. A wrong setting may have a negative effect on
the control. For special applications, contact the manufacturer before adapting
the parameters.

Preconditions
The current controller parameters are calculated based on the stator resistance and leakage
inductance. Thus, the following parameters must be set correctly, either via optimisation or
manually (according to manufacturer-data/motor data sheet):
• 0x2C01:002: Stator resistance
• 0x2C01:003: Stator leakage inductance
4Motor equivalent circuit diagram data ^ 201
Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info
0x2942:001 Current controller parameters: Gain Gain factor Vp of the current controller.
(P334.01) (Current contr.: Gain)
0.00 ... [42.55]* ... 750.00 V/A
* Default setting depending on the size.
0x2942:002 Current controller parameters: Reset time Reset time Ti of the current controller.
(P334.02) (Current contr.: Reset time)
0.01 ... [4.50]* ... 2000.00 ms
* Default setting depending on the size.

202
Motor control
Optimisation of the control loops
Motor controller settings

8.4.4.2 Field controller

For a quick commissioning, the calculations and settings are made automatically during the
optimisation.
Preconditions
The field controller is only effective in the following motor control types:
• Servo control (SC ASM)
• Sensorless vector control (SLVC)

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x29C0:001 Gain Gain factor Vp of the field controller.
0.00 ... [59.68]* ... 50000.00 A/Vs
* Default setting depending on the size.
0x29C0:002 Reset time Reset time Tn of the field controller.
1.0 ... [45.5]* ... 6000.0 ms
* Default setting depending on the size.

8.4.4.3 Field weakening controller

For a quick commissioning, the calculations and settings are made automatically during the
optimisation.
Preconditions
The field weakening controller is only effective in the following motor control types:
• Servo control (SC ASM)
• Sensorless vector control (SLVC)

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x29E0:001 Field weakening controller settings: Gain Gain factor Vp of the field weakening controller.
0.000 ... [0.000]* ... 2000000.000 Vs/V
* Default setting depending on the size.
0x29E0:002 Field weakening controller settings: Reset time Reset time Tn of the field weakening controller.
1.0 ... [1478.3]* ... 240000.0 ms
* Default setting depending on the size.
0x29E1 Field weakening controller Field limitation Field limitation of the field weakening controller.
5.00 ... [100.00] ... 100.00 %
• From version 04.00

8.4.4.4 Field weakening controller (advanced)

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x29E2 DC-bus filter time Filter time for the current DC-bus voltage.
1.0 ... [25.0] ... 1000.0 ms
0x29E3 Motor voltage filter time Filter time for the current motor voltage.
1.0 ... [25.0] ... 1000.0 ms
0x29E4 Voltage reserve range Voltage reserve range at the transition point to the field weakening.
(P354.00) (Voltage reserve) • Only relevant if 0x2C00 (P300.00) is set = "Servo control (SC ASM) [2]".
1 ... [5] ... 20 %

203
Motor control
Optimisation of the control loops
Motor controller settings

8.4.4.5 Imax controller

For a quick commissioning, the calculations and settings are made automatically during the
optimisation.

For typical applications, a manual adaptation of the parameters of the Imax con-
troller is not recommended. A wrong setting may have a negative effect on the
control. For special applications, contact the manufacturer before adapting the
parameters.

Preconditions
The Imax controller is only effective in the following motor control types:
• V/f characteristic control (VFC open loop)
• V/f characteristic control (VFC closed loop)
Details
The Imax controller becomes active in the V/f operation if the actual motor current exceeds
the maximum overload current "Max current". The Imax controller changes the output fre-
quency to counteract the exceedance.
The maximum overload current "Max current" is defined in 0x6073 (P324.00) in percent with
regard to the rated motor current "Motor rated current" 0x6075 (P323.00).
If the maximum overload current is exceeded:
• During operation in motor mode, the Imax controller reduces the output frequency.
• During operation in generator mode, the Imax controller increases the output frequency.
Setting notes
If oscillations occur at the current limit during operation:
• Reduce gain of the Imax controller in 0x2B08:001 (P333.01).
• Increase reset time of the Imax controller in 0x2B08:002 (P333.02).
• Carry out the changes in small steps only (by 2 ... 3 % of the set value) until the oscillations
do not exist anymore.
If the Imax controller does not respond fast enough after the maximum current has been
exceeded:
• Increase gain of the Imax controller in 0x2B08:001 (P333.01).
• Reduce reset time of the Imax controller in 0x2B08:002 (P333.02).
• Carry out the changes in small steps only (by 2 ... 3 % of the set value) until the response
time is acceptable.

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x2822:019 Axis commands: Calculate Imax controller parameter 1 = start automatic calculation of the Imax controller parameters.
0 ... [0] ... 1 • Gain 0x2B08:001 (P333.01) and reset time 0x2B08:002 (P333.02) of
the Imax controller are recalculated and set.
0x2B08:001 V/f Imax controller: Gain Gain factor Vp of the Imax controller.
(P333.01) (V/f Imax contr.: Gain)
0.000 ... [0.284]* ... 1000.000 Hz/A
* Default setting depending on the size.
0x2B08:002 V/f Imax controller: Reset time Reset time Ti of the Imax controller.
(P333.02) (V/f Imax contr.: Reset time)
1.0 ... [2.3]* ... 2000.0 ms
* Default setting depending on the size.

204
Motor control
Optimisation of the control loops
Motor controller settings

8.4.4.6 Flying restart controller

For a quick commissioning, the calculations and settings are made automatically during the
optimisation.
Preconditions
The flying restart controller is only effective in the following motor control types:
• V/f characteristic control (VFC open loop)
• Sensorless control (SL PSM)
• Sensorless vector control (SLVC)
Details
The following parameter is only relevant for the flying restart circuit if an asynchronous motor
is controlled. In case of a sensorless control of a synchronous motor (SL-PSM) the parameter
has no meaning.
Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info
0x2BA1:003 Flying restart circuit: Restart time Integration time for controlling the flying restart circuit.
(P718.03) (Flying restart: Restart time)
1 ... [5911]* ... 60000 ms
* Default setting depending on the size.

8.4.4.7 SLVC controller

For a quick commissioning, the calculations and settings are made automatically during the
optimisation.
Preconditions
The SLVC controller is only effective in the motor control type "Sensorless vector control
(SLVC)".
Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info
0x2B40:001 Gain Gain of the SLVC-Q controller.
0.0000 ... [0.2686]* ... 1000.0000 Hz/A
* Default setting depending on the size.
0x2B40:002 Reset time Reset time of the SLVC-Q controller.
1.0 ... [2.3]* ... 2000.0 ms
* Default setting depending on the size.

205
Motor control
Optimisation of the control loops
Motor controller settings

8.4.4.8 Torque control w/ freq. limit

In general, the inverter is operated in a mode that controls the motor frequency. Alternatively,
the inverter can be configured in such a way that it controls a motor torque within a defined
frequency range.
Typical applications for such a torque control with frequency limitation are winders and pack-
aging machines.
Preconditions
A torque control is only possible in the motor control type 0x2C00 (P300.00) = "Sensorless
vector control (SLVC) [4]" or "Servo control (SC ASM) [2]". Thus, first this motor control type
must be configured. For details see the following chapter:
4Sensorless vector control (SLVC) ^ 173
4Servo control for asynchronous motors (SC-ASM) ^ 176
After configuring the sensorless vector control (SLVC), one of the following optimisations must
be carried out for a torque control as precise as possible:
4Automatic motor identification (energized) ^ 199
4Automatic motor calibration (non-energized) ^ 200
Details
Setpoint selection:
• Instead of a frequency setpoint in [Hz], a torque setpoint has to be defined for the torque
control. This can be either a value in percent with reference to the rated motor torque set
in 0x6076 (P325.00) or a value in [Nm] if defined via the network.
• The standard setpoint source for the torque control can be selected in 0x2860:003
(P201.03) (default setting: Analog input 1).
• Corresponding functions make it possible to change over to other setpoint sources during
operation.4Setpoint change-over ^ 546
Limitation of the torque range:
• The positive and negative torque limit can be set independently of each other.
Frequency limitation / speed limitation:
• The adjustable speed limits serve to protect against very high speeds. High speeds can
occur if a pure torque is selected without a counter torque being available (load-free
machine).
• The torque control controls the assigned torque setpoint within the set speed limits. The
actual speed results from the load conditions of the application. If the actual speed rea-
ches the set speed limits, it is kept on the respective limit value. This protective function is
also called "speed limitation".
• The lower and upper speed limit for speed limitation can be set independently of each
other. They can also be defined via analog inputs or network.
In the following, the steps required for configuring the torque control with frequency limita-
tion are described.

206
Motor control
Optimisation of the control loops
Motor controller settings

Parameterisation required
1. Set the operating mode "MS: Torque mode [-1]" in 0x6060 (P301.00).
2. Set the rated motor torque in 0x6076 (P325.00).
3. Set the permissible maximum torque in 0x6072 (P326.00).
• The setting is made in percent with reference to the rated motor torque set in 0x6076
(P325.00).
4. Select the source for the positive torque limit in 0x2949:001 (P337.01).
• Default setting: Maximum torque 0x6072 (P326.00)
• In case of selection "Analog Input 1 [2]": Set setting range in 0x2636:011 (P430.11) and
0x2636:012 (P430.12).
• In case of selection "Analog Input 2 [3]": Set setting range in 0x2637:011 (P431.11) and
0x2637:012 (P431.12).
• In case of selection "Positive torque limit [4]": Set the positive torque limit in 0x60E0.
5. Select the source for the negative torque limit in 0x2949:002 (P337.02).
• Default setting: (-) Maximum torque 0x6072 (P326.00)
• In case of selection "Analog Input 1 [2]": Set setting range in 0x2636:011 (P430.11) and
0x2636:012 (P430.12).
• In case of selection "Analog Input 2 [3]": Set setting range in 0x2637:011 (P431.11) and
0x2637:012 (P431.12).
• In case of selection "Negative torque limit [4]": Set the negative torque limit in 0x60E1.
6. Select the source for the upper speed limit in 0x2946:003 (P340.03).
• Default setting: Maximum frequency 0x2916 (P211.00)
• In case of selection "Analog input 1 [2]": Set setting range in 0x2636:002 (P430.02) and
0x2636:003 (P430.03).
• In case of selection "Analog input 2 [3]": Set setting range in 0x2637:002 (P431.02) and
0x2637:003 (P431.03).
• In case of selection "Upper frequency limit [4]": Set the upper speed limit in [Hz] in
0x2946:005 (P340.05).
• In case of selection "Upper speed limit [5]": Set the upper speed limit in [vel. unit in
0x2946:001 (P340.01).
7. Select the source for the lower speed limit in 0x2946:004 (P340.04).
• Default setting: (-) Maximum frequency 0x2916 (P211.00)
• In case of selection "Analog input 1 [2]": Set setting range in 0x2636:002 (P430.02) and
0x2636:003 (P430.03).
• In case of selection "Analog input 2 [3]": Set setting range in 0x2637:002 (P431.02) and
0x2637:003 (P431.03).
• In case of selection "Lower frequency limit [4]": Set the lower speed limit in [Hz] in
0x2946:006 (P340.06).
• In case of selection "Lower speed limit [5]": Set the lower speed limit in [vel. unit in
0x2946:002 (P340.02).
8. Select the standard setpoint source for the torque control in 0x2860:003 (P201.03).
• Default setting: Analog input 1. In case of this selection, set the setting range in
0x2636:011 (P430.11) and 0x2636:012 (P430.12).
• In case of selection "Analog input 2 [3]": Set setting range in 0x2637:011 (P431.11) and
0x2637:012 (P431.12).
• Except for the network, the torque setpoint must be given in percent with regard to the
0x6076 (P325.00) rated motor torque.
• Via the network the torque setpoint is selected via the mappable parameter 0x400B:
008 (P592.08) in [Nm / 2scaling factor]. The scaling factor can be set in 0x400B:009
(P592.09).
9. Optionally: For a "smooth" change-over between different setpoint sources, adapt the
ramp time for the torque setpoint in 0x2948:002 (P336.02).
The torque control with frequency limitation is now active and the inverter responds to the
torque setpoint given by the selected setpoint source.

207
Motor control
Optimisation of the control loops
Motor controller settings

Diagnostic parameters:
• 0x2DD5: Torque setpoint
• 0x2949:003 (P337.03): Actual positive torque limit
• 0x2949:004 (P337.04): Actual negative torque limit
• 0x2946:007 (P340.07): Speed limitation: Actual upper speed limit
• 0x2946:008 (P340.08): Speed limitation: Actual lower speed limit

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x2912:001 Torque setpoint presets: Preset 1 Parameterisable torque setpoints (presets) for operating mode "MS: Tor-
(P452.01) (Torque presets: Torque preset 1) que mode".
-400.0 ... [100.0] ... 400.0 % • 100 % ≡ Motor rated torque 0x6076 (P325.00)
0x2912:002 Torque setpoint presets: Preset 2
(P452.02) (Torque presets: Torque preset 2)
-400.0 ... [100.0] ... 400.0 %
0x2912:003 Torque setpoint presets: Preset 3
(P452.03) (Torque presets: Torque preset 3)
-400.0 ... [100.0] ... 400.0 %
0x2912:004 Torque setpoint presets: Preset 4
(P452.04) (Torque presets: Torque preset 4)
-400.0 ... [100.0] ... 400.0 %
0x2912:005 Torque setpoint presets: Preset 5
(P452.05) (Torque presets: Torque preset 5)
-400.0 ... [100.0] ... 400.0 %
0x2912:006 Torque setpoint presets: Preset 6
(P452.06) (Torque presets: Torque preset 6)
-400.0 ... [100.0] ... 400.0 %
0x2912:007 Torque setpoint presets: Preset 7
(P452.07) (Torque presets: Torque preset 7)
-400.0 ... [100.0] ... 400.0 %
0x2912:008 Torque setpoint presets: Preset 8
(P452.08) (Torque presets: Torque preset 8)
-400.0 ... [100.0] ... 400.0 %
0x2946:001 Speed limitation: Upper speed limit Upper limit for the speed limitation.
(P340.01) (Speed limitation: Upper limit) • Setting is only effective with the selection "Upper speed limit [5]" in
-480000 ... [0] ... 480000 vel. unit 0x2946:003 (P340.03).
• From version 03.00
0x2946:002 Speed limitation: Lower speed limit Lower limit for speed limitation.
(P340.02) (Speed limitation: Lower limit) • Setting is only effective with the selection "Lower speed limit [5]" in
-480000 ... [0] ... 480000 vel. unit 0x2946:004 (P340.04).
• From version 03.00
0x2946:003 Speed limitation: Upper speed limit source Selection of the source for the upper speed limit.
(P340.03) (Speed limitation: Uppspeed lim src)
• From version 03.00
0 Maximum frequency Upper speed limit = Maximum frequency 0x2916 (P211.00).
1 Fixed Limit 0.0 Hz Upper speed limit = 0.0 Hz.
2 Analog input 1 The upper speed limit is defined as analog signal via the analog input 1.
4Analog input 1 ^ 597
3 Analog input 2 The upper speed limit is defined as analog signal via the analog input 2.
4Analog input 2 ^ 601
4 Upper frequency limit Upper speed limit = setting in 0x2946:005 (P340.05) in [Hz].
5 Upper speed limit Upper speed limit = setting in 0x2946:001 (P340.01) in [vel. unit].
6 Network target velocity The upper speed limit is defined as process data object via network.
4Configuring the network ^ 226

208
Motor control
Optimisation of the control loops
Motor controller settings

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x2946:004 Speed limitation: Lower speed limit source Selection of the source for the lower speed limit.
(P340.04) (Speed limitation: Lowspeed lim src)
• From version 03.00
0 (-) Maximum frequency Lower speed limit = (-) Maximum frequency 0x2916 (P211.00).
1 Fixed Limit 0.0 Hz Lower speed limit = 0.0 Hz.
2 Analog input 1 The lower speed limit is defined as analog signal via the analog input 1.
4Analog input 1 ^ 597
3 Analog input 2 The lower speed limit is defined as analog signal via the analog input 2.
4Analog input 2 ^ 601
4 Lower frequency limit Lower speed limit = setting in 0x2946:006 (P340.06) in [Hz].
5 Lower speed limit Lower speed limit = setting in 0x2946:002 (P340.02) in [vel. unit].
6 Network target velocity The lower speed limit is defined as process data object via network.
4Configuring the network ^ 226
0x2946:005 Speed limitation: Upper frequency limit Upper limit for the speed limitation.
(P340.05) (Speed limitation: Upper freq.limit) • Setting is only effective with the selection "Lower frequency limit [4]"
Device for 50-Hz mains: -1000.0 ... [50.0] ... 1000.0 Hz in 0x2946:004 (P340.04).
Device for 60-Hz mains: -1000.0 ... [60.0] ... 1000.0 Hz
• From version 03.00
0x2946:006 Speed limitation: Lower frequency limit Lower limit for speed limitation.
(P340.06) (Speed limitation: Lower freq.limit) • Setting is only effective with the selection "Lower frequency limit [4]"
Device for 50-Hz mains: -1000.0 ... [-50.0] ... in 0x2946:004 (P340.04).
1000.0 Hz
Device for 60-Hz mains: -1000.0 ... [-60.0] ...
1000.0 Hz
• From version 03.00
0x2946:007 Speed limitation: Actual upper speed limit Display of the current upper limit for speed limitation.
(P340.07) (Speed limitation: Act uppspeed lim)
• Read only: x.x Hz
• From version 03.00
0x2946:008 Speed limitation: Actual lower speed limit Display of the current lower limit for speed limitation.
(P340.08) (Speed limitation: Act lowspeed lim)
• Read only: x.x Hz
• From version 03.00
0x2948:002 ramp time Ramp time for operating mode "MS: Torque mode".
(P336.02) (Ramp time) • The torque setpoint is led via a ramp generator. This provides for a
0.0 ... [1.0] ... 60.0 s "smooth" switch-over between different setpoint sources.
• From version 03.00 • The set ramp time refers to the ramping up/down of 0 ... 100 % rated
motor torque 0x6076 (P325.00). At a lower setpoint selection, the
ramp time is reduced accordingly.
0x2949:001 Positive torque limit source Selection of the source for the positive torque limit source.
(P337.01) (Pos. torqlim src)
• From version 03.00
0 Max torque Positive torque limit source = Max torque 0x6072 (P326.00).
1 Fixed Limit 0.0 % Positive torque limit source = 0.0 %.
2 Analog Input 1 The positive torque limit source is defined as analog signal via the analog
input 1.
4Analog input 1 ^ 597
3 Analog Input 2 The positive torque limit source is defined as analog signal via the analog
input 2.
4Analog input 2 ^ 601
4 Positive torque limit Positive torque limit source = Positive torque limit 0x60E0.
5 Network target torque The positive torque limit source is defined as process data object via net-
work.
4Configuring the network ^ 226

209
Motor control
Optimisation of the control loops
Motor controller settings

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

8.4.4.9 Slip controller

In case of V/f characteristic control with feedback (VFC closed loop), the slip is calculated and
injected by the slip controller. The default setting of the slip controller provides robustness
and moderate dynamics.
Preconditions
In 0x2C00 (P300.00), the motor control type "V/f characteristic control (VFC closed loop) [7]"
is selected and configured. For details, see chapter "V/f characteristic control (VFC closed
loop)". ^ 172
Details
• The slip controller is designed as PI controller.
• In order to improve the response to setpoint changes, the setpoint speed of setpoint fre-
quency is added as feedforward control value to the output (correcting variable) of the slip
controller.
• With the setting 0x2B14:003 = 0 Hz, the slip controller is deactivated.

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x2B14:001 Gain Gain of the slip controller.
0.000 ... [0.100] ... 65.535
0x2B14:002 Reset time Reset time of the slip controller.
0.0 ... [100.0] ... 6553.5 ms
0x2B14:003 Frequency limitation Frequency limitation of the slip controller.
0.00 ... [10.00] ... 100.00 Hz • With the setting of 0 Hz, the slip controller is deactivated.

210
Motor control
Optimisation of the control loops
Speed controller

8.4.5 Speed controller

The speed controller is automatically set if one of the following optimisations is carried out:
4Motor selection from motor catalogue ^ 197
4Automatic motor identification (energized) ^ 199
4Automatic motor calibration (non-energized) ^ 200

For typical applications, a manual adaptation of the parameters of the speed

controller is not recommended. A wrong setting may have a negative effect on
the control. For special applications, contact the manufacturer before adapting
the parameters.

Details
The speed controller has an influence in the following motor control types:
• Servo control (SC ASM)
• Sensorless control (SL PSM)
• Sensorless vector control (SLVC)
The automatically calculated settings for the speed controller enable an optimal control
behaviour for typical load requirements:
• Minimum speed loss ①
• Minimum settling time ②
• Minimum overshoot ③

Load requirement
Speed setpoint

Speed

Setting notes
If oscillations occur during operation after high load requirements:
• Reduce gain of the speed controller in 0x2900:001 (P332.01).
• Increase reset time of the speed controller in 0x2900:002 (P332.02).
If the speed loss is too high or the settling time too long during operation with high load
requirements:
• Increase gain of the speed controller in 0x2900:001 (P332.01).

If the gain is set too high or the reset time too low, the speed control loop can
become unstable!

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x2900:001 Speed controller settings: Gain Gain factor Vp of the speed controller.
(P332.01) (Speed controller: Gain)
0.00000 ... [0.00193]* ... 20000.00000 Nm/rpm
* Default setting depending on the size.
0x2900:002 Speed controller settings: Reset time Reset time Ti of the speed controller.
(P332.02) (Speed controller: Reset time)
1.0 ... [80.0]* ... 6000.0 ms
* Default setting depending on the size.
0x2904 Actual speed filter time Filter time for the actual speed value.
0.0 ... [2.0] ... 50.0 ms

211
Motor control
Motor rotating direction

8.5 Motor rotating direction

In the default setting, both directions of motor rotation are enabled. Optionally, the direction
of rotation can be restricted so that only a clockwise rotation (CW) of the motor is possible.
Preconditions
Wiring of the motor phases must be carried out correctly with regard to the direction of
motor rotation.
In the documentation and the parameter selection texts, the following terms are used for the
direction of rotation:
• Forward = clockwise direction of rotation (CW)
• Reverse = counter-clockwise direction of rotation (CCW)
Details
The direction of rotation of the motor can be controlled in various ways:
• Via the function "Reverse rotational direction". Possible triggers to be selected for the
function "Reverse rotational direction" are available for example in 0x2631:013 (P400.13)
the digital inputs and internal status signals of the inverter.
• Via network. The definition of the direction of rotation is possible via the mappable Net-
WordIN1 data word or one of the predefined process data words.
• By specifying a bipolar setpoint value via analog input. Either via bipolar input range
(-10 ... +10 V) or configuration of a bipolar setting range.
If a reversal is not required, the direction of rotation can be restricted in 0x283A (P304.00) to
"Only clockwise (CW) [0]".
Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info
0x283A Limitation of rotation Optional restriction of the rotating direction.
(P304.00) (Limit. rotation)
0 Only clockwise (CW) The motor can only be rotated clockwise (CW). The transfer of negative
frequency and PID setpoints to the motor control is prevented.
• This function takes effect after the "Reverse rotational direction" func-
tion (0x2631:013 (P400.13)).
• Since this function only prevents negative setpoints, counter-clock-
wise rotation (CCW) is possible if the motor has been wired for this
rotating direction.
1 Both rotational directions Both directions of motor rotation are enabled.
0x2631:013 Function list: Reverse rotational direction Assignment of a trigger for the "Reverse rotational direction" function.
(P400.13) (Function list: Reverse rot.dir.) Trigger = TRUE: the setpoint specified is inverted (i. e. the sign is inver-
• Setting can only be changed if the inverter is inhibited).
ted. Trigger = FALSE: no action / deactivate function again.
• For further possible settings, see parameter
0x2631:001 (P400.01). ^ 532
13 Digital input 3

212
Motor control
Switching frequency changeover

8.6 Switching frequency changeover

The output voltage of the inverter is a DC voltage with sine-coded pulse width modulation
(PWM). This corresponds by approximation to a AC voltage with variable frequency. The fre-
quency of the PWM pulses is adjustable and is called "switching frequency".
Details
The switching frequency has an impact on the smooth running performance and the noise
generation in the motor connected as well as on the power loss in the inverter. The lower the
switching frequency, the better the concentricity factor, the smaller the power loss and the
higher the noise generation.
Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info
0x2939 Switching frequency Selection of the inverter switching frequency.
(P305.00) (Switching freq.) Abbreviations used:
* Default setting depending on the size.
• "Variable": adaptation of the switching frequency as a function of the
1 4 kHz variable / drive-optimised current
2 8 kHz variable / drive-optimised • "Drive-opt.": drive-optimised modulation ("sine/delta modulation")
3 16 kHz variable / drive-optimised • "Fixed": fixed switching frequency
• "Min. Pv": additional reduction of power loss
5 2 kHz fixed / drive-optimised
6 4 kHz fixed / drive-optimised
7 8 kHz fixed / drive-optimised
8 16 kHz fixed / drive-optimised
11 4 kHz variable / min. Pv
12 8 kHz variable / min. Pv
13 16 kHz variable / min. Pv
15 2 kHz constant/min. Pv
16 4 kHz constant/min. Pv
17 8 kHz constant/min. Pv
18 16 kHz constant/min. Pv
21 8 kHz variable / drive-optimised / 4 kHz min.
22 16 kHz variable / drive-optimised / 4 kHz
min.
23 16 kHz variable / drive-optimised / 8 kHz
min.
31 8 kHz variable /min. Pv / 4 kHz min.
32 16 kHz variable /min. Pv / 4 kHz min.
33 16 kHz variable /min. Pv / 8 kHz min.
0x293A Actual switching frequency Display of the currently active switching frequency of the inverter.
(P115.00) (Actual sw. freq.) Example:
• Read only • "16 kHz variable / drive-optimised / 4 kHz min. [22]" is selected as
1 2 kHz drive-optimised switching frequency in 0x2939 (P305.00).
2 4 kHz drive-optimised • An increase of the ambient temperature and/or the load have caused
3 8 kHz drive-optimised a decrease of the switching frequency to 8 kHz. In this case, this
parameter indicates the selection "8 kHz power loss-optimised [7]".
4 16 kHz drive-optimised
5 2 kHz power loss-optimised
6 4 kHz power loss-optimised
7 8 kHz power loss-optimised
8 16 kHz power loss-optimised

213
Motor control
Motor protection

8.7 Motor protection

Many monitoring functions integrated in the inverter can detect errors and thus protect the
device or motor from being destroyed or overloaded.
• Motor overload monitoring (i²*t) ^ 215
• Motor temperature monitoring ^ 219
• Current limits ^ 220
• Overcurrent monitoring ^ 222
• Motor phase failure detection ^ 223
• Motor speed monitoring ^ 224
• Motor torque monitoring ^ 224

214
Motor control
Motor protection
Motor overload monitoring (i²*t)

8.7.1 Motor overload monitoring (i²*t)

This function monitors the thermal utilisation of the motor, taking the motor currents recor-
ded and a mathematical model as a basis.

DANGER!
Fire hazard by overheating of the motor.
Possible consequences: Death or severe injuries
▶ To achieve full motor protection, an additional temperature monitoring function with a sep-
arate evaluation must be installed.
▶ When actuating motors that are equipped with PTC thermistors or thermal contacts, always
activate the PTC input.

Details
This function only serves to functionally protect the motor. It is not suitable for the safety-rele-
vant protection against energy-induced hazards, since the implementation is not fail-safe.
• When the thermal motor utilisation calculated reaches the threshold set in 0x2D4B:001
(P308.01), the response set in 0x2D4B:003 (P308.03) is triggered.
• With the setting 0x2D4B:003 (P308.03) = "No response [0]", the monitoring function is
deactivated.

For a UL-compliant operation with motor overload protection, 0x2D4B:002

(P308.02) and 0x2D4B:003 (P308.03) must be left on the default setting! This
setting serves to save the calculated thermal motor utilisation internally when
the inverter is switched off and reloaded when it is switched on.
If monitoring is deactivated by the setting 0x2D4B:003 (P308.03) = "No response
[0]", no motor overload protection is active. In this case, an external motor
overload protection can be provided by the user for a UL-compliant operation.

If a suitable motor temperature sensor is connected to the terminals X109/T1

and X109/T2 and the response to the triggering of the motor temperature mon-
itoring in 0x2D49:002 (P309.02) is set to "Fault [3]", the response of the motor
overload monitoring may be set other than "Fault [3]" " in 0x2D4B:003
(P308.03).
4Motor temperature monitoring ^ 219

215
Motor control
Motor protection
Motor overload monitoring (i²*t)

The following two diagrams show the relation between the motor load and release time of
the monitoring under the following conditions:
• Maximum utilisation 0x2D4B:001 (P308.01) = 150 %
• Speed compensation 0x2D4B:002 (P308.02) = "Off [1]" or output frequency ≥ 40 Hz
Release time
[s]

16000
14000
12000
10000
8000
6000
4000
2000
0 Load
[%]
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130

Load * Load ratio Release time

Release time
[s]
110 % Indefinite
100
90 135 % 93 s
80
70
60 150 % 60 s
50
40 200 % 26 s
30
20
10 250 % 17 s
0 Load
[%]
140
150
160
170
180
190
200
210
220
230
240
250

Depending on the setting in 0x2D4B:001 (P308.01), the release time from the diagrams can be
derived as follows:
• Calculation of the load ratio:
Load ratio = 150 % / maximum utilisation 0x2D4B:001 (P308.01)
(example: 0x2D4B:001 (P308.01) = 75 % à load ratio = 150 % / 75 % = 2)
• Calculation of the release time of the monitoring:
Release time = actual load * load ratio
(example: actual load = 75 % à release time = 75 % * 2 = 150 %)
• Looking up the release time from the above table based on load * load ratio.
(example: Load * load ratio = 150 % à release time = 60 s)

216
Motor control
Motor protection
Motor overload monitoring (i²*t)

Speed compensation for protecting motors at low speed

The inverter comes with an implemented compensation for low speed. If the motor is driven
with frequencies lower than 40 Hz, the speed compensation in 0x2D4B:002 (P308.02)should
be set to "On [0]" (default setting). This setting serves to reduce the release time of the moni-
toring at low speed to consider the reduced natural ventilation at AC motors. The speed com-
pensation for UL-compliant operation in 0x2D4B:002 (P308.02) must be set to "On [0]" as
well.
If the speed compensation is activated, the release time is reduced as follows:
• With an output frequency < 40 Hz: Reduced release time to 62.5 % + 37.5 % * output fre-
quency [Hz] / 40 [Hz]
• With an output frequency ≥ 40 Hz: No reduced release time
The following diagram shows the reduced release time with activated speed compensation.
• Maximum utilisation 0x2D4B:001 (P308.01) = 150 %
• Speed compensation 0x2D4B:002 (P308.02) = "On [0]"
Release time
[s]
Output frequency Release time
70
40 Hz 60 s
60
50 30 Hz ≈ 41 s
40
30 20 Hz ≈ 31 s
20
10 10 Hz ≈ 23 s
0 Frequency
[Hz]
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40

The following diagram shows the possible permanent load with activated speed compensa-
tion without the monitoring being triggered.
• Maximum utilisation 0x2D4B:001 (P308.01) = 150 %
• Speed compensation 0x2D4B:002 (P308.02) = "On [0]"
Load
[%]
Output frequency Possible permanent load
120
40 Hz 110 %
100
80 30 Hz 99 %
60
40
20 Hz 90 %
20 10 Hz 79 %
0 Frequency
[Hz]
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40

In case of 0 Hz, only a load of 62.7 % (≈ 62.5 %) with regard to the load at 40 Hz or above is
possible (69 / 110 * 100 % = 62.7 %). In case of a deviating setting in 0x2D4B:001 (P308.01),
the maximum possible motor load changes proportionately.
Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info
0x2D4B:001 Motor overload monitoring (i²*t): Maximum utilisa- Maximum permissible thermal motor utilisation (max. permissible motor
(P308.01) tion [60 s] current for 60 seconds).
(Motor overload: Max.load.for 60s) • 100 % ≡ rated motor current 0x6075 (P323.00)
30 ... [150] ... 200 % • If the motor is actuated with the current set here for 60 seconds, the
maximum permissible thermal motor utilisation is reached and the
response set in 0x2D4B:003 (P308.03) is executed.
• If the motor is actuated with a different current, the time period until
the motor overload monitoring function is activated is different. Gen-
erally the following applies: the lower the current, the lower the ther-
mal utilisation and the later the monitoring function is triggered.

217
Motor control
Motor protection
Motor overload monitoring (i²*t)

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x2D4B:002 Motor overload monitoring (i²*t): Speed compensa- Use this function to protect motors that are actuated at a speed below
(P308.02) tion 40 Hz.
(Motor overload: Speed comp.) • UL-compliant operation with motor overload protection requires the
setting "On [0]"!
0 On Release time for motor overload monitoring is reduced in order to com-
pensate for the reduced cooling of naturally ventilated AC induction
motors during operation at low speed.
1 Off Function deactivated, no reduction of the motor overload monitoring
release time. May require an external motor overload protection for the
UL-compliant operation.
0x2D4B:003 Motor overload monitoring (i²*t): Response Selection of the response to the triggering of motor overload monitor-
(P308.03) (Motor overload: Response) ing.
• For further possible settings, see parameter • UL-compliant operation with motor overload protection requires the
0x2D45:001 (P310.01). ^ 223 setting "error [3]"!
3 Fault • If monitoring is deactivated by the setting 0x2D4B:003 (P308.03) =
"No response [0]", no motor overload protection is active. In this case,
an external motor overload protection can be provided by the user for
a UL-compliant operation.
Associated error code:
• 9040 | 0x2350 - CiA: i²*t overload (thermal state)
0x2D4B:005 Motor overload monitoring (i²*t): Thermal load Display of the value of the internal i²*t integrator.
• Read only • 37500 ≡ 100 % thermal load
• When power is switched off, this value is saved in the internal
EEPROM.
• When power is switched on, the saved value is reloaded into the i²*t
integrator.
• The internal i²*t integrator detects the thermal load based on the load
conditions even if the motor overload monitoring is deactivated.

218
Motor control
Motor protection
Motor temperature monitoring

8.7.2 Motor temperature monitoring

In order to record and monitor the motor temperature, a PTC thermistor (single sensor
according to DIN 44081 or triple sensor according to DIN 44082) or thermal contact (normally-
closed contact) can be connected to the terminals T1 and T2. This measure helps to prevent
the motor from being destroyed by overheating.
Preconditions
• The inverter can only evaluate one PTC thermistor! Do not connect several PTC thermistors
in series or parallel.
• If several motors are actuated on one inverter, thermal contacts (NC contacts) connected
in series are to be used.
• To achieve full motor protection, an additional temperature monitoring function with a
separate evaluation must be installed.
• By default, a wire jumper is installed between terminals X109/T1 and X109/T2, which must
be removed when the PTC thermistor or thermal contact is connected.
Details
If 1.6 kΩ < R < 4 kΩ at terminals X109/T1 and X109/T2, the monitoring function will be activa-
ted; see functional test below.
• If the monitoring function is activated, the response set in 0x2D49:002 (P309.02) will be
effected.
• The setting 0x2D49:002 (P309.02) = 0 deactivates the monitoring function.

If a suitable motor temperature sensor is connected to the terminals X109/T1

and X109/T2 and the response in 0x2D49:002 (P309.02) is set to "Fault [3]", the
response of the motor overload monitoring may be set other than "Fault [3]" in
0x2D4B:003 (P308.03).
4Motor overload monitoring (i²*t) ^ 215

Functional test
Connect a fixed resistor to the PTC input:
• R > 4 kΩ : the monitoring function must be activated.
• R < 1 kΩ : the monitoring function must not be activated.

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x2D49:002 Motor temperature monitoring: Response Selection of the response to the triggering of the motor temperature
(P309.02) (Mot.temp.monit.: Response) monitoring.
• For further possible settings, see parameter Associated error code:
0x2D45:001 (P310.01). ^ 223
• 17168 | 0x4310 - Motor overtemperature error
3 Fault

219
Motor control
Motor protection
Current limits

8.7.3 Current limits

For the purpose of current limitation, a maximum overload current can be set for the inverter.
If the current consumption of the motor exceeds this current limit, the inverter changes its
dynamic behaviour, in order to counteract this exceedance.
Details
• The maximum overload current of the inverter can be set in 0x6073 (P324.00).
• Reference for the percentage setting of the maximum overload current is the rated motor
current set in 0x6075 (P323.00).
• The actual motor current is displayed in 0x2D88 (P104.00).

If the change in the dynamic behaviour carried out by the inverter does not
result in exiting the overcurrent state, the inverter outputs an error.

Load behaviour Impact

Overload during acceleration in A longer time than is required for reaching the frequency setpoint is set.
motor mode
Overload during deceleration in A longer time than is required for reaching standstill is set.
generator mode
Increasing load at constant fre- If the motor current limit value is reached:
quency • The inverter reduces the effective speed setpoint until a stable working is set or an effective speed setpoint
of 0 rpm is reached.
• If the load is reduced, the inverter increases the effective speed setpoint until the setpoint speed is
reached or the load reaches the current limit value again.
When the generator current limit value is reached:
• The inverter increases the effective speed setpoint until a stable working point is reached or up to the max-
imum permissible output frequency 0x2916 (P211.00).
• If the load is reduced, the inverter reduces the effective speed setpoint until the setpoint speed is reached
or the load reaches the current limit value again.
If an abrupt load is building at the motor shaft (e.g. drive is blocked), the overcurrent switch-off function may
respond.

Example: Overcurrent switch-off in case of a sudden load at the motor shaft

Frequency setpoint selection
60 Hz
50 Hz
40 Hz
30 Hz
20 Hz
10 Hz
0 Hz t

Output frequency
60 Hz
50 Hz
40 Hz
30 Hz
20 Hz
10 Hz
0 Hz t

Motor load
100 %

0x6073

0% t

220
Motor control
Motor protection
Current limits

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x6073 Max current Maximum overload current of the inverter.
(P324.00) (Max current) • 100 % ≡ Motor rated current 0x6075 (P323.00)
0.0 ... [200.0] ... 3000.0 % • If the current consumption of the motor exceeds this current limit,
the inverter changes its dynamic behaviour, in order to counteract this
exceedance.
• If the change in the dynamic behaviour carried out by the inverter
does not result in exiting the overcurrent state, the inverter outputs
an error.
Note!
This parameter is not identical to the so-called ultimate motor current
IULT !
• The ultimate motor current set in 0x2D46:001 (P353.01) is a limit
value for synchronous motors that serves to protect their magnets.
• The value to be set here should always be considerably below the ulti-
mate motor current!
0x2D88 Motor current Display des present current-r.m.s. value.
(P104.00) (Motor current)
• Read only: x.x A
0x6078 Current actual value Display of the present motor current.
(P103.00) (Current actual) • 100 % ≡ Motor rated current 0x6075 (P323.00)
• Read only: x.x %

221
Motor control
Motor protection
Overcurrent monitoring

8.7.4 Overcurrent monitoring

This function monitors the instantaneous value of the motor current and serves as motor pro-
tection.

NOTICE
With an incorrect parameterisation, the maximum permissible motor current may be excee-
ded in the process.
Possible consequence: irreversible damage of the motor.
▶ The setting of the threshold for the overcurrent monitoring in 0x2D46:001 (P353.01) must
be adapted to the connected motor.
▶ Set the maximum output current of the inverter in 0x6073 (P324.00) much lower than the
threshold for overcurrent monitoring.

Details
The inverter monitors its output current. This monitoring takes place irrespective of the set-
tings for the current limiting function. 4Current limits ^ 220
• If the instantaneous value of the motor current exceeds the threshold set in 0x2D46:001
(P353.01), the response set in 0x2D46:002 (P353.02) takes place.
• With the setting 0x2D46:002 (P353.02) = "No response [0]", the monitoring function is
deactivated.
The threshold for the overcurrent monitoring is preset to four times the rated motor current.
This presetting is overwritten in case a motor in the engineering tool is selected from the
"motor catalog" or the automatic identification or calibration of the motor data is carried out.
For a suitable protection, the automatically adapted setting should be used. If disturbances
occur during operation, the value can be increased.
Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info
0x2D46:001 Overcurrent monitoring: Threshold Warning/error threshold for motor current monitoring.
(P353.01) (Overcurr. monit.: Threshold) • If the instantaneous value of the motor current exceeds the threshold
0.0 ... [6.8]* ... 1000.0 A set, the response set in 0x2D46:002 (P353.02) is effected for the pur-
* Default setting depending on the size. pose of motor protection.
• From version 02.00 • The parameter is calculated and set in the course of the automatic
identification of the motor.
• The parameter can also be set and thus overwritten by selecting a
motor in the engineering tool from the "motor catalog" or calibrating
the motor.
4Optimisation of the control loops ^ 193
0x2D46:002 Overcurrent monitoring: Response Selection of the response to the triggering of motor current monitoring.
(P353.02) (Overcurr. monit.: Response) Associated error code:
• For further possible settings, see parameter • 29056 | 0x7180 - Motor overcurrent
0x2D45:001 (P310.01). ^ 223
3 Fault

222
Motor control
Motor protection
Motor phase failure detection

8.7.5 Motor phase failure detection

The motor phase failure detection function can be activated for both synchronous and asyn-
chronous motors.
Preconditions
Phase failure detection during operation is basically only suitable for applications which are
operated with a constant load and speed. In other cases, transient processes or unfavourable
operating points can cause maloperation.
Details
If a current-carrying motor phase (U, V, W) fails during operation, the response selected in
0x2D45:001 (P310.01) is tripped. In case of setting "No response [0]", only an entry is made in
the logbook.
A motor phase failure can only be detected if
1. the rated motor current is higher than 10 % of the rated inverter current and
2. the output frequency is not lower than 0.1 Hz (standstill).
The lower the output frequency the longer the detection of the motor phase failure.
Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info
0x2D45:001 Motor phase failure detection: Response Selection of the response following the detection of a motor phase fail-
(P310.01) (Mot.phase.fail.: Response) ure.
Associated error codes:
• 65289 | 0xFF09 - Motor phase missing
• 65290 | 0xFF0A - Phase U motor phase failure
• 65291 | 0xFF0B - Motor phase failure phase V
• 65292 | 0xFF0C - Motor phase failure phase W
0 No response 4Error types ^ 139
1 Warning
2 Trouble
3 Fault
0x2D45:002 Motor phase failure detection: Current threshold Current threshold for the activation of the motor phase failure detection
(P310.02) (Mot.phase.fail.: Current thresh.) function.
1.0 ... [5.0] ... 25.0 % • 100 % ≡ Maximum current 0x2DDF:002
• Background: in order to be able to reliably detect the failure of a
motor phase, first a certain must flow for the current sensor system.
The detection function is therefore only activated if the actual value
of the motor current has exceeded the current threshold set here.
• Display of the present motor current in 0x2D88 (P104.00).
0x2D45:003 Motor phase failure detection: Voltage threshold Voltage threshold for motor phase monitoring.
(P310.03) (Mot.phase.fail.: Voltage thresh.) • The monitoring function is triggered if the level of the motor current
0.0 ... [10.0] ... 100.0 V is lower than the device-dependent threshold for longer than 20 ms.
• In case of V/f characteristic control, the voltage threshold is consid-
ered additionally for the motor phase failure detection. If the motor
voltage is higher than the voltage threshold, monitoring is combined
with the motor current.

223
Motor control
Motor protection
Motor speed monitoring

8.7.6 Motor speed monitoring

This function monitors the motor speed during operation.
Preconditions
• In order to detect the current motor speed, the inverter must be enabled and the motor
must rotate.
• For an exact monitoring, rated motor speed 0x2C01:004 (P320.04) and rated motor fre-
quency 0x2C01:005 (P320.05) must be set correctly.
Details
• If the motor speed reaches the threshold set in 0x2D44:001 (P350.01), the response set in
0x2D44:002 (P350.02) takes place.
• With the setting 0x2D44:002 (P350.02) = "No response [0]", the monitoring function is
deactivated.

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x2D44:001 Overspeed monitoring: Threshold Warning/error threshold for motor speed monitoring.
(P350.01) (Overspeed monit.: Threshold) • If the motor speed reaches the threshold set, the response selected in
50 ... [8000] ... 50000 rpm 0x2D44:002 (P350.02) is effected.
• The parameter is calculated and set in the course of the automatic
identification of the motor.
• The parameter can also be set and thus overwritten by selecting a
motor in the engineering tool from the "motor catalog" or calibrating
the motor.
4Optimisation of the control loops ^ 193
0x2D44:002 Overspeed monitoring: Response Selection of the response to the triggering of motor speed monitoring.
(P350.02) (Overspeed monit.: Response) Associated error code:
• For further possible settings, see parameter • 65286 | 0xFF06 - Motor overspeed
0x2D45:001 (P310.01). ^ 223
3 Fault

8.7.7 Motor torque monitoring

This function monitors the motor torque during operation.
Preconditions
The motor torque monitoring can only be used for the following motor control types with
speed controller:
• Servo control (SC ASM)
• Sensorless control (SL PSM)
• Sensorless vector control (SLVC)
Details
This function sets the internal status signal "Torque limit reached [79]" = TRUE if the maximum
possible torque has been reached.
• The status signal is set irrespective of the response 0x2D67:001 (P329.01) and delay time
0x2D67:002 (P329.02) set for this monitoring.
• The user can use the status signal to activate certain functions. 4Flexible I/O configura-
tion ^ 525
• The status signal also serves to set a digital output or a bit of the NetWordOUT1 status
word. 4Configuration of digital outputs ^ 603

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x2D67:001 Maximum torque monitoring: Response Selection of response to reaching the maximum possible torque.
(P329.01) (MaxTrq.Monitor: Response) • The selected response takes place if the status signal "Torque limit
• From version 02.00 reached [79]" = TRUE and the deceleration time set in 0x2D67:002
• For further possible settings, see parameter (P329.02) has elapsed.
0x2D45:001 (P310.01). ^ 223 Associated error code:
0 No response • 33553 | 0x8311 - Torque limit reached

224
Motor control
Motor protection
Motor torque monitoring

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x2D67:002 Maximum torque monitoring: Triggering delay Optional setting of a deceleration for triggering the response selected in
(P329.02) (MaxTrq.Monitor: Triggering delay) 0x2D67:001 (P329.01).
0.000 ... [0.000] ... 10.000 s Typical application:
• From version 02.00 • The motor should be driven at the torque limit for a short time with-
out triggering the selected response.
• Only after a longer operation (> set deceleration) at the torque limit,
the selected response is to take place.
0x6072 Max torque Symmetrical selection of the maximum permissible torque.
(P326.00) (Max torque) • 100 % ≡ Motor rated torque 0x6076 (P325.00)
0.0 ... [250.0] ... 3000.0 % • This parameter serves to implement a statically and bipolarly acting
• From version 02.00 torque limitation. This can be used, for instance, as overload protec-
tion of the mechanical transmission path/elements starting at the
motor shaft.
• This limitation acts irrespective of the torque limitations acting in uni-
polar mode that are set in 0x60E0 and 0x60E1.
0x60E0 Positive torque limit Positive torque limit source for speed control with torque limitation.
0.0 ... [250.0] ... 3276.7 % • 100 % ≡ Motor rated torque 0x6076 (P325.00)
• From version 02.00
0x60E1 Negative torque limit Negative torque limit source for speed control with torque limitation.
0.0 ... [250.0] ... 3276.7 % • 100 % ≡ Motor rated torque 0x6076 (P325.00)
• From version 02.00

225
Configuring the network

226
Configuring the network
General network settings

9.1 General network settings

Activate network control
In order to be able to control the inverter via network, a trigger must be first assigned in
0x2631:037 (P400.37) to the "Activate network control" function.
• This trigger can for instance be the constant value "TRUE" or a digital input.
• If the assigned trigger is = TRUE, the motor can only be started via the network control
word (exception: Jog operation; see chapter "Start / stop motor" ^ 531).
In case of an activated network control, the following functions are still active:
• 0x2631:001 (P400.01): Enable inverter
• 0x2631:002 (P400.02): Run
• 0x2631:003 (P400.03): Activate quick stop
• 0x2631:004 (P400.04): Reset fault
• 0x2631:005 (P400.05): Activate DC braking
• 0x2631:010 (P400.10): Jog foward (CW)
• 0x2631:011 (P400.11): Jog reverse (CCW)
• 0x2631:012 (P400.12): Activate keypad control
• 0x2631:037 (P400.37): Activate network control
• 0x2631:043 (P400.43): Activate fault 1
• 0x2631:044 (P400.44): Activate fault 2
• 0x2631:054 (P400.54): Position counter reset
All other functions configurable via 0x2631:xx (P400.xx) are deactivated in case of network
control. 4Flexible I/O configuration ^ 525
Network control word and status word
For establishing a simple network connection, the inverter provides predefined control and
status words for device profile CiA 402, AC drive profile as well as in LECOM format. For imple-
menting your own formats, the data words NetWordIN1 and NetWordOUT1 are available. By
means of data mapping to a network register, each of these words can be transferred as proc-
ess date via network.
Designation Parameter Associated mapping Further information
entry *
CiA: Controlword 0x6040 0x60400010 4Device profile CiA 402 ^ 247
CiA: Statusword 0x6041 (P780.00) 0x60410010
AC Drive control word 0x400B:001 (P592.01) 0x400B0110 4AC Drive Profile ^ 248
AC Drive status word 0x400C:001 (P593.01) 0x400C0110
LECOM control word 0x400B:002 (P592.02) 0x400B0210 4Lenze LECOM profile ^ 249
LECOM status word 0x400C:002 (P593.02) 0x400C0210
NetWordIN1 0x4008:001 (P590.01) 0x40080110 For implementing an individual control word format.
The functions that are to be triggered via bits 0 ... 15 of the NetWordIN1
data word are defined in 0x400E:001 (P505.01) ... 0x400E:016 (P505.16).
NetWordOUT1 0x400A:001 (P591.01) 0x400A0110 For implementing an individual status word format.
The triggers for bits 0 ... 15 of the NetWordOUT1 data word are defined
in 0x2634:010 (P420.10) ... 0x2634:025 (P420.25).
* A mapping entry consists of index, subindex and data length in bits of the parameter to be mapped.

General information about the process of data mapping can be found in the chapter of the
same name for the corresponding network.

227
Configuring the network
General network settings

Network setpoint
It must be observed that the network setpoint must be selected explicitly. There are various
options to select/change-over to the network setpoint. See the following examples.

Example 1: The AC drive control word shall enable a change-over from the standard setpoint
source to the network setpoint (bit 6).
1. Set a standard setpoint source different than Network" [5]" in 0x2860:001 (P201.01).
2. Set the selection Network setpoint active " [116]" in 0x2631:017 (P400.17).

Example 2: Independent of the used network, a change-over from the standard setpoint
source to the network setpoint shall be possible via a digital trigger (e. g. digital input).
1. Set a standard setpoint source different than Network" [5]" in 0x2860:001 (P201.01).
2. Set the desired digital trigger (e. g. digital input) in 0x2631:017 (P400.17) via which the
change-over to the network setpoint is to take place.

Example 3: The setpoint is to be defined exclusively via network.

1. As standard setpoint source, set the selection "Network [5]" in 0x2860:001 (P201.01).

The following table describes the change-over to the network setpoint via the different net-
work control words in detail:
Network control word Change-over to network setpoint
NetWordIN1 data word Assign the functionActivate network setpoint [17]" to the bit that is to be used for activating the network
0x4008:001 (P590.01) setpoint.
• The functions that are to be triggered via bits 0 ... 15 of the NetWordIN1 data word are defined in 0x400E:
001 (P505.01) ... 0x400E:016 (P505.16).
Bit x Selection:
0 Standard setpoint source selected in 0x2860:001 (P201.01).
1 Network setpoint
AC drive control word The network setpoint is activated via bit 6 of the AC Drive control word:
0x400B:001 (P592.01) Bit 6 Selection:
0 Standard setpoint source selected in 0x2860:001 (P201.01).
1 Network setpoint
Note!
In order that the activation via bit 6 works, the selection "Network setpoint active [116]" must be set in
0x2631:017 (P400.17).
LECOM control word The setpoint is selected via bit 0 and bit 1 of the LECOM control word:
0x400B:002 (P592.02) Bit 1 Bit 0 Selection:
0 0 Standard setpoint source selected in 0x2860:001 (P201.01).
0 1 Frequency setpoint preset 1 0x2911:001 (P450.01)
1 0 Frequency setpoint preset 2 0x2911:002 (P450.02)
1 1 Frequency setpoint preset 3 0x2911:003 (P450.03)
CiA 402 Controlword In case of control via device profile CiA 402:
0x6040 • In the operating mode "CiA: Velocity mode [2]", the setpoint speed defined via the "Target velocity"
0x6042 (P781.00) parameter is used.4Device profile CiA 402 ^ 469
• A change-over to an alternative setpoint source via the CiA 402 Controlword is not possible.

If a bipolar network setpoint is specified for the operating mode "MS: Velocity
mode" (e. g. via the mappable parameter 0x400B:006 (P592.06)), the direction
of rotation cannot be controlled via the network control word. The direction of
rotation is determined by the sign of the setpoint.

228
Configuring the network
General network settings

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x231F:001 Module ID: Active module ID Display of the network options currently configured in the inverter.
(P500.01) (Module ID: Active module ID) • With the help of this module ID, the keypad only shows the communi-
• Read only cation parameters relevant to the respective network.
48 No network
Note!
67 CANopen
When switched on, the inverter checks whether the parameter settings
71 EtherNet/IP (from version 02.00) saved in the memory module match the inverter hardware and firm-
ware. In case of an incompatibility, a corresponding error message is
output. For details see chapter "Data handling" (section "Hardware and
firmware updates/downgrades"). ^ 141
78 POWERLINK (from version 05.00)
80 PROFIBUS Display of the network options currently configured in the inverter.
82 PROFINET (from version 02.00) • With the help of this module ID, the keypad only shows the communi-
cation parameters relevant to the respective network.
84 EtherCAT (from version 02.00)
86 Modbus TCP/IP Note!
87 Modbus When switched on, the inverter checks whether the parameter settings
saved in the memory module match the inverter hardware and firm-
ware. In case of an incompatibility, a corresponding error message is
output. For details see chapter "Data handling" (section "Hardware and
firmware updates/downgrades"). ^ 141
0x231F:002 Module ID: Module ID connected Display of the network option currently available in the inverter.
(P500.02) (Module ID: Module ID conn.)
• Read only Note!
• For the meaning of the display see parameter When switched on, the inverter checks whether the parameter settings
0x231F:001 (P500.01). ^ 229 saved in the memory module match the inverter hardware and firm-
ware. In case of an incompatibility, a corresponding error message is
output. For details see chapter "Data handling" (section "Hardware and
firmware updates/downgrades"). ^ 141
0x400E:001 NetWordIN1 function: Bit 0 Definition of the function that is to be triggered via bit 0 of the mappa-
(P505.01) (NetWordIN1 fct.: NetWordIN1.00) ble NetWordIN1 data word.
• Setting can only be changed if the inverter is inhibi-
ted.
0 Not active Trigger bit without any function.
1 Disable inverter Trigger bit = 0-1 edge: The inverter is disabled.
Trigger bit = 0: The inverter is enabled (unless there is another cause for
inverter disable).
Notes:
• In all device states, a 0-1 edge causes an immediate change to the
inhibited state with one exception: If the inverter is in the error status
and the error condition still exists, the inverter remains in the error
status.
• Changing to the disabled state causes an immediate stop of the
motor, regardless of the stop method set in 0x2838:003 (P203.03).
The motor coasts down as a function of the mass inertia of the
machine.
• In the disabled state, the motor cannot be started.
• After the inverter disable is deactivated, a renewed start command is
required to restart the motor.
• The cause(s) that are active for the disabled state are shown in
0x282A:001 (P126.01).
2 Stopping Trigger bit = 1: Motor is stopped.
Trigger bit = 0: No action / Deactivate stop again.
Notes:
• The stop method can be selected in 0x2838:003 (P203.03).
3 Activate quick stop Trigger bit = 1: "Quick stop" function activated.
Trigger bit = 0: no action / deactivate function again.
Notes:
• The "Quick stop" function brings the motor to a standstill within the
deceleration time set in 0x291C (P225.00).
• The "Quick stop" function has a higher priority than the "Run" func-
tion.

229
Configuring the network
General network settings

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

4 Reset error Trigger bit = 0-1 edge: Active error is reset (acknowledged) if the error
condition is not active anymore and the error is resettable.
Trigger bit = 0: No action.
Notes:
• After resetting the error, a new enable/start command is required to
restart the motor.
4Error handling ^ 139
5 Activate DC braking Trigger bit = 1: "DC braking" function activated.
Trigger bit = 0: no action / deactivate function again.
4DC braking ^ 437
8 Run forward (CW) Trigger bit = 0-1 edge: Motor is started in forward rotating direction
(CW).
Trigger bit = 1-0 edge: Motor is stopped again.
Notes:
• The stop method can be selected in 0x2838:003 (P203.03).
• In the case of a bipolar setpoint selection (e.g ±10 V), the function is
executed irrespective of the rotating direction. The rotating direction
is determined by the sign of the setpoint.
• The function also serves to realise an automatic start after switch-on.
4Starting performance ^ 153
• The "Reverse rotational direction [13]" function can be used in con-
nection with this function.
9 Run reverse (CCW) Trigger bit = 0-1 edge: Motor is started in backward rotating direction
(CCW).
Trigger bit = 1-0 edge: Motor is stopped again.
Notes:
• The stop method can be selected in 0x2838:003 (P203.03).
• In the case of a bipolar setpoint selection (e.g ±10 V), the function is
executed irrespective of the rotating direction. The rotating direction
is determined by the sign of the setpoint.
• The function also serves to realise an automatic start after switch-on.
4Starting performance ^ 153
• The "Reverse rotational direction [13]" function can be used in con-
nection with this function.
13 Reverse rotational direction Trigger bit = 1: the setpoint specified is inverted (i. e. the sign is inver-
ted).
Trigger bit = 0: no action / deactivate function again.
14 Activate AI1 setpoint Trigger bit = 1: analog input 1 is used as setpoint source (if the trigger bit
assigned has the highest setpoint priority).
Trigger bit = 0: no action / deactivate function again.
4Analog input 1 ^ 597
15 Activate AI2 setpoint Trigger bit = 1: analog input 2 is used as setpoint source (if the trigger bit
assigned has the highest setpoint priority).
Trigger bit = 0: no action / deactivate function again.
4Analog input 2 ^ 601
17 Activate network setpoint Trigger bit = 1: the network is used as setpoint source (if the trigger bit
assigned has the highest setpoint priority).
Trigger bit = 0: no action / deactivate function again.
18 Activate preset (bit 0) Selection bits for bit coded selection and activation of a parameterised
19 Activate preset (bit 1) setpoint (preset).
4Setpoint source of preset setpoints ^ 554
20 Activate preset (bit 2)
21 Activate preset (bit 3)
26 Activate segment 1 setpoint (from Selection bits for bit coded selection and activation of a parameterised
version 03.00) segment setpoint.
27 Activate segment 2 setpoint (from Notes:
version 03.00) • During normal operation (no active sequence), this function serves to
28 Activate segment 3 setpoint (from activate the setpoint of a segment (instead of an entire sequence in
version 03.00) the sequencer operation).
29 Activate segment 4 setpoint (from • This function is not intended for the use in the sequencer operation.
version 03.00) 4Setpoint source segment setpoints ^ 563

230
Configuring the network
General network settings

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

30 Run/abort sequence (from version 03.00) Trigger bit = 1: Start selected sequence.
Trigger bit = 0: Abort sequence.
Notes:
• The assigned trigger bit must remain set to "1" for the duration of the
sequence.
• If the trigger bit is reset to "0", the sequence is aborted. In this case,
the standard setpoint or the setpoint source selected via setpoint
change-over is active again.
• A sequence is selected in a binary-coded fashion via the trigger bits
assigned to the four functions "Select sequence (bit 0) [50]" ... "Select
sequence (bit 3) [53]".
4Sequencer ^ 504
32 Next sequence step (from version 03.00) Trigger bit = 0↗1 (edge): Next sequence step.
Trigger bit = 1↘0 (edge): No action.
Notes:
• The execution of the current step is completed even if the time para-
meterised for the segment has not elapsed yet.
• The function is only relevant for Sequencer mode 0x4025 (P800.00) =
"Step operation [2]" or "Time & step operation [3]".
• A jump to the next sequence step is not possible if the sequence pau-
ses, the sequence is suspended or the final segment is executed.
4Sequencer ^ 504
33 Pause sequence (from version 03.00) Trigger bit = 1: Pause sequence.
Trigger bit = 0: Continue sequence.
Notes:
• During the pause, the sequence stops in the current step. The expira-
tion of the time set for the segment is stopped.
• The sequencer setpoint continues to remain active.
4Sequencer ^ 504
34 Suspend sequence (from version 03.00) Trigger bit = 1: Suspend sequence.
Trigger bit = 0: Continue sequence.
Notes:
• This function serves to temporarily change over to the standard set-
point or the setpoint source selected via setpoint change-over.
• The sequence is continued at the point where it was suspended.
4Sequencer ^ 504
35 Stop sequence (from version 03.00) Trigger bit = 0↗1 (edge): Stop sequence.
Trigger bit = 1↘0 (edge): No action.
Notes:
• If the sequence is stopped, it is jumped to the final segment.
• The further execution depends on the selected End of sequence
mode 0x402F (P824.00).
4Sequencer ^ 504
36 Abort sequence (from version 03.00) Trigger bit = 0↗1 (edge): Abort sequence.
Trigger bit = 1↘0 (edge): No action.
Notes:
• This function serves to directly stop the sequence without the final
segment being executed. In this case, the standard setpoint or the set-
point source selected via setpoint change-over is active again.
4Sequencer ^ 504
39 Activate ramp 2 Trigger bit = 1: activate acceleration time 2 and deceleration time 2 man-
ually.
Trigger bit = 0: no action / deactivate function again.
4Frequency limits and ramp times ^ 156
40 Load parameter set Trigger bit = 0-1 edge: parameter change-over to the value set selected
via "Select parameter set (bit 0)" and "Select parameter set (bit 1)".
Trigger bit = 0: no action.
Notes:
• The activation method for the "Parameter change-over" function can
be selected in 0x4046 (P755.00).
4Parameter change-over ^ 464

231
Configuring the network
General network settings

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

41 Select parameter set (bit 0) Selection bits for the "Parameter change-over" function.
42 Select parameter set (bit 1) 4Parameter change-over ^ 464
43 Activate fault 1 Trigger bit = 1: Trigger user-defined error 1.
Trigger bit = 0: no action.
Notes:
• After the error is triggered, the motor is brought to a standstill with
the quick stop ramp. The inverter is then disabled.
Associated error code:
• 25249 | 0x62A1 - Network: user fault 1
44 Activate fault 2 Trigger bit = 1: Trigger user-defined error 2.
Trigger bit = 0: no action.
Notes:
• After the error is triggered, the motor is brought to a standstill with
the quick stop ramp. The inverter is then disabled.
Associated error code:
• 25250 | 0x62A2 - Network: user fault 2
45 Deactivate PID controlling Trigger bit = 1: If PID control is activated, ignore PID control and drive the
motor in speed-controlled manner.
Trigger bit = 0: If PID control is activated, drive the motor with PID con-
trol.
Notes:
• The PID control can be activated in 0x4020:001 (P600.01).
4Configuring the process controller ^ 407
46 Set PID output to 0 Trigger bit = 1: If PID control is activated, I component and the output of
the PID controller are set to 0 and the internal control algorithm is stop-
ped. The PID control remains active.
Trigger bit = 0: No action / deactivate function again.
4Configuring the process controller ^ 407
47 Inhibit PID I-component Trigger bit = 1: If the PID control is activated, the I component of the PID
controller is set to 0 and the integration process is stopped.
Trigger bit = 0: No action / deactivate function again.
4Configuring the process controller ^ 407
48 Activate PID influence ramp Trigger bit = 1: the influence of the process controller is shown by means
of a ramp.
Trigger bit = 0 or not connected: the influence of the process controller
is shown by means of a ramp.
Notes:
• The influence of the process controller is always active (not only when
PID control is activated).
• Acceleration time for showing the influence of the process controller
can be set in 0x404C:001 (P607.01).
• Deceleration time for hiding the influence of the process controller
can be set in 0x404C:002 (P607.02).
4Configuring the process controller ^ 407
49 Release holding brake Trigger bit = 1: Release holding brake manually.
Trigger bit = 0: No action.
Notes:
• The manually triggered "Release holding brake" command has a direct
impact on the "Release holding brake [115]" trigger. Thus, the holding
brake can be manually released if the power section is switched off.
• The responsibility for a manual release of the holding brake has the
external trigger source for the "Release holding brake" command.
4Holding brake control ^ 472
50 Select sequence (bit 0) Selection bits for bit coded selection of a sequence.
51 Select sequence (bit 1) Notes:
52 Select sequence (bit 2) • The selected sequence is not started automatically.
53 Select sequence (bit 3) • For a status-controlled start, the function "Run/abort sequence [30]"
is available.
4Sequencer control functions ^ 588

232
Configuring the network
General network settings

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

54 Position counter reset Trigger bit = 1: Reset position counter manually.
Trigger bit = 0: No action.
4Position counter ^ 493
55 Activate UPS operation Trigger bit = 1: Activate UPS operation.
Trigger bit = 0: No action / deactivate function again.
4UPS operation ^ 490
0x400E:002 NetWordIN1 function: Bit 1 Definition of the function that is to be triggered via bit 1 of the mappa-
(P505.02) (NetWordIN1 fct.: NetWordIN1.01) ble NetWordIN1 data word.
• Setting can only be changed if the inverter is inhibi-
ted.
• For further possible settings, see parameter
0x400E:001 (P505.01). ^ 229
0 Not active
0x400E:003 NetWordIN1 function: Bit 2 Definition of the function that is to be triggered via bit 2 of the mappa-
(P505.03) (NetWordIN1 fct.: NetWordIN1.02) ble NetWordIN1 data word.
• Setting can only be changed if the inverter is inhibi-
ted.
• For further possible settings, see parameter
0x400E:001 (P505.01). ^ 229
3 Activate quick stop
0x400E:004 NetWordIN1 function: Bit 3 Definition of the function that is to be triggered via bit 3 of the mappa-
(P505.04) (NetWordIN1 fct.: NetWordIN1.03) ble NetWordIN1 data word.
• Setting can only be changed if the inverter is inhibi-
ted.
• For further possible settings, see parameter
0x400E:001 (P505.01). ^ 229
0 Not active
0x400E:005 NetWordIN1 function: Bit 4 Definition of the function that is to be triggered via bit 4 of the mappa-
(P505.05) (NetWordIN1 fct.: NetWordIN1.04) ble NetWordIN1 data word.
• Setting can only be changed if the inverter is inhibi-
ted.
• For further possible settings, see parameter
0x400E:001 (P505.01). ^ 229
8 Run forward (CW)
0x400E:006 NetWordIN1 function: Bit 5 Definition of the function that is to be triggered via bit 5 of the mappa-
(P505.06) (NetWordIN1 fct.: NetWordIN1.05) ble NetWordIN1 data word.
• Setting can only be changed if the inverter is inhibi-
ted.
• For further possible settings, see parameter
0x400E:001 (P505.01). ^ 229
18 Activate preset (bit 0)
0x400E:007 NetWordIN1 function: Bit 6 Definition of the function that is to be triggered via bit 6 of the mappa-
(P505.07) (NetWordIN1 fct.: NetWordIN1.06) ble NetWordIN1 data word.
• Setting can only be changed if the inverter is inhibi-
ted.
• For further possible settings, see parameter
0x400E:001 (P505.01). ^ 229
19 Activate preset (bit 1)
0x400E:008 NetWordIN1 function: Bit 7 Definition of the function that is to be triggered via bit 7 of the mappa-
(P505.08) (NetWordIN1 fct.: NetWordIN1.07) ble NetWordIN1 data word.
• Setting can only be changed if the inverter is inhibi-
ted.
• For further possible settings, see parameter
0x400E:001 (P505.01). ^ 229
4 Reset error
0x400E:009 NetWordIN1 function: Bit 8 Definition of the function that is to be triggered via bit 8 of the mappa-
(P505.09) (NetWordIN1 fct.: NetWordIN1.08) ble NetWordIN1 data word.
• Setting can only be changed if the inverter is inhibi-
ted.
• For further possible settings, see parameter
0x400E:001 (P505.01). ^ 229
0 Not active

233
Configuring the network
General network settings

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x400E:010 NetWordIN1 function: Bit 9 Definition of the function that is to be triggered via bit 9 of the mappa-
(P505.10) (NetWordIN1 fct.: NetWordIN1.09) ble NetWordIN1 data word.
• Setting can only be changed if the inverter is inhibi-
ted.
• For further possible settings, see parameter
0x400E:001 (P505.01). ^ 229
5 Activate DC braking
0x400E:011 NetWordIN1 function: Bit 10 Definition of the function that is to be triggered via bit 10 of the mappa-
(P505.11) (NetWordIN1 fct.: NetWordIN1.10) ble NetWordIN1 data word.
• Setting can only be changed if the inverter is inhibi-
ted.
• For further possible settings, see parameter
0x400E:001 (P505.01). ^ 229
0 Not active
0x400E:012 NetWordIN1 function: Bit 11 Definition of the function that is to be triggered via bit 11 of the mappa-
(P505.12) (NetWordIN1 fct.: NetWordIN1.11) ble NetWordIN1 data word.
• Setting can only be changed if the inverter is inhibi-
ted.
• For further possible settings, see parameter
0x400E:001 (P505.01). ^ 229
0 Not active
0x400E:013 NetWordIN1 function: Bit 12 Definition of the function that is to be triggered via bit 12 of the mappa-
(P505.13) (NetWordIN1 fct.: NetWordIN1.12) ble NetWordIN1 data word.
• Setting can only be changed if the inverter is inhibi-
ted.
• For further possible settings, see parameter
0x400E:001 (P505.01). ^ 229
13 Reverse rotational direction
0x400E:014 NetWordIN1 function: Bit 13 Definition of the function that is to be triggered via bit 13 of the mappa-
(P505.14) (NetWordIN1 fct.: NetWordIN1.13) ble NetWordIN1 data word.
• Setting can only be changed if the inverter is inhibi-
ted.
• For further possible settings, see parameter
0x400E:001 (P505.01). ^ 229
0 Not active
0x400E:015 NetWordIN1 function: Bit 14 Definition of the function that is to be triggered via bit 14 of the mappa-
(P505.15) (NetWordIN1 fct.: NetWordIN1.14) ble NetWordIN1 data word.
• Setting can only be changed if the inverter is inhibi-
ted.
• For further possible settings, see parameter
0x400E:001 (P505.01). ^ 229
0 Not active
0x400E:016 NetWordIN1 function: Bit 15 Definition of the function that is to be triggered via bit 15 of the mappa-
(P505.16) (NetWordIN1 fct.: NetWordIN1.15) ble NetWordIN1 data word.
• Setting can only be changed if the inverter is inhibi-
ted.
• For further possible settings, see parameter
0x400E:001 (P505.01). ^ 229
0 Not active
0x2631:001 Function list: Enable inverter Assignment of a trigger for the "Enable inverter" function.
(P400.01) (Function list: Enable inverter) Trigger = TRUE: The inverter is enabled (unless there is another cause for
• Setting can only be changed if the inverter is inhibi- inverter disable).
ted. Trigger = FALSE: The inverter is disabled.
Notes:
• This function must be set to TRUE to start the motor. Either via an
assigned digital input or by default setting "Constant TRUE [1]".
• Changing to the inhibited state causes an immediate stop of the
motor, regardless of the stop method set in 0x2838:003 (P203.03).
The motor becomes torqueless and coasts down as a function of the
mass inertia of the machine.
• The cause(s) that are active for the disabled state are shown in
0x282A:001 (P126.01).
0 Not connected No trigger assigned (trigger is constantly FALSE).

234
Configuring the network
General network settings

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

1 Constant TRUE Trigger is constantly TRUE.
11 Digital input 1 State of X3/DI1, taking an inversion set in 0x2632:001 (P411.01) into
consideration.
12 Digital input 2 State of X3/DI2, taking an inversion set in 0x2632:002 (P411.02) into
consideration.
13 Digital input 3 State of X3/DI3, taking an inversion set in 0x2632:003 (P411.03) into
consideration.
14 Digital input 4 State of X3/DI4, taking an inversion set in 0x2632:004 (P411.04) into
consideration.
15 Digital input 5 State of X3/DI5, taking an inversion set in 0x2632:005 (P411.05) into
consideration.
16 Digital input 6 State of X3/DI6, taking an inversion set in 0x2632:006 (P411.06) into
consideration.
Digital input 6 is only available in the Control Unit (CU) with application
I/O.
17 Digital input 7 State of X3/DI7, taking an inversion set in 0x2632:007 (P411.07) into
consideration.
Digital input 7 is only available in the Control Unit (CU) with application
I/O.
50 Running TRUE if inverter and start are enabled and output frequency > 0.2 Hz.
Otherwise FALSE.
51 Ready for operation TRUE if inverter is ready for operation (no error active, no STO active and
DC-bus voltage ok). Otherwise FALSE.
53 Stop active TRUE if inverter is enabled and motor is not started and output fre-
quency = 0.
54 Quick stop active TRUE if quick stop is active. Otherwise FALSE.
58 Device warning active TRUE if warning is active. Otherwise FALSE.
• A warning has no impact on the operating status of the inverter.
• A warning is reset automatically if the cause has been eliminated.
59 Device fault active TRUE if a fault is active. Otherwise FALSE.
• In the event of a fault, the motor is brought to a standstill with the
quick stop ramp. The inverter is then disabled.
• Exception: In case of a serious fault, the inverter is disabled immedi-
ately. The motor becomes torqueless (coasts).
• The error state will be left automatically if the error condition is not
active anymore.
• The restart behaviour after trouble can be configured. 4Automatic
restart ^ 484
60 Heatsink temperature warning active TRUE if current heatsink temperature > warning threshold for tempera-
ture monitoring. Otherwise FALSE.
• Display of the current heatsink temperature in 0x2D84:001 (P117.01).
• Setting of the warning threshold in 0x2D84:002.
69 Rotational direction reversed TRUE if output frequency is negative. Otherwise FALSE.
70 Frequency threshold exceeded TRUE if current output frequency > frequency threshold. Otherwise
FALSE.
• Display of the current output frequency in 0x2DDD (P100.00).
• Setting Frequency thresholdin 0x4005 (P412.00).
4Frequency threshold for "Frequency threshold exceeded" trigger ^ 593
71 Actual speed = 0 TRUE if current output frequency = 0 Hz (± 0.01 Hz), irrespective of the
operating mode. Otherwise FALSE.
• Display of the current output frequency in 0x2DDD (P100.00).
78 Current limit reached TRUE if current motor current ≥ maximum current. Otherwise FALSE.
• Display of the present motor current in 0x2D88 (P104.00).
• Setting for the maximum current in 0x6073 (P324.00).
79 Torque limit reached (from version 02.00) TRUE if torque limit has been reached or exceeded. Otherwise FALSE.
• Setting "Positive torque limit" in 0x60E0.
• Setting "Negative torque limit" in 0x60E1.

235
Configuring the network
General network settings

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

81 Error of analog input 1 active TRUE if the monitoring of the input signal at the analog input 1 has
responded. Otherwise FALSE.
This trigger is set as a function of the following settings:
• Monitoring threshold 0x2636:008 (P430.08)
• Monitoring condition 0x2636:009 (P430.09)
The setting of the Error response in 0x2636:010 (P430.10) has no effect
on this trigger.
4Analog input 1 ^ 597
82 Error of analog input 2 active TRUE if the monitoring of the input signal at the analog input 2 has
responded. Otherwise FALSE.
This trigger is set as a function of the following settings:
• Monitoring threshold 0x2637:008 (P431.08)
• Monitoring condition 0x2637:009 (P431.09)
The setting of the Error response in 0x2637:010 (P431.10) has no effect
on this trigger.
4Analog input 2 ^ 601
83 Load loss detected TRUE if actual motor current < threshold for load loss detection after
delay time of the load loss detection has elapsed. Otherwise FALSE.
• Display of the present motor current in 0x6078 (P103.00).
• Setting Threshold in 0x4006:001 (P710.01).
• Setting Decelerationin 0x4006:002 (P710.02).
4Load loss detection ^ 449
102 Sequence suspended (from version 03.00) Status signal of the "sequencer" function:
TRUE if the sequence is currently suspended.
4Sequencer ^ 504
103 Sequence done (from version 03.00) Status signal of the "sequencer" function:
TRUE if the sequence is completed (final segment has been passed
through).
4Sequencer ^ 504
104 Local control active TRUE if local keypad control ("LOC") active. Otherwise FALSE.
105 Remote control active TRUE if remote control ("REM") via terminals, network, etc. active. Oth-
erwise FALSE.
106 Manual setpoint selection active TRUE if manual setpoint selection ("MAN") via keypad active. Otherwise
FALSE.
• Selection of the trigger for the "Activate keypad setpoint" function in
0x2631:016 (P400.16).
107 Automatic setpoint selection active TRUE if automatic setpoint selection ("AUTO") via terminals, network,
etc. active. Otherwise FALSE.
201 Internal value (from version 05.00) Internal values of the manufacturer.
202 Internal value (from version 05.00)
203 Internal value (from version 05.00)
204 Internal value (from version 05.00)
205 Internal value (from version 05.00)
206 Internal value (from version 05.00)

236
Configuring the network
General network settings

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

Function 2: Start enable/stop motor

237
Configuring the network
General network settings

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x2631:010 Function list: Jog foward (CW) Assignment of a trigger for the "Jog foward (CW)" function.
(P400.10) (Function list: Jog foward) Trigger = TRUE: Let motor rotate forward with preset 5.
• Setting can only be changed if the inverter is inhibi- Trigger = FALSE: Stop motor.
ted.
CAUTION!
• For further possible settings, see parameter
0x2631:001 (P400.01). ^ 532 The jog operation has a higher priority than the "Run" function, all other
0 Not connected start commands and the keypad key .
• If jog operation is active, the motor cannot be stopped with the previ-
ously mentioned functions!
• However, jog operation can be interrupted by the "Quick stop" func-
tion.
Notes:
• The preset value 5 can be set in 0x2911:005 (P450.05).
• The stop method can be selected in 0x2838:003 (P203.03).
• If "Jog foward (CW)" and "Jog reverse (CCW)" are activated at the
same time, the motor is stopped using the stop method and jog oper-
ation must be triggered again.
• Jog operation cannot be started automatically. The "Start at power-
up" option in 0x2838:002 (P203.02) does not apply to jog operation.
0x2631:011 Function list: Jog reverse (CCW) Assignment of a trigger for the "Jog reverse (CCW)" function.
(P400.11) (Function list: Jog reverse) Trigger = TRUE: Let motor rotate backward with preset 6.
• Setting can only be changed if the inverter is inhibi- Trigger = FALSE: Stop motor.
ted.
CAUTION!
• For further possible settings, see parameter
0x2631:001 (P400.01). ^ 532 The jog operation has a higher priority than the "Run" function, all other
0 Not connected start commands and the keypad key .
• If jog operation is active, the motor cannot be stopped with the previ-
ously mentioned functions!
• However, jog operation can be interrupted by the "Quick stop" func-
tion.
Notes:
• The preset value 6 can be set in 0x2911:006 (P450.06).
• The stop method can be selected in 0x2838:003 (P203.03).
• If "Jog foward (CW)" and "Jog reverse (CCW)" are activated at the
same time, the motor is stopped using the stop method and jog oper-
ation must be triggered again.
• Jog operation cannot be started automatically. The "Start at power-
up" option in 0x2838:002 (P203.02) does not apply to jog operation.
0x2631:012 Function list: Activate keypad control Assignment of a trigger for the "Activate keypad control" function.
(P400.12) (Function list: Keypad control) Trigger = TRUE: activate keypad as control source.
• For further possible settings, see parameter Trigger = FALSE: no action / deactivate keypad as control source again.
0x2631:001 (P400.01). ^ 532
0 Not connected
0x2631:017 Function list: Activate network setpoint Assignment of a trigger for the "Activate network setpoint" function.
(P400.17) (Function list: Setp: Network) Trigger = TRUE: the network is used as setpoint source (if the trigger
• From version 02.01 assigned has the highest setpoint priority).
• For further possible settings, see parameter Trigger = FALSE: no action / deactivate function again.
0x2631:001 (P400.01). ^ 532
0 Not connected
116 Network setpoint active (from version 02.00) TRUE if a change-over to network setpoint is requested via bit 6 of the
AC drive control word0x400B:001 (P592.01). Otherwise FALSE.
Notes:
• Set this selection if the network setpoint is to be activated via bit 6 of
the AC drive control word.
• The AC drive control word can be used with any communication pro-
tocol.
4AC Drive Profile ^ 248

238
Configuring the network
General network settings

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x2631:037 Function list: Activate network control Assignment of a trigger for the "Activate network control" function.
(P400.37) (Function list: Network control) Trigger = TRUE: Activate network control.
• For further possible settings, see parameter Trigger = FALSE: No action / deactivate network control again.
0x2631:001 (P400.01). ^ 532
0 Not connected
114 Network control active (from version 02.00) TRUE if the network control is requested via bit 5 of the AC drive control
word 0x400B:001 (P592.01). Otherwise FALSE.
Notes:
• Set this selection if the network control is to be activated via bit 5 of
the AC drive control word.
• The AC drive control word can be used with any communication pro-
tocol.
4AC Drive Profile ^ 248
0x2631:043 Function list: Activate fault 1 Assignment of a trigger for the "Activate fault 1" function.
(P400.43) (Function list: Fault 1) Trigger = TRUE: Trigger user-defined error 1.
• For further possible settings, see parameter Trigger = FALSE: no action.
0x2631:001 (P400.01). ^ 532 Notes:
0 Not connected • After the error is triggered, the motor is brought to a standstill with
the quick stop ramp. The inverter is then disabled.
Associated error code:
• 25217 | 0x6281 - User-defined fault 1
0x2631:044 Function list: Activate fault 2 Assignment of a trigger for the "Activate fault 2" function.
(P400.44) (Function list: Fault 2) Trigger = TRUE: Trigger user-defined error 2.
• For further possible settings, see parameter Trigger = FALSE: no action.
0x2631:001 (P400.01). ^ 532 Notes:
0 Not connected • After the error is triggered, the motor is brought to a standstill with
the quick stop ramp. The inverter is then disabled.
Associated error code:
• 25218 | 0x6282 - User-defined fault 2
0x2634:010 Digital outputs function: NetWordOUT1 - bit 0 Assignment of a trigger to bit 0 of NetWordOUT1.
(P420.10) (Dig.out.function: NetWordOUT1.00) Trigger = FALSE: bit set to 0.
• For further possible settings, see parameter Trigger = TRUE: bit set to 1.
0x2634:001 (P420.01). ^ 603
51 Ready for operation
0x2634:011 Digital outputs function: NetWordOUT1 - bit 1 Assignment of a trigger to bit 1 of NetWordOUT1.
(P420.11) (Dig.out.function: NetWordOUT1.01) Trigger = FALSE: bit set to 0.
• For further possible settings, see parameter Trigger = TRUE: bit set to 1.
0x2634:001 (P420.01). ^ 603
0 Not connected
0x2634:012 Digital outputs function: NetWordOUT1 - bit 2 Assignment of a trigger to bit 2 of NetWordOUT1.
(P420.12) (Dig.out.function: NetWordOUT1.02) Trigger = FALSE: bit set to 0.
• For further possible settings, see parameter Trigger = TRUE: bit set to 1.
0x2634:001 (P420.01). ^ 603
52 Operation enabled
0x2634:013 Digital outputs function: NetWordOUT1 - bit 3 Assignment of a trigger to bit 3 of NetWordOUT1.
(P420.13) (Dig.out.function: NetWordOUT1.03) Trigger = FALSE: bit set to 0.
• For further possible settings, see parameter Trigger = TRUE: bit set to 1.
0x2634:001 (P420.01). ^ 603
56 Error active
0x2634:014 Digital outputs function: NetWordOUT1 - bit 4 Assignment of a trigger to bit 4 of NetWordOUT1.
(P420.14) (Dig.out.function: NetWordOUT1.04) Trigger = FALSE: bit set to 0.
• For further possible settings, see parameter Trigger = TRUE: bit set to 1.
0x2634:001 (P420.01). ^ 603
0 Not connected
0x2634:015 Digital outputs function: NetWordOUT1 - bit 5 Assignment of a trigger to bit 5 of NetWordOUT1.
(P420.15) (Dig.out.function: NetWordOUT1.05) Trigger = FALSE: bit set to 0.
• For further possible settings, see parameter Trigger = TRUE: bit set to 1.
0x2634:001 (P420.01). ^ 603
54 Quick stop active

239
Configuring the network
General network settings

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x2634:016 Digital outputs function: NetWordOUT1 - bit 6 Assignment of a trigger to bit 6 of NetWordOUT1.
(P420.16) (Dig.out.function: NetWordOUT1.06) Trigger = FALSE: bit set to 0.
• For further possible settings, see parameter Trigger = TRUE: bit set to 1.
0x2634:001 (P420.01). ^ 603
50 Running
0x2634:017 Digital outputs function: NetWordOUT1 - bit 7 Assignment of a trigger to bit 7 of NetWordOUT1.
(P420.17) (Dig.out.function: NetWordOUT1.07) Trigger = FALSE: bit set to 0.
• For further possible settings, see parameter Trigger = TRUE: bit set to 1.
0x2634:001 (P420.01). ^ 603
58 Device warning active
0x2634:018 Digital outputs function: NetWordOUT1 - bit 8 Assignment of a trigger to bit 8 of NetWordOUT1.
(P420.18) (Dig.out.function: NetWordOUT1.08) Trigger = FALSE: bit set to 0.
• For further possible settings, see parameter Trigger = TRUE: bit set to 1.
0x2634:001 (P420.01). ^ 603
0 Not connected
0x2634:019 Digital outputs function: NetWordOUT1 - bit 9 Assignment of a trigger to bit 9 of NetWordOUT1.
(P420.19) (Dig.out.function: NetWordOUT1.09) Trigger = FALSE: bit set to 0.
• For further possible settings, see parameter Trigger = TRUE: bit set to 1.
0x2634:001 (P420.01). ^ 603
0 Not connected
0x2634:020 Digital outputs function: NetWordOUT1 - bit 10 Assignment of a trigger to bit 10 of NetWordOUT1.
(P420.20) (Dig.out.function: NetWordOUT1.10) Trigger = FALSE: bit set to 0.
• For further possible settings, see parameter Trigger = TRUE: bit set to 1.
0x2634:001 (P420.01). ^ 603
72 Setpoint speed reached
0x2634:021 Digital outputs function: NetWordOUT1 - bit 11 Assignment of a trigger to bit 11 of NetWordOUT1.
(P420.21) (Dig.out.function: NetWordOUT1.11) Trigger = FALSE: bit set to 0.
• For further possible settings, see parameter Trigger = TRUE: bit set to 1.
0x2634:001 (P420.01). ^ 603
78 Current limit reached
0x2634:022 Digital outputs function: NetWordOUT1 - bit 12 Assignment of a trigger to bit 12 of NetWordOUT1.
(P420.22) (Dig.out.function: NetWordOUT1.12) Trigger = FALSE: bit set to 0.
• For further possible settings, see parameter Trigger = TRUE: bit set to 1.
0x2634:001 (P420.01). ^ 603
71 Actual speed = 0
0x2634:023 Digital outputs function: NetWordOUT1 - bit 13 Assignment of a trigger to bit 13 of NetWordOUT1.
(P420.23) (Dig.out.function: NetWordOUT1.13) Trigger = FALSE: bit set to 0.
• For further possible settings, see parameter Trigger = TRUE: bit set to 1.
0x2634:001 (P420.01). ^ 603
69 Rotational direction reversed
0x2634:024 Digital outputs function: NetWordOUT1 - bit 14 Assignment of a trigger to bit 14 of NetWordOUT1.
(P420.24) (Dig.out.function: NetWordOUT1.14) Trigger = FALSE: bit set to 0.
• For further possible settings, see parameter Trigger = TRUE: bit set to 1.
0x2634:001 (P420.01). ^ 603
115 Release holding brake
0x2634:025 Digital outputs function: NetWordOUT1 - bit 15 Assignment of a trigger to bit 15 of NetWordOUT1.
(P420.25) (Dig.out.function: NetWordOUT1.15) Trigger = FALSE: bit set to 0.
• For further possible settings, see parameter Trigger = TRUE: bit set to 1.
0x2634:001 (P420.01). ^ 603
55 Safe torque off (STO) active
0x2860:001 Frequency control: Default setpoint source Selection of the standard setpoint source for operating mode "MS:
(P201.01) (Stnd. setpoints: Freq. setp. src.) Velocity mode".
• The selected standard setpoint source is always active in the operat-
ing mode 0x6060 (P301.00) = "MS: Velocity mode [-2]" when no set-
point change-over to another setpoint source via corresponding trig-
gers/functions is active.
4Setpoint change-over ^ 546
1 Keypad The setpoint is specified locally by the keypad.
• Default setting: 0x2601:001 (P202.01)
• Use the and navigation keys to change the keypad setpoint
(also during running operation).

240
Configuring the network
General network settings

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

2 Analog input 1 The setpoint is defined as analog signal via the analog input 1.
4Analog input 1 ^ 597
3 Analog input 2 The setpoint is defined as analog signal via the analog input 2.
4Analog input 2 ^ 601
4 HTL input (from version 04.00) The digital inputs DI3 and DI4 can be configured as HTL input to use an
HTL encoder as setpoint encoder or define the setpoint as a reference
frequency ("pulse train").
4HTL input setpoint source ^ 565
5 Network The setpoint is defined as process data object via the network.
4Configuring the network ^ 226
11 Frequency preset 1 For the setpoint selection, preset values can be parameterised and selec-
12 Frequency preset 2 ted.
4Setpoint source of preset setpoints ^ 554
13 Frequency preset 3
14 Frequency preset 4
15 Frequency preset 5
16 Frequency preset 6
17 Frequency preset 7
18 Frequency preset 8
19 Frequency preset 9
20 Frequency preset 10
21 Frequency preset 11
22 Frequency preset 12
23 Frequency preset 13
24 Frequency preset 14
25 Frequency preset 15
31 Segment preset 1 (from version 03.00) For the setpoint selection, the segment presets parameterised for the
32 Segment preset 2 (from version 03.00) "sequencer" function can be selected as well.
4Sequencer ^ 504
33 Segment preset 3 (from version 03.00)
34 Segment preset 4 (from version 03.00)
35 Segment preset 5 (from version 03.00)
36 Segment preset 6 (from version 03.00)
37 Segment preset 7 (from version 03.00)
38 Segment preset 8 (from version 03.00)
50 Motor potentiometer The setpoint is generated by the "motor potentiometer" function. This
function can be used as an alternative setpoint control which is control-
led via two signals: "MOP setpoint up" and "MOP setpoint down".
4Motor potentiometer setpoint source (MOP) ^ 559
201 Internal value (from version 05.00) Internal values of the manufacturer.
202 Internal value (from version 05.00)
203 Internal value (from version 05.00)
204 Internal value (from version 05.00)
205 Internal value (from version 05.00)
206 Internal value (from version 05.00)

241
Configuring the network
General network settings

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

242
Configuring the network
General network settings

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x4008:001 Process input words: NetWordIN1 Mappable data word for flexible control of the inverter via network.
(P590.01) (NetWordINx: NetWordIN1)
0x0000 ... [0x0000] ... 0xFFFF
Bit 0 Mapping bit 0 Assignment of the function: 0x400E:001 (P505.01)
Bit 1 Mapping bit 1 Assignment of the function: 0x400E:002 (P505.02)
Bit 2 Mapping bit 2 Assignment of the function: 0x400E:003 (P505.03)
Bit 3 Mapping bit 3 Assignment of the function: 0x400E:004 (P505.04)
Bit 4 Mapping bit 4 Assignment of the function: 0x400E:005 (P505.05)
Bit 5 Mapping bit 5 Assignment of the function: 0x400E:006 (P505.06)
Bit 6 Mapping bit 6 Assignment of the function: 0x400E:007 (P505.07)
Bit 7 Mapping bit 7 Assignment of the function: 0x400E:008 (P505.08)
Bit 8 Mapping bit 8 Assignment of the function: 0x400E:009 (P505.09)
Bit 9 Mapping bit 9 Assignment of the function: 0x400E:010 (P505.10)
Bit 10 Mapping bit 10 Assignment of the function: 0x400E:011 (P505.11)
Bit 11 Mapping bit 11 Assignment of the function: 0x400E:012 (P505.12)
Bit 12 Mapping bit 12 Assignment of the function: 0x400E:013 (P505.13)
Alternatively, this mapping bit can be used for controlling the digital out-
puts.
Assignment of the digital outputs:
• Relay: 0x2634:001 (P420.01) / selection [30]
• Digital output 1: 0x2634:002 (P420.02) / selection [30]
• Digital output 2: 0x2634:003 (P420.03) / selection [30]
Note!
Do not assign the mapping bit to a function and a digital output at the
same time. A double assignment can cause an unpredictable drive
behaviour!
Bit 13 Mapping bit 13 Assignment of the function: 0x400E:014 (P505.14)
Alternatively, this mapping bit can be used for controlling the digital out-
puts.
Assignment of the digital outputs:
• Relay: 0x2634:001 (P420.01) / selection [31]
• Digital output 1: 0x2634:002 (P420.02) / selection [31]
• Digital output 2: 0x2634:003 (P420.03) / selection [31]
Note!
Do not assign the mapping bit to a function and a digital output at the
same time. A double assignment can cause an unpredictable drive
behaviour!
Bit 14 Mapping bit 14 Assignment of the function: 0x400E:015 (P505.15)
Alternatively, this mapping bit can be used for controlling the digital out-
puts.
Assignment of the digital outputs:
• Relay: 0x2634:001 (P420.01) / selection [32]
• Digital output 1: 0x2634:002 (P420.02) / selection [32]
• Digital output 2: 0x2634:003 (P420.03) / selection [32]
Note!
Do not assign the mapping bit to a function and a digital output at the
same time. A double assignment can cause an unpredictable drive
behaviour!
Bit 15 Mapping bit 15 Assignment of the function: 0x400E:016 (P505.16)
Alternatively, this mapping bit can be used for controlling the digital out-
puts.
Assignment of the digital outputs:
• Relay: 0x2634:001 (P420.01) / selection [33]
• Digital output 1: 0x2634:002 (P420.02) / selection [33]
• Digital output 2: 0x2634:003 (P420.03) / selection [33]
Note!
Do not assign the mapping bit to a function and a digital output at the
same time. A double assignment can cause an unpredictable drive
behaviour!

243
Configuring the network
General network settings

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x400A:001 Process output words: NetWordOUT1 Mappable data word for the output of status messages of the inverter
(P591.01) (NetWordOUTx: NetWordOUT1) via network.
• Read only
Bit 0 Mapping bit 0 Mappable data word for the output of status messages of the inverter
via network.
Assignment of the status message: 0x2634:010 (P420.10)
Bit 1 Mapping bit 1 Mappable data word for the output of status messages of the inverter
via network.
Assignment of the status message: 0x2634:011 (P420.11)
Bit 2 Mapping bit 2 Mappable data word for the output of status messages of the inverter
via network.
Assignment of the status message: 0x2634:012 (P420.12)
Bit 3 Mapping bit 3 Mappable data word for the output of status messages of the inverter
via network.
Assignment of the status message: 0x2634:013 (P420.13)
Bit 4 Mapping bit 4 Mappable data word for the output of status messages of the inverter
via network.
Assignment of the status message: 0x2634:014 (P420.14)
Bit 5 Mapping bit 5 Mappable data word for the output of status messages of the inverter
via network.
Assignment of the status message: 0x2634:015 (P420.15)
Bit 6 Mapping bit 6 Mappable data word for the output of status messages of the inverter
via network.
Assignment of the status message: 0x2634:016 (P420.16)
Bit 7 Mapping bit 7 Mappable data word for the output of status messages of the inverter
via network.
Assignment of the status message: 0x2634:017 (P420.17)
Bit 8 Mapping bit 8 Mappable data word for the output of status messages of the inverter
via network.
Assignment of the status message: 0x2634:018 (P420.18)
Bit 9 Mapping bit 9 Mappable data word for the output of status messages of the inverter
via network.
Assignment of the status message: 0x2634:019 (P420.19)
Bit 10 Mapping bit 10 Mappable data word for the output of status messages of the inverter
via network.
Assignment of the status message: 0x2634:020 (P420.20)
Bit 11 Mapping bit 11 Mappable data word for the output of status messages of the inverter
via network.
Assignment of the status message: 0x2634:021 (P420.21)
Bit 12 Mapping bit 12 Mappable data word for the output of status messages of the inverter
via network.
Assignment of the status message: 0x2634:022 (P420.22)
Bit 13 Mapping bit 13 Mappable data word for the output of status messages of the inverter
via network.
Assignment of the status message: 0x2634:023 (P420.23)
Bit 14 Mapping bit 14 Mappable data word for the output of status messages of the inverter
via network.
Assignment of the status message: 0x2634:024 (P420.24)
Bit 15 Mapping bit 15 Mappable data word for the output of status messages of the inverter
via network.
Assignment of the status message: 0x2634:025 (P420.25)

244
Configuring the network
General network settings

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

245
Configuring the network
Predefined process data words

9.2 Predefined process data words

Process data are exchanged via cyclic data exchange between the network master and the
inverter.
Details
For the cyclic data exchange, the inverter is provided with 24 network registers.
• 12 network registers are provided as input registers for data words from the network mas-
ter to the inverter.
• 12 network registers are provided as output registers for data words from the inverter to
the network master.
• Each network register is provided with a corresponding code that defines which parame-
ters (or other data codes) are mapped to the network register.
• The input and output registers are divided into three blocks (A, B, C) in each case, featuring
4 successive data words, respectively:
Network register
Input register Output register
Network IN A0 Network OUT A0
Network IN A1 Network OUT A1
Network IN A2 Network OUT A2
Network IN A3 Network OUT A3
Network IN B0 Network OUT B0
Network IN B1 Network OUT B1
Network IN B2 Network OUT B2
Network IN B3 Network OUT B3
Network IN C0 Network OUT C0
Network IN C1 Network OUT C1
Network IN C2 Network OUT C2
Network IN C3 Network OUT C3
The terms "input" and "output" refer to the point of view of the inverter:
• Input data are transmitted by the network master and received by the inverter.
• Output data are transmitted by the inverter and received by the network master.

The exact assignment of the network registers and the number of data words
that can be transmitted cyclically varies according to the network/communica-
tion protocol. You can find some detailed information in the documentation for
the respective communication protocol.

Data mapping
For establishing a simple network connection, the inverter provides predefined control and
status words for device profile CiA 402, AC drive profile as well as in LECOM format. By means
of data mapping to a network register, each of these words can be transferred as process date
via network. Additionally, further mappable data words are provided to individually control
the inverter. The mappable data words are described in detail in the following subchapters.

Data mapping cannot be applied to all parameters. The mappable parameters

are marked correspondingly in the parameter attribute list.

246
Configuring the network
Predefined process data words
Device profile CiA 402

9.2.1 Device profile CiA 402

For control via device profile CiA 402, the parameters listed in the following can be mapped to
network register.
Details
• The mapping entry for the CiA 402 control word is 0x60400010.
• The mapping entry for the CiA 402 status word is 0x60410010.
• General information about the process of data mapping can be found in the chapter of the
same name for the corresponding network.
• For further CiA 402 parameters, see chapter "Device profile CiA 402". ^ 469

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x6040 CiA: Controlword Mappable CiA 402 control word with bit assignment according to device
0 ... [0] ... 65535 profile CiA 402.
Bit 0 Switch on 1 = switch-on
Bit 1 Enable voltage 1 = DC bus: Establish readiness for operation
Bit 2 Quick stop 0 = activate quick stop
Bit 3 Enable operation 1 = enable operation
Bit 4 Operation mode specific Bits are not supported.
Bit 5 Operation mode specific
Bit 6 Operation mode specific
Bit 7 Fault reset 0-1 edge = reset error
Bit 8 Halt (from version 04.00) 1 = stop motor (ramping down to frequency setpoint 0 Hz)
Bit 9 Operation mode specific Operating mode dependent
Bit 14 Release holding brake 1 = releasing holding brake manually
CAUTION!
• The manually triggered "Release holding brake" command has a direct
impact on the "Release holding brake [115]" trigger. Thus, the holding
brake can be manually released if the power section is switched off.
• The responsibility for a manual release of the holding brake has the
external trigger source for the "Release holding brake" command.
4Holding brake control ^ 472
0x6041 CiA: Statusword Mappable CiA 402 status word with bit assignment according to device
(P780.00) (CiA: Statusword) profile CiA 402.
• Read only
Bit 0 Ready to switch on 1 ≡ drive ready to start
Bit 1 Switched on 1 ≡ drive switched-on
Bit 2 Operation enabled 1 ≡ operation enabled
Bit 3 Fault 1 ≡ fault or trouble active
Bit 4 Voltage enabled 1 ≡ DC bus ready for operation
Bit 5 Quick stop 0 ≡ quick stop active
Bit 6 Switch on disabled 1 ≡ operation inhibited
Bit 7 Warning 1 ≡ warning active
Bit 8 RPDOs deactivated 1 ≡ cyclic PDOs have been deactivated.
Bit 9 Remote 1 ≡ inverter can receive commands via network.
• Bit is not set in the operating mode 0x6060 (P301.00) = "MS: Velocity
mode [-2]".
Bit 10 Target reached 1 ≡ the actual position is in the window.
Bit 11 Internal limit active 1 ≡ internal limitation of a setpoint active.
Bit 14 Holding brake released 1 ≡ holding brake released
Bit 15 Safe torque off (STO) not active 0 ≡ STO active
1 ≡ STO not active

247
Configuring the network
Predefined process data words
AC Drive Profile

9.2.2 AC Drive Profile

For control via AC drive profile, the parameters listed in the following can be mapped to net-
work registers.
Details
• The mapping entry for the AC Drive control word is 0x400B0110.
• The mapping entry for the AC Drive status word is 0x400C0110.
• Detailed information on the data mapping can be found in the chapter of the correspond-
ing network.
AC drive control word
The AC Drive control word 0x400B:001 (P592.01) will only be processed if the network control
in 0x2631:037 (P400.37) has been activated and the network is also active as control source.
4Control source change-over ^ 526
• Moreover, some bits in the AC drive control word are ignored if the bit 5 ("Activate net-
work control") is not set. For details see the parameter description for 0x400B:001
(P592.01).
• The following logic applies to bit 0 "Run forward (CW)" and bit 1 "Run reverse (CCW)":
Bit 0 Bit 1 Action
"Run forward (CW)" "Run reverse (CCW)"
0 0 Stopping with stop method set in 0x2838:003 (P203.03).
0↗1 (edge) 0 Run forward (CW)
0 0↗1 (edge) Run reverse (CCW)
0↗1 (edge) 0↗1 (edge) No action / last action is continued to be executed.
1 1
1 0
0 1
1↘0 (edge) 1 Run reverse (CCW)
1 1↘0 (edge) Run forward (CW)

For further details on the single bits, see the following parameter descriptions:
Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info
0x400B:001 Process input data: AC Drive control word Mappable control word with bit assignment in compliance with Ether-
(P592.01) (Process data IN: AC control word) Net/IP™ AC drive profile.
0x0000 ... [0x0000] ... 0xFFFF
Bit 0 Run forward (CW) Bits are only evaluated if bit 5 = "1".
Bit 1 Run reverse (CCW) For the exact logic, see the above truth table.
Bit 2 Reset error (0-1 edge)
Bit 5 Activate network control If bit 5 = "1" and 0x2631:037 (P400.37) = "Network control active [114]":
All bits of the AC drive control word are evaluated.
If bit 5 = "0" or 0x2631:037 (P400.37) = "Not connected [0]":
• Bit 0, 1, 12, 13, 14, 15 of the AC drive control word are not evaluated
(ignored).
• Active control source is the "Flexible I/O configuration". 4Control
source change-over ^ 526
Bit 6 Activate network setpoint 0 = the standard setpoint source selected in 0x2860:001 (P201.01) is
used.
1 = network setpoint is used.
Bit 12 Disable inverter Bits are only evaluated if bit 5 = "1".
Bit 13 Activate quick stop
Bit 14 Deactivate PID controlling
Bit 15 Activate DC braking

248
Configuring the network
Predefined process data words
AC Drive Profile

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x400C:001 Process output data: AC Drive status word Mappable status word with bit assignment in compliance with
(P593.01) (Process data OUT: AC status word) EtherNet/IP™ AC drive profile.
• Read only
Bit 0 Fault/Trip active
Bit 1 Warning active
Bit 2 Running forward
Bit 3 Running reverse
Bit 4 Ready
Bit 5 Network control active
Bit 6 Network setpoint active
Bit 7 At Reference
Bit 8 Profile-State bit 0 The drive status is coded as follows:
Bit 9 Profile-State bit 1 0: Manufacturer-specific (reserved)
1: Startup (Drive initialisation)
Bit 10 Profile-State bit 2
2: Not_Ready (Mains voltage switched off)
Bit 11 Profile-State bit 3 3: Ready (Mains voltage switched on)
4: Enabled (Drive has received run command)
5: Stopping (Drive has received stop command and is stopped)
6: Fault_Stop (Drive is stopped due to a fault)
7: Faulted (Faults have occurred)
Bit 12 Process controller active
Bit 13 Torque mode active
Bit 14 Current limit reached
Bit 15 DC braking active
0x6402 Motor type AC motor type
• From version 02.00 • Motor Data Object (0x28) - instance attribute 3
3 PM synchronous
7 Squirrel cage induction

9.2.3 Lenze LECOM profile

For connection to Lenze inverters with a LECOM control word (C135) and LECOM status word
(C150), the parameters listed in the following can be mapped to network registers.
Details
• The mapping entry for the LECOM control word is 0x400B0210.
• The mapping entry for the LECOM status word is 0x400C0210.
• General information about the process of data mapping can be found in the chapter of the
same name for the corresponding network.

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x400B:002 Process input data: LECOM control word Mappable control word with bit assignment in compliance with code
(P592.02) (Process data IN: LECOM ctrl word) C135 of the 8200 Lenze inverter.
0x0000 ... [0x0000] ... 0xFFFF
Bit 0 Activate preset (bit 0)
Bit 1 Activate preset (bit 1)
Bit 2 Reverse rotational direction
Bit 3 Activate quick stop
Bit 9 Disable inverter
Bit 10 Activate user fault
Bit 11 Reset error (0-1 edge)
Bit 14 Activate DC braking

249
Configuring the network
Predefined process data words
Lenze LECOM profile

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x400C:002 Process output data: LECOM status word Mappable status word with bit assignment in compliance with code
(P593.02) (Process data OUT: LECOM stat. word) C150 of the 8200 Lenze inverter.
• Read only
Bit 0 Active parameter set (0 = set 1 or 3; 1 = set 2
or 4)
Bit 1 Power section inhibited
Bit 2 Current or Torque limit reached
Bit 3 Frequency setpoint reached
Bit 4 Ramp generator (input = output)
Bit 5 Frequency < frequency threshold
Bit 6 Actual frequency = 0
Bit 7 Inverter disabled
Bit 8 Coded status bit 0
Bit 9 Coded status bit 1
Bit 10 Coded status bit 2
Bit 11 Coded status bit 3
Bit 12 Overtemperature warning
Bit 13 DC-bus overvoltage
Bit 14 Rotational direction reversed
Bit 15 Ready for Operation

250
Configuring the network
Predefined process data words
Further process data

9.2.4 Further process data

The parameters listed in the following can also be mapped to network registers, in order to
transmit control and status information as well as setpoints and actual values as process data.
Details
• The following parameters are always available irrespective of the network option.
• The use of these parameters for the transmission of process data is optional. It is also pos-
sible to only use a part of the parameters. For the transmission of the frequency setpoint
and actual value, for instance, several parameters with a different resolution can be selec-
ted.
• Via the parameters, at the same time the general network activity can be diagnosed.
NetWordIN1 ... NetWordIN5
These mappable data words are provided to individually control the inverter:
Data word Parameter Intended use
NetWordIN1 0x4008:001 (P590.01) For implementing an individual control word format.
4General network settings ^ 227
NetWordIN2 0x4008:002 (P590.02) For controlling the digital outputs via network.
4Configuration of digital outputs ^ 603
NetWordIN3 0x4008:003 (P590.03) For controlling the analog outputs via network.
NetWordIN4 0x4008:004 (P590.04) 4Configuration of analog outputs ^ 617
NetWordIN5 0x4008:005 (P550.05) For defining an additive voltage impression via network.
4Additive voltage impression ^ 502

NetWordOUT1 and NetWordOUT2

These mappable data words are provided to output status messages to the network master:
Data word Parameter Intended use
NetWordOUT1 0x400A:001 (P591.01) For implementing an individual status word format.
4NetWordOUT1 status word ^ 609
NetWordOUT2 0x400A:002 (P591.02) For the output of messages of the "sequencer" function.
4Segment configuration ^ 506

The following describes all further process data.

251
Configuring the network
Predefined process data words
Further process data

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

252
Configuring the network
Predefined process data words
Further process data

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x4008:002 Process input words: NetWordIN2 Mappable data word for optional control of the digital outputs via net-
(P590.02) (NetWordINx: NetWordIN2) work.
0x0000 ... [0x0000] ... 0xFFFF Assignment of the digital outputs:
Bit 0 Mapping bit 0 • Relay: 0x2634:001 (P420.01) / selection [34] ... [49]
Bit 1 Mapping bit 1 • Digital output 1: 0x2634:002 (P420.02) / selection [34] ... [49]
Bit 2 Mapping bit 2 • Digital output 2: 0x2634:003 (P420.03) / selection [34] ... [49]
Bit 3 Mapping bit 3
Bit 4 Mapping bit 4
Bit 5 Mapping bit 5
Bit 6 Mapping bit 6
Bit 7 Mapping bit 7
Bit 8 Mapping bit 8
Bit 9 Mapping bit 9
Bit 10 Mapping bit 10
Bit 11 Mapping bit 11
Bit 12 Mapping bit 12
Bit 13 Mapping bit 13
Bit 14 Mapping bit 14
Bit 15 Mapping bit 15
0x4008:003 Process input words: NetWordIN3 Mappable data word for optional control of an analog output via net-
(P590.03) (NetWordINx: NetWordIN3) work.
0.0 ... [0.0] ... 100.0 % Assignment of the analog outputs:
• Analog output 1: 0x2639:002 (P440.02) = "NetWordIN3 [20]"
• Analog output 2: 0x263A:002 (P441.02) = "NetWordIN3 [20]"
0x4008:004 Process input words: NetWordIN4 Mappable data word for optional control of an analog output via net-
(P590.04) (NetWordINx: NetWordIN4) work.
0.0 ... [0.0] ... 100.0 % Assignment of the analog outputs:
• Analog output 1: 0x2639:002 (P440.02) = "NetWordIN4 [21]"
• Analog output 2: 0x263A:002 (P441.02) = "NetWordIN4 [21]"
0x4008:005 Process input words: NetWordIN5 Mappable data word for optionally specifying an additive voltage set-
(P550.05) (NetWordINx: NetWordIN5) point via network.
-100.0 ... [0.0] ... 100.0 % • 100 % ≡ Rated voltage 0x2C01:007 (P320.07)
• This value is used if "Network [3]" is selected in 0x2B13:002.

253
Configuring the network
Predefined process data words
Further process data

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

254
Configuring the network
Predefined process data words
Further process data

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x400A:002 Process output words: NetWordOUT2 Mappable data word for the output of messages of the "Sequencer"
(P591.02) (NetWordOUTx: NetWordOUT2) function via network.
• Read only Configuration of the messages:
Bit 0 Mapping bit 0 • 0x4026:008: NetWordOUT2 value for sequencer segment 1
Bit 1 Mapping bit 1 • 0x4027:008: NetWordOUT2 value for sequencer segment 2
Bit 2 Mapping bit 2 • 0x4028:008: NetWordOUT2 value for sequencer segment 3
• 0x4029:008: NetWordOUT2 value for sequencer segment 4
Bit 3 Mapping bit 3
• 0x402A:008: NetWordOUT2 value for sequencer segment 5
Bit 4 Mapping bit 4 • 0x402B:008: NetWordOUT2 value for sequencer segment 6
Bit 5 Mapping bit 5 • 0x402C:008: NetWordOUT2 value for sequencer segment 7
Bit 6 Mapping bit 6 • 0x402D:008: NetWordOUT2 value for sequencer segment 8
• 0x402E:008: NetWordOUT2 value for final segment
Bit 7 Mapping bit 7
Bit 8 Mapping bit 8
Bit 9 Mapping bit 9
Bit 10 Mapping bit 10
Bit 11 Mapping bit 11
Bit 12 Mapping bit 12
Bit 13 Mapping bit 13
Bit 14 Mapping bit 14
Bit 15 Mapping bit 15
0x400B:003 Process input data: Network setpoint frequency (0.1) Mappable parameter for specifying the frequency setpoint in [0.1 Hz] via
(P592.03) (Process data IN: Net.freq. 0.1) network.
0.0 ... [0.0] ... 599.0 Hz • The specification is made without sign (irrespective of the rotating
direction).
• The rotating direction is specified via the control word.
• Example: 456 ≡ 45.6 Hz
0x400B:004 Process input data: Network setpoint speed Mappable parameter for specifying the setpoint as speed in [rpm] via
(P592.04) (Process data IN: Net.setp. speed) network.
0 ... [0] ... 50000 rpm • The specification is made without sign (irrespective of the rotating
direction).
• The rotating direction is specified via the control word.
• Example: 456 ≡ 456 rpm
0x400B:005 Process input data: Network setpoint frequency (0.01) Mappable parameter for specifying the frequency setpoint in [0.01 Hz]
(P592.05) (Process data IN: Net.freq. 0.01) via network.
0.00 ... [0.00] ... 599.00 Hz • The specification is made without sign (irrespective of the rotating
direction).
• The rotating direction is specified via the control word.
• Example: 456 ≡ 4.56 Hz
0x400B:009 Process input data: Torque scaling Scaling factor for torque setpoint 0x400B:008 (P592.08) and actual tor-
(P592.09) (Process data IN: Torque scaling) que value 0x400C:007 (P593.07) via network.
-128 ... [0] ... 127 • With the setting 0, no scaling takes place.
• From version 02.00
0x400B:012 Process input data: Network setpoint frequency Mappable parameter for specifying the frequency setpoint in [0.02 Hz]
(P592.12) [0.02Hz] via network.
(Process data IN: NetSetfreq0.02Hz) • The specification is made without sign (irrespective of the rotating
-29950 ... [0] ... 29950 Hz direction).
• From version 04.00 • The rotating direction is specified via the control word.
• Examples: 50 ≡ 1 Hz, 100 ≡ 2 Hz
0x400B:013 Process input data: Network frequency setpoint Mappable parameter for specifying the frequency setpoint via network.
(P592.13) [+/-16384] • ±16384 ≡ ±100 % Maximum frequency 0x2916 (P211.00)
(Process data IN: N.FrqSet+/-16384)
-32768 ... [0] ... 32767
• From version 05.00
0x400C:003 Process output data: Frequency (0.1) Mappable parameter for the output of the actual frequency value in
(P593.03) (Process data OUT: Frequency (0.1)) [0.1 Hz] via network.
• Read only: x.x Hz • The output is effected without sign (irrespective of the rotating direc-
tion).
• The rotating direction is specified via the status word.
• Example: 456 ≡ 45.6 Hz

255
Configuring the network
Predefined process data words
Further process data

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x400C:004 Process output data: Motor speed Mappable parameter for the output of the actual value as speed in [rpm]
(P593.04) (Process data OUT: Motor speed) via network.
• Read only: x rpm • The output is effected without sign (irrespective of the rotating direc-
tion).
• The rotating direction is specified via the status word.
• Example: 456 ≡ 456 rpm
0x400C:005 Process output data: Drive status Mappable status word (Modbus Legacy Register 2003).
(P593.05) (Process data OUT: Drive status)
• Read only
0 Error (non-resettable) active
1 Error active
2 Waiting for start
3 Identification not executed
4 Inverter disabled
5 Stop active
7 Identification active
8 Running
9 Acceleration active
10 Deceleration active
11 Deceleration override active
12 DC braking active
13 Flying start active
14 Current limit reached
16 Process controller idle state
0x400C:006 Process output data: Frequency (0.01) Mappable parameter for the output of the actual frequency value in
(P593.06) (Process data OUT: Frequency 0.01) [0.01 Hz] via network.
• Read only: x.xx Hz • The output is effected without sign (irrespective of the rotating direc-
tion).
• The rotating direction is specified via the status word.
• Example: 456 ≡ 4.56 Hz
0x400C:007 Process output data: Torque scaled Mappable parameter for the output of the actual torque value in [Nm /
(P593.07) (Process data OUT: Torque scaled) 2scaling factor] via network.
• Read only • The scaling factor can be set in 0x400B:009 (P592.09).
• From version 02.00 • Actual torque value = scaled actual torque value (0x400C:007) / 2scaling
factor

Example:
• Scaled actual torque value (0x400C:007) = 345 [Nm]
• Scaling factor (0x400B:009) = 3
• Actual torque value = 345 [Nm] / 23 = 43.125 [Nm]
0x400C:008 Process output data: Frequency [0.02 Hz] Mappable parameter for the output of the actual frequency value in
(P593.08) (Process data OUT: Frequency 0.02Hz) [0.02 Hz] via network.
• Read only: Hz • The output is effected without sign (irrespective of the rotating direc-
• From version 04.00 tion).
• The rotating direction is specified via the status word.
• Examples: 50 ≡ 1 Hz, 100 ≡ 2 Hz
0x400C:009 Process output data: Frequency [+/-16384] Mappable parameter for the output of the actual frequency value via
(P593.09) (Process data OUT: Freq. [+/-16384]) network.
• Read only • ±16384 ≡ ±100 % Maximum frequency 0x2916 (P211.00)
• From version 05.00

256
Configuring the network
Predefined process data words
Parameter access monitoring (PAM)

9.2.5 Parameter access monitoring (PAM)

The parameter access monitoring can be used as basic protection against a control loss of the
inverter. Monitoring is triggered if a parameter write access to a certain index does not take
place at regular intervals via the established communication connection.
Preconditions
This monitoring only works when the network control is activated.
Except for the keypad, the monitoring can be used for all communication connections, for
instance:
• PC/Engineering Tool <--> inverter with USB module
• PC/Engineering Tool <--> inverter with WLAN module
• Controller <--> network <--> inverter with network option
Details
For monitoring purposes, a non-zero value must be written into the "Keep-alive register"
0x2552:002 (P595.02) at regular intervals. The first write access with a non-zero value acti-
vates monitoring. The intervals between the write accesses must not be higher than the time-
out time set in 0x2552:003 (P595.03). If no parameter write access takes place within the
time-out time, monitoring is triggered: The response selected in 0x2552:005 (P595.05) takes
place and the action selected in 0x2552:005 (P595.05). In addition, the status bit 1 in
0x2552:006 (P595.06) is set to "1".
The error status can be left by a normal "error reset". Since monitoring continues to be active
and the time-out time is not reset by the error reset, the inverter immediately changes again
to the error status. In order to prevent his, you have the following options:
a) Restore communication exchange.
b) Set the monitoring response in 0x2552:004 (P595.04) to "No response [0]" or "Warning
[1]".
c) Change over to local or flexible control.

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x2552:002 Parameter access monitoring: Keep alive register Register for cyclic parameter write accesses for monitoring the commu-
(P595.02) (PAM monitoring: Keep alive reg.) nication link.
0 ... [0] ... 65535 • If the setting is non-zero, the monitoring is active.
• From version 04.00 • In order that the monitoring is not tripped, a non-zero value has to be
entered into this index at regular intervals. The temporal distances of
the write accesses must not be higher than the time-out time set in
0x2552:003 (P595.03).
0x2552:003 Parameter access monitoring: Time-out time Maximum permitted time between two write accesses to the "keep-
(P595.03) (PAM monitoring: Time-out time) alive-register".
0.0 ... [10.0] ... 6553.5 s In case of a time-out
• From version 04.00 • the error response selected in 0x2552:004 (P595.04) is effected,
• the action selected in 0x2552:005 (P595.05) is effected,
• the status bit 1 in 0x2552:006 (P595.06) is set to "1".
0x2552:004 Parameter access monitoring: Reaction Selection of the response to the triggering of the parameter access mon-
(P595.04) (PAM monitoring: Reaction) itoring.
• From version 04.00 Associated error code:
• For further possible settings, see parameter • 33045 | 0x8115 - Time-out (PZÜ)
0x2D45:001 (P310.01). ^ 223
0 No response
0x2552:005 Parameter access monitoring: Action Selection of the action to be executed if the parameter access monitor-
(P595.05) (PAM monitoring: Action) ing is triggered.
• From version 04.00
0 No action
1 Reserved

257
Configuring the network
Acyclic data exchange

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x2552:006 Parameter access monitoring: Parameter Access Mon- Bit coded display of the status of parameter access monitoring.
(P595.06) itoring-Status
(PAM monitoring: PAM status)
• Read only
• From version 04.00
Bit 0 Monitoring activated 1 ≡ parameter access monitoring is active.
Bit 1 Timeout 1 ≡ within the time-out time set in 0x2552:003 (P595.03), no successful
parameter write access to the "keep-alive register" 0x2552:002
(P595.02) was made.
0x2552:007 Parameter access monitoring: WLAN reset time-out Time after which the WLAN network with the current settings of the
(P595.07) time WLAN parameters is restarted if no "keep alive" messages are received.
(PAM monitoring: WLAN reset t.out) • 0 s = function deactivated (no WLAN restart).
0 ... [0] ... 65535 s • With a setting > 0 s and a time-out, the control units sets 0x2440 =
• From version 05.00 "Restart with current values [1]".

9.2.6 Process data handling in case of error

If the inverter receives invalid process data, the inverter uses the process data received last
(valid). You can optionally set that the contents of the process data in the inverter are set to
the value "0" after invalid process data has been received.

The setting in 0x24E5:001 is independent of the response selected in

0x2859:005 if invalid process data has been received!
If the application requires that the drive keeps moving with the last valid proc-
ess data when receiving invalid process data, set the response "No response" or
"Warning" in 0x2859:005. Moreover, the selection "Clear data [1]" must not be
set in 0x24E5:001. Deleting the process data would stop the motor.

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info

0x24E5:001 Process data handling in case of error: Procedure Selection which process data the inverter is to use after receiving invalid
process data.
0 Keep last data The last valid process data of the master are used.
1 Clear data The contents of the process data in the inverter is set to the value "0".

9.3 Acyclic data exchange

The acyclic data exchange is normally used for transmitting parameter data the transmission
of which is not time-critical. Such parameter data are for example operating parameters,
motor data, and diagnostic information.
Details
• The acyclic data exchange enables access to all parameters of the inverter.
• For all communication protocols except Modbus, the parameter is addressed directly via
the index and subindex.
• The parameter attribute list contains a list of all inverter parameters. This list in particular
includes some information that is relevant to the reading and writing of parameters via the
network.

258
Configuring the network
CANopen
Introduction

9.4 CANopen

CANopen® is an internationally approved communication protocol which is designed for com-

mercial and industrial automation applications. High data transfer rates in connection with
efficient data formatting provide for the coordination of motion control devices in multi-axis
applications.
• Detailed information on CANopen can be found on the web page of the CAN in Automa-
tion (CiA) user organisation: http://www.can-cia.org
• Information about the dimensioning of a CANopen network can be found in the configura-
tion document for the inverter.
• CANopen® is a registered community trademark of the CAN in Automation e. V user organ-
isation.
Preconditions
• Control unit (CU) of the inverter is provided with CANopen.
• The DIP switches for node address, baud rate and bus terminating resistors are set cor-
rectly. See "Basic network settings" in the section 4CANopen ^ 64.
• The network is terminated by one bus terminating resistor each at the first and last node.
See "Typical topologies" in the section 4CANopen ^ 64.
• The required EDS device description files for the inverters to be operated are loaded in the
master.
• Download of EDS files

9.4.1 Introduction
• The implementation of the CANopen communication profile (CiA DS301, version 4.02)
enables baud rates of 20 kbps to 1 Mbps.
• For establishing a simple network connection, the inverter provides predefined control and
status words for device profile CiA 402, AC-drive profile and in LECOMformat. Additionally,
further mappable data words are provided to individually control the inverter.
• The inverter control is preconfigured via a CiA 402-compliant control word.

259
Configuring the network
CANopen
Node address setting

9.4.2 Node address setting

Each network node must be provided with a unique node address.
Details
• The node address of the inverter can be optionally set in 0x2301:001 (P510.01) or using
the DIP switches on the device labelled with "1" ... "64".
• The setting that is active when the inverter is switched on is the effective setting.
• The labelling of the DIP switches corresponds to the values of the individual DIP switches
for determining the node address (see the following example).
• The active node address is displayed in 0x2302:001 (P511.01).
View of the DIP switch
R d c b a 64 32 16 8 4 2 1
O
N

Baud CAN Address

Example of how the node address is set via the DIP switches
DIP switch 64 32 16 8 4 2 1
Setting OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON ON
Value 0 0 16 0 4 2 1
Node address = sum of all values = 16 + 4 + 2 + 1 = 23

The parameters for addressing the device are described below.

Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info
0x2301:001 CANopen settings: Node ID Optionally setting of the node address (instead of setting via DIP
(P510.01) (CANopen sett.: Node ID) switches 1 ... 64).
1 ... [1] ... 127 • The node address set here only becomes effective if DIP switches
1 ... 64 have been set to OFF before mains switching.
• A change in the node address will not be effective until a CAN Reset
Node is performed.
0x2302:001 Active CANopen settings: Active node ID Display of the active node address.
(P511.01) (CANopen diag.: Active node ID)
• Read only
0x2303 CANopen switch position Display of the DIP switch setting at the last mains power-on.
(P509.00) (CANopen switch)
• Read only

260
Configuring the network
CANopen
Baud rate setting

9.4.3 Baud rate setting

All network nodes must be set to the same baud rate.
Details
• The baud rate can be optionally set in 0x2301:002 (P510.02) or using the DIP switches on
the device labelled with "a" ... "d" (see the following table).
• The setting that is active when the inverter is switched on is the effective setting.
• The active baud rate is displayed in 0x2302:002 (P511.02).
View of the DIP switch
R d c b a 64 32 16 8 4 2 1
O
N

Baud CAN Address

d c b a Baud rate
OFF ON OFF ON 20 kbps
OFF OFF ON ON 50 kbps
OFF OFF ON OFF 125 kbps
OFF OFF OFF ON 250 kbps
OFF OFF OFF OFF 500 kbps
OFF ON OFF OFF 1 Mbps
When a combination is set that is not in the list, the baud rate is set to 500 kbps.

The parameters for the baud rate of the device are described below.
Parameter Name / value range / [default setting] Info
0x2301:002 CANopen settings: Baud rate Optionally, setting of the baud rate (instead of setting via DIP switches
(P510.02) (CANopen sett.: Baud rate) a ... d).
0 Automatic (from version 03.00) • The parameterised baud rate is only effective if DIP switches a ... d
and 1 ... 64 were set to before mains switching.
1 20 kbps
• A change in the baud rate will not be effective until a CAN reset node
2 50 kbps is performed.
3 125 kbps
4 250 kbps
5 500 kbps
6 800 kbps
7 1 Mbps
0x2302:002 Active CANopen settings: Active baud rate

I550 Series Ins en

Uploaded by

I550 Series Ins en

Uploaded by

Commissioning | EN

7 Basic setting 143

8 Motor control 163

8.7 Motor protection 214

9 Configuring the network 226

9.6 PROFIBUS 294

9.10 EtherCAT 383

11 Additional functions 417

11.14 Automatic restart 484

14 Flexible I/O configuration 525

14.15 Configuration of digital outputs 603

2.2 Residual hazards

Dangerous electrical voltage

2.3 Application as directed

0.25 kW ... 0.37 kW

0.55 kW ... 0.75 kW

0.75 kW ... 1.1 kW

1.1 kW ... 2.2 kW

4.2 Mains connection

4.2.1 1-phase mains connection 120 V

4.2.1.1 Connection plan

Fig. 1: Wiring example

4.2.1.2 Fusing and terminal data

4.2.2 1-phase mains connection 230/240 V

4.2.2.1 Connection plan

Fig. 2: Wiring example

The connection plan is valid for the inverters I55AExxxD.

Fig. 3: Wiring example

4.2.2.2 Fusing and terminal data

4.2.3 3-phase mains connection 230/240 V

4.2.3.1 Connection plan

Fig. 4: Wiring example

The connection plan is valid for the inverters I55AExxxD.

Fig. 5: Wiring example

4.2.3.2 Fusing and terminal data

4.2.4 3-phase mains connection 400 V

4.2.4.1 Connection plan

Fig. 6: Wiring example

4.2.4.2 Fusing and terminal data

4.2.5 3-phase mains connection 400 V "light duty"

4.2.5.1 Connection plan

4.2.5.2 Fusing and terminal data

4.2.6 3-phase mains connection 480 V

4.2.6.1 Connection plan

Fig. 7: Wiring example

4.2.6.2 Fusing and terminal data

4.2.7 3-phase mains connection 480 V "Light Duty"

4.2.7.1 Connection plan

4.2.7.2 Fusing and terminal data

4.3 Control connections

Terminal description CANopen

Basic network settings

Baud CAN Address

Bus termination Baud rate CAN node address

Bold print = default setting

4.4.2 Modbus RTU

X216 TA TB COM X216 TA TB COM X216 TA TB COM X216 TA TB COM

Terminal description Modbus RTU

Basic network settings

Bus termination Baud rate Parity Modbus node address

Bold print = default setting

4.4.3 Modbus TCP

Basic network settings

Setting Value of last byte Resulting IP address

Terminal description PROFIBUS

Basic network settings

PROFIBUS station address

Bold print = default setting

Basic network settings

Basic network settings

Setting Value of last byte Resulting IP address

C IO controller SW Switch SCALANCE (MRP capable)

The rotary encoder switch has no function.

CN11 CN12 CN1n

CN21 CN22 CN2n

Mrated Managing Node H Hub